m14 thermal fluid

7/18/2019 M14 Thermal Fluid

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/m14-thermal-fluid 1/486



AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg indust i ies BV

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel, +31 (0)181 550 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501

Traderegister Rotterdam

No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail: r tmw@aalborg- indus t r ies .n l

h t tp : / /www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l

Bankers: Fort is Bank, Rotterd am

Account No. 25.75.69.618

IBAN No. NL85FTSB0257569618

BIC.Code FTSBNL2R

DESCRIPTION AND MAINTENANCE

OF

THERMAL FLUID INSTALLATION

INCLUDING

FINAL DRAWINGS

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.aalborg-industries.nl/





AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg Industr ies BV

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 550 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91 594.B.01



Bankers: Fort is Bank, Rotterda m

Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

223

CONTENTS PAGE

L GENERAL

2.

SPECIFICATION

4 - 8

3.

DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION 9 - 1 5

4. START UP THE INSTALLATION 1 6 -1 8

5.

CONTROL EQUIPMEN T

1 9 - 2 0







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm weg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.8.01

E-mail: r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.nl

h t tp : / /www.aalborgHndus t r ies .n l

Bankers: Fort is Bank, R otterda m

Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^^3

G E N E R A L

Thermal fluid installation for:

Shipyard

Hull no.

Classification

Delivered by

Telephone

Jinling Shipyard

Nanjing

P.R. of China

JLZ04-0411 (PP5738841-01A.00)

JLZ04-0412 (PP5738842-01A.00)

Germanischer Lloyd

Aalborg hidustries B.V.

P.O.

Box 145

3200 AC SPIJKENISSE

THE NETHERLANDS

+31 (0)181-650500


http://www.aalborghndustries.nl/

http://www.aalborghndustries.nl/




AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohrnweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

SPECIFICATION

Thermal fluid heater

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91,694.B.01


h t tp : / /www,aa lborg-industr ies.nl

Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotterdam

Account No. 25.75.69.618

IBAN No . NL85FTSB0257569618

BIC Code FTSBNL2R

Type

Capacity

V 4 - 0 - T F O - 0 1 0

800 kW

Burner

Make

Type

Weishaupt

R M S 7

Tem perature controller oil fired heater

Make

Type

Aalborg

93 WOO 701


http://www%2Caa/

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/lborg-industries.nl

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/lborg-industries.nl

http://www%2Caa/




AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P-O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmvveg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL 0081.91.694.B.01

Leakage device for oil fired heater


ht tp: / /www.aalborg-industr ies.nl


Account No. 25,75.69.618

IBAN N o. NL85FTSB0257569618

BIC Code FT5BNL2R

Make

Type

Gems

LS-1950 /010-242

Flow switch

Make

Type

Range

Wika

702.2

0 - 0.6 ba r

Economiser

Make

Type

Capacity

Wiesloch

EXV660-43-57.0-600

1,000 kW







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No.

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.594.B.01


ht tp: / /www.aalborg-industr ies.ni


Account No. 25.75.59.618


BICCode FTSBNL2R

E ^

Flow switch economiser

Make

Type

Range

Wika

702.2

O

- 0.6 bar

Leakage alarm exhaust gas heater

Make

Type

Mobrey

S01DB/T84

Circulating pumps

Make

Type

Capacity

Delivery head

34

Allweiler

NTT 50-200

m^/h

m.l.c.


http://www.aalborg-industries.ni/

http://www.aalborg-industries.ni/




• • • • •

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 550 501


No.

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01


ht tp; / /www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l


Account No, 25.75.69.618


BICCode FTSBNL2R

Temperature sensor

Make

Type

Jumo

PT 100 Ohm

Threeway control valve for dum pcooler

Make

Type

Bore

D N 6 5

ARI

23.451/PR2.2

PN 16

Pressure controller minimum flow

Make

Type

Range

Aalborg

93W00 70E

0-6 bar







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

A a l b o r g I n d u s t r i e s B V

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Sp i j ken i sse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE S p i j ken i sse

T h e N e t h e r l a n d s

Te l .

+31 (0 )181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 550 501

T r a d e r e g i s t e r R o t t e r d a m

N o . 2 4 2 3 4 1 7 9

VAT No . NL0081 .91 .694 .B .01

E - m a i l : r t m w @ a a i b o r g - i n d u s t r i e s . n l

h t t p : / / w w w . a a l b o r g - i n d u s t r i e s . n l

B a n k e r s : F o r t i s B a n k , R o t t e r d a m

A c c o u n t N o . 2 5 . 7 5 . 6 9 . 6 1 8

I B A N N o . N L 8 5 F T 5 B 0 2 5 7 5 6 9 6 1 8

BIC Code FTSBNL2R

22H

Expansion vessel

Make

Type

Contents

Aalborg

SVE 5950

1430 liter

Level switch expansion vessel

Make

Type

Mobrey

S01DB/F84

Level indicator

Make

Type

Reed contacts

Intra

ITA-3.0-GL

LMS-A







• • • •

•

: S S S S S :

iiuuiiå

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg Industries BV

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.8,01

E-mail: r tmw@aalborg- indust r ies .nl

ht tp: / /www.aalborg- indust r ies .nl

Bankers: Fort is Bank, Ro tterdam

Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

[^^

3.

DESCRIPTION O F THE INSTALLATION

3.1. GENERAL

In the thermal oil system the following components are installed:

1 Oil fired thermal fluid heater 800 kW with W eishau pt bum er.

2 Circulating pum ps (one pum p automatically standby).

Economiser.

Dumpcooler.

De-aerating pipe.

Temperature block ing pipe.

Expansion tank.







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

Em a i l : r tmw@aalborgHndustr ies.nl



Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC C ode FTSBNL2R

^ 3

3.1.1.

Oil fired heater

In the supply pipeline, after the oil-fired heater, a temperature sensor (PT 100 Ohm) is

installed, which is connected to the temperature controller. This takes care of a constant

temperature of the fluid to the heat consumers. The set point can be adjusted at the

temperature controller, installed in the switch panel. The oil-fired heater will be started

autom atically if the heat production of the economiser is insufficient by

a

reduced o utput

of the main engine.

In the return pipeline to the oil-fired h eater a second temperatu re sensor (PT 100 Ohm ) is

installed, which is also connec ted to the tempe rature con troller. On the controller you can

read out the return tempe rature of the therm al fluid, by pressing the arrow-up key. While

showing the return tem pera ture, the controller will still maintain

the

supply temperature at

the set point.

The temperature controller com mands the oil burner. The burner is a modulating burner:

1.

Modulating betwe en 30 % and 100 %;

2. O n / o f f

30%.







Aa lbo rg Industries BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail: r tmw@aalborg-indu5tr ies.nl iTTCi

P.O. Box 145 Fax +31 (0)181 650 501 http ;// www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l nrm

3200 AC Spijkenisse Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotterd am P jØ ^^

Oh mw eg 8 Traderegister Rotterda m Account No. 25.75.69.618 i S S S l

A A L B O R G 3208 KE Spijkenisse No. 24234 179 IBAN No. NL85FTSB0257559618 ^ ^ Q

I N D U S T R I E S The Ne ther land s VAT No. NL008 1.91.694.B.01 BIC Code FTSBNL2R

"^"^"t

3.1.2. Economiser

The economiser is built up from concentric coils. The hot exhaust gases of the engine

flow between these coils and transfer their heat to the thermal fluid. The economiser is

installed before the oil-fired heater. The economiser recuperates heat of the exhaust

gasses of the main engine by cooling back these gases.

If the main engine is not running, or is running with a reduced output, the exhaust gas

quantity is reduced and the heat capacity will be reduced a s well.

When the heat demand of the heat consumers is more than the heat production of the

economiser, the oil-fired heater will be started automatically at partial- or full load.

The economiser is provided w ith the following safety de vices:

One maximum thermostat, make Jum o, type ATH s-20.

A flue gas thermostat in the exhaust gas pipe after the heater, make Jumo, type

ATHs-7.

A flow safety system consisting of a measuring orifice in combination with an

indicating differential pressure switch, type 702-2.









.

:i i.

• •

• • •

:S t tS S :

iiiiiiiji

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 550 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.594.B.01

E-mail; r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.nl



Account No. 25.75.69.618

IBAN No. NL85FT5B0257569618

BICCode FTSBNL2R

As with the oil-fired heater, the minimum quantity of thermal fluid flowing through the

heater tubes must be maintained in order to prevent cracking of the thermal fluid and

damag ing the heater tubes. During port operation th e econom iser has to circulate as well.

This is to prevent dew point corrosion.

The econom iser is provided with cleaning nozz les, which are installed in

the

bottom part

and connected to the w ater system of the ship.

During operation the valves before the nozzles can be opened and the heater will be

cleaned. To keep the heat surface of the econom iser clean, it is advisable to open these

valves once a week, during 20 - 30 sec. with intervals of approx. 15 minutes until the

economiser is clean.

The bottom of the thermal fluid heater is provided with a drain connection, which is

connected

to

a float chamber with a level switch (leakage device). If there is

a

leakage the

level switch will give an alarm on th e control panel of the thermal fluid system.

Furthermore the economiser is provided with extinguish nozzles. These nozzles can be

opened at a safe plac e and are able to cool the heating surface during 30 m inutes.

The se nozzles are only to be used in case of a fire.

u

223







. ; i ; .

• • • • •

iflliijii

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 550 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail: [email protected]


Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotterd am

Accou nt No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^ ^

3.1.3. Dumpcooler

After the oil-fired heater, a dump cooler is installed. It is made of steel so the cooling

water can only be closed fresh water. A dumpcooler is necessary when the heat

production of the economiser is m ore than the heat demand of the heat consumers.

An electronic temperature c ontroller will activate an electric three-way

valve,

depending

on the temperature and the (partial) flow will pass through the dumpcooler.

After passing the cooler the thermal fluid is directed to the heat consumers.

IMPORTANT:

Do not close the valves on the waterside.

3.1.4. M inim um flow control set

As mentioned before the oil-fired thermal fluid heater and econom iser are equipped with

flow switches. The system must guarantee sufficient flow.







Ill

«

• • •

:tittt:

ittsiiib

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No.24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.59.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

rrr .,

F S H

im

' ',;,. |; ^ '

3.1.5.

De-aeration pipe

The return line of the heat consum ers is connected with the d e-aerating pipe. The bottom

side of this pipe is connected to the suction side of the circulating pumps. During the

operation of the installation, light fractions or vapours can develop. To give these gases

the opportunity to escape via the expansion tank to the atmosphere, the velocity of the

fluid is reduced in the de-aeration p ipe, the top of wh ich is connected with the top of the

expansion tank.

The de-aerating pipe gives the possibility of a continuous de-aeration.

Ano ther pipe is the expansion pipe ; it is connected to the bottom of the exp ansion tank.

This pipeline gives the thermal fluid the opp ortunity to increase and decrease in vo lume

caused by tem perature differences.

3.1.6. Temperature blocking pipe

The lifetime of thermal fluid can be greatly reduced if the thermal fluid is in contact with

oxygen (air) by high temperature.







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmvveg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

Tlie Netherlands

Tel. +31 {0)181 650 500

Fax +31 {0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081,91.694.B.01


h t tp : / /www.aalborg- indus t r ie5.n l


Account No. 25.75.69.618

IBAN No. NL8SFTSB0257569618

BIC Code FTSBNL2R

t M , . .

i n

Im

T?P]

; ' : ; ' , ; ' ; ; , v

IMPORTANT:

It is very important to keep the expansion tanks as cool as possible because the

quality of the thermal fluid will reduce greatly if the fluid is in contact with oxygen

(air) by high temperature. Therefore be sure that the temperature does not rise

above app roximately 70 °C. To ensure this a high temp erature alarm is installed.

3.1.8. Boiling out pipe

Most light

fi-actions

and vapours will develop by heating the fluid during the first start up.

Furthermore it can happen that some water is in the installation, which w ill evaporate in

the heater. To give the steam and light gases the opportunity to leave the installation as

soon as possible, a boiling out pipe is mounted directly behind the heater on the de-

aerator. This boiling out pipe is provided with a valve, which is connected to the top of

the expansion tank.

IMPORTANT:

It is only allowed to open the boiling out valve during the first start up period, until

all the gases have escaped to the atmospher e.


http://www.aalborg-industrie5.nl/

http://www.aalborg-industrie5.nl/




AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg Industr ies 6V

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No.

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01


h t tp : //www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l

Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotterda m

Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

I N ; M / ^

WIFM

W i

[ ^ > : - ^ - ^ , - - l

START LP THE INSTALLATION

4.1. GENERAL:

1. Main switch in position "O N "

2. Start one of the thermal fluid circulating pum ps of the oil fired heater and

economiser.

Check flow over oil fired h eaters and eco nomiser.

3.

Start fuel oil supply pum ps

4. Adjust temperature on temperature controller of oil-fired heater.

5.A. For W eishaupt burner

5.A. 1 Place switch "BURNER ON/O FF" in position "ON".







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No . 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01


ht tp: / /wvvw,aalborg-industr ies.nl


Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

4.2. FUEL OIL OPERATION

General:

The system is able to handle and to b um heavy fiiel oil w ith a viscosity of 380 cSt at

50 °C.

For the first start-up and also if the therm al fluid installatio n has been o ut of operation for

a longer period of

time,

M.D .O. has to be used.

Before starting the burner, be sure that a fuel pu mp is running. You can start the burner as

described earlier.

If you wan t to operate on H .F.O., be sure that the fuel oil in the service tank is between

70-80°C and that the tracing of the H.F.O.-pipelines for the thermal fluid is in operation.

The H.F .O. will now circulate from the H.F.O. service tank to the ga s-air separator over a

pressure reh ef valve. T he pressure relief valve will adjust at a set point of 2,5 - 3 bar(g),

the pressure can be read out on the pressure gauge, moun ted before th e relief valve.


http://wvvw%2Caalborg-industries.nl/

http://wvvw%2Caalborg-industries.nl/




•

•

• •

>

« • • • «

iijiiiiii

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Nether lands

Tel.

+31 (0)181 550 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01



Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotterd am

Accoun t No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^ ^

It can happe n that after th e change over proced ure the burn er stops. Reason for this is that

the heavy fuel oil temperature at the burn er is too low . This situation will be shown on the

electric panel. After a few m inutes the temperature is sufficient and the burner re-starts

automatically.

Furthermore the fuel pre-heater is provided with a maximum thermostat for fuel oil. If

this thermostat is activated, the burner will be blocked electrically and has to be reset.

CHANGE OVER FROM H.F.O. TO M.D.O.

When chang ing back to M .D.O., you manu ally activate the change over valves slowly

during operation of the burner.

When switching back, activate valve 1.After a few minutes activate valve 2.

This is necessary to avoid that H.F.O . will enter the M.D .O. service tank. Then you

activate the switch "M.D.O. - H.F.O." back in position M.D.O.







• • • • •

« • •

•

•

üttüsii

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalbo rg Industr ies BV

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail ; r tmwQaalborg-industr ies.n

http: / /www.aalborg-industr ies.nl


Account No. 25.75.69.618


SIC Code FTSBNL2R

^33

5.

CONTROL EQUIPMENT

5.1.

OIL FIRED HEATER

Temperature controller

The set point of the temperature controller can be adjusted by pressing the "P " button (see

also instruction book temperature co ntroller). As a temperature sensor a PT 100 Ohm is

connected to the controller.

By pressing the "P" button you can read out this set point. After releasing the press

button, the measured temperature to the heat consum ers will be shown on the display.

After adjusting the correct supply temperature, the burner is allowed to start.

The burner w ill start fully automatic according to the following procedu re:

Be s ure that one o f the fiiel oil transfer pumps is in operation.

Fan a nd fuel oil pum p will be started.





Aa lb or g Industries BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail: r tmw@aalborgHndust r ies .nl " 7 ^ . " ^

P.O. Box 145 Fax +31 (0)181 650 501 http ;//www.aalborg- indust r ies .nl '^mrm

3200 AC Spijkenisse Bankers: Fortis Bank, Ro tterd am fiff'^

Oh mw eg 8 Traderegister Rotterda m Account No. 25.75.69.618 S i S l

A A L B O R G 3208 KE Spijkenisse No. 24234179 IBAN No. NL85FTSB0257559618 ^ ^

I N D U S T R I E S The Neth erlan ds VAT No. NL0081 .91.694.B.01 BiC Code FTSBNL2R

The temperature controller is provided with two switches. When there is a large heat

demand the second switch will be closed and the burner will operate at full load. If the

heat demand is reduced the burner modulates automatically back to partial load.

If the heat prod uction of the econo mizer is high enough the burner will be switched off

In the return lin e of the oil fired heater a second PT 100 Ohm sensor is installed, which is

also connected to the temperature controller. By means of a push-button (see the

description of the controller) you are able to read out the inlet temperature of the thermal

fluid into the oil fired heater. While showing the return temperature, the controller will

maintain the supply temperature at the set point.

5.2. DUMPCOOLER

When there is an overproduction of heat by the econo mizer, the supply temperature will

be controlled by a temperature controller in combination with a three-way valve. The

three-way va lve m ixes the un-cooled th erm al fluid with the thermal fluid that is cooled by

the Dum pcooler to the required supply temp erature.

The three-way valve is controlled by a stop controller with a P + I action.









AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No . 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01


ht tp: / /www.aalborg-indu5tr ies.nl


Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

[233

6. SAFETY EQUIPM ENT

IMPORTANT: IT IS NEVER ALLOWED TO OVERRULE THE SAFETY DEVICES

6.1.

OIL FIRED HEATER

6.1.1. Minimum flow switch

In the outlet of the oil fired heater an orifice is installed. With a pressure differential

switch the flow will be registered. The larger the flow, the larger the pressure drop is at

the pressure differential switch.

The pressure differential switch is provided with two contacts. After starting the

circulating pump the first contact has to be closed and is adjusted at 0.05 bar.

The flow switch will give an indication of approx. 0.4 bar pressure difference through the

installed orifice. During normal circumstances the indication of the pressure differential

switch is 0.4 bar. The secon d contact is adjusted at approx. 0.25 bar.


http://www.aalborg-indu5tries.nl/





Aa lbo rg Industries BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail: r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.nl

P.O. Box 145 Fax +31 (0)181 550 501 ht tp: / /www.aalborg-industr ies.nl

3200 AC Spijkenisse Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotte rdam

Oh mw eg 8 Traderegister Rotterd am Account No. 25.75.69,618 mmmm

L ORG 3208 KE Spijkenisse No. 2423417 9 IBAN No. NL85FTSB0257569618 E ^ l

I N D U S T R I E S The Nethe rlands VAT No. NL0081.91.694.E.01 BIC Code FTSBNL2R I:,':;";"™

6.1.2. Maximum temperature of thermal fluid

ha the supply line of the oil-fired heater a maximum fluid thermostat is installed.

The adjusted value w ill be approx. 20 °C (or ±10 % ) above the operation temperature.

Check if this temp erature is not above the allow ed m aximum bulk temp erature according

to the instructions of the supplier of the thermal fluid.

If this thermostat is activated, the burner will be stopped and electrically b locked.

6.1.3. Maximum flue gas thermostat

In the flue gas connection of the oil-fired heater a m aximum thermostat is installed. This

thermostat has to b e adjusted at a set point 10 % higher than the flue gas temperatu re at

fiill load of the burner, at the temperature of the thermal fluid during operation.

If this temperature is exceeded the burner will switch off and block electrically.

For a good adjustment of the thermostat adjust it above the measured temperature, and

turn it back very slowly with several time intervals. At a certain m oment the b urner trips,







• • • • •

• • • • •

;ssstS:

«ttüüi*

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.69.618


SIC Code FT5BNL2R

2^3

6.2. ECONOMISER

6.2.1. Flow switch

The flow alarm switc h will give an indication of ap prox. 0.4 bar pressu re difference over

the installed orifice. If the pressu re difference (= flow) is too low, an alarm in the ECR is

generated.

The alarm is adjusted at approx. 0.25 bar.

6.2.2. Maxim um temperature of thermal fluid

The economiser is provided with

a

maximum thermal fluid thermostat (ATH-SE-20). The

set point of the thermostat is approx. 2 0 "C higher than the maximum operating tempera

ture. If this thermostat is activated, only an alarm in the EC R is generated.

6.2.3.

Maxim um exhaust gas thermostat







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

Tiie Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^ ^

6.2.4.

Fire alarm

A second flue gas therm ostat is installed and has a higher set point. This thermostat is

activated in case of a fire in the economiser.

If there is a

fire

n the econom iser, the valves for the extinguish nozzles

have to

be opened

and the fire fighting pum p has to be started.

The main engine has to be reduced to 50 % of the ou tput.

Note:

Before resetting the failure on the alarm panel of the ECR, first reset the thermo

stat itself (with the reset-button).

6.2.5.

Leakage device

If there is a leakage in the economiser, a floating switch is activated and will stop the

burner. To empty the float chamber the valve under the float chamber should be open ed.

On top of the floating chamber of the leakage device a second valve is mounted. Through







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalbo rg Industr ies BV

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 550 501


No.

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

[ 3 2 3 3

6.3. EXPANSION TANK

On the expansion tank following level switches are mou nted:

6.3.1.

Low low level

This level switch is mo unted on the tank and after en ergizing the switch the circulating

pumps and b urner will be switched off. The level switch will be electrically blocked.

6.3.2. Low level

This level sw itch (reed contact) is adjustable and moun ted on the level indicator.

The adjustable alarm has to be adjusted in such a way that by a normal op eration the level

switch is just below the level in the expansion tank.

The alarm h as a time delay to avoid alarms due to rolling of the ship.

Alarm can be caused by:







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalb org Industr ies BV

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No.

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.69.618


SIC Code FT5BNL2R

u

^21

6.3.3 Quick emptying valve

Li emergency cases the expansion tank can be emptied quickly by activating the valve.

The contents of the expansion tank will be drained in the drain/collecting tank.

The valve is spring opening and will be activated by means of

a

pneumatic / hydraulic

actuator which is energized by means of a solenoid valve or a pressurised air cylinder

from the safety station of the ship.

After releasing the solenoid valve the valve is closed and the electrical filling pump can

fill the tank.

6.3.4. General reset

If one of the safety devices is activated, the installation will be switched off and

electrically blocked. T he installation h as to b e reset by pressing the reset button on the

switch panel and the burner can be started again.







Aa lbo rg Industries BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail: r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.nl ''^.Z^r"

P.O. Box 145 Fax +31 (0)181 650 501 http;//vvw w.aa lborg -indu stries.n l rSTI

3200 AC Spijkenisse Bankers: Fortis Bank, Rotterd am

R f t v l

Oh mw eg 8 Traderegister Rotterdam Account No. 25.75.69.518 sSSSl

A A L B O R G 3208 KE Spijkenisse No. 24234179 IBAN No. NL85FTSB0257569618 [ iHåiA

I N D U S T R I E S The Netherlands VAT No. NL0081.91.694.ß.01 BIC Code FTSßNL2R r " ,i;.',n', '

7. BOILING OUT THE SYSTEM

In spite of our advic e to pres sure test the installation w ith nitrogen, it will be necessary to

boil out the installation.

Boiling out is necessary:

1.

After the first start-up of the installation .

2.

If the installation is not used during 3 months or mo re.

3.

After replacement of the thermal fluid.

4.

After entering water or air into the system.

Procedure:

After filling the installation with thermal fluid, the circulating pump has to be started and

air has to be removed by opening air vents.

When the pressure differential indicator shows a constant flow, the burner has to be







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmvveg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No.

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.69.618


SIC Code FTSBNL2R

1^^

CLEANING

CLEANING OF THE HEAT EXCHANGER OF THE OILFIRED HEATER

With an oil-fired heater that bum s on M DO , it is hardly ever necessary to clean the heat

exchanger.

If it will happen that the heat exchanger is dirty, you have to clean it with water with an

alkalic additive, steam cleaner or a high-pressure waterjet.

On the outside at the bottom of the heater, two thread connections have to be opened so

that water with removed and dirt can be drained.

The cover can be removed easily without special tools, be aware of the weight of the

cover, for this is provided with refractory lining.









.; i;.

• • • • •

iitiittift

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tei.

+31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B,01


ht tp: / /wvvw.aalborg-industr ies.nl


Account No. 25.75.69.518


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^^3

8.2. CLEANING OF THE ECONOMISER

The economiser has a high flue g as speed and sm ooth pipes. This results in a very good

self-cleaning effect. We know from experience that for some economisers cleaning

programm es are totally unnecessary.

Cleaning the main motor blower with water will result in a speed increase in the

economiser, w hich will have a cleaning effect.

This economiser is provided with cleaning nozzles. Depending on the capacity of the

economiser one or mo re nozzles are mounted.

In order to prevent sulphur corrosion, water mu st not be allowed to com e into frequent

contact with the materials.

There must always be a water pressu re of 0.8 - 1.5 bar available on the nozzle, otherwise

no spray shower will occur.

As already mentioned, some vessels require no cleaning at all. By measuring the flue gas


http://wvvw.aalborg-industries.nl/

http://wvvw.aalborg-industries.nl/






AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Net l ier lands

Tel, +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91,694.B.01




Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

2553

MAINTENANCE

9.1. EVERYDAY

1. Oil fired heate r:

a. Outside.

2.

Thermal fluid:

a. Level expansio n tank.

b.

The temperature in the expansion tank must never exceed 70

°C.

3.

Burner: (see also burner instruction s)

a. Outside oft he burner installation.

b.

Fuel pressure.

c. Leakage of fuel oil pum p, hoses and noise.










Aa lbo rg Industries BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail: r tmw@aalborg- industr ies.nl

" 7 7 , ^ " ' :

P.O. Box 145 Fax +31 (0)181 550 501 h t tp : / /www.aa lborg- indu5tr ies.n l ^^^w

3200 AC Spijkenisse Bankers: Fortis Bank, Ro tterd am fijf/\l

Oh mw eg 8 Traderegister Rotterd am Accou nt No. 25.75.59.618

JS»»

AALBORG

3208 KE Spijkenisse No, 24234179 IBAN No. NL85FT5B0257559618 ^ ^

I N D U S T R I E S

The Neth erland s VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01 BIC Code FTSBNL2R

l,",',; ,',"'

6. Piping:

Check all:

a. Flanges and gaskets

b.

Compensators

c. Valves

d. Fixed points

of the installation on leakage.

If thermal fluid is absorbed by the insulation, the insulation has to be removed

immediately and replaced.

7.

Strainers:

Check strainers in thermal fluid system (first month after installation; thereafter

every three months).









• • • •

•

; 2 S S S S :

iilliiiii

AALBORG

N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail : r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.n

ht tp : / /www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l

Bankers: Fort is Bank, Rotterd am

Account No. 25.75.69.618

IBAN No. NL85FTSB0257569ei8

BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^^3

9.2. EVERY MONTH

9.2.1.

Bum er (See also instructions for burner)

a. Clean ignition pins.

b. Clean flame scanner

c. Rem ove flame scanner from the burner during operation.

The burner must then switch off within 4 seconds and on the switch panel the

burner failure must be lit.

9.2.2. Safety equipment

a. Flow switches

Flow switches of oil fired heater and economiser.

Check flow switches by closing the valve behind every oil-fired heater and every

economiser.

N ote: Do not forget to fully open the valve after the testing.

1 \ . M ,







. • • •.

• • • • •

ülttttii

AALBORG

N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 550 501


No .

24234179

VAT No, NL0Ü81.91.694.8.01


ht tp: / /www.aalborg~industr ie5.nl

Bankers: Fort is Bank, Rotterdam

Account No. 25.75,69.618


BIC Co de FTSBNL2R

W W M

BP

; M J , ; '

9.2.4. Pumps

1. Therma l fluid circulating pum ps:

a. Lubrication of the circulating pum ps (see instruction pum p set).

b.

Coupling

c. Autom atic standby function

Check autom atic stand-by function of circulating pumps by slowly closing the

valve on the pressure side of the running pump. Second pump must start

automatically.

Note:Do no t forget to open valve after testing.

2.

Filling pump :

Start the filling pum p and make sure of a good functioning.







AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

O h mwe g 8

3208 KE 5pijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081,91.694.B.01

E-mail: r tmw@aalborg- industr ies.nl

h t tp : / /www.aa lborg- industr ies.n l


Account No. 25.75,59.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

ISS

9.3. EVERY THREE MONTHS

1.

Burner:

a. Che ck or let check the flue gasse s.

C 0 2 - approx. 9 -12 %

CO - nihil

Sootnumber in accordance with Bacharach max . 1 - 2.

Do not increase the capacity of your installation, (for capacity see page 4).

Over-firing of your heat exchang er can cause cracking of the thermal fluid and

damag e to the coils.

b.

Che ck if burne r is adjusted in the right way.

c. Clea n ignition electrodes.

d. Cle an diffuser and flame head .

Aalborg Industr ies BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail: r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.nl " l M ~ ,









• • • • •

• • • • •

'.ttttt:

iillfflfi

AALBORG

N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Fax +31 (0)181 550 501


No.24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

ht tp : //www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l

Bankers: Fortis Bank, R otterda m

Accoun t No. 25.75.69.518


BiC Code FTSBNL2R

n r i

øP

ISS

1 "ns'.';;>

9.4. EVERY YEAR

1. Thermal fluid:

a. Take a samp le of your thermal fluid and have its condition checked by e.g. the

supplier of the fluid.

This sample has to be taken from a part of the installation, which is mostly in

circulation, e.g. the drain valve at the circulating pump.

Burner installation:

a. Clean impeller of blower and combustion air fan.

b.

Replace nozzles.

c. Replace ignition electrodes.

d. Replace flame scanner.

e. Check servom otor air dumper,

f Clean air inlet.


Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500 E-mail; r tmw@aalborg-industr ies.nl








AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netlnerlands

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01



Accou nt No. 25.75.69.618

IBAN N o. NL85FTSB0257B69618

BIC Code FTSBNL2R

^ J J

10.

GENERAL SETPOINTS OF THE CONTR OL- AND SAFETY DEVICES

10.1 OIL FIRED HEATER

- Temperature controller

Partial load

Full load

- Flow switch

First contact

Second contact

- Maxim um thermal fluid thermostat

Pre-alarm

High alarm

200

195

0.05

0.25

-

230

°C

°C

bar (g)

bar(g)

°C

- Inlet minimum thermostat (cold start thermostat) 70 °C

- Max. flue gas thermostat 280 °C

Aalborg Industr ies BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500










AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01


Bankers; Fortis Bank, Rotterdam

Account No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

10.3 ECONOMISER

- Tem perature controller (if present)

Partial load

Full load

- Ma x. thermal fluid thermostat

Pre-alarm

High alarm

- Flow switch

- Flue gas thermostat

Pre-alarm

High alarm (fire-alarm system)

- Min. control air pressostat

- Safety valve

200 °C

195 °C

230 °C

0.25 bar

275 °C

320 °C

3 bar (g)

10 bar (g)

Aalborg Industr ies BV Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500










AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694,6.01

ht tp : //www.aalborg- indus t r ies .n l


Account No. 25.75.69.618


SIC Code FTSBNL2R

^ ^

10.5 SYSTEM

- Pressure switch for the autom atic stand-by

ofthe thermal fluid pum ps 3.5 bar

- Minimum flow controller 2.4 bar

Minimum system pressostat (if present)

bar

Temperature controller mixing injection system

(if present)

Max. thermal fluid thermostat

°C

°C

Min. thermal fluid thermostat

Safety valves

- °C

10 bar

Note: Final set points will be adjusted during comm issioning.





AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 1

Email:

rtmw

Yardnr.:

Yard:

45, 3200 AC

/@aalborg-ir

J LZ04-041 :

Jinling Sipy

At: Nanjing - P

Project nr.: PP573 8841

Line no

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

Fitting no

1001

1002

141S19

141S16

1010

1011

1012

1013

1014

1015

1016

1017

1018

1019

1020

1021

1022

1023

1024

1025

1030

1031

1032

1033

1034

1035

1036

1037

1038

1039

1040

1041

1042

20M10

20M14

30S12

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

; Spijkenisse, The Netherlands Phone:

idustr ies.nl F a x :

i & J L Z 0 4 - 0 4 1 4

ard

R of China

& PP5738842

Norn diam

100

100

15

100x1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

100

80

80ND

100x1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

15CD

1/2"

1/2"

100

100

15

100x1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

100

80

80ND

100x1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

/ i te ra t ions:

Description / D IN-standard

De-airat ing pipe

Temp, blocking pipe

Minimal therma l f luid thermostat inol thermowell

Maximal thermal f luid thermostat inci thermowell

Circ. pumps

Circulating pump with 15kW E-motor

Globe stop valve with bellow seal / PN16

St ra ine r /PN 16


Mano-vacuum meter glycerine f i l led

Manometer valve / PN40

Manometer syphon / PN40

Suction bellow with double braiding and f langes

Delivery bellow with double braiding and f langes

Globe stop valve non return disc with bellow seal / PN16




Globe control valve with bellow seal / PN16

Manometer valve with test connection / PN40


Circulating pump with 15kW

E-motor


S t r a i n e r / P N 1 6





Suction bellow with double braiding and f langes

Delivery bellow with double braiding and f langes





E-motor 15kW

E-motor 15kW

Auto stand-by pressostat ind. reducer 3/8"x1/2"

»-31 181650500

<-31 181650501

Date

•Mater ial

steel

steel

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3/Niro

GGG40.3

AISI-304/316

steel

steel

steel

steel

GGG40.3

AISI-304/316

steel

steel

GGG40.3 / Niro

steel

steel

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3/Niro

GGG40.3

AISI-304/316

steel

steel

steel

steel

GGG40.3

AISI-304/316

steel

steel

FITTING LIST

Titel of corresponding drawing:

THERMAL FLUID D IAGRAM

No .

of correspon dig dnwg.:

Weight

15

78

0,8

0,8

231,5

28

16

3,7

0.9

0,55

0,69

9,1

7,3

21

0.9

0,55

0,69

3,7

1

0,69

231,5

28

16

3,7

0.9

0,55

0,69

9,1

7,3

21

0.9

0,55

0,69

1

Remarks

50 / 300°C

50 / 300°C

Q=34m3/h H=80mlc

norm, open

drain

-1+3B

norm,

open

0-16B

keep hot

Q=34m3/h H=80mlc

norm,

open

drain

-1+38

norm,

open

0-16B

SP = 3,5 bar

D53714 Thermal f luid diagram

D53715 MDO/HFO d iagram

Type / Fig no

D50

5950

ATHs-2

ATHs-2

NTT 50-200

22.046

22.05

22.046

type 213.53.100

S004.16.100

S006.07.110

RFB

RFB

22.046ND

type 213.53.100

S004.16.100

S006.07.110

22.046CD

S004.60.100

S006.07.110

NTT 50-200

22.046

22.05

22.046

type 213.53.100

S004.16.100

S006.07.110

RFB

RFB

22.046ND

type 213.53.100

S004.16.100

S006.07.110

K P S 3 5

Draw no

90427

90429

951167

951167

D53720

22046

22050

22046

62053

941037

941041

90424

90424

22046ND

62053

941037

941041

22046 CD

941037

941041

D53720

22046

22050

22046

62053

941037

941041

90424

90424

22046ND

62053

941037

941041

941032

Fitfing List nr.:

Date:

Name:

E-Schema:

Maker

Aalborg

Aalborg

Jumo

Jumo

Allweiler

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Wika

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Senior Flexonics

Senior Flexonics

Albert Richter

Wika

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Albert Richter

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Allweiler

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Wika

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Senior Flexonics

Senior Flexonics

Albert Richter

Wika

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Siemens

S iemens

Danfoss

5738659

16-03-2005

CE

D53716

SuppI

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

P lace

System

System

System

System

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

Circ. pumps

P:\PP\PP2004\PP04.737230.Aalborg HKG_JinllngM1 Tekeningen PP04.737230\ritl5738841

Date 12/4/2006 2:43 PM

page

1

of 5

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/idustries.nl



http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/S004.16.100










http://p/PP/PP2004/PP04.737230.Aalborg
















« ü t t i i ü

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 1

Email: rtmw

Yardnr.:

Yard:

At:

Project nr.:

Line no

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

45,

3200 AC

/@aalborg-ir

J LZ04-041 :

Jinling Sipy

Nanjing - P

PP5738841

Fitting no

1100

1101

1102

1103

1104

1105

1106

1107

1108

1109

1110

1111

120M6

141S12

141S3

141S6

141S9

142S7

160B3

160B4

160B6

1200

1201

1202

1203

1204

1205

1206

1207

1208

1209

1210

1211

1212

1213

1214

1215

1216

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

) Spijkenisse, The Netherlands Phone:

idustr ies.nl Fax:

& JLZ04-0414

ard

R of China

& PP5738842

Nom diam

80

3/4"

3/4"

10

10

15CD

25/40

80ND

65CD

2"

80CD

10

10

25

15CD

25/40

80ND

65CD

1/2"

1"

Alterations:

Description / DIN-standard

Oil fired heater

Oil f ired heater


Stop valve with welding ends PN 40

Stop valve with welding ends PN 40

EO valve for ind. f low control

EG valve for ind. f low control

De-aerator


Safety valve

Globe stop valve n on return disc with bellow seal / PN16


Thermometer with thermowell

Burner

Leakage devoce

incl.

T-piece

Limit switch burner f lange

Maximal thermal f luid thermostat high high

Maximal f lue gas thermostat high high

Ind. diff. press, switch with two contacts

Electronic mod. temperature controller

Single PT 100 Ohm sensor

incl.

thermowell

Single PT 100 Ohm sensor incl. thermowell

Economiser

Economiser






Globe stop valve with bellow sea l / PN16


Safety valve





Maximal f lue gas thermostat high high

Ball valve

Ball valve

Float chamber for leakage device

*•3^ 181650500

t-31 181650501

Date

Material

GGG40.3

C22.8

C22.8

C22.8

C22.8

C22.8

GGG40.3 / Niro

GGG 40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3 / Niro

Stainless steel

steel

GGG40.3 / Niro

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

C22.8

022.8

GGG40.3

GGG40.3 / Niro

GGG 40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3 / Niro

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

GG-20

FITTING LIST


THERMAL FLUID DIAGRAM

No . of correspondig drwg.:

Weight

2300

21

2,5

2,5

0,4

0,4

5,8

3,7

10

21

11,7

0.5

0,8

0,8

1,75

0,28

0,28

4500

21

0.5

0.5

0,4

0,4

8,8

3,7

10

21

11,7

0.5

0.5

0,8

0,2

0,5

12

Remarks

800 kw

norm,

open

drain

vent

Boiling Out

sp= 10 bar

norm,

open

norm, closed

0-500°C

f i t ted on 120M6

50 / 30 0°C

200 / 500°C

0

/ 0,6 bar

0-300°C

single element

single element

norm,

open

0-300°C

0-300°C

drain

Boil ing Out

sp= 10 bar

norm, open

norm, closed

0-500°G

0-500°C

200 / SOOX

D53714 Thermal f luid diagra

D53715 MDO/HFO diagram

Type / Fig no

V4-0-TFO-010

22.046

A V 1 1 . 1 S m S m

A V 1 1 . 1 S m S m

S338.03.160

S338.03.160

DE 50

22.046CD

25.901

22.046ND

22.046CD

10/1/2002

RMS7

LS-1950/010-242

ATHs-2

ATH-7

Delta Comb 702.2

93W00 701

90.210.F02/dl

90.210.F02/dl

EXV568-41-57.0-600

22.046CD

10/1/2002

10/1/2002

S338.03.160

S338.03.160

22.046

22.046CD

25.901

22.046ND

22.046CD

10/1/2002

10/1/2002

ATH-7

1607N

1607N

fig 802

m

Draw no

D53717

22046

951214

951214

951444

951444

90428

22046 CD

25901

22046ND

22046 CD

951411

D11855

951167

951165

D00776

see doc

901071

901071

D53718

22046 CD

951411

951411

951444

951444

22046

22046 CD

25901

22046ND

22046 CD

951411

951411

951165

72859

72859

61670

Fitting List nr.:

Date:

Name:

E-Schema:

Maker

Aalborg

Albert Richter

5738659

16-03-2005

CE

D53716

SuppI

Aalborg

Aalborg

Deinzer & Weilanc Aalborg

Deinzer & Weilanc Aalborg

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Aalborg

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Jumo

Weishaupt

Gems

Weishaupt

Jumo

Jumo

Wika

Aalborg

Jumo

Jumo

Aalborg

Albert Richter

Jumo

Jumo

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Jumo

Jumo

Jumo

Econosto

Econosto

Econosto

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Place

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired heater

Fired Heater

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

P:\PP\PP2004\PP04.737230.Aalboig HKG_Jinling \11 Tekening en PP04.737230\fltl57388 41 Date 12/4/20O6 2:43 PM

page 2 of 5















AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 1

Email:

rtmv

Yardnr.:

Yard:

At:

Project nr.:

Line no

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

45,

3200 AC

/@aalborg-l

J LZ04-041 ;

Jinling Sipy

Nanjing - P

PP5738841

Fitting no

91S2

91S4

91S6

91S8

1300

1301

1302

1303

1304

1305

1306

40S11

40S14

40S17

40S8

1400

1401

1402

1403

1404

1405

9087

9082

90Y5

1450

1451

1452

1453

1454

1455

1456

8982

8987

89Y5

1510

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

/ Spijkenisse, The Netherlands Phone:

idustr ies.nl Fax:

i & JLZ04-0414

ard

R of China

& PP5738842

Norn diam

25

65

25

50

50

65

65

40CD

1/2"

1/2"

65

80

65CD

80

50CD

25/40

/Mterations;

Description / DIN-standard

Ind. diff. press, switch with two contacts

IVIaximal thermal fluid thermostat

IVIaximal flue gas thermostat high

Level switch high

Expansion tanl(

Expansion tank

Self closing drain valve

Quick opening globe valve


IVIagnetic level gauge



Level switch low (reedoontact)

Level switch low low

Level switch high high

Limit switch

IMin.

f low control

Elect, controlled two-way valve with bellow se al

Globe stop valve with bellow seal / PN1 6

Globe stop valve with bellow seal / PN 16




Pressure transmitter

Modulating elec. pressure controller

Electr ic actuator

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Electr ic controlled three-way valve with bellow s eal




Globe control valve with bellow seal / PN 16

Safety valve

Modulating temperature controller

Single PT 100 Ohm sensor

incl.

thermowell

Electr ic actuator

Filling pum p

Fil l ing pump with 0,63 kw E-motor

f31 181650500

1-31 181650501

Date

IMaterial

steel

C. steel

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

AISI-304

Stainless steel

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

G G G 4 0 . 3 / N i r o

steel

steel

steel

G G G 4 0 . 3 / N i r o

GGG40.3

G G G 4 0 . 3 / N i r o

GGG40.3

G G G 4 0 . 3 / N i r o

GGG40.3

FITTING LIST

Titel of

corresponding

drawing:


No .

of correspondig drwg.:

Weight

1,75

0,8

0,8

3

5,3

21

5,1

15

0.5

11,7

0,2

3

3

0,2

19,5

14,7

14,7

8,8

1

0,69

197

35,5

14,7

11,7

14,7

11,7

10

0,28

41

Remarks

0 / 0,6 bar

50 /300°C

200 / 500°C

Norm,

closed

norm,

closed

norm,

closed

0-160°C

norm,

open

fit ted on 1304

Fitted on 1302

norm,

open

norm,

open

norm,

closed

0-6 bar

0-6 bar

norm,

open

norm,

open

norm,

closed

sp=10 bar

0 - 300°C

single element

Q=2,5m3/h H=4 bar

D53714 Thermal f luid diagram


Type / Fig no

Delta Comb 702.2

ATHs-2

ATH-7

S01DB/F84

SVE 5950

574

100/432SO

22.046

ITA-3,0-GL

10/1/2002

22.046

LMS-A

S01DB/F84

S01DB/F84

23.441/PR2.2

22.046

22.046

22.046CD

3004,60.100

S006.07.110

IVIBS33M (rel)

93W00 70E

PR2.2

M X 2 0 T 1 0 L = 1 2 0 0

23.451/PR2.2

22.046

22.046CD

22.046

22.046CD

25.901

93W00 700

90.210.F02/dl

PR2.2

KF25 RF2-D15

Draw no

D00776

951167

951165

D00734

D53719

D00894

90236

22046

D01054

951411

22046

D00734

D00734

73851

22046

22046

22046 CD

941037

941041

951182

see doc

D53721

72903

22046

22046 CD

22046

22046 CD

25901

see doc

901071

61943

Fitting List nr.:

Date:

Name:

E-Schema:

IVIalter

Wika

Jumo

Jumo

Mobrey

Aalborg

Econosto

Econosto

Albert Richter

Intra

Jumo

Albert Richter

Intra

Mobrey

Mobrey

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Danfoss

Aalborg

Albert Richter

Aalborg

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Aalborg

Jumo

Albert Richter

Kracht

5738659

16-03-2005

CE

D53716

SuppI

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Place

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Economiser

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Expansion tank

Min. f low control

Min . f low control

Min. f low control

Min.

f low control

Min.

f low control

Min. f low control

Min .

f low control

Min .

f low control

Min.

f low control

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Dumpcooler

Fil l ing pump

P:\PP\PP2004\PP04.737230.Aalborg

HKG_JinlingM

1

Tekeningen PP04.737230\ritl5738841 Date 12/4/2006 2:43 PM








• • • • • • • • • H E A T T E C H N O L O G Y

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P.O. Box 1

Email:

rtm\A

Yardnr.:

Yard:

45,

3200 AC

/@aalborg-ir

J LZ04-041 :

Jinling Sipy

; Spijkenisse, The Netherlands Phone: +31 181650500

idustr ies.nl Fax: +31181650501

i & JLZ04-0414

ard

At: Nanjing - PR of China

Project nr.: PP5738841 & PP5738842

Line no

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

Fi t t ing no

1511

1512

1513

1514

1515

1516

1517

1518

1519

1520

1521

1522

1523

1524

1525

1526

20M18

Yard

Yard

5001

5001

5002

5003

5010

5100

5101

5103

5104

5105

180S12

180S6

31S12

Yard

Yard

Nom d iam

25

25

25

100x1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

25

25

25ND

100x1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

25

25

25

25

25

25

40

40

20

1/2"

1/2"

25

1/2"

3/8"

3/8"

1/2"

100x1/2"

/iterations: Date

Descr ip t ion / D IN-standard


St ra iner /PN16


Mano-vacuum glycerine f i l led






Mano-vacuum glycerine f i l led



Globe stop valve with bellow seal / P N16




E-motor 0,63 kw

Sight glass

Non return valve

IVIDO/HFO sy stem

Changes over valve set HFO/MDO with l imit switch

Changes over valve set HFO/MDO with l imit switch

Oil pressure controller


MDO/HFO Booster pumpset

Burner

Fuel oi l de-aerator


Ball valve set

Safety valve

Limit switch

Fuel oi l pressure switch low low, incl.:adaptor 3/8"x1/2"

Auto standby pressostat, incl. :adaptor3/8"x1/2"



•Material

GGG40.3

GGG40.3/Niro

GGG40.3

AISI-304/316

steel

steel

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

AISI-304/316

steel

steel

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

GGG40.3

Steel

Steel

Steel

Steel

Steel

Steel

AISI-304/316

FITTING LIST



No .

of correspondig drwg.: D53714 Thermal fluid diagram


W e i g h t

5,1

5,5

5,1

0.9

0,55

0,69

5,1

5,1

5,1

0.9

0,55

0,69

5,1

5,1

5,1

5,1

25

25

1

1

62

111

6.5

1

1.2

0.7

1

1

0.55

0.9

Remar l (s

norm, closed

norm,

closed

-1+3B

norm, closed

norm,

closed

norm, closed

0-6B

norm,

closed

norm,

closed

norm,

closed

norm,

closed

672 l/h 2-5 bar

E-Heater

2.6 kW

Setpoint 8 bar

Mounted on 5001

SP = 3,5 bar

SP = 3.5 bar

0-6

Type / F ig no

22.046

22.05

22.046

Type 213.53.100

S004.16.100

S006.07.110

22.046

22.046

22.046ND

Type 213.53.100

S004.16.100

8006.07.110

22.046

22.046

22.046

22.046

25

25

FDR 20

S004.60.100

ZAS 550

RMS 7

Size 2

S004.60.100

1515

K P S 3 5

K P S 3 5

S004.16.100

Type 213.53.100

Draw no

22046

22050

22046

62053

941037

941041

22046

22046

22046ND

62053

941037

941041

22046

22046

22046

22046

D01026

D01026

D00800

D00749

D00840

D00799

D00749

D00839

D11428

D01026

61727

61727

941037

62053

Fitting List nr.: 5738 659

Date:

16-03-2005

Name:

CE

E-Schema: D53716

•Maker

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Wika

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Wika

Franz Schneider

Franz Schneider

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Albert Richter

Kracht

Aalborg

Aalborg

H.Paulsen

Franz Schneider

Allweiler

Weishaupt

Weishaupt

Franz Schneider

Aalborg

Econosto

Aalborg

Danfoss

Danfoss

Franz Schneider

Wika

Suppi

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

/Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Yard

Yard

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

P lace

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

Fil l ing pump

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

MDO/HFO system

P:\PP\PP2004\PP04.737230.Aalborg HKG_Jinling\11 Takaningen PP04.737230\ffll5738841 Dale 12/4/2006 2:43 PM

page 4 of 5



















• • • " " • ' H EA T T EC H NO L OG Y

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P 0. Box 1

Email:

rtmvi

Yardnr.:

Yard:

45,

3200 AC

/@aalborg-ir

J LZ04-041 :

Jinling Sipy

; Spijkenisse, The Netherlands Phone: +31 181650500

idustr ies.nl Fax: +31181650501

i & JLZ04-0414

ard

At: Nanjing - PR of China

Project nr; PP5738841 & PP5738842

Line no

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

Fi t t ing no

9001

9002

9003

9004

9005

9006

9007

9100

9101

9102

9103

9104

9105

9106

9107

9108

9109

9110

9200

9201

9202

9300

9301

9302

9303

9304

9305

9306

9307

9308

9309

Nom d iam

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

2 PC

2pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

2 PC

2 p c

1 pc

2 p c

2 p c

1 pc

1 pc

2 p c

2 p c

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

1 pc

10 PC

Alterations: Date

Descr ip t ion / D IN-standard

Spare par ts

IVIodulating Nozzle

Ignit ion electrode left

Ignit ion electrode r ight

Flame sensor RAR7

Rubber cross coupling

Ignit ion cables complete

Coupling for burner pump

Joint 400.1

Joint 400.3

Gland seal packing 461.01

Joint 411.06/07

IVIechanical seal 433.01 (IVI3N4/32-SBVGG)

Distance washer 551.4/5

Circl ip 932.02/04

Washer 932.01

Seegerr ing 936.01

Ball bearings for Pump

Ball bearing for E-motor

PT 100 ohm sensor

Max. thermal f luid thermostat type ATH-SE-20

Max. f lue gas thermostat type ATH-SE-20

Aux relais

Aux relais

Aux relais

Signal lamp glass green

Signal lamp glass red

Signal lamp glass yellow

Signal lamp glass blue

Signal lamp glass white

Lampholder complete

Lampbulbs

Mater ia l

FITTING LIST



No . of correspondig drvig.: D53714 Thermal f luid diagram


Weigh t Remarks Type / F ig no

212 163 1020/7

212 163 1021/7

111 964 1201/2

111 151 0901/2

111 782 0901/2

ALXA402

ALXA403

ALR 060782

ALR049680

ALXA 551

ALXA 932

ALXA932

ALXA936

ALR0112062

6309-2Z

90.21-F02/dl

ATH-SE-20

ATH-SE-20

CAD32P7

CAD32P7

CAD50P7

ZB-V03

ZB-V04

ZB-V05

ZB-V06

ZB-V07

Draw no

Fitting List nr.:

Date:

Name:

E-Schema:

Maker

Monarch

Monarch

Monarch

Monarch

Monarch

Monarch

Monarch

Allweiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

All Weiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

Allweiler

Jumo

Jumo

Jumo

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

Telemecanique

5738659

16-03-2005

CE

D53716

SuppI

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

Aalborg

P lace

Spares for Burner

Spares for Burner

Spares for Burner

Spares for Burner

Spares for Burner

Spares for Burner

Spares for Burner

Spares for circ. Pump











Spares for Safeties

Spares for Safeties

Spares for Safeties

Spares for Control Box










P;\PP\PP2004\PP04.737230.Aalborg HKG_JinlingM

1

Tekening en PP04.737230Mitl5738841 Date 12/4/2006 2:43 PM

page 5 of 5

WTESnWP

06-12-04

U:13J2

JUL

I

8 I 9 I 10 I 11 I 12 "

I '* I ^^~T

16

1 7

I 1'8

•J9 20







3

i

Li. ^

^ Q:

o; o

UJ l i .

o.

o Q

o: UJ

o. o

UJ a

I - o:

«2 ul

(K

"->

UJ _

-^ Ul

i

o tu

s •"

o z

-i

1

o <

z

i

o

< / )

/ S S S S f t TH ER M AL F L U ID

™

r S ^ ? S ? ? ?

HEAT

T E C H N O L O G Y 'Zo,

PO Box 145, 3200 AC Spijkenisse The Netherlands

+31 181 650500

+31 181650501

rtmw @ aa lborg- industr ies.n l

Shipyard

City

Count ry

C lass i f ica t ion

Burner make

Burner type

Jinling

Nanjing

P.R. of China

Gl. + AUT

Welshaupt Monarch

RMS7

Pro ject 1

Pro je c t 2

Pro ject 3

Pro ject 4

Pro ject 5

Pro ject 6

Pro ject 7

Pro ject 8

Pro ject 9

PP5738659A.00

PP5738660A.00

PP5738661A.0O

PP5738862A.00

PP5738841A.00

; PP5738842A.00

PP5739698A,00

; PP06.052352-01

: PP06.052352-02

Yard

Yard

Yard

Yard

Yard

Yard

Yard

Yard

Yard

nunnber 1

nunnber 2

number 3

number 4

number 5

number 6

number 7

number 8

number 9

; JLZ04-0409

; JLZ04-0410

: JLZ04-0413

; JLZ04-0414

; JLZ04-0411

JLZ04-0412

JLZ04-0416

: JLZ04-0415

JLZ04-0417

Yard number chonQ«d

Reviaion Dgscription

Added ygrj number

Dots

0 5 -0 8 -2 9

06-04-20

Noma

RP

OS

Dot«

05-04-25

RP

Noma

,|{{}{{i,

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

PO amM^imm

n r-Mi inagos»

F« :+3\ ISISaOSOl

OILFIREDHEAT

Front page

Job Number

PP5738659A.0CI

Drowing number

D53716

Revision

B

A3

Page

1 0

Next

11

DMESTMIP

06-12-04

14:13:17

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/aalborg-industries.nl

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/aalborg-industries.nl



i

i

UJ Li.

O.

O Q

o: iij

o. u

E o

« &j

o:

1

li

o <

z

i

o

I n s ta l l a t i o n

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

Pcqe

10

11

12

14

15

16

20

21

24

25

29

30

31

40

89

90

91

95

101

102

120

141

142

150

151

160

170

180

185

De sc r i p t i o n

Front page

Index

Index

General information

Controlbox dimensions

Front layout

Main current

Main current

Control current

Stand still heating

Reset

Themal fluid pumps

Fuel oi l pumps

Expansion tank

Dumpcooler

Minimum flow control

Economiser

Potential free contacts

Pilot lamps

Pilot lamps

Main current

Burner safeties

Burner safeties

Burner safety circuit

Burner control

Burner control

Burner ai r valve an d nozzles

Burner safeties

H.F.O. Pre-heoter

Date

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

04.10.29

Na me

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

RP

Rflvlaion Daacription

Dote

Noma Data

35-04-25 RP

Nama

(iiiiiij^

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

P O l a i l M i a o O A C ^ I I n k H l l M l t a l l M M n ^

ra :-)« laieoono

F B i+ai

isiuosoi

E-<HJ: rtnwa adbaiu liitirtilMjii

OIUHREDHEAT

Page index

Job Number

PP5738659A.0a

Drawing number

D53716

R e v i s i o n

A3

Poge 11

Next 12

MIESTMIP

06-12-04

14:13:12



i

o

o:

o

3

c- 0^

b: o

LU L-

o Q

o: ui

Q. O

i= o:

« Si

o:

z

i-

O UJ

S""

o z

< " 1 _

O <

z

i

Insta l la t ion

OILFIREDHEAT

OILFIREDHEAT

Paqe

200

201

Descrip t ion

Pilot lamps

Pilot lamps

Date

04.10.29

04.10.29

Name

RP

RP

Revision Degcription

Pote

Norne

Dote

D5-04-25 RP

Norne

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

po B>i4&a

n r-Mi imaaoaoo

F M :-f31 181100601

E-mal: rtnw o^wu tHtwIilMiJ

OimREDHEAT

Page index

Job Number

PP5738659A.0q

browing nunnber

D53716

Revision

A3

Page 12

Next 14

•

*

I

V

C

^o"ea

O

—

r

M

^

(

O

i

n

•

r

o

C

-

m

1

i

T

^

s

S



O

)

C

"5>

L

U

1

—

<

_

CXL

U

1

—

X

om

_

j

o

C

-

o

Ü

o

>

N

o

x

•

*

o

•

>

D

Ü

S

=

2

C

O

w

>

L

L

C

C

Eo

O

•

o

co

S

t

o

0

C

1

_

0

^

=

2

o

o

e

o

o

§

Ü

Ü

"

ooC

O

O

o

^

.

t

c

o

c

u

^

æ

t

D

c

<

D

o

c

C

>

,

£

o

<

2

I

-

Q

O

Ü

s

a

s

N

io

«>

C

D

C

3

0

D

C

Q

0

D

Q

C

C

3

O

O

>

C

D

C

<

3

U

l

U

c

l

J

O

l

r

C

3

^

-

>

2

l

L

I

_

j

Z

C

0

_

i

Z

C

0

ü

.

ü

.

A

y

a

H

y

o

a

o

o

w

JO

A

a

3

H

s

>tL

>

_

U

QQZ

<

z

z

o

o

H

1

-

Ü

O

U

U

z

z

z

z

o

o

o

o

Q

Q

C

C

<

<

>

>

©

y

o

a

3

N

3

H

N

M

eÜ

J

mI

D

z

1

—

Ü<I

—

zoo

I

QL

Ü

m

3z

U

e

i

O

S

W

Q

N

S

Q

O

M

MTESr/W

06-12-04

H:13K)3

J ^

1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 ^ ^ 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12

1 .^i

| 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 L ^ 9

m

w w w

W ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

FRDNT-VIEW SIDE-VIEW GROUND PLATE

1 20



i

5

Cl

z

«3 •>-

9 2

$ o

L.

^

°f

æ O

UJ u.

Q-

O Q

tr UJ

Q. Ü

r)

u

o

?=

o

f- o;

w

u3

o:

°g

x f ü

i^'

O UJ

S""

z S

o z

Q 3

^9

o <

z

i

Rovision

o

o

00

*—

C 3

O

OJ

1

'

i

1000

D

400

20

>X)

ON

^—1

'

20 899

' ^

\

Holes 8mn (4x)

i- 4

FS.M1HII

Description

Data Norne

nr,^

ClMck«d

Dote

D5-04-25

Name

RP

« " « # 1 1 *

THERMAL FLUID

1* : J

IS ISS?

OltflREDHEAT

Controlbox dimensions

Job Number

PP5738659A.0C

Drawing number

D53716

Revision

A3

Poge 15

Next 16



9

C

i

pVS

j

ivno

^V

mV3

w

m

B

d

•

A

t

B

PP

^

Z8

T

l

•

I

T

HKD

n

«WM

ITT

tS

iwou

w

T

nWK

r

MM

I

immm

r

MT E STAMP

0S-12-«

mn

l l I 9 I 10

12

I 14 I 15 I TT 17

" • I ^ 9 I 20



13

3

O

O

L. £

UJ £

o.

o Q

o:

iij

o. u

« a

o:

o;

O

X

Q

o

1x1

S""

Z &

u z

ig

î

C3

<

Z

i

Cl

w/

R;

/ •

?

MAINSWTTCH

100A

aos2

20W2

I

I I

H

@

I

rrr nr

20W3

I I I

I

I

I I

1 1 _ ^

I I must

IM

determinsd

1

I by

Crosa sectional

ana

•t

IM

dati

the yard

L3

SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 2

POWER SUPPLY

3x 440VAC 60Hz

46kVA

T.F.PUMP 1

3 |5 ,33 ,43

20Q10

24-32A

lth-2a.2A

mÂ

2 K | 6

S

30K4

/30

1 o

4 12 HI

20T10

I

X20<rö"ö'

3x4mm2

5

6

20P11

?

C M.ro

ppdgnaHy ploM

to

20W10

I I I

_

I I 1fnafeilMianM swHch

I

I I CreM ••oMcifKil ana

I l iy iL '^F'^

20M10

THERMAL FLUID PUMP 1

440 Volts

15 KW

28.2 A

T.F.PUMP 2

^

3 |5 ,33 ,43 FILLNG PUMP

20Q14 f— EIEJ

1—

l

4-32A

lth-28,2A

m ^ » ^ - ^

Tn6

s

30K8 V- \Ä

/30.8

20T14

I

X20<)'o"ö

3x4<nm2

20P15

?

20W14

i i Ir

< ' ' a p $ 2 « ^ P"«* <

I

I

I

I I Cro« —cttcyml ang

I

I

muit IM MunnrMd

I I by l lM yonl

20M14

THERMAL FLUID PUMP 2

440 Volts

15 KW

28,2 A

^

• L l

>L2

'L3

3 |5 33 43

20Q18 | —

1-1j6A I I />

Â

th-1.i6A

^^^

i

30K18 \ - \ A

/30.18 12141

X20p 9 9

3x2,5mm2

5

6

20wia i l l

OptSondty ploM

to

20M18

FILLING PUMP

440 Volts

0.63 kW

1,36 A

R ev is ion D aocr ipt ion

D o t e N o m e

D ot e

D5-04-25 RP

Nome

PO hül14&32aOM:

THERMAL FLUD "

[ ^ Z

dflREDHEAT

Main current

Job Number

PP5738659A.0q

D rawing num ber

Revson

A3

Poge

20

MIESTMP

06-12-04

t4:12:4S

IZZ

^ I 5 I 1 r

9 I 10 I 11 I 12 I

I 14 I 15 I 16 I 17 18

^ 9

I 20

L1

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/CM.ro

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/CM.ro



i

O

o

O "^

uj £

o.

S o

CC Ul

o. o

UJ Q

M

Si

o:

tt: o

-^ UJ

•7

w

O UJ

S " "

o z

^1

O <

z

i

a

L1

L2

L3

»

•

F.O. PUMP 1

1

1

3 |a

|33 |43

F . O . PU M P 2 ,

1

1

' ' '

3

Is

|33 |43

».

•

L2

L3

^

21Q 4

1-1 "

Ith - 1 A

6

A I — 75

1 A I I. r. A •*.

2 4 6 -f

31K 4

/ 3 1 .

*V\A

4 1 2 H 1

X 2 i p Ö Ö

21W4 H I ,

I I I I»

D M

yird

21M 4

FUEL OIL PUMP 1

440 Volts

0,37 KW

1 A

^

21Q8 h—

1-1,6

K

I f />

m ^ « ^

4 6 r;

3x2,6fnm2

\ : \ - ^

1K 8

/31.8 12 14^6

X 2 1 6 Ö Ö

2iwa \ \ \

a>

OfnOftB^f pMOtt to

@

2 i M e

I

I

l _ _ ^

I

I I muBc bs oMflfi tw isa

I I l « l h >yvd

FUEL OIL PUMP 2

440 Volts

0.37 KW

1 A

Ravlslon Daacription Dote

Dot«

35-04-25

RP

Noma

iiiliiii«

-——* THERMAL FLUID

PO BMl«3I0OAC44|nkMllwlMtotaiA

T« •.*3t inuogoo

Fai :+ 3l intSOaOl

OimREDHEAT

Main current

Jo b

Number

PP5738659A.0a

D r a w i n g n u m b e r

Revision

A 3

Page

21

MTESrWP

06-12-04

14:12:45

W | 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1

^ H CONmOL CURRENT 230VAC

^ ^

CDNTRDL C

4

1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1

t

24VAC

L I » f f

12 1 . ^ ^ 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 ,^ 9 | 20

9

9

• L I



a

^

(/)

a

z

<J

•>-

9 2

< Q

Li.

£

^ 0^

LU U.

O Q

o: iij

0 . U

3

Lij a

I - IE

« Si

o:

CC o

•^ Ui

i ^

o u

ä""

z 5

o 2

o s

? o

o <

2

i

o

n

L 2 *

CONT. CURRENT

a4Q3 1—C

1.6-2,5

1 -

24T3

^^'' A

*^>J?\

1 3

A

.

ci

c

/>

2 4

1

2

r

6

CONT. CURF

2

0 . 2 5 -

i E N T

*Q7

f - S

-0.4A 1

44 0/2 3 0V 24T7

630 VA

^

2 ^S <N V

4 ^

^

cl d,

i>

2 4

1

\

2

^

6

440/24VDC

100 VA

3

4

Revision Description

Date

Nama

Omwn

O m k «

Data

05-04-25

Noma

RP

^ I S I S L THERMAL FLUD I* =1? )2 2S?

0ILF1REDHEAT

Control current

•LS

Job Number

PP5738659A.0C

Drawing number

D53716

Revision

A3

Poge 24

Next 25

WiTESrWP

0 6 - 1 2 - «

14:12:40

i I 6

ANTI CONDENS HEATll

THERMAL FLUID PUMP

1

I 10 I 1

ANTI CONDENS HEATING

12

14 15

I 16 I

LAMP TEST

17

18 20

THERMAL auiO PUMP 2



o

o:

O

u- S

CO ilj

o uj

o

z

i

2 5 F 2

2A

^ 5 ^ '

X25<;)

1 <t^

230V-60HZ

2 5S5 _ R A

30K4 7

/30.4 f62

25S9 _F\A

2 5 K 1 6 \

.16

25K16 7

.16

I22

X25<jit

25W5

_L

25E5 =

03

04

30K8

/30.a 62

lamptest 3

25S16 E-V-//101.18

13

2 5 K 1 6 \

.16 V 4

hi

25K16 7

•16 f32

X25i'*

25H7

< ^ l

XI

X2

X25<j?.

25Wg

JL

25E9

=

y^

25H11

X25i^

XI

X2

AI

25H18

25K16

< a i

X,

1X2

M .

LAMPTEST

' ^ J ^ * .11

.b

.10

>|--?

Revision Deacription Dote

Nome

Dots

D5-04-25 RP

Noma

,i\Mu

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

PO • « m s a o A c

Tai

i-H)

181

Fai i-f» in

OILflREDHEAT

Stand still heating

Job Number

PP5738659A.0CI

Drawing nunnber

D53716

Revision

A3

Page 25

Next 29

O A I E S T W

0 e - 1 2 - ( K

10 12

14

15

16

E M E R G E N C Y

1 ^7 I 18-

20

S T D P



UJ

i

o.

o

o:

o.

a

u

o

M Si

-^ ui

0 UJ

1 en

<n

i

X29

29W2

I;

2 9 S 2 ( H r - y

2 9 S4 E A

X29

L/24,4

I

Al

N/24,4

I

lAl lAl

29K4 I I 29K6

\ ~ \

29K7

\ ~ ]

^ Ä 2 ^ Ä 2 ^ Ä 2

•L /30 .2

3 s e c ^ l A l

29K10

WT

1^

••N/30.2

RESET 1

'^J^

/40.a

- J - ^ *

/40.13

" ^ ^ * /40.14

_ /40.18

/141.3

03

/iao.3

KP ^ /40M KP^

03

"J^*

/ H l 6

' - J - J - *

/ia0.6

^ • / 1 4 1 . 9 " - ^ *

Ain^O RESET

03 , 04

1.3

- - + ^

/91.5

^ 3 ^ *

/91.7

• ^ J ^

/91.9

/141.12

/141.17

/14U0

/142.9

/150.12

rpf-

2lji^

3 i4 ja

« j 4 *

«7 J J B •

R ev is ion D ascr ipt lon

D a t e

N o m a

D ot e

Q5-04-25 RP

Nome

THERMAL FLUID

P O l l e > t 4 & a o a « C 4 < | n m T l M l M l i i r i n *

n :43i isiaaiaoo

Fn i-^a tmaaosoi

OILFIREIMEAT

Reset

Job Number

PP5738659A.0CI

U rawing

Revision

A3

Poge 29

l



t

"

i

S

r

(

x

^

o

A

(

V

J

O

O

s

0

-

^

•

H

^

^

"

1

1

1

^

1

°

I

"

i

"

-

Ö

0

X

o

i

-

ß

o

P

S

|

2

_

^

j

~

~

^

-

J

%

l

0

r

V

å

<

.

^

J

^

-

O

U

O

O

0

-

r

uO

n

K

l

^

S

o

o°

•

^

A

O

.

^

S

S

(

g

s

o

n

o

H

A

U

v

a

H

a

a

a

a

3

O

s

w

Q

N

V

s

a

s

N

o

w

3

A

a

3

H

S

N

I

3

M

3

H

N

M

O

H

S

N

s

Q

N

V

o

N

M

^

l



O

t

o

S

l

I

B

-

<

^

O

K

—

s

^

r

s

V

r

—

^

^

1

^

5

l

O

0

©

i

A

C

d

C

A

ad

A

y

a

H

H

a

a

a

3

O

s

Q

s

y

s

N

o

o

w

o

A

y

3

H

s

N

H

NM

N

s

O

O

M

1

l

»



O

^

5

1

o

o

5

i

5

'

i

æ

A

1

u

sX

r

~

,

_

^

n»

o

s

i

"

,

0

«

S

^

O

Q

:

0*

\

C<

•

o

<

>

f

mr

^

A

-

y

a

H

y

a

y

a

3

O

s

w

Q

N

V

s

y

s

N

o

w

J

O

A

y

3

H

s

N

3

H

N

W

O

H

S

N

s

Q

N

V

O

M

OME STAMP

06-12-04

14:12:16

CONTROL VALVE

OPEN CLOSE

" ^ T O P

10

I

11 I

12

14

15 16

T T

I 18

[~^^

I 2Ö"

lUPPLY

PERATURE

L/40.19i

•L/90.2



I

o

a:

o

9

5

o

Q

Q: UJ

a. o

13

UJ a

>- Od

m

ui

QC

ÜJ _

I""

o

UJ

o z

is

O <

a9B2

27

\Xk1

51 ]52

5 0

Rv n

\Xk2

54 155

Controller type

:

93W01

700

153

1 2 3

2 8 2 9

N/40.191

89B7

Pt IOO

• N / 9 0 . 2

Revision Dascriptlon

Oats

No mo

Dots

D5-04-25

RP

Nome

po BKtAaiooM:

THERMAL FLUID

" =«i

i"« «»»o

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

Fax

r-MI

imaSOSOl

OILflREDHEAT

Dumpcooler

Job Number

PP5738659A.0q

Drowng number

D53716

Revision

A3

Page 89

Next 90

MTESMiP

06-12-04

14:1111

^ 1

2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1

^ B CONTROL VALVE

" ^ OPEN CLOSE

#

1

8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1

ESSURE

TWRNSMTTER

12

1 . ^2

1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 . ^ 9 | 20

9

V

to

1

'0 1 ^



a

(/>

3O

z

" •> -

tl^

K

o s

Ü. £

°g

ir o

Q.

O Q

o; UJ

0. U

=

J a

P ir

M S

or:

or: O

-^

UJ

i "

UJ

o z

Q

3

5 Q

O <

I

Ü1

f

90B2

37

1

r

r-

X k 1

51 ]

52 50

r\ n

X k 2

54

^55

Controllar type :93W01 70E

Ronga

0- 6 BAR

53 99 10 2829

X90(l <cM

90W7 ,

>

o:

1 1

t é

90B7

4-20nA 1 0-6 Bar

X9oL <L

90W5 > >

LiiJ '•'

goYs i~ V ^

.._ .B

X90<y

j .

Rflvision Description

Data

Nama

Dmm

Cliiri lK il

Data

05-04-25

Noma

RP

it iJ H it ; POaai14M200AC4>l]>nlMllMlMliirin4i

/HiJrZ.. THERMAL FLUD ™' ?15 25?

)GY ^ü ,;

r t n i v A o^BW"~«winii&nl

OimREDHEAT

Mnmum tlow control

Job Number

PP5738659A0]

Drowing number

D53716

Revison

A3

PoqeSO

Next 91

*

t

t

1

i

u

1

Æ

m

^

H

h

0

-

K

m

—

^

^

^

B

0

C _O I

r

o

^'



W

I

N

A

D

G

S

W

N

H

N

S

T

H

P

O

A

I

N

E

A

M

N

B

zN

(

0

(

O

2

A

5

"

5

O

l

O

f

O

>

o

o

N

I

S

i

«

£

O

a

0

*

C

*

.

A

1

.

*

*

"

>

U

O

R

F

O

T

R

P

X

(

0

O

X

C

^

z

>

o

o

l

o

(

0

0

0

*

»

•

>

r

o

^

>

-

9

P

^

C

i

^

C

~

~

2

*

o

u

T

-

0

.

3

1

1

0

"

>

r

o

^

> -

^

o

o

*

O

J

^

0

"

1

°

s

O

o

5

Cro

-n

^

©

(O

to

»

io

^

©

(D

o

>

ä

^

©

C

C

O

0

^

1

^

©

rV S

,

n

°

2

i

s

-

_

—

~

'

T

—

L

~

C

^

g

—

•

^

-

o

—

:

^

°

C

(

O

J

_

•

^

°

^

^

C i

g

—

v

-

S

—

.

:

^

1

^

^

MI E STAMP

06-12-04

14:t2.-02

'^ T

10 12

I 14 I TS I Te" I 17 I 18

39 I 20



£3

i

Lu ¥

o:

a

a. u

< n &

i'

< i

O <

i

to

X95 1

3 0 K1

/ 3 0 ,

(10 7

.10 I',.

X95

32

2

THERMAL FLUID STAND-BY PUMP

ACTUATED

X95 3

13

150K6

/150,6

150Ka\

/150.8 ^

@ X95

CDMMDN ALARM

DIL FIRED HEATER

14

113

14

4

X95 5

9iKa

/91,2

13

14

9 1 K4

/ 9

COMMON ALARM

13 CCONOMISER

••*

114 TO MAIN ENG INE

, SAFETY SYSTEM

X95 7

31K10

/31.10

f

32

@ X95j,8

X95 9

141K16 \

/141,16

13

14

@ X95J,10

X95 11

141K19 \

/141.19

13

14

@ X95j,12

X95 13

40K11 \

/40.11 ^

@ X95,

X 9 5

180K9

\

/180.9 ^

@ X95,

13

14

il4

f

13

14

[l6

FUEL O IL STAND-BY PUMP

ACTUATED

T.F.SYSTEM TEMP.

HIGH

T.F.SYSTEM TEMP.

LOW

LEVEL EXPANSIONTANK

LOV

F.O.TEMP.

LOV

X95 17

MAINSWITCH

20S2.1

^

@

X95Jjl8

X 9 5 Q 1 9

X95 21

13

91K6

/91.6

@ X95

4 3 \ LEVEL EX

\ EXH. GAS TEMP. ECONOMISER 40 K1 9 \ HIGH HIGH

\ HIGH HIGH

/4019 \ ^

@ X95

LEVEL EXPANSION TANK

44

20

14

22

Raviaion Deacfiptlon

Dote

Name

Pate

35-04-25 RP

Nome

Müh

THERMAL

FLUID

poBla14^^laoAc

n :+3i i n

OlLflRmEAT

Potential free contacts

Job Number

PP5738659A.0q

Drowinq number

Revision

A3

Poge 95

Next 101

MI E STAMP

0 6 - 1 2 - «

H:US

^

1

2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1

^ B

^ ^

L 2 4 V / 2 4 . a »

^ i ^

1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 ^13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1

m m

F

^W

é

1 20

. ^ 4 V / 1 0 2 . 3



u

o:

&i

13Cl

z

a:

C

° 5

< °

< o

Ü. £

O ^

0^

Q-

O Q

IK U

Q. O

r>

UJ o

f- o:

o: o

i -

2 S

O Z

2

^

a

X

Revislon

3 0 K 4 \

/ 3 0 . 4 1

101D3

13

3 0 K 8 \

1 4 / 3 0 . 8 ^

13

3 0 K 1 0 \

1 4 / 3 0 . 1 0 ^

43

4 4

13 14 15

1 2 3

X I

X I

X I

l O I H S ^ ^ " "

1 0 1 H 5 ( 5 ^ ' " 1 0 1 H 6 ( 5 ^ " '

N 2 4 V / 2 4 . 8 » •

| X 2 j X 2 ] X 2

T.F. PUMP 1 T.F. PUMP 2 STAND-BY PUMP

IN OPERATION IN OPERATION ACIUATH)

D e s c r i p t i o n

Dots

Norne

Dnnm

D a t e

05-04-25

Norne

RP

3 0 K 1 8 \

/ 3 0 . i a 1

13

3 1 K 4 \

1 4 / 3 1 - 4 ^

13

3 1 K 8 \

1 4 / 3 1 - 8

13

3 1 K 1 0 \

1 4 / 3 1 . 1 0 >

4 3

4 4

16 17 18 19 20 21

4 5 6 7 8 9

XI X I X I

X I

101H9 (X ) • " 101H12 0 * " 101H14 Ø *" 101H15 0 "*

1X2 |X2 TX2 J[X2

• t • •

nUJNG PUMP FU a OIL PUMP 1 FU a OIL PUMP 2 F.O. PUMP

IN OPERATION IN OPERATION IN OPERATION STANO-BT

IN OPERATION

å i i i i i t ; P O B i > i « ] 2 0 0 A C 4 iq M k a i i M iM i M i « < i

- Z I I U I I L

THERMAL FLUD If. :t2

12S2?

OllflREDHEAT

Pilot lamps

2 2 2 3

10 11

lamptest

2 5 S 1 6 - \

/ 2 5 . 1 6

3

4

Job Number

PP5738659A.0C

Drawing number

D53716

Revision

12

A 3

Poge 101

Next 102

MI E STAMP

0S-12-M

14:1132

J ^ 1

2 1 3

^ B

^ ^

L24V /101 .19 *

1 4 1 5 1 6 1 ^ 1 8 1 9 1 10 1

9

11 1 12 l ^ i 1 14 1 15 1

9

6 1 17 1 18 1

•

9 1 20

\

L24V/200.3



K 3

i

a

z

'S V

Q.

O Q

o: u j

1 -

C£

m Si

o:

^ g

: o

O UJ

o z

< " l _

s§

1

i

f

Revision

40K11

/40 .11

102D3

7

22

13

1

102H3

^

N24V/101 .19» '

1

XI

yx2

40K14

/40 .14

f

22

40K16

'40.16

40K19

'40.19

r

22

f

32

14 15

2 3

102H5 6^

X I

h " 1 0 2 H 6 6

XL

1X2 TX2

fVE L EXP.TANK LE Va EXP.TANK LEVEL EXP.TANK

LOW LOW LOW HIGH HIGH

}escrip t ion

Dot«

Noma

Dmm

Chmod

Data

D5-04-25

Nome

RP

40K8

/40 .8

f

22

40K10

'40.10

f

22

16 17 18

4 5 6

102H9 6^

.XI

yx2

Q U I K E M P T Y I N G V A L V E

O P E N

j t H H i i ;

poBoiH«i32oo«sn»«*«n

A U Z M A THERMAL FLUID I* =* " 1?? ? ??

91K2

/91 .2

7

?1K4

'22 /91.4

7 91 KB

2 2 / 9 1 - 6

t /

19 20 21

7 8 9

102H12 (X

XI

?) 102H14 6

X I

h 102H15 6

1K8

91.8

7

2 2

22 23

10 11

XI

0 102H16 6

| X 2 y X 2 y X 2

T.F.aOW ECON. T.F.TEMP. ECON. EXHAUSTGASTEMP.

LOW LOW HIGH HIGH ECON. HIGH HIGH

OIlflREDHEAT

Pilot lamps

C/101.19

x f / 1 0 1 . 1 9

. 1

p<2

LEAKAGE

ECONOMISER

Job Number

PP5738659A.0C

Drawing number

Revision

12

2 0 0 . 1 8

^24V/200.3

A3

Paqe102

Next 120

DMESTW

06-12-04

14:11:47

I

g T

1

« I

I

'° r

12 14

I 15 I 16 I 17

18 J 9 20

L I

I

L 2 I



&5

1=1

O

o:

o

o.

O

a

C H

lu

a. u

11 1 a

P o:

a:

X

Cl

tn

3

9 UJ

S""

o

z

5 9

i

L 3 I

BURNER MOTOR

. \ 3 ^ ,33 ,43

PRE-HEATER

6-

lth-7.3A

'

i

150K13 V-V Ä

/150,13 12 1416

X120<r<^<?

CraM Mcnonoi orM

I

t fmiM M Mnf nwwo

I i ir8i.xrt

120M6

BURNER MOTOR

440 Volts

3.7

KW

7,3A

^

1 3 5

|3 3

|43

120Q10 h-g

1 7 - 2 3 A

_ " 7>^

^-N-

2 4 6 -J

3)l2.aniin2

185K16V-\ ,

/185.16 ]2)4l6

185K18

\ - \ Ä

/ 1 8 5 . 1 8 1 2 1 4 1 6

in

>o

X120Ö Ö Ö

120W10

>'"]•>

I I

l Imu s t

am

OVH

120E10

PRE-HEATER

440 Volts

13,2

KW

20 A

Reviaion Daaeriptlon

Pote

Name

Dote

"^ D5-04-25RP

Name

- — • ^

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT

TECHNOLOGY

PO

B M I « ^

3200 AC y f iMi lMI

T4 :-tJI laSBQSOO

te i-f» laiHoaoi

OllilRmEAT

Main current

Job Number

PP5738659A.0a

Drawing number

D53716

Revision

A3

Poge 1 2 0

Next 141

l



_

-

o

U

J

^

a

o

^

C

o

X

2

w

-

O

U

-

«

2

o

X

s

t

o

^

©

^

-

A

*

^

2

•

X

o

S

"

I

s

I

v

D

O

r

^

0

(

^

0

0

0

0

0

-

f

i

n

v

i

n

v

O

C

•

^

^

^

r

^

0

N

0

0

æ

G

0

r

~

0

t

^

0

0

0

æ

0

C

V

J

1

L

—

i

w

-

T

O

A

y

a

H

y

o

a

a

a

3

O

s

w

Q

s

y

s

N

o

w

o

A

ü

3

H

s

N

3

H

NM

N

S

a

m

O

M

U

§

é

S



C

0

C

^

•

e

s

o

•

^

y

O

2

^

•

O

C

^

o

o

i

£

.

*

^

S

^

o

o

—

c

^

<

^

•

<

1

—

n

o(

V

•

+

r

•

^

—

1

<

>

(

X

i

d

O

k

z

x

y

a

H

a

a

y

a

3

B

O

s

w

Q

s

y

s

N

o

B

w

JO

A

y

3

H

s

N

H

H

NW

N

O

S

O

Q

O

M

W1ESMff>

06-12-04

14:11J2

5

I 6"

^

]I3:

9

I 1° r

12

14

1~^

16

17 18

L/142.19 I

X150(

SPARE BURNER RELAY

TO BE

INSTALLED

|03 103

1S0B8

n2

20

• L / 1 5 1 , 2



3

O

o:

o

uj S

Q.

O Q

o:

Lj

o.

o

UJ

Q

I -

(E

2

fe

o:

a:

o

-^

ui

S""

o z

< ._

s§

^1

O <

z

i

Cl

150W6

I

C H r - y 1 5 0 S 2

180K5

\

/ 1 8 0 . 5

\

180K3

\

/ 1 8 0 . 3

^

180K9

\

P R E S S .

.9

X150O"

|03

4 0 K 8 \

/ 4 0 . 8

^04

03

40K10 \

/40.10 ^4

|03

40K14

\

'""''

104

04

Supply

Zsro

2

Bum«r

trouble

Rasat

21

Bumar

motor

Rama aanaor

2 2

24

W^'

180K8

/ 1 8 0 . 8

180K6

\

/ 1 8 0 . 6

\

04

|03

5 3

I

185K16

\

180K14

\

/185.16 ls/180,14 ^

2 3

2 4

3 0 K 4 \

/ 3 0 . 4

^

/40.14

40K16

\

/Arne \

0 3 LOW mv

/40,16 04

03

141K3 \

/141.3

^04

^

lo3

141K5 '

/141,5

141K11 \

/141.11 V4

103

141K9 \

/141.9 ]^^

142K10 \

/142.10 V4

^

|03

1 4 2 K 9

'

/ 1 4 2 , 9

1 5 0 K 1 1

.11

5 3

5 4

• * • R

/150.13

5 3

3 0 K 8 \

/ 3 0 . 8

^54

I

141K6 \

/in £. \

04

03

141K12

/141.12

/141.6

141K8

/141.8 \Q^

N/142,19

I

i V

04

03

JW^

141K14 \

/141.14

150K11

r

^ F l a n e s e n s o r c a b l e M UST

be

a

s e p a r o t e c a b l e )

.

57

1 5 0 K 1 8 V #

A

20Q6

/120.6

Al

3sec.

IAI

150K13

3 3

34

A2

S

3 s e c

JAI

15 K18

S

7160,14

•6/151,2

SAFETf CIRCUrr

'^-JJ /160.18

'KP* /95.3

K P ^ '

/151.17

" J ^ / 2 0 0 . 8

53 t 54

61513

SAFETY CIRCUIT

'^JJ^

/160.18

''-J^' /95.3

^Ji*

/ 1 5 1 . 1 7

KP / 2 0 0 . 8

M f 54

BURNER TROUBLE

BURNER MOTOR

03

I 04

2j5X,_a

43

, 44

/200.9

/151.17

' J - ^

/120.6

* /120.6

5

13 ' , 14

j5.

/120.6

' i

X - i '

/160.15

/151.17

03

I 04

2 l 3 X j 2

3 1 4 ^

«

j44

66

/151.3

.13

• N / 1 5 1 . 2

Ravlsion Oascription

Data

Noma Data

D 5 - 0 4 - 2 5 R P

N a m e

PO 801146^3200 AC

THERMAL FLUID

f l l ^ S S T

HEATTECHNOLOGY

E-mai; rt wa idhBfQ hdwMw jil

OIUnREDHEAT

B u r n e r s a f e t y c i r c u i t

Job Number

P P 5 7 3 8 6 5 9 A . 0 q

Drawing number

D53716

Revision

A3

Poge 150

Next

151

l



o

<

0

^

dX

J

^

I

(

O

O

^

•

x

g

X

I

o0

o

s

<

t

o

V

C

O

i

S

o

s

V

C(0

1

C

o

ai

d

•

O

1

(

D

(

O

O

^

(

O

<

M

>

M

a

m

^

I

0

A

OÖ

1

N

Z

A

H

a

H

a

a

y

a

3

O

N

s

w

Q

N

V

S

y

s

N

o

w

JO

A

a

3

R

S

N

3

H

N

N

S

O

O

M

OME STAMP

ae-n-o*

14:11:22

BURMER OFF/ON SOMMOPQ R

12

U

15 16 17 18 20

dOSE/OPEN

L/151,19 I

•L/iso.a

/150.8

Burner relay LAL2.25

150B8



a

O

ar

o

u. £

UJ £

O.

O Q

CH

t iJ

Q. O

o: o

o UJ

z o

u z

o

z

i

m

I

160B3

X k 4 - 4 0 . 4 C o n t r o l l a r t y p a : 9 3 W 0 1 7 0 1

X k S - 1 4 2 . 3 R o n g a : 0-4S5o C

2728 1 2 3 4 5 6

N/151,19 ^

X160

JfF^aeJW

160B6

P-tlOO

160B4

P-tlOO

BURNER

160S8 h v

> 1

R alaaaa load

c o n t r o l

20

Air pranura

chak

On/off control

bumar

14

12

170K4 \

/170 .4 >

21 |03

142K3 7 142K3 \

' '"^"^ (22/142.3 ^

13

150K13

/150 ,13

14

13

14

/ 1 4 2 . 3

.8

t - ^ 160S8

2 - A u t ono l l o

1 "

PtrtU

looil

O - OTF

g BURNER r

•E/170.2

•F/170.2

- / . 1 4

/ 1 5 0 ,6

' / 1 7 0 . 3

•N/170.2

R av is ion D ascr ipf aon

D a t e

N o r n e

D at a

D5-04-25 RP

N o m a

itm^fi

T H E R M A L F L U I D

H E A T T E C H N O L O G Y

poaKi4&]20OM:

U :+31 in

Fa» : 43 i innoaoi

O i m R E D H E A T

Bumer control

Job N um ber

PP5738659A.O0

D rawing num ber

16

D rawing r

D5371

R e v i s i o n

A3

P a g e 1 6 0

N ext 170

06-12-04

14:11:17

'2 T

/160.14

/

Burner relay LAL2.25

150B8

Bumer

in

operation

19

""8 T

10

I 11 I 12 ~ r

I 14 I 15 I

"W

17

"*

1 ^ ^ I °

Servomotor Feedback

opan

«Ignal

9

8

Servomotor Servomotor

cloae cloae

11 10

Nozzle* Ignition

traneformer

18 16



i3

i

i

li . ^

°f

fe "^

O.

o

Q

o: uj

Q-

O

tt: < - >

-^

UJ

O Ui

S "

o

z

< " l _

S |

^1

O <

z

i

F/160.16

I

E/160,16

I

170P3

143

170K2 \ 170K4

.2

\AA .4

7

'32 170K4

\

.4

^

170K

170K4

\

87

A l

170K2

N/160.20

[

88

7 6

X170

r

170K4

,4

7

122

X170

03

04

X1706: X170

X170

170W5

2 7

12 8 129 114 112 til-

•H/151 .5

X170'

170K2

.2

f

22

L

X170'

W i l

t ^ ^

L_J

L_J

@

X170

iG/151 .5

IL

X170<

t

X170

M/151.19

t

I

\ I

L_J

L_J

15 13 16 JT ti

23

I

I

iE

I

Y15

CLGSE

I

-U MI T SWITCH ÜPEN

U = LIMIT SWITCH CLOSED

111 = LIMIT SWITCH IGNITION POSITION

VI I= LIMIT SWITCH PARTIAL LOAD

> ^

Y14

A l

]

i N

; ^ N i N

b T N

^\ _ /

j ^ _ y L j

^ |A2

j ~ ^

170K4~]Ä2

X170 X170

TM »BURNER+ER

3

•N/180.2

BURNER

IN

OPERATION

/200.3

' i J ^ "

/200.6

' ^

M

43 |_J4 4

BI^ TM

n _ ' 74

" j - i *

/160.14

2151122

g

^J^M^ is

M

| M

« l i T j E

Revieion Descfiption

Date

Norne

Date

D5-04-25 RP

Nome

iitiiitii

THERMAL FLUD " : ^

S S S f

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

c l ^ j ^ ^ r * "

OlREDHEAT

Burner air valve and nozzles

Job Number

PP5738659A.0CI

Drawing number

Revision

A3

Poge

170

Next 180

i



I

i

n

n

<0

™

C

00

"

<

0

00

v

O

0

i

n

s

o

m

o

•

"

Vo0

«

«

X

If

1

i

A

,

=

2o0

5«

—

O

•

^

—

W

I

—

1

<

u

0

O

i

n

d

-

1

—

l

a

o

5

n

O

n

s

x

a

a

H

y

a

a

a

3

O

s

w

Q

s

M

i

s

N

o

w

o

A

a

3

S

N

3

H

N

N

s

Q

O

M



•

O

O

)

é

O

cO

o

»

N

[

3

I

-

,

2

(

D

U

g

n

s

o

2

(

O

rI

c

1

n

^

^

J

I

^

n

I

I

L

_

"

z

J

L

«

7

f

?

J

s

p

j

g

l

i

o

A

a

a

H

a

a

a

a

3

O

N

s

w

Q

s

a

s

N

o

w

o

A

a

3

H

s

H

H

N

M

N

O

s

Q

o

N

M

MTE S TMIP

0 6 - 1 2 - 0 4

14:11:01

^ 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6

^ ^

L 2 4 V / 1 0 2 . 1 9 »

0 3

13

^ ^ 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 1 1 i 12 1 ^ 1 1 4 1 1 5 1

^ H ^ H

^m ^^'

3 3 0 3

16 1 17 1 18 1

\

•

9 1 20



^

3O

z

< 3 s .

O E

3 f

5 o

li.

e

uj Q

o Q

o:

i±i

Q. O

3

UJ Q

F= o:

</l UJ

o:

• ^ U J

i"

I m

( / )

1-

z o

o z

5 Q

§

z

£

o

en

Ravialon

1 7 0 K 2 \

/ 1 7 0 . 2 ^

1 4 2 K 3 \

/ 1 4 2 . 3 ^

2 0 0 D 3

1 7 0 K 2 \

0 4 / 1 7 0 . 2

13

14

1 4

13 14 15

1 2 3

X I

X I

2 0 0 H 3 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 6 ( X )

N 2 4 V / 1 0 2 . 1 9 » >

J X 2 ] X 2

BURNER IN FORCED BURNER IN

PARTIAL LOAD OPERATON

Description Data

Noma

Oman

O M C I X I

Data

D5-04-25

Noma

RP

1 5 0 K 6 \

/ 1 5 0 . 6 ^

/

1 5 0 K 8 \

'150.8

) 0 K 1 l \

50.11 ^

3 3

3 4

1 4 1 K 1 2

0 4 / l + L I Z

/

f

2 2

4 1 K 1 4

1 4 1 . 1 4

141K9

' 1 4 1 . 9

f ,

22 /

f

2 2

41K11

141.11

142K9

' 1 4 2 . 9

t

)

f

2 2

4 2 K 1 0

142.10

1 4 1 K 6

M 4 1 . 6

f

f

2 2

141

KB

2 2 , ' 1 4 1 . 8

16 17 18 19 20 21

4 5 6 7 8 9

X1 X I X I X I X I X I

141K3

' 1 4 1 . 3

' 1

2 2

T

2 2

141K5

' 1 4 1 . 5

I

2 2

2 2 2 3

10 11

C/102.19

. 1

0/102.19

^

A^

rd

2 0 0 H 8 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 9 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 1 1 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 1 2 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 1 4 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 1 5 ( X ) 2 0 0 H 1 7 ( X J

]X2 1X2 1X2 1X2 1X2 1X2

• • • I I «

BURNER CONDdONS BURNER LEAKAGE FLUEGAS TEMP. THERMAL FLUID FLOW T.F. TEMP.

CORREa TROU BII (XL RRED HEATER HIGH HIGH LOW LOW HIGH HIGH

j t i H i t i ;

poaaii4&aoo«c4i|MiiMiiMiMiiirin4i

y^JJJJpJL THFRMA Flllin ™ i « laieeoMo

OlfREDHEAT

Pilot lamps

T X 2

*

BURNER FIANGE

OPEN

Job Number

PP5738659A.0C

Drawing number

Revision

12

201.18

1

1

g 2 4 V / 2 0 1 . 3

A 3

Page 200

eC

^

M

0

.

9

S

CCC

1

*

^

^

t

d



V

W

e

A

9

jn

)VS

M

-

3

^HO

5

I

Z

C

Z

6

HH

d

^

^O

I

6

su

m

(s

d

m

d

»

uQ

a

HHH

NOHHQVG

fOH

^

(

I

^

i

3

9

t

,

\

9

9

,

\

,

\

3

J

6

6

8

8

3

3

1

9

9

S

9

C

C

C

i

U

D

5

5

S

Z

m

s

o

'

:

[

o

o

c

o

m

o

-

"

O

3

s

o

2

g

^

o

c

e

To a SAFE place

/ • " N i n t he at mospher e

25

I

PRESSURE INDICATOR

PRESSURE ALARM

PRESSURE CONTROLLER

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

PRESSURE INDICATING CONTROLLER

TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

TEMPERATURE ALARM

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER

TEMP. INDICATOR CONTROLLER

FLOW INDICATING ALARM

IM I

MANUAL VALVE

IM I MANUAL VALVE N.C.

I^<1| MANUAL VALVE

"^ ' WITH LOOSE DISC

f^ MANUAL VALVE

WITH WELDING ENDS

^ MANUAL VALVE N.C.

WITH WELDING ENDS

|j<^|

MANUAL VALVE

WITH REGULATION DISC

1^1 MANUAL VALVE N.C.

WITH REGULATION DISC

<<>i MANUAL VALVE

^' ^ WITH REGULATION DISC

AND WELDING ENDS

^ MANUAL VALVE N.C.

' ^ WITH REGULATION DISC

AND WELDING ENDS

v < i M A N U A L V A L V E

WITH LOOSE DISC

AND WELDING ENDS

J _ ^ S E L F C L O SI N G

SOUNDING PIPE VALVE

• . BLOCKIN G VALVE

. ^ * S E L F C L O S I N G

Æk. FLAME ARESTOR

1^1 ELECTRIC TWOWAY VALVE

r/\ STRAINER

I m ) M A N U A L D R I V EN PU M P

_ ^ 3 \ _ E L E C T R I C D R I VE N P U M P

<

NON RETURN VALVE

"Z i lREDUCER

l y BELLOW

FILTER AIRREDUCER



PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

INCL. VALVES AND ORIFICE

LEVEL INDICATOR

LEVEL ALARM

LEVEL CONTROLLER

TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER

WITH DOUBLE ELEMENT

" " " " CAPILLARY TUBE

0 0 0 0 A I R - T U B E

ELECTRIC LINES

11^ SAFETY VALVE

P<i\ PNEUMATIC CONTROLED VALVE —

1 ^ 1 E L E C T R I C

3-WAY

VALVE '

) ^ _

6^

2-WAY

SOLENOID VALVE

3 - WAY SOLENOID VALVE

CALORIMAT

m\

ELECTRIC 2- WAY VALVE

I I XI I

THERMAL FLUD

STEAM

WATER

IIXII MECHANICAL CONTROL VALVE

L.C. = Loose Co ne

DN80

TO

HEAT CONSUMERS

200*0

PPE SIZING TABLE

ACQ TO ISO

OUTSDE

DN15

DN20

DN25

DN32

DN40

DN50

DN65

DN80

DN100

DN125

DN150

DN200

DN250

DN300

DAMETER

21.3

26.9

33.7

42.4

48.3

60.3

76.1

88.9

114.3

139.7

168.3

219.1

273.0

323.9

Min f l ow cont r ol

TYPE:

E l ect r i cal

acc. dwg 62050

150°C

^

FROM

HEAT CONSUMERS

YARD : J in l ing Shipyard

At : Nonjlng - P.R. of China

CLASS :

Germanischer Lloyd

+

MCE,AUT(SBG)

Aolborg

Project

PP5758659A.00

PP5738660A.00

PP5758661A.00

PP5758662A.00

PP5738841A.00

PP5758842A.00

052352-1

PP5739698A.00

052352-2

Newbuilding

JLZ04-0409 A

JLZ04-0410

A

JLZ04-0413 A

JLZ04-0414 A

JLZ04-0411 A

JLZ04-0412 A

JLZ04-0415 A

JLZ04-0416

A

JLZ04-0417 A

REMARK

A

REMARK A

Type EXV568-41-57.0-600 is used

dwgnr.

D53718

Type EXV660-43-57.0-600 is used

dwgnr.

054051

( 20M7

) For

electrical diagram

see DWG

D53716

ÖlT l

For

item number

see

fittingli st FITL5738659

Yard Delivery

For MDO/HFO diagram

see DWG

D53715

add new Fitno.

Hul numbers added

DESCRIPTION

AALBORG

NAME

PROJECTION

0 4 - 0 5 - 2 0 0 6

1 3 - 0 2 - 2 0 0 6

DATE

Thermal Fluid Diagram

DRAWN

CE

SCALE none

DAT 16-03-2005

DRAWING

No:

D53714

PO Bo 145,3200 AC Spienisse The Netherands

Id :+31 181650500

H E R M A L F L U I D

H E A T T E C H N O L O G Y ' ""

' • * '

'^'^'

REVSON

B

THIS DRAWING

AND

DESGN SHOWN

HERDN

IS THE

PROPERTY

OF

AALBORG

INDUSTRIES

AND

MUST NOT

BE

USED

SHEET

1

0 F 1

AI

in

D AIL Y

SERVICE

TAN K

MD O

PART OF MAIN

FUEL SYSTEM



S

115V

S e t p o i n t 8 Bar

rHTl—Ä-ff

0-6

Æ ]jiM n

^

DN

25

DISTANCE FROM DE-AERATORS TO BURNER

AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE

Oi l Pressure

Control ler

Type: FDR 20

A c e dw g . : D 00800

o<

ISSD

BURNER WEISHAUPT

Type RMS

7-ZMD

E-motor:

2.6 [kW]

E-heater: 13.2 [kW]

FUEL OIL DE-AERATOR

Size 2

Ace.

dwg D00799

DN 25

Y ARD :

J'mlbq

Shipyard

At : Nanjing - P.R. of China

CIASS : Germanischer Uoyd + MCE,AUT(SBG)

Aalborg Project

PP5738659A.00

PP5738660A.00

PP5738661A.00

PP5738662A.00

PP5738841A.00

PP5738842A.00

052352-1

PP5739698A.00

052352-2

Newbuilding

1204-0409

JLZ04-0410

JI204-0413

1104-0414

1.Z04-0411

1204-0412

JLZ04-0415

1204-0416

1.Z04-0417

Change Over Valves

Type:

PHD 40

Ace dwg. D42950

H.F.O. Circulating Pumps

Type:

ZAS 550

Cap.:

672 L/hr

H.: 2- 5 Bar(g)

E-Motor:

0,37 kW

Current: 3x440V -

Aec. Dwg. D00840

60Hz

QOMTJ For electrical diagram see DWG D53716

150031 For item number see fittinglist FITL5738659

E Ä R |

Yard Delvery

For System diagram see DWG D53714

R EV.

Hull Numbers added

DESCRIPTON

«iiliiiU

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

PJ

NAME

PROECKN

€ 3

13-02-2006

D A T E

MDO / HFO Diagram

Modulating Burner

DRAWN CE

SCALE none

D A T E : 1 6 - 0 3 - 2 0 0 5

DRAWING No:

D53715

THERMAL FLUID

l ^ ' ^ l ^ ' S T A ' " ' " ' ^ '

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

^ - — ^ . ^ . ^

R E V I S I O N

DB MUWK AW DESm SHOW

WREn

rS

1HE PROFERY

OF

At i ra»

MUSnss MB HSr NOT

S

USED

Bv 01

t E m o n x a

F O R D M I P A RT Y

SHEET

1

0 F1

A2

ALUVEILER



Operating and Maintenance Instructions

VM No.:

Edition:

Ident No.

460.0008 GB

07.01

55 0 102

Volute-Casing Centrifugal Pumps

Series NTT and CTT

Retain

for future

use

Order No.:

Machine No.:

Pump Ident. No.:

Pump Type:

Operating

data,

dimensions and other additional information can be found in the order-specific part of the

documentation.

A

hese Operating and Maintenance

Contents

1.

General



NTT/CTT ALLWEILER

1 General

1.1 Pu mp designation

The exact designat ion ca n be found In the order-sp e

cif ic documents (see data sheet).

1.2 Properuse

Information on proper use of the pumps is provided in

the technical data sheet.

The pumped l iquid must not contain any abrasive con

stituents nor corrode the pump materials.

1.3 Pe rforman ce data

The exact p erformance data can be taken from the or

der data sheet and/or acceptance test report.

1.4 Warranty

Our warranty for shortcomings in the supply is laid

down in our delivery co ndit ions. No l iabil i ty wil l be un

dertaken for damages caused by non-compliance with

the operating instructions and service condit ions.

If at any later date the operating co nditions cha nge (e.g.

different f luid co nvey ed, sp eed , viscosity, tempe rature

or supply condit ions), i t must be checked by us from

case to case and confinned , if necessary, that the pum p

is suited for those purposes. Where no special agree

ments were m ade, pump s suppl ied by us may, dur ing

the wan-anty period, only be ope ned or varied by us or

our authorized c ontract se rvice wori<shops; otherwise

our l iabil ity for any de fects w il l cease.

1.5 Testing

NTT/CTT

ALIWEILER



2 Safety

2.1

These operating instructions contain basic safety

instnjctions for installation, operation and

mainten ance. It is therefore essential that they are read

by fitters and all specialist staff and cus tome r pe rsonnel

prior to installation and start-u p. They m ust always b e

kept at hand at the place of installation.

The special safety instructions contained in the other

chapters must be observed in addit ion to the general

safety instructions in this chapter.

Identification of safety instructions in the

operating manual

The safety instmctions contained in these operating

instmctions which represent a danger to personnel if

not complied with are specially marked by the general

danger symbol:

Warning symbol

as per DIN 484 4-W9

Wam ing of danger from electric voltage is indicated as

follows:

2.3 Dangers in the event of non-co mplian ce with

safety instructions

Failure to comply with the safety instructions may result

in danger to persons, and place the environment a nd

the machine at r isk. Non-compl iance wi th the safety

instructions wil l lead to the loss of any claims for

damages.

Non -comp l iance may resul t in the following dangers:

• Failure of important functions of the plant

• Failure of spec if ied metho ds for maintenance an d

servicing

• Danger to persons result ing from electrical,

mechanical an d chemical ef fects

• Danger to the environment result ing f i-om leakage of

hazardous substances

2.4 Responsible working practices

The safety instructions contained in these operating

instmctions, current national accident prevention

regulations, as well as intemal working, operating and

safety rules of the customer, must be observed.

2.5 Safety instructions for the user/operator

• Hot or cold machine parts representing a dan ger



NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER

2.6 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection

and installation

The operating company must ensure that all

maintenance, inspection and installation tasks are

performed by authorized and qualif ied specialist

personnel who have thoroughly studied the operating

Instructions.

Wort< on the m achine Is only to be carried out when the

machine Is at a standsti l l . The procedure for shutting

down the machine described In the operating

Instructions must always be followed.

Pumps or aggregates handling f luids which are

detrimental to health must be decontaminated. All

safety and protective devices must Immediately be

refitted and made operational on completion of the

work.

The Instnjctlons under Section 6.1 , "Preparation for

start-up", must be observed before restarting.

2.7 Unauthorized conversion and production of

replacement parts

Conversion or modification of the machines Is only

permissible after consultation with the manufacturer.

Original replacement parts and accessories approved

by the manufacturer are intr insic to safe operation. If

other parts are used the manufacturer cannot be held

liable for the consequences.

2.8 Unacceptable mo des of operation

The ope rational safety of the machine su pplied Is only

ensured w hen it Is used In accordance with Section 1 o f

the operating instructions. The l imit values given on the

3.1

Transportation and Intermediate Stor

age

Packaging

Attention m ust be paid to the f igurative markings on th e

packaging.

The suctk)n and pressure side an d all auxil iary con nec

tions must always be closed during transportation an d

storage.

The cover ings must only be removed im

mediately before connecting the pipeline.

3.2

A

A

A T T E N T I O N

Transportation

The pump or pump aggregate Is to be safely trans

ported to the place of Installation, if required by mean s

of lifting gear.

The regulations for lifting loads in accordance with

VBG 9a must be observed. Crane and sling equip

ment must be adequately dimensioned. Sling

equipment m ust not be secured to the lifting eyes

of the motor, except as additional protection

against overturning in the event of nose-heavi

ness.

Transportation to and at the Installation site

Make sure that the unit Is transported safely and In a

stable posi t ion. Overtuming due to nose-heaviness

must be prevented.

NTT/CTT

ALIWEILER



3.3 P reservation / Storage of centrifugal pump s

3.3.1 Preservation

In the case of storage or prolonged standsti l l , the

pumps must be protected against corrosion. In those

cases , an outside and inside preservation is to be pro

vided. The durabil i ty of the protection against corro

sion, which is l imited in time, depends o n the com posi

t ion of the preservative to be applied and the storage

condit ions.

Under normal ci rcumstances the pumps

have no special preservative.

T T E N T I O N

At an addit ional charge we can, however, supply

pumps and replaceme nt parts ex factory with a preser

vative adequate to the planned storage period.

3.3.1.1

Outside preservation

The outside preservative should be app lied by painting

or spraying with a spray gun .

Po ints of preservation:

All bright and unvamished parts (e.g. shaft ends, cou

pl ings, f lange facings, valve and m anometer connec

tions).

3.3.1.2 Inside preservation

(Not required for pum ps made of stainless materials.)

Intemal preservation is applied by painting, spraying

using spray

guns,

f i ll ing/dipping and s ubseq uent drain

i n g . Finally, the suction and outlet branch es as well as

all other supply and discharge branches must be

A

Note: The preservatives l isted are to be regarded as a

recommendation. Altematively, technically equivalent

products from other manufacturers can be used.

When handling preservatives, the safety hints con

tained in the relevant DIN safety data sheets and thos e

of the manufacturer must be complied with.

3.3.1.4 Depreservation

Prior to sett ing the pum p in mo tion, the inside preserva

t ion must be removed.

A

Environmentally compatible disposal must be en

sured.

Preservatives can be removed wi th wax solvents, pe

troleum ether, diesel, petroleum or alkaline cleaners.

However, the simplest method is to use a steam clean

er.

Recommendation for Tectyl 506 EH: Al low petro

leum ether to act for 10 minutes before any further ac

tion.

A

Pumps that are used in the food or drinking water sector

must be dism antled and thoroughly cleaned prior to de-

preservatk)n.

A suitable so lvent that is compatible with the liqukj to

b e

pumped (dr inking water / food) can be used as the

cleaning age nt, e.g. Spiritus, Ritzol 155 or suds with a

high alkaline content. Steam cleaning is ideal.

A T T E N T I O N

After a prolonged storage period (more

than 6 months) , al l elastomers (O-r ings,

shaft seals) must be checked for elasticity of shape.



NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER

4 Description / P rinciple design of the pum p

The pictorial presentation may not correspond with the pump supplied.

The actual design wil l be stated in the specif ic order documents.

Volute casing

Impeller

Bearing bracket

NTT/CTT

ALIWEILER



Installation/Mounting

5.1

A

A

Installation

For installation methods and locations, please see in

stallation drawing.

Other m ethods of instal lation are not pe rmissible

without prior consultation with the m anufacturer.

The safety regulations and tests in accordance

with DIN 4754 and VDI 3033 must be observed

where pumps are instal led in heat-transfer plants.

5.2.3

A H E N T I O N

When install ing the pump, please ensure

that the cooling air from the mo tor fan can

flow unimpede d over the bearing bracket to the casing

cover.

5.1.1 P lace of Installation

Temp erature: min . -2 0 °C

max. +40 °C

relative air hum idity:

permanent max. 85 %

temporary max . 100 %

Installation height: max. 1000 m abo ve NN

For data differing from this, please consult the manu

facturer.

Intensive vibrations in the vicinity of the

T T E N T I O N

5.3

Characteristics of a floor/concrete foundation

The foundation m ust be horizontal, f lat and clean, and

be capable of b earing the full load upon it.

Note:

Concrete foundations must be executed with

standard concrete of strengfl i das s B 25 as a minimum.

Alignment of the pump aggregate

The pump aggregate must be al igned to i ts pre-set

height and system dimensions. This is done using

s u i

table steel shims, an-anged direcfly adjacent to each f i

xing bolt.

The overall height of the steel shims is determined by

the established system dimensions of the plant. The

steel shims and the base plate must be posit ioned

evenly and securely.

If the fixing holes are more than 750 mm apart, we re

comme nd fitt ing addit ional steel shims in the middle of

the base plate.

Baseplate

a

7L T.

V

F i g . 1 : Alignment

with

steel shims

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



5.4 Checking the coupling al ignment

5 .4.1 Adjusting the support foot

Before aligning the coupling, all screws on the sup port

foot (183...) m ust be loosened, so that the insert unit is

stress -free. After aligning the coupling, screw the sup

port foot (183...) down to the base plate. The fixing

screw (901...) on the bearing bracket should sti l l be

loose.

Che ck tha t the bearing bracke t Is not twisted du r

ing tightening. Fo r this purpose, the fixing screw (901...)

must SCTew free ly into the bea ring b racket. If this is n ot

possible, the se at of the support foot on the base plate

must be corrected (e.g. by placing spacer plates under

neath). Then tighten the fixing saew (901...).

5.4.2 Checking the coupling al ignment in case of hori

zontal setup on base plate

A complete delivered pump aggregate has t)een care

fully ass emb led at the factory. After proper Installation,

and prior to star t-up of the pump a ggregate, the al ig n

ment of the coup l ing must be checked.

The check can be made wi th a straight-edge and a

feeler gauge , or with other suitable equipment (such as

a laser alignment device).

The measurements are taken in two planes, each offset

by 90°, on the circumference of the coupling.

The gap between the two coupl ing halves must be the

same all round the circumference of the coupling. Th e

specif ied ga p is shown In the installation diagram .

Figure 5.3: Alignment of the coupling with dial gauges

Note: The permissible axial and radial deviation,

measured on the front face of the coupling and the

coupling circumference respectively, may be max.

0.1 mm, but as far as possible should be kept below

0.05 mm.

If a height, lateral or angle offset is detected betwee n

the two coupling halves, the drive motor should be re

aligned such that the coupling halves are f lush with

each other ( level out with f lat packing shims as ne ce s

sary).

Whe the fixing bolts have been aligned and tightened

the pump/drive motor unit must be able to be spun by

hand without pressure points.

Out-of- f lush errors on the coupl ing may

lead to heavier wear of the coupling, the

T T E N T I O N

anti-fr ict ion t)earing and the shaft

seal,

and even cause

NTT/CTT

ALIjyVEILER



A

5.6

5. In the case of horizontally mou nted pump

aggregates f ixed on a base plate or directly on the

foundat ion, the coupl ing must be al igned as

described in Section 5.4.

6. Mount the contact protection.

According to accident prevention regulations, the

pump must only be operated wi th a protect ion

against accidental contact.

Note: When install ing pumps with symmetrical feet

which are supplied without base plate, make sure that

the gu ide bolt at the volute cas ing is seated In a guide

hole. Th e hole diameter must be provided according to

the representation below. The 5 mm distance must be

observed.

A T T E N T I O N

F i g . 5.4: Volute casing with guide bolt in the base plate

Space required for maintenance and repair

The pump must be accessible from all

sides in order to be able to cany out

H E M T I O N

necessary visual inspections.

Shorter pipelines on the suction side are

possible, but may lead to a deterioration of

the hydraulic performance data. Shorter pipelines on

the discharge side are possible, but may lead to in

creased noise developmen t.

A T T E N T I O N

Compensators must not generate any un

acceptable addit ional forces on the pump

connection branches. Special care is needed in cases

where compensators are used, whose pressurised di

ameter is greater than the nominal width of the pump

connect ion branches.

5.7.2 Changes in cross-s ection and direction

Sudden changes in cross-sect ion and direct ion, as

we ll as bends with a bend radius less than 1.5 times the

interior pipe width, mus t be avoided.

5.7.3 Supports and flange connections

All pipelines must be connected to the

pump stress- f ree in accordance wi th

T T E N T I O N

VDM A standard sheet 24277.

The permissible pipeline forces must not

be exceeded in any operating status.

T T E N T I O N

We therefore recommend on principle that a calculation

of the pipeline forces is performed, which takes into

consideration all operating status (e.g. cold/warm,

empty/full , depressurised/pressurised, etc.).

Pipeline suppo rts mu st always be free sIkJing and m ust

not rust in (check regu lariy).

How to assess a pipel ine conn ection

To conduct an assessment, the pipeline must be de-

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



5.7.6

A T T E N T I O N

The applicable NPSH values in the char

acteristic curves a re for water with 20 ° C .

For other med ia and/or temperatures, the NPSH value

may deviate from the cha racteristic curves.

A T T E N T I O N

Uncertainties in the determination of

NPSH condit ions, particularly for media

other than water and/or other temperatures, must be

compensated for by increased safety factors (please

consult the ma nufacturer).

Inlet pipeline

In order to avoid the formation of air bags, the inlet

pipeline m ust be laid rising to the pu mp.

5.7.6.1 Stop valve (inlet mode)

A stop valve is to

b e

installed in the inlet pipeline. It must

be fully op en during operation (see figure DN 1 ).

5 .7.7 Pres sure pipeline

5.7.7.1 Stop valve in the pressure pipeline

A stop valve should be installed in the pressure pipe

line.

5.9

A

Electrical connections

The power supply cables of the drive motor must be

connected by a trained electrician, according to the

motor manufacturer's circuit diagram. The valid VDE

regulations, the regulations of the local electricity board

and the operating manual for the motor must be

compl ied

with.

Danger due to electrical power must be excluded and

an EMERGENCY STOP switch in accordance with EN

809 m ust be provided.

A T T E N T I O N

The pump must not run dry, not even for

checking the sense of rotation.

Refer

6.1. . . Control of drive motor sense of rotation

5.10

A

Checking the pressure of the system with b uil t-in

pump

If the whole system with built- in pump is to be sub

jected to a f inal pressure test, the test pressure must

not be more than the maximum permissible internal

pressure of the pump (see data sheet).

5.7.7.2 Non -return valve in the pressure pipel ine

A

The pump m ust not njn liackward s. It is recommen ded

that a non-retum valve is f i t ted between the pressure

branch and th e stop valve.

5.7.7.3 Bleeding

In the pressure pipeline, bleeding facil i t ies should be

provided at th e highest point and in front of the norv-re-

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



6 Start-up/Shutdown

A

When starting up and shutting down the pump (s),

general and special safety requirements for heat

conducting equipment (e.g. from DIN 4754, VDI

3033,

etc.) must be observed as well as the app li

cable accident prevention regulations (e.g. U W /

VBG 64).

Plant manufacturers and operators are respon

sible for informing personnel of safety require

ments, as we ll as for the implementation a nd con

tinued observation of the same.

6.1 Preparations for (initial) star t-up

6.1.1 Filling an d bleeding the pump in the plant

Prior to starting u p, the p ump must l e bled In the plant.

For this, the plant and the pu mp must l3e fi lled with d e

livery fluid (see plant manufacturer's operating Instruc

tions).

During fi l l ing with delivery f lu id, we recommend slowly

rotating the pump shaft by han d to allow air pockets to

escape into the piping system.

If the pump fails to build up pressure when started up

(see manome ter) , bleeding must

be

repeated.

6.1.2 Filling and bleeding the bearing bracket

Due to the sealing effect of the safety stuff ing box , the

bearing bracket must be separately f i l led with heat

transfer oil.

6.1.3 Control of drive moto r sens e of rotation

The sense of rotation of the motor must match the

sense of rotation arrow on the pump. To check the

sense of rotation, the m otor can be switched on briefly

when the pump is

full.

The pump must not run dry, not even for

checking the sen se of rotation.

T T E N T I O N

In the case of pumps with a mechanical seal that is de

pendent on the sense of rotation, the motor must al

ways be disconnected in order to check the sense of

rotation.

if the se nse of rotation is Incon^ect, the sense of rotation

of the three phase motor can be reversed by sw itching

any two phases.

6.2 Start-up

6.2.1

A

.2.2

6.2.3

General

Before starting, all fi l ling an d venting openings must be

completely closed.

Checking the coupling al ignment

Prior to starting and after the f irst mn-u p of the pump to

operating temperature, the co upling alignment and the

fixing of the suppo rting foot Is to be c hecked. Readjust,

if necessary (please refer to Section 5.4 above). The

pump shaft must be capable of being cranked by hand

and without any pressure points.

Starting

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



6.2.6

6.2.7

A

6.2.8

Setting the pump power output values

The pressure-side stop valve must be opened unti l the

required pump power output values are obtained (see

data sheet).

Unti l the operating temperature has been

reached,

it may be necessary to run the

6.4

Measures in the event of standsti lls

A T T E N T I O N

pump at a reduced capacity. This wil l compensate for

the increased power consumption due to high viscosity.

Temperature

In order to prevent injuries due to bums, at pumping

liquid temperatures higher than 60°C protective de

vices In accordance with EN 809 must be provided on

site.

A H E N T I O N

It must be ensured that the pum p ho using

is evenly heated. Differences in tempera

ture b etween the top and bottom of t h e pump, as well as

sudden temperature ch anges, should be avoide d.

Temperature changes in the material of more th an

SO'C per minute are not permissible.

Spare pump

A spare pump belonging to the plant must always be

kept ready for operation. For these purposes, the stop

valve on the supply side must be completely open. The

stop valve on the outlet side must be opened to such a

degre e that the pump, f i lled and Weeded, has operating

temperature.

Pumped liquid

May solidify

+

has a preservative effect

<3>

May solidify

+•

does not have a preserva

tive effect

Does not solidi^

+

has a preservative effect

Does not solidify

+

does not have a presen/a-

tive effect

Measures in ttie event of

brief standstill

Hear or drain pump

Hear or drain pump

-

-

Measures in the event of

prolonged standstill

Drain pump

Drain and preserve pump

-

Drain arxj preserve pump

® See section 3.3

A T T E N T I O N

In plants in which imperm issible tem pera

ture may arise due to failure of the o perat

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



7 Maintenance/Repair

7.1 Maintenance

• The instructions in Section 2, Safety, must be

observed in maintenance and repair work.

• Regular mon itoring and maintena nce of the pump

and the drive motor are essential for optimum ser

vice l i fe an d sa fety.

7.1.1 General mon itoring

1. The pum p mus t not run dry.

2.

The pump must not run in cavitation.

3. The minimum delivery rate must always be main

tained (see S ection 6.2..).

4. The drive motor must not be over loaded.

5. The bearing temperature of roll ing bearings must

not exceed 120*C.

6. The shaft seal must have no inadmissible leakage.

7. The pum p unit must not experience or generate an y

undue vibrations (e.g. as a resu lt of incorrect align

ment). Intemational standard ISO 10816 must be re

ferred to for assessment.

The pump side medium-lubr icated rol l ing bear ing is

maintenance-free.

The drive-s ide roll ing bearing is lubricated with spec ial

grease and is f i l led with greas e at the factory.

•

Bearing bracket size 360 and 470:

Sealed roll ing bearing with guard discs, provided

with a l i fetime greas e fi l l ing at the factory.

• Bearing bracket size 530 and 65 0:

Open roll ing bearing with Nilos rings and grease

fi l led at the factory. These bearings must be regu-

lariy relubricated.

For the relubrication periods, please refer to the

fol

lowing l ist ing.

Speed

mirr ' '

1450

1750

Bearing bracket size

530

650

Lubrication period in operating hours

11.400

10.100

10.500

9.300

Notes:

1. At a maximum ambient temperature of 35*0 and

maximum admissible operat ing temperature, the

temperature at the drive-side roll ing bearing is ap-

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



Rolling bearing greases:

For the lubrication of the drive -side t)earing, the belov\f-

l isted roll ing bearing grease or an equivalent special

greas e w ith the following characteristics m ust be use d.

Quality:

The rolling bearing grease must be free from resin and

acid and anti-con-osive.

7.2 Repair

Characteristics:

Worked penetration

Dropping point

Range of temperature

application:

250-280 mm/10

> 2 5 0 ' C

-40 bis 180 'C

Manufacturer

Klüber ®

Brand

ASONIC GHY 72

(3) M anufacturer KLÜBER LUBRICATION MÜNCHEN KG

Gelsenhausenerstr. 7

81379 München

Germany

7.1.2.2

Shaft seal

The bui l t - in mechanical seal is ma intenance-free.

A maximum dripping rate of 10 g/h may occur during

operation and is nonnal. If the dripping is heavier, the

shaft seal must be replaced.

A

A defective shaft seal can cause uncontrolled dis

charge of pumping l iquid.

This constitutes a hazard to people (possibility of

A

A

A

General

The system operator is responsible for ensuring that in

struction in safety is provided. The personnel must be

made aw are of all hazards that can a rise in connection

with the pump ed l iquid or the p lant.

•Mounting and repair work

Trained Service f itters are available o n request to carry

out m ounting and repair wori<.

For all repairs, i t must be ensured that the pump is de-

pressurised, completely drained and cool. The motor

must be protected against unintended switching on.

We must refuse acceptance of repair wori< on pumps

filled with fluid, for the protection of our staff and for

environmental reasons. The expenditures for disposal

with respect to the environment are to be cany by the

customer/operating company.

Hazardous substances

Where repairs are to be earned out on pumps which"

have been operated wi th hazardous substances ®

and/or environmentally harmful media, the

customer/operator must inform its own personnel on

site, or our person nel where repairs are retumed to o ur

factory or a service wori<shop, without being

specif ically requ ested to do so.

Together wrtt i the request for a Service f itter a

verif ication of delivery material, for example in the form

of a DIN safety data sheet, must be submitted to us.

Altematively, you can request a certif icate of safety

(form no. 448 /191 ) from our Service department, f i l l ing

NTT/CTT

ALIWEILER



7.2.1

A

A

Dismounting the centrifugal pump

Before dismo unting, the following work must be carried

out:

• Electrical dang er must be eliminated The motor

must be secured against being switched on. If

necessary, the power supply cable must be

disconnected from the motor by an authorized

electrician.

• Close all stop devices in the inlet and delivery pipe

line, and in the auxil iary pipelines.

• Allow the pump housing to cool to ambient

temperature.

• Drain the f luid in f lowable condit ion from the pump .

Note: Use a collecting tank.

• The pump must be depressur ized and drained.

• Hazardous substances and/or environmentally

harmful media must be drained off and collected

such that no danger to l i fe and l imb is created.

Environmentally compatible disposal must be

ensured.

• Remove auxil iary pipelines, if f i t ted.

• Dismount man ometer lines, manom eters and hold

ing devices.

• Dismount protection against accidental contact.

7.2.2 Moun ting the centrifugal pum p

Before remounting che ck all parts for wear

and aging and, as necessary, replace with

T T E N T I O N

A

original replacement parts.

Clean all parts before mounting. Always fit new

gaskets.

The pum p must be mounted by a quali fied techn i

cian using the pertaining drawings. The prescribed

tightening torque must be observe d.

To prevent dama ge, it is espe cially important to e nsure

that the componen ts are mounted concentrically and

that they are no t ti l ted.

•Mounting instructions:

• The mari<ings applied wh en dismoun ting mu st be

obse rved. The components mus t be put back in their

original fitting position.

• When assem bling, screws and nuts must be painted

with a sui table high-tem perature screw paste (e.g.

Molykote P37).

• After f i t t ing the insert unit, the pum p shaft mu st l ie

exactly f lush with the mo tor s haft.

• After t ightening the scre ws , it must

be

possible to

turn the pump and drive manually without straining

points.

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER

æ»



A

Following the mounting the centri fugal pum p, the

fol lowing operations are to be p erforme d.

• Align coupling (please refer to Section 5.4 above).

• Attac h protection against accidental contac t and

supporting foot, i f any.

• Attach manome ter pipelines, mano meter and hold

ing devices to the pump.

Electrical danger mus t be eliminatedl Pow er supply

cables must only be connected by qualif ied

electricians. Pay attention to sense o f rotation.

7.3 Replacement parts

The application guidelines in accordance with DIN 24

296 can b e tak en as a basis for spare parts stock hold

ing (see Section 7.3.2).

However, for reasons of operational safety, we rec om

mend the stocking of complete insert units or spare

pumps.

Advantage: In the event of damage, a defective unit

can be replaced by a spare unit without great expen di

ture and in a very short space o f t ime.

7.3.1 Ordering spare/replacement parts

The following details are required for handling orders

for replacement and spare parts:

Start up pump as per instructions in Section 6.

P u m p a b b r e v i a t i o n

P u m p n u m b e r

Y e a r o f c o n s t r u c t i o n

P a r t n u m b e r

D e n o m i n a t i o n

Quant i t y

ffi

®

®

® refer to nam e plate

7.3.2 Replacement parts for two -yea r continuous operation as per DIN 24 296

Part No.

Part denomination Number of ident ical pumps (including standby pumps)

2 3 4 5 6 und 7 8 und 9 10 und mehr

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



8 Operating Faults, Causes and Remedial Action

8.1 Faults with referen ce number for caus e and remed ial action

The table below is intended as a guide to identifying faults and their possible ca uses .

If faults occur which a re not l isted here, or which cannot be traced back to the l isted causes, we recomm end consult ing the

factory, or one of ou r branch off ices or sales off ices.

The pump must be depressurized and drained when faults are being rectif ied.

A

Centrifugal pump faults

Delivery rate too low

Delivery head too low

Power consumption of pump too high

Delivery pressure too h igh

Bearing temperature increased

Pump housing leaky

Heavy leakage of shaft seal

Pump not operating smoothly

Pump gets hot

Reference numb ers for cause and remedial action

1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,21,22

2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 2 1 , 2 2

9 , 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 6 , 1 7 , 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 5

9 ,12

1 6 , 1 7 , 1 8 , 2 0 , 2 5

23

1 0 , 1 3 , 1 6 , 1 7 , 2 7

1,2, 3, 4 , 5, 6, 8, 11 , 16 , 17 , 24, 25, 26

2, 5, 26

8.2 Causes and remedial action

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER

» •



18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

Excessive axial thrust.

-

Specified coupling half gap not com plied

with.

l\4otor voltage incon-ect.

Motor runs only to two phases.

Screws not tight.

Impeller out-of-true.

Groove ball bearing defective.

Delivery rate below minimum.

Pumped liquid corroding m echanical seal mate

rial.

Clean relief bore holes in impeller.

-

Set coupling half gap as per Installation diagram.

Use motor with correct voltage.

1.

Check cable connection.

2.

Replace fuses.

1.

Tighten screws.

2.

Replace gaskets.

1.

Clean impeller.

2.

Re-balance impeller.

Replace groove ball bearing.

Increase delivery rate to minimum.

Check pumped liquid

(e.g.:

incon-ect temperature , concentra

tion,

dosing of additives, etc.)

® Consult factory

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



Associated Documentation

Sectional drawing NTT

Sizes at bearing bracket size 360 und 470

FF V

565.01 903.06 903.07 330.01 321.02 932f lt

9W.02

360.02

901.01 901.03

901.B 183fl1 710.01 914.08

LO

«».01 «•00.02 509.01 901.02

901J01

Des ig n w i th in te rme d ia te r ing

ViewX

NTT/CTT

ALlMfEILER

æ »



Sectional drawing NTT

Two-stage sizes at bear ing bracket size 360

171.01

940.03

210.02

230.02

904 05 514.01 230.03 108.01 400 .01 161.02 901.01

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER



Sectional drawing CT T

Sizes at bear ing bracket size 360 und 47 0

FF V

565 .1 903.18 903.19 330 .1 3 21.2 932 .2

551.1 I 9W).2

902.1 932.7 321.1 901.13 183.1 730.1» 551.3 360.2

LO

NTT/CTT

ALIWEILER

W ß



Sectional drawing CTT

Two-stage sizes at bearing bracket size 360

NTT/CTT

ALIWEILER



Order-specific Documentation

These operating instructions are supplemented by the following documents:

Acceptance of order No .

Data sheet No .

Installation drawing No .

Sectional drawing No .

Part list No.

NTT/CTT

ALLWEILER

^



ALLWEILER



Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Screw Pumps

Series Z AS, ZASV

VM no.:

Edition:

Ident no.:

Retain

for future

use

626.0011 GB

12.98

55 0 213

Order no.:

Machine no.:

Pump ident. no.:

Pump type:

Operating data of pump as per order data sheet

Dimensions as per technical specification VIM 533/..

Contents

A

hese Operating and Maintenance

Instructions contain information from

tiie pump manufacturer. Ttiey may need

to be supplemented by instructions of

the ope rator company for its personnel.

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER



General

1.1 Abbreviation

The abbreviation of the screw pump is set up according

to the following schema, and is engraved on the type

plate.

Example:

Series

Z A S 3 15 0 G 8 .3 F E - W 2 0

Twin Aggregate

ZAS = horizontal installation

ZASV = vertical Installation

Size

= Delivery (approx.) in [l/h] at

p = 4

bar,

v = 12 mm /s and

f = 50Hz

Special design feature

G = Internal slide bearing

U = Rolling bearing inside.

Shaft seal uncooled/unheated

Shaft seal

8.3 = Mechanical seal

Design with filter

1.3 Pe rformanc e data

The exact performance data applicable to the pump

can be taken from the order data sheet and/or

acceptanc e test report, and are engraved on the name

plate.

The pressure data indicated there apply only to

approximated static pressure load. In the case of

dynamic alternating pressure load, consult the

manufacturer.

1.4 Warranty

Our wananty for shortcomings in the supply is laid

down in our delivery condit ions. No l iabil i ty wil l be

undertaken for damages caused by non-compl iance

with the operating instructions and service condit ions.

If at any later date the ope rating co nditions change (e.g.

different f luid convey ed, speed , viscosity, temperature

or supply condit ions), i t must be checked by us from

case to case and confinned, if necessary, that the pump

is suited for those purposes. Where no special

agreements were made, pumps suppl ied by us may,

during the warranty period, only be opened or varied by

us or our authorized contract service workshops;

othenA/ise our liability for any defects will cease.

1.5 Testing

Prior to leaving our factory, all pumps are subjected to a

thorough test run and performance test on the test

stand. Only properly operating pumps, achieving the

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER



2 Safety

2.1

These operating instructions contain basic safety 2.3

instructions for installation, operation and

maintenance. It Is therefore essential that they are read

by fitters and a ll specialist staff and c ustomer person nel

prior to installation and start-u p. They must always be

kept at hand at the place of installation.

The special safety instructions contained in the other

chapters must be observed in addit ion to the general

safety instructions in this chap ter.

Marking of instructions in the operating

instructions


instructions which represent a danger to personnel if

not complied with are specially marked by the g eneral

danger symbol:

A

Warning symbol

as per DIN 4844-W9

arning of danger from electric voltage is given as

follows:

2.4

Dangers in the event of non-compliance with

safety instructions

Failure to comply with the safety instructions may result

in danger to persons, and place the environment and

the machine at r isk. Non-compliance with the safety

instructions may lead to the loss of any claims for

damages.

Non-compliance may relate to the following dangers:

• Failure of important functions of the plant

• Failure of specif ied methods for maintena nce and

servicing

• Danger to persons result ing from electrical,

mechanical and chemical effects

• Da nge r to the environm ent resulting from leakage of

hazardous substances

Respon sible working practices


instructions, current national accident prevention

regulation s, as well as intemal working, operating and

safety rules of the customer, must be observed.

2.5 Safe ty instructions for the user/operator

• Hot or cold parts representing a dange r must be

Z A S , ZASV

ALLWEILER



2.6 Safety instructions for maintena nce, inspection

and mounting work

The operator company shall ensure that all

maintenance, inspection and mounting work is

performed by authorized and qualif ied specialist

personnel who have thoroughly studied the operating

Instructions.

Work on the machine is only to be earned out when the

machine is at a standsti l l . The means of shutdown of

the machine described in the operating instructions

must always be followed.

Pumps or aggregates handling f luids which are

detrimental to health must be decontaminated. All

safety and protective devices must immediately be

refitted and made operational on completion of the

work.

The instnjctions under Section 6 .1, "Preparation for

start-up", must be observed before restarting.

2.7 Unauthorized conversion and production of

replacement parts

Conversion or modification of the machines is only

permissible after consultation with the manufacturer.

Original replacement parts and accessories approved

by the manufacturer serve safety purposes. If other

parts are used the manu facturer cannot be held l iable

for the consequences.

2.8 Impen nissible modes of operation

The operating safety of the machine supplied is only

ensured when it is used in accordance w ith Section 1 of

3.1

3.2

A

Transportation and Intermediate

Storage

Packaging

Attention must be paid to the markings on the

packaging.

The suction and pressure sides and all auxil iary

connections must always be closed during

transportation and storage. The closing plugs must be

removed when the pump aggregate is installed.

Transportation

The pump or pump aggregate is to be safely

transported to the place of installation, if required by

means of lifting gear.

The generally applicable safety regulations for

lifting loads must be observed. The crane device

and cables must be adequately dimensioned. The

cables must not be attached to the attachment eyes

of the motor.

A H E N T I O N

During transportation ensure that the

aggregate is secured against toppling

over. The attachment eyes of the m otor can be used to

secu re it.

Transport damage

Check the pump for damage on receipt.

Any da mage detected must be notified im-

H E N T I O N

mediately.

Z A S , ZASV

ALLWEILER

3.3 Preservation and storage of the screw pumps 3.3.1.4 Depreservation



A H E N T I O N

3.3.1 Preservation

In the case of storage or prolonged standsti l l , the

pumps must be protected against corrosion. In those

cases, an outside and inside preservation is to be

provided. The durabil i ty of the protection against

corrosion,

which is l imited In t ime, depends on the

composit ion of the preservative to be applied and the

storage condit ions.

Under normal circumstances the pumps

have no special preservative.

At an addit ional charge we can, however, supply

pumps a nd replacement parts ex factory with a preser

vative adequate to the planned storage period.

We will be pleased to specify suitable preservatives for

you on request.

3.3.1.1 Outside preservation

The outside preservative should be applied by painting

or spraying with a spray gun .

Points o f preservation:

All bright and unva mished p arts (e.g. shaft ends,

cou

plings, f lange facings, valve and manometer connec

tions).

3.3.1.2 Inside preservation

The presen/a tive Is to be applied by filling the pump. For

these pu rposes, the suction side of the pump must f irst

be closed with a dummy flange. During fi l l ing, the

pressure f lange must be on a higher level than the

Prior to sett ing the pump in motion, the preservative

^ \ appl ied must be removed.

Environmental ly

ensured.

compatible disposal must be

The preservative applied for inside preservation can

norm ally be removed by flushing the pump with the fluid

to be conveyed.

Alternative, suitable solvents may be applied for

removing the inside and outside preservation.

Appropriate solvents are for example: petroleum,

benzen e, Diesel fuel, spirit, alkalis (industrial cleaners)

or any othe r wax solvents. Steam jet cleaning devices

with appropriate admixtures can also be used (allow

wax solvent to act beforehand).

A H E N T I O N

Prior to start-up after prolonged storage,

all elastomers (0-rings, shaft seals) must

be checked for their elasticity of shape. Embritt led

elastomers must be exchanged. Elastomers of

ethylene-propylene aibber (EPDM) must always be

rep laced.

The pump mus t be fi l led with f iuid to prevent

seizing of the components. A pressure-relief valve

attached or f i t ted in the pipeline must be checked for

passage.

Note: If on the plant side, the pipelines, (oil) tanks or

other parts are wetted with paraff in-containing

preservative, the entire plant must be depreserved as

paraffin is detrimental to the air separating capability of

o i l .

This m ay result in unsteady operation of the pump

and loud noise.

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER



Description

4.1 Structural design of the pumps

Three-screw pumps in f lange design form, wi th a

double- threaded dr iving spindle and two

double-threaded idler spindles, enclosed in a housing

insert with narrow running clearance.

The delivery elements are installed in a pump housing

whic h is closed off on the drive side and the end side by

pump caps.

4.1.1 Bearing and lubrication

Sizes 150 to 3150: By an intemal me dium -lubri

cated slide bearing.

4.1.2

Sizes 3600 to 6450:

By an intemal medium-lubr i

cated groove ball bearing to

DIN 625.

Shaft seal, design 8.3

Uncooled, maintenance-free mechanical seal of the

unbalanced type.

Materials of the mec hanical

seal:

Rotating seal ring: Tung sten carbide

Stationary seal

ring:

Tungsten carbide

Auxil iary gaskets: Viton

Spring:

CrNIM o steel

M etal parts : CrNilVIo steel

4.1.3 Flanges/connections

4.2 Mode of operation of the screw pumps

Through the suction connection and the suction

chamber in the reversing valve casing, the f luid is

conveyed into the suction chamber of the pump. From

there the fluid f lows into the spindle cham bers, wh ich

are constantly formed by the rotary motion at the

spindle end on the suction side. By the translatory

rotary motion, the cham bers f i l led with the f luid mov e

from the suction side to the outlet side. During this

process the closed chamber volum e does not change .

At the spindle end on the outlet side the cham ber opens

towards the delivery chamber. The fluid is steadily

pushed out into the delivery cham ber from whe re it is

transported, through the delivery chamber of the

reversing valve casing and the pressure connection,

into the pressure pipeline.

The axial thrust acting o n the face s of the profile flanks

on the ouflet side is hydraulically balanced by an

appropriate dimensioning of the compensating piston

of the driving spind le. Thus the bea ring is relieved of

the hydraulic axial thrust. The axial thrust of the two

idler spindles is hydrodynamically absorbed by the

pump cover, non -drive side or by the fi lter casing.

The idler spindles a re hydraulically driven by means of

appropriate dimensioning of the spindles. Only the

torque resulting from the fluid friction is transmitted via

the profile flanks. They are therefore practically

stress-ft-ee, and not subject to any wear.

As a result of the cons tant chamber volume the medium

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

If no contact protection is provided, it must be attached

Switching diagram



by the operator

4.3.3 Pump brackets

The flange pumps are joined to the drive motor by pump

brackets (lanterns) as standard.

4.3.4 Non-return valves/stop valves

Fo r each pump, a non -return valve and a stop valve are

provided in the reversing valve casing . The non-return

valves operate automatically and are lockable by hand.

4.3.5 Operating control device

Manometers:

ZAS/ZASV without filter

Outlet side: one manometer (Included In the scope

of supply). I f a mano-vaccummeter is

requested on the suction side, same

mu st be provided at the site . Bore hole of

the screw plug (227) is provided for con

nection.

ZAS/ZASV with filter

Suction side: two mano-vakuummeters

Outlet side: one manom eter

(each included In the scop e of supply).

Reversing unit:

If a reversing unit wa s supplied for operation control, its

circuitry is such tha t in case of failure of the operating

pump, the spare pump is automatically switched on.

Signal lamps denote the respective operating condi

tions.

Series ZAS/ZASV without filter

1 Operating and spare pump

2 Three-pha se motor (901)

3 Stop valve (355)

5 Lockable non-retum valve (356)

7 Manometer with ball valve (360) and (363)

Switching diagram

Series ZAS/ZASV with filter

Z A S ,

ZASV

ALLWEILER



Installation/Mounting

5.1 Installation

ZAS aggregates can be installed horizontally or verti

cally.

ZASV aggregates must be Installed vertically.

A

For safety reasons the "downward-facing motor"

arrangement is not permitted.

5 .2

Mode of fastening

The mode of fastening Is dependent on the local

Installation conditions.

2 J ^ S aggregates are fastened by means of foot angles

at the place of installation.

For ZASV aggregates, the firmly fixed oil drip pan

serves as fastening base.

Precise details on form and dimensions are given in the

Installation diagram.

5.3 Foundation

5.3.1 Design

The foundation may be concrete or a load-bearing

foundation frame, of steel for example.

The condition for all foundation designs is:

The foundation must be designed so that it can take the

weight of the pump aggregate across Its entire area.

5.3.2 Characteristics of a steel foundation frame

5.6

Push on the coupling halves on the pump and m otor

side with the aid of a pusher device until the shaft

end is flush to the coupling hu b.

The possibility of axia l shock stress on

the pump and drive motor components

T T E N T I O N

during assembly of the coupling must be eliminated.

3. The coupling does not need to be re-allgned.

4 . Flange the pumps and motors onto the lantem s.

Space required for maintenance and repair

A H E N T I O N

The pump aggregate must be accessible

from all sides In order to be able to carry out

necessary visual inspections.

Adequate space must be provided for maintenance

and repair work, in particular for removal of the drive

motors or of the complete pump aggregate. It must also

be ensured that all pipelines can be attached and

removed without hindrance.

5.7 Laying the pipelines

5 .7.1 Nominal widths

If possible, the nominal widths of the suction and

pressure pipelines should be rated so that the rate of

flow does not exceed a maximum of 1 m/s In the suction

pipeline and 3 m/s In the pressure pipeline.

Note: The nom inal width of the inlet and delivery pip e

line should be the same or greater than the nominal

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

5.7.5 Non-r eturn valves/stop valves

5.9

Electrical connections



In the reversing valve casing, a no n-return v alve and a

stop valve are provided for each pump.

Note:

When the n on-return valve and stop valve o f the

stopped pump are closed the associated fi l ter can be

cleaned, even If the pu mp Is under Inlet pressure.

5.7.6 Pres sure-rel ief valve

See Section 4.1 ...

5.7.7 Bleeding

Th e pum ps can be bled on the suction side by means of

the screw plugs (227) on the pump cas ing (1). In addi

t ion,

a vent valve must be provided at the highest point

in the pressure pipeline.

Note: In the case of horizontal pump installation and

where the connecting flanges are turned to the side, the

fi l ling and vent holes and the connections for the pres

sure gauges must point upwards.

5.7.8 Filtering

To protect the pum p against coarse dirt contamination,

we recommend as a matter of principle installing a filter

in the suction pipeline, mes h width 0.4 mm .

Note: The service l i fe of the pump is decisively

influenced by the degree of dirt contamination of the

fluid being conv eyed , that is, by the numb er, size and

hardness of the abrasive components.

Note: A filter to DIN 473 6 m ust be Installed in oil supply

systems for oil bumers.

5.8 Safety and control devices

A

The power cables of the coupled drive motors, any

fitted f i l ter heating and/or switchgear must be con

nected by a qualif ied electrician. The applicable VDE

specif ications and the regulations of the local power

supply com pany must be observed.

Avoid all dange r from electrical ene rgy

5.9.1 Motor connection

Standard three-phase motors can be used for the

fol

lowing circuit con figurations:

Terminal connection diagram:

^ v » 2 ( ^ " * ( ^ ' " ^ w i - ^ U 2 . ^ v a

^b

^b

v i ( ^ ^

-0U1 -A v i .Aw i

LI LZ

A-circult

L3

Y-clrcult

5 .9.2 Electric filter heating

The hea ting shells of the electric f il ter heating system

should be con nected to a voltage of 220 V according to

the fol lowing diagram.

Connection diagram

r'

"~]

Z A S , ZASV

ALLWEILER

Sta rt -u p/s h utdo wn



6.1 Preparation for start-up

6.1.1

Filling the pu mp s with fluid

Prior to init ial operation, the two pumps

mu st be filled with fluid and bled. This at the

H E N T I O N

same time provides the spindles with the sealing re

quired for suc tion.

The pump must not run dry.

Before f i l l ing, the operator must ensure

careful and thorough rinsing of the pump if

H E N T I O N

A

the f luid to be conveyed is not chemically compatible

with the test med ium (see performanc e test report).

The fluid sho uld be Introduced via the delivery pipeline

or the con nections on the pump or f il ter casing, unti l i t

emerges free of air bu bbles.

During bleeding of the pump and the plant, hazardous

or environmentally harmful f luid and gas emerging

must be safely collected and discharged.

6.1.2 Heating the delivery fluid

When conveying heavy heating oils or other delivery

media which solidify when cooled, heating must be pro

vided in the plant (e .g. pipe steam trace).

The delivery fluid must be flowable and pum pable when

the pump is started up, in order to prevent damage to

the pump.

Heavy heating oil, for example, must be heated to at

least 10°C above the solidification point before starting

the pump.

6.2.2

6.2.3

The opening pressure can be changed within nar

row l imits using an adjusting screw. The pressure-

relief valve mu st not be used to regulate the flow.

3. During starting, a vent va lve Installed on the outlet

side o f the plant must be opene d until the air has es

caped from the suction side of the pump. As soon as

fluid emerges the vent valve can be closed. The

pump is self-priming and is automatically vented

without counter-pressure.

Drive

Switch on the motor.

Pay attention to product-specific characteristics. Refer

to the operating Instructions of the drive motor

manufacturer

Checking the del ivery values

When the motor has reached its operating speed, the

Inlet pressure and ouflet pressure of the pump must be

checked using manometers.

The motor must not be overioaded. The current con

sum ption can be checke d with an ammeter. In this

con

nection, the temperature and viscosity of the fluid must

also be checked. The readings must be checked

against the layout or accep tance test report.

Note: Pressure gauges are normally equipped with

stop valves. The stop valves may be openend only dur

ing start-up for pressure control purposes. During per

manent operation, same must be kept closed.

ZAS,

ZASV ALLWEILER

Maintenance/Repair



7.1 Maintenance

• The instructions in Section 2, Safety, must be

observed in maintenance and repair work.

• Regular monitoring and maintenance of the pump

and drive motor increases their service life.

The following instructions are generally applicable.

7.1.1 Gene ral monitoring

1. The pumps must not run dry.

2. The drive motors must not be overloaded.

3. The suction a nd pressure p ipelines must be

checked for leaks. Air must be prevented from

entering the delivery system.

4. There m ust be no serious leakag e from the

mechanical seals.

5. Pressure an d temperature m onitors must be

observed.

7.1.2 IMaintenance of compo nents

7.1.2.1 Bearing and lubrication

Sizes 150 to 3150

7.1.2.3 Pressure-relief valve

Pressure-rel ief valves must be checked from time to

time, in particular after prolonged downtimes, for

passage and functioning. Leaking pressure-relief

valves may cause damage to the pump. Damaged

parts should be replaced or repaired as necessary.

The pressure-relief valves are set as standard ex

works to an opening pressure of 7 bar. If the opening

pressure is to be change d, the screw plug (222) in the

end- side pump cover (4) or in the filter casing (9) m ust

first be removed . The adjusting screw (333) is then ac

cessible.

Turning the screw clockwise increases the opening

pressure, turning anti-clockwise reduces it. Any ad

justment must be made only with an intact pressure

gauge.

7.1.2.4 Filter

The filters fitted to screw pumps must be cleaned at

regular intervals.

The filter casings (9) are fitted with a mano-vacuum-

meter (361) which indicates the pressure downstream

of the filter (481). The pressure loss gives an indication

of the degree of dirt contamination of the filters. For pre

cise recording of the differential pressure, we recom

mend installing a pressure gauge upstream of the filter

on the suction flange of the pumps, or in the suction

pipeline. In the event of a detectable differential pres

sure, the filter (481) must be cleaned, or replaced as

necessary.

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

• After allowing the filter to drip off from the clean side

7.2 Repair (Dismo unting and IVIounting Instructions)



to the dirty side (from the inner to the outer, not vice

versa ), blow it out with compress ed air.

Note:

Suitable cleaning agents are benzene, spirit,

diesel fuel or a solvent-free cold cleaning agent.

The use of other special cleaning agents Is possible.

The concentration depends on the nature and se

verity of the dirt.

A soft brush can be used to clean the filter. Sharp im

plements must not be used.

In the case of excessive dirt contamination we rec

ommend replacing the filter (481).

• After cleaning, the filter (481) is loosely slotted onto

the pipe (30) in the filter casing bottom. The filter

cover (7) is re-attached to the filter casing (9).

Note:

The O-ring (119) must be in its groove and

must not be damage d. Replace it as necessary. The

(filter) casing cover (7) must close air-tight, to pre

vent the pump from taking in air.

• Re- ope n the non-return valve and stop vatve of the

stopped pump. Fill and bleed the pump as per Sec

tion 6.

Note:

When retrofitting a filter to a pump , it is essential

that the pipe (29) is installed first.

7.1.2.5

Coupling

The condition of the flexible elements in the coupling

should be checked after initial start-up and at regular

intervals.

Note:

Worn flexible elements must be replaced.

A

General

Trained Service fitters are available on request to ca ny

out mounting and repair work.

Where repairs are carried out by the operator's own

perso nne l or by specialist fitters, it must be ensured th at

the pump is fully drained and cleaned.

This particulariy applies to pumps which are sent for

repair to our factory or one of our service workshops.

We must refuse acceptance of repair work on pumps

filled with fluid, for the protection of our staff and for

environm ental reasons. Otherwise we must invoice the

customer/operator for the costs of environmentally

compatible disposal.

Where repairs are to be carried out on pumps which

have been operated with hazardous substances (D

and/or environmentally harmful media, the

customer/operator must inform its own personnel on

site,

or our personnel where repairs are retumed to our

factory or a service workshop, without being

specifically requested to do so.

In such cases a verification of delivery material, for

exam ple in the form of a DIN safety data sheet, m ust be

subm itted to us together with the request for a Service

fitter.

Altematively, you can request a certificate of safety

(form no. 448/191) from our Service departm ent, filling

it out truthfully, correctly and in full. Send the completed

forni to the center commissioned with carrying out the

repair, or hand it to our Service fitter.

® Hazardous substances are:

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

7.2.1 Dismounting the screw pump

• Use an impleme nt to dismount mechanical seal



Before dismounting, the following work must be carried

out:

• Switch on the standby pump and stop the operating

pump. Close the non-retum valve and stop valve of

the pump to be dismounted. Service is maintained

by the standby pump.

A

A

• Mal<e sure the power cable is disconnected from the

pump motor by a qualif ied electrician. Electrical

danger must be el iminated The motor must be se

cured against being switched on.

• Drain the fluid In f lowable condit ion from the pu mp.

Note:

Us e a collecting tank .

, . • Haza rdous substances and/or environme ntally

* \ harmful media must be drained of f and col lected

such that no danger to l i fe and l imb is created.

Environmentally compatible disposal must be

ensured.

• The pump must be depressur ized and drained.

• Allow the pump and motor to cool to amb ient

temperature.

• Remov e the manometer cables, manometers and

retaining brackets.

7.2.1.1 Dismounting a screw pump from the twin

coun ter-ring (186 ) and O-ring from pump cover (3).

Note:

Special care should be taken to ensure that

the mechanical seal coun ter-ring is pushed out con

centrically over the shaft and not canted, to avoid

damaging the counter-r ing.

• Remove rotating part of mechanical seal (186) over

driving spindle (12).

• Remove support washer (263) from driving spindle

(12).

7.2.1.3 Dismounting the spindle set, slide bearing and

casing insert from sizes 150 to 315 0

• After removing shaft

seal,

detach spindle set with

bush (10) from c asing insert (2).

• Dismount idler spindles (13) from driving spindle

(12).

• Remove bush (10) from driving spindle (12).

• Unscrew socket-head cap screws (201) f rom en d-

side pump c over (4) or fi l ter casing (9).

• Remove en d-s ide pump cover (4) or f i lter cover (9)

from pump casing (1).

• Remove gasket (100) and cleaning sealing faces.

• Unscrew soc ket- hea d cap screw (24) from side of

ZAS,

ZASV

ALLWEILER

• Press driving spindle (12) with groove ball bearing

7.2.2

Mounting the screw pum p



(292), support washer (263), spacer bush (20) and

mec hanica l seal (186) out of drive-side pump cover

(3) using a suitable

tool.

• Rem ove mechanical seal (186) from driving spindle

(12).

• Unscrew socl<et-head cap screws (201) f rom en d -

side pu mp cover (4) or fi l ter casing (9).

• Rem ove end -side pump cover (4) or f i lter cover (9)

from pump casing (1).

• Rem ove gasket (100) and cleaning sealing face s.

• Unscrew socket-head cap screw (24) f rom side of

pump casing (1).

Note: This socket-head cap screw fixes the casing

Insert (2) in position.

• M ark positions of casing insert (2) and pump casing

(1)to each other.

• Press casing insert (2) out of pump casing (1) from

pump-end side using a sui table

tool.

In case of

pumps with f i l ter, f irst remove pipe (29) from pump

casing (1).

7.2.1.5 Dismounting the groove bal l bearing from sizes

3600 to 645 0

• After removing shaft seal and spindle set, dismount

Before remounting check all parts for wear

and, as necessary, replace with original

T T E N T I O N

replacement parts.

Clean all parts before mounting. Always fit new

gaskets.

7.2.2.1 Mounting the casing insert, slide bearing and

spindle set to sizes 15 0 to 3150

• Lightly oil the f itting faces on the casing insert (2).

Press casing insert (2) into pump casing (1) from

drive side using a suitable tool.

Note: Pay attention to marking made prior to dis

mounting

• Dri ll together pump ca sing (1) with casing insert (2)

by way of bore hole on side for socket-head cap

screw (24).

Bore diameter: 4 mm

Bore depth: 6 mm

• Screw soc ket-h ead cap screw (24) with sealing

washer (151) Into side of pump casing (1) and tigh

ten.

• Push bush (10) over driving spindle (12) up to collar.

• Lightly oil driving spindle (12) and press into pump

casing (1) from drive side together with bush (10).

Note: This guides the driving spindle concentrically

through the bush in the pump casing.

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

• Attach pump cover (3) with new O-ring (120) and

centrically into the pump cover and not canted, to



bu ilt- in mechanical seal counter-ring (186) to pum p

casing (1) with socket-head cap screws (200).

• Insert circl ip (250) into drive-side pum p cover (3).

• Insert key (290) into drivin g spindle (12).

• Push pump -side coupling half onto driving spindle

(12).

7.2.2.3 Mounting the groove ball bearing to sizes 3600 to

6450

• As necessary, carefully clean groove ball bearing

(292) with diesel

fuel.

If the mnning surfaces are

bright and undamaged, the groove ball bearing

(292) can be re-use d. If not, the bearing must be re

placed.

• Lightly oil bearing seat on driving spindle (12).

• By l ight tapping on the inner ring, push the groove

ball bearing (292) onto the driving spindle (12) up to

the shaft shoulder using a suitably sized tube.

• Mo unt circl ip (251) in shaft groove provided in front

of groove ball bearing (292).

• Lightly oil driving spindle (12) and press into pump

cover (3) together with groove ball bearing (29 2).

7.2.2.4 Mounting the casing insert, spindle set and me

avoid damaging the coun ter-r ing.

• M oun t circlip (250) in front of mechanical seal count

er-r ing (186) in dr ive-sid e pump cover (3) .

• Insert new 0-rin g (122 ) into pump casing (1) in front

of return bore hole.

• Push pump cover (3) with new 0-r in g (120),

pressed-in driving spindle (12) and built- in me

chanical seal counter-ring (186) into pump casing

(1) and attach with socket-head cap screws (200).

• Scre w idler spindles (13) into casing insert (2) from

pump-end side.

• In case of pumps with filter, push pipe (29) over cas

ing insert (2).

• Place new gasket (100) on cleaned sealing face of

pump casing (1).

• Attac h end-side pu mp cover (4) or filter casing (9) to

pump casing (1) wi th socket-head cap screws

(201).

• Insert key (290) into driving spindle (12).

• Push pum p-side coup ling half onto driving spindle

(12).

ZAS, ZASV ALLWEILER

7.3 Replaceme nt parts/spare parts

The parts marked with footnote ® in the parts list can be



provided as replacement/spare parts.

The casing insert (2) with spindles (12) and (13) are

available only as a complete spare part set.

However, for operational safety reasons, we recom

mend you always stock a complete car t r idge-uni t or

standby pump.

The adv antage Is that in the event of a fault or damage

the standby unit can replace the non-functioning unit

quickly a nd w ithout great effort.

When order ing spare and replacement parts, besides

th e

part number, denomination

a nd

quantity,

th e

fol

lowing should also be quoted:

Pump abbreviation,

Pump number,

Year of construction.

This information is engraved on the rating plate of the

pump.

ZAS,

ZASV

ALLWEILER

8 Operating Faults, Causes and Remed ial Action



8.1 Faults with refere nce number for cause and rem edial action

The table below is intended as a g uide to identi lying faults and their possible causes. Faults relating to the pressure-relief

valve are l isted separately.

If faults occur which are not l isted here, or which cannot be traced back to the l isted causes, we recommend consult ing the

factory, or one of our branch offices or sales offices.

'iX The pump mus t be depressurlzed and drained when faults are being rectified.

A

Screw pump faults

No pump suction and no delivery

Delivery too low

Pump operates noisi ly

Irregular delivery

Pum p gets too warm

Pump is seized

Motor overload

Pressure-rel ief valve faults

Delivery pressure drops

Pressure-relief valve does not open

Reference numbers for cause and remedial action

1,2,3,4,5,11

2 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 1 0 , 1 1

4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 1 0 , 1 1 , 12,13

6,7,10

6 , 7 , 1 1 , 1 4 , 1 6

14 , 15, 16

6 ,13 , 14 ,15 ,16

Reference numbers for cause and remedial action

17

18

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

12 Flow rate in suction and pressure pipelines too

high.

Flow rate in suction pipe line must not exce ed m ax. 1 m/s, an d

in pressure pipeline max. 3 m/s.



13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Motor speed too

high.

Delivery pressure too

high.

Foreign bodies in pump.

Damaged ball bearing.

Pressure spring fatigued.

Valve seat leaking.

Pressure spring heavily pre-tensioned.

Valve cone stuck in valve housing .

a) Due to foreign body or

b) Operating temperature of plant substantial ly

higher than q uoted on order.

Pressure spring not pre-tensioned, or

insufficiently pre-tensioned.

Valve seat leaking.

Pressure-relief valve knocking.

Check speed and current consumpt ion. Check vol tage and

frequen cy ag ainst mo tor rating plate.

Set specif ied delivery pressure via pressu re-relief valve. Pump

outlet pressure must not be exceeded.

Dismantle pump, remove foreign bodies and smooth damaged

points with oilstone.

Che ck s uction f il ter and strainer.

Replace ball bearing.

Install new pressure spring.

Install new valve cone.

Release pressure spring using adjusting screw, and reset to

required pressure.

(

Dismant le pressure-rel ief

valve.

Clean internal parts.

Con sult factory.

Tum adjusting screw to right unti l required operating pressure

is reached.

Rework or replace valve cone and valve housing.

Check overpressure with pressure valve closed. Reset valve.

Opening pressure 10 % above operating pressure.

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

Sectional drawing

Series Z AS w ithout f il ter



Sect ion A-B

441 124 355 123 440 204 356 108 206 125 236 900 290 216 231

/ / / / / /

• / / /

Section E-F

227 156 107 1 301 126

• g ^ r . r , - n t r 7 r , / i r i l f 4 U ^ - H | F -

238 100 222 142 333 340 331 330 120 200 263 217 231 901 910

Sect ion C-D

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

Sectional drawing

Series ZAS with filter



Section A- B

7 362 146 143 207 238 208 441 301 206 124 204 356 108 440 123 206 125 236 216 360

i ; i i I I / I I 1 i I I I i I , I

Section E-F

22 7 156 355 107 126 152 361 364 157

M i l '

119 235 159 962 431 30 100 142 333 340 331 330 1 120 200 263 250 900 217

Section C-D

151 13 201 9 29 2 12 10 160 122 186 901 290

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

Sectional drawing

Series ZASV without filter



Section A -B

Section C-D

Section E-F

rx^

ZAS, ZASV

ALLWEILER

W ß

Sectional drawing

Series ZASV with filter



Section A-B Section C-D

Section E-F

235 481 i 208

^

7 R 207 i 143

•

D

30 962 9 ° 119 152

#

V

M

6

0

G

1

9



z

d

u

n

J

O

U

O

J

M

j

o

o

u

a

M

d

N

5

2

2

ZAS, ZASV ALLWEILER

W ß



#

A R M A T U R E N

Betriebs- und Montageanleitung

Durchgangs-Stellventile - STEVl® 440 /

441,

445 / 446



: ^ l T f e > A R M A T U R E N


DG-Stellventile - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

1.0 A l lgem eines zur B et r iebsan le i tung

Diese Betriebsanleitung gilt als Anweisung, d ie Armaturen sicher zu montieren und zu

warten. Bei Schwierigkeiten, die nicht mit Hilfe der Betriebsanleitung gelöst werden

können,

nehmen Sie Kontakt mit dem Lieferant oder Hersteller auf.



Sie ist verbindlich für den Transport, Lagerung, IVIontage, Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb,

Wartung, Reparatur

Die Hinweise und Warnungen sind zu beachten und einzuhalten.

- Handling und alle anderen Arbeiten sind von sachkundigem Personal durchzuführen bzw.

alle Tätigkeiten sind zu beaufsichtigen und zu prüfen.

Die Festlegung des Verantwortungsbereiches, des Zuständigkeitsbereiches und der

Überwachung des Personals obliegt dem Betreiber.

- Bei Außerbetriebsetzung, Wartung bzw. Reparatur sind zusätzlich die aktuellen

regionalen Sicherheitsanforderungen heranzuziehen und zu beachten.

Der Hersteller behält sich das Recht von technischen Änderungen und Verbesserungen

jederzeit vor.

Diese Betriebsanleitung entspricht den Anforderungen der EU-Richtlinien.

2.0 Gefahrenh inweise

2.1 Bedeutung der Symbole

ACHTUNG

V

A

Warnung vor einer allgemeinen Gefahr

g Q * > A R M A T U R E N


DG -Stellventile - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

4 .0 Be s c h r e ib u n g

4.1 Anwendungsbereich

Armaturen werden zum „Regeln von flüssigen, gasförmigen und dampfförmigen Medien in



der Verfahrens- und Prozesstechnii^ sowie im Anlagenbau" eingesetzt.

A

ACHTUNG

- Einsatzgebiete, Einsatzgrenzen und -mögliclikeiten sind dem Kataiogblatt zu

entnehmen.

- Bestimmte Medien setzen spezieile Werkstoffe voraus oder schiießen sie aus.

- Die

Armaturen

sind

ausgelegt für normale

Einsatzbedingungen.

Gehen

die

Bedingungen über diese Anforderungen hinaus, wie z.B. aggressive oder abra

sive l\Aedien, hat der Betreiber die höheren Anforderungen bei der Bestellung

anzugeben.

- Armaturen aus Grauguss sind für den Einsatz in Anlagen nach TRD 110 nicht

freigegeben.

Die Angaben sind konform mit der Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG.

Die Einhaltung unterliegt der Verantwortung des Anlagenplaners.

Besondere Kennzeichnungen der Armatur

sind

zu beachten.

Die Werkstoffe der Standard-Ausführungen sind dem Katalogblatt zu entnehmen.

Bei Fragen ist Rücksprache mit dem Lieferanten oder Hersteller zu füh ren.

A R M A T U R E N


DG -Stellventile - STEVI® 440 /

441,

445 / 446

4.3 Schaubilder



« K J y § > A R M A T U R E N


DG-Stellventile - STEVI® 440 / 441 , 445 / 446



A R M A T U R E N


DG-Stellventile - STEVI® 440 /

441,

445 / 446

4.4 Technische Daten

wie z.B.

- Hauptabmessungen ,

- Druck-Temperatur-Zuordnungen, usw.

sind dem Kata logbla tt zu entnehm en.



4.5 Kennzeichnung

Typen-Nummer

Kvs-Wert

Kegel

ausführung

Werkstoff der

Innengarnitur

Nennweite

Hersteller

CE-Kennzeichnung

Benannte Stelle

kundenspezifische

Angaben

Baujahr unverschlüsselt

(1. und 2. Stelle)

Spindelabdichtung

B i l d s

Ans chri f t de s Herstel lers: siehe Pkt 11.0 Garan t ie / Gew ährleistung

Entsprechend der Druckgeräter icht l in ie Diagramm 6, Anhang I I dürfen Armaturen ohne

Sicherhei tsfunkt ion erst ab DN 32 CE -gekennzeichnet werde n.

Armaturen mit Sicherhei tsfunkt ion sind:

A R M A T U R E N

Betriebs- und M ontageanleitung

DG -Stellventile - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

5 .0 Mont age

5.1 Allgemeine Montageangaben

Neben den allgemeingültigen Montagerichtlinien sind folgende Punkte zu beachten;



A

ACHTUNG

- Flanschabdeckungen, falls vorhanden, entfernen.

- Der Innenraum von A rmatur und Rohrleitung muss frei von Fremdpartikeln sein.

-

Einbaulage

in

Bezug

auf

Durchströmung

beachten,

siehe Kennzeichnung

auf

der Armatur

- Dampfieitungssysteme sind so

auszulegen,

dass Wasseransammlungen

vermieden

werden.

- Die Rohrleitungen so verlegen, dass schädliche Schub-, Biege- und

Torsionskräfte ferngehalten

werden.

- Bei

Bauarbeiten Armaturen

vor

Verschmutzung

schützen.

-

Anschlussflansche müssen

übereinstimmen.

-Armaturaufbauten wie

A ntriebe,

Handräder, Hauben dürfen nicht

zur A ufnahme

von

äußeren Kräften

wie

z.B.

Aufstiegshilfen,

Anbindungspunkte

für

Hebezeuge etc. zweckentfremdet werden.

- Für

Montagearbeiten müssen geeignete

Transport-

und Hebemittel verwendet

werden.

Gewichte siehe Katalogblatt.

-

Spindelgewinde

und

Spindelschaft müssen farbfrei

bleiben.

A R M A T U R E N



441,

445 / 446

5.2 IVIontageangaben zum Einbauort

Die Einbaustelle soll gut zugänglich sein und genügend Freiraum zur Wartung und zum

Abnehmen der S tellantriebe aufweisen. Vor und h inter dem Stellventil sind

Handabsperrventile vorzusehen, die Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten am Stellventil



ermöglichen, ohne die Anlage zu entleeren. Das Stellventil soll vorzugsweise senkrecht mit

obenliegendem Antrieb eingebaut

werden.

Schräge bis waagerechte Einbaulage ist ohne

AbStützung nur bei Antrieben mit geringem Eigengewicht zulässig.

Der Antrieb muss jedoch so m ontiert sein, dass die beiden Distanzsäulen bzw. das Joch in

senkrechter Ebene übereinander liegen:

Bild 9: Rohrleitung senkrecht Bild 10: Rohrleitung waagerecht

Zulässige Antriebsgewichte bei waagerechter Einbaulage in Bezug auf die Spindel, ohne

bauseitige Abstützung, sind: 20 kg für DN 1 5 -3 2

25 kg für DN 40 - 65

35 kg für DN 80-100

Um die Stellantriebe vor zu hoher Wärme zu schützen, sind die Rohrleitungen zu isolieren.

A R M A T U R E N


DG -Steilventile - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

6 .0 Inbe t r i ebnahme

ACHTUNG

- Vorder

Inbetriebnahme sind die Angaben

zu

Werkstoff, Druck, Temperatur und



A

Strömungsrichtung zu

übe rprüfen.

- Grundsätzlich sind die regionalen Sicherheitsanweisungen e inzuhalten.

-

Rückstände

in

Rohrleitungen und Armaturen (wie Schmutz, Schweißperlen,

usw.) führen

zu

Undichtigkeiten bzw. Beschädigungen.

-

Beim Betrieb

m it

hohen

(> 50 "C) oder

tiefen

(<0°C)

Medientemperaturen

besteht Verletzungsgefahr

be i

Berühren

der

Armatur.

Ggf Warnhinweise oder Isolierschutz

anbringen

Vor Jeder Inbetriebnahme einer Neuanlage

bzw.

Wiederinbetriebnahme einer

Anlage

nach Reparaturen

oder

Umbauten

is t

sicherzustellen:

- Der

ordnungsgemäße Abschluss aller

A rbeiten

- Die

richtige Funktionsstellung

der A rmatur

-

Schutzvorrichtungen sind angebracht.

7 .0 P f l ege und W ar t un g

Die Wartung und Wartungsintervalle sind entsprechend den Anforderungen vom Betreiber

festzulegen.

7.1 Austausch der Spindel-Abdichtungen

A R M A T U R E N


DG -Steilventile - STEVI® 440 /

441,

445 / 446

7.1.2 Ausführung mit Stopfbuchspackung

Die Stopfbuchspackung (Pos. 23) ist nicht wartungsfrei.

Bei auftretenden Undichtigkeiten sofort stufenweise die Verschraubung (Pos. 25) bis zur

Dichtheit der Packung (Pos. 23) anziehen.



Durch regelmäßige Kontrolle auf Dichtheit wird die Lebensdauer der Stopfbuchspackung

(Pos. 23) erhöht.

Ist ein Abdichten durch Nachziehen nicht mehr möglich, muss mit einem neuen

Packungsring (Pos. 23) nachgepackt werden.

Nachpacken der Stopfbuchspackung:

A

ACHTUNG

Vor Demontage der Armatur Punkt 10.0

und

11.0 beachten.

• Antrieb abbauen, (siehe Betriebsanleitung des Stellantriebs )

• Neuen Packungsring einlegen, Einbau gemäß Darstellung Bild 11 - Bild 13.

A R M A T U R E N



441,

445 / 446

7.1.3 Ausführung mit Faltenbalg

Bei Undichtigkeiten an der Spindel liegt ein Defekt des eingebauten Faltenbalges

(Pos. 20.3) vor. Zunächst kann durch leichtes Anziehen der Verschraubung (Pos. 20.17)

eine ausreichende Dichtheit erzielt werde n.



Bei einem Austausch können Spindel und Faltenbalg (Pos. 20.3) nur gemeinsam

ausgetauscht werden.

Austausch der Faltenbalgelnheit:

A

ACHTUNG

Vor Demontage der Armatur

Punkt

10.0

und

11.0

bea chten.

20,17

- Antrieb abbauen.

(Siehe Betriebsanleitung des Stellantriebs )

- Muttern (Pos. 11) lösen.

- Fa ltenbalgaufsatz (Pos. 20) abnehmen.

-Verschraubung (Pos. 20.17) um ca. eine

Umdrehung lösen.

- Spindel-ZFaltenbalgeinheit (Pos. 20.3) in der unteren

Stellung gedrückt halten.

- Spannhülse (Pos. 4) mit einem Dorn heraustreiben.

- Kegel (Pos. 3) abschrauben.

20.8

20.2

20.6

20.3

A R M A T U R E N

Betr iebs- und Montageanlei tung

DG -Stel lventi le - STEVi® 440 / 441 , 445 / 446

7.2 Austausch der Innengarni tur

7.2.1 Austausch von Kegel und Spindel

ACHTUNG



A

Vor Demontage

der Armatur

Punkt 10.0

und 11.0 bea chten.

- Antrieb abbauen.


BR

440

/

445:


- Traversendeckel (Pos. 7) abnehmen.

- Verschraubung (Pos. 19 bzw. Pos. 25) um ca. 1

Umdrehung lösen.

- DN15-100: Kegel-ZSpindeleinheit (Pos. 3) herausziehen.

- DN125-150: Kegel (Pos. 3) mit Spindel (Pos. 5)

herausziehen.

- DN125-150: Stift (Pos. 4) m it einem Dorn heraustreiben.

- DN125-150: Kegel (Pos. 3) abschrauben.

- DN125-150: Neue Teile verschrauben, bohren und

verstiften.

Bild 15: BR 44 0/ 4 45

DN15-100

<^3>>

A R M A T U R E N


DG-Steliventile - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

7.2.2 Dichtungsaustausch beim Druckentlastungskegel

ACHTUNG

Vor Demontage der Armatur

Punkt

10.0

und

11.0

beachten.



A

•

Antrieb abbauen.


• Kegel ausbauen wie unter Punkt 7.2.1

beschrieben.

•

Verschlissene Kolbendichtung (Pos. 32) mit

geeignetem W erkzeug (z.B. Schraubendreher)

aus der Nut im Kegel heraushebeln.

-

Neue Kolbendichtung (Pos. 32) einsetzen , dabei

aufrich tige Einbaulage achten (siehe Bild 16).

• Führungsband (Pos. 31) austauschen.

- Lauffläche der Führungsbuchse (Pos. 30)

säubern;

ggf. mit feinem Schleifmittel glätten.

-

2 Flachdichtungen (Pos. 9) erneuern.

-

Zusammenbau in umgekehrter Re ihenfolge.

• M it Muttern (Pos. 11) befestigen und kreuzweise

anziehen.

Bild 16: Druckentlastungskegel

A R M A T U R E N


DG-Stellventile - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

7.3 Anzugsdrehimomente

7.3.1 Anzugsdrehmomente der Sechskantmuttern

M 1 0 = 1 5 - 3 0 N m



M 12 = 3 5 - 5 0 Nm

M 16 = 80-1 20N m

7.3.2 Anzugsdrehmomente der Sitzringe

DN 15/20

DN

25/ 32

DN

40 /

50

DN65

DN80

DN100

=

=

=

=

=

=

100 Nm

150 Nm

350 Nm

480 Nm

660 Nm

980 Nm

/

A ntriebsaufbau siehe Betriebsanleitung

für betreffenden A ntrieb

8.0 Ursache und Abh i l f e be i Be t r i ebss tö rungen

• C S I S ^

A H M A T U H E I M



441,

445 / 446

9.0 Feh lersuchp lan

ACHTUNG

- vor Mo ntage- und Reparaturarbeiten Punkte 10.0 und 11.0 beachten

- vor Wiederinbetriebnahme Punkt 6.0 beachten



A

Störung

Kein Durchfluss

Geringer Durchfluss

Ventilspindel bewegt sich

nur ruckweise

Ventilspindel bzw. Kegel

sitzt fest

Mö g l ich e Ursach en

Armatur geschlossen

Flanschabdeckungen wurden nicht

entfernt

Armatur nicht ausreichend geöffnet

verunreinigter Schmutzfänger

Verstopfung im Rohrleitungssystem

Ventil bzw. Kvs-Wert falsch gewählt

Zu fest angezogene Stopfbuchsabdich

tung (bei Ventilen mit Graphit-Packung)

Ventilkegel hat aufgrund von Fest-

Schmutzpartikeln leicht gefressen

Sitz und Kegel stark mit Schmutz ver

klebt, insbesondere bei Schlitz- und

Lochkegeln

Abhil fe

Armatur öffnen (mittels Antrieb)

Flanschabdeckungen entfernen


Sieb reinigen / austauschen

Rohrleitungssystem überprüfen

Ventil mit größerem Kvs-Wert

einsetzen

Geringes Lösen der Verschraubung

(Pos.

25 /20 .17 )

Dichtheit muss gewährleistet bleiben.

Innenteile sä ubern ,

beschädigte Stellen glätten

Sitz und Kegel mit geeignetem

Lösungsmittel reinigen

A R M A T U R E N



441,

445 / 446

10.0 Dem ontage de r Arm atu r bzw. des Obe r te i les

ACHTUNG

Insbesondere sind folgende Punkte zu beachten:



A

- Druckloses Rohrleitungssystem .

-

Abgekühltes

Medium.

-

Entleerte

A nlage.

- Bei ä tzenden, brennbaren,

aggressiven oder toxischen Medien

Rohrleitungs

system

belüften.

11.0 Garant ie / Ge w äh r le is tung

Umfang und Zeitraum der Gewährleistung ist in der

zum

Zeitpunl<t der Lieferung gültigen

Ausgabe der "Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen der Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG"

oder abweichend davon im Kaufvertrag selbst angegeben.

Wir leisten Gewähr für eine dem jeweiligen Stand der Technik und dem bestätigten Verwen

dungszweck entsprechenden Fehlerfreiheit.

Für Schäden, die durch unsachgemäße Behandlung oder Nichtbeachtung der Betriebs

und M ontageanleitung, des Katalogblattes und der einschlägigen Regelwerken entstehen,

können keine Gewährleistungsansprüche geltend gemacht werden.

Schäden die während des Betriebes, durch vom Datenblatt oder anderen Vereinbarungen

abweichenden Einsatzbedingungen entstehen, unterliegen ebenso nicht der Gewährleis

< Ä ß K > A R M A T U R E N

Betr iebs- und Montageanle i tung

DG -Ste liventile - STEVI®

440

/ 441,

445

/

446

1 2 . 0 K o n f o r m i t ä t s -

/

H ers t e l l e re rk lä rung

ARl-Armaturen Albert Richter Gm bH & Co. KG,

Mergelheide 5 6-60, 33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock



EG-Konformitätserklärung

im Sinne der

EG-Druckgeräterichtlinie97/23/EG

Hiermit erklären wir,

dass gemäß der oben genannten Druckgeräterichtlinie, die unten aufgelisteten Produkte ausgeführt

sind und nach D iagramm 6, Anhang II Modul H bzw. Modul H l (mit Sicherheitsfunktion; zusä tzlich

EG-Baumusterprüfung gemäß M odul B+D) von LLOY D'S REGISTER QUALITY ASSURANCE

(BS-Nr.

0525), Mönckebergstr. 2 7, 20095 Hamburg, geprüft wurden.

Modul H, Z ertifikat-Nr; 50003/1

Absperr- u. Stellventi l in Durchgangsform

Typ 405 , 460 , 440 , 441 , 445 , 446 , 470 , 471 , 422, 462, 425 , 426, 480

Angewendete Normen;

DIN EN 60534 Teil 1

VDIA/DE 3844 Blatt 1

DIN 3840

AD 2000 Merkblatt A4

- Gusseisen mit Kugelgraphit

- Stahlguss

- Schmiedestahl

A R M A T U R E N

Betriebs- und Montageanieitung

DG-Stellventiie - STEVI® 440 /

441,

445 / 446



A R M A T U R E N

Operating and installation instructions

str a igh t throu gh co ntro l valves - STEVI® 440 /

441,

445 / 446



S ? - ^ ^

"^^^^'o

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. control valves

- STEVI® 440

/ 441,445 /

446

1.0 Genera l in fo rmat ion on opera t ing ins t ruc t ions

These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.

Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be

solved by reference to the operating instructions.



They are binding on the transport, storage, installation, start-up, operation, maintenance

and repair.

The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.

- Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be

supervised and checked.

It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to

monitor the personnel.

- In addition, current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when

taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them.

The m anufacturer reserves the right to introduce techn ical modifications at any time.

These Operating Instructions comply w ith the requirements of

EU

D irectives.

2.0 Notes on poss ib le dangers

2.1 Significance of symbols

A

ATTENTION

Warning of general danger.

i:aV'

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. control valves - STEVI®

440

/ 441,445 / 446

4 .0 Descr ip t ion

4.1 Scope of applications

Valves are used for „controlling the flow of liqu ids, gases and vapours in chemical and other

processing plants and for plant engineering".



A

ATTENTION

-

Refer to

the data sheet

for applications, limits

on use and

possibilities.

- Certain media require or preclude the use of special

materials.

-The

valves are designed for

standard

operating conditions.

If

conditions exceed

these requirements, e.g. aggressive

or

abrasive

media, the

operator should

state the higher requirements

when

ordering.

- Valves made from grey cast iron are no t authorised for use in systems subject

to

TRD 110.

The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.

It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.

The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.

Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.

Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if

you

have any questions.

4.2 Operating principles

ARI control valves are especially suitable for actuation by pneumatic or electrical actuators.

A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l lat ion inst ruct ions

Str. thr . con trol va lves - STEVI® 440 / 441,445 / 446

4.3 Diagram



A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l lat ion inst ruc t ions

Str. th r. contro l valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446



A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l lat ion inst ruct ion s

Str. thr. co nt ro l valves - STEVI® 440 / 441,445 / 446

4.4 Technical data

for

- Principal dimensions

- Pressure-temperature-rat ings, etc. refer to data sheet.



4.5 Marking

Kvs-value

Plug

design

_ ., , Nominal diameter

Type-Number

Flow

characteristic

4E^

T K V ^

DN

Manufacturer

Nominal pressure

PN

Pack.

CE-marking

Notified body

^ >C €

<^

laMat.

SN

IVIaterial of

internal parts

Customer-specific

^ information

Serial-No,

Year of manufacture clear speech

( L a n d 2 .

position)

Stem sealing

Fig.

8

Address of manufacturer: refer to i tem 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

Acc ording to the P ressure Equipmen t Direct ive table 6, an nex I I , valves without safety

funct ion are only al lowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.

Valves w ith safety funct ion a re:

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. control valves • STEVi® 440 / 441,445 / 446

5.0 Insta l la t ion

5.1 General notes on instal lat ion

The following items should be taken into account besides the general principles governing

installation work:



A

ATTENTION

-

Remove flange covers

if

present.

-

Ttie

interior of

valve and

pipeline

must be

free from

foreign particles.

-

Note installation position

with

reference

to

flow,

see

mark on

valve.

- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accum ulation.

- Lay pipelines so that damaging

transverse,

bending and torsional forces are

avoided.

-

Protect valves from dirt

during

construction work.

-

Connection flanges must

mate

exactly.

- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to

take external forces,

e.g. they

are

not

designed

fo r

use

as

climbing aids,

or

as

connecting points for lifting

gear

-

Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be

used.

Refer to data sheet fo r weights.

-

Keep

the

thread and

sha ft of

the stem

free

from paint.

- Centre gaskets between the

flanges.

A R M A T U R E N


Str. th r. con tro l valves - STEVI®

440

/ 441 ,445 / 446

5.2 Req uiremen ts at the place of instal lat ion

Th e place of instal lat ion should be easi ly accessible and provide am ple space for

maintenance and removing the actuator. Stop valves should be instal led before and after

the control valve to enable maintenance working without draining the piping system. The

va lve should preferably installed vert ical ly with the actuator at the top. Incl ined or horizontal

installation without supports is permissible only with l ight actuators.



For this installation posi t ion , the two distan ce column s (or jok e) have to be above eac h

other in the vertical plane.

Fig.

9: Pipe line vertically Fig. 10: Pipeline horizontally

Permissible actuator weights for valves with unsupported horizontal stems:

20 kg for DN 1 5 - 3 2

25 kg for DN 40 - 65

35 kg for DN 80-100

Th e pipes must be lagge d to protect the actuators from exce ssive heat. Suff ic ient sp ace

mu st b e left for the ma intenanc e of the ste m pa cking.

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. control valves • STEVI® 440 / 441,445 / 446

6.0 Pu t t ing th e valve into op era t ion

ATTENTION

- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature

and

direction

of

flow.

- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.



A

- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage.

-

Touching

the

valve when

it is

operating

at

high

(> 50

°C)

or

low (<

0

°C)

m edia

temperatures can cause injury.

Affix

warning notice

or

protective insulation

as appropriate

Before

putting a

new

plant

into operation

or

restarting

a plant

after repairs

or

modification,

always make

sure

that:

- Al l

works

has

been completed

-

The

valve is in the

correct position

fo r

its

function.

- Safety devices have been attached.

7.0 Care an d ma inten an ce

Maintenance and maintenance intervals have to be defined by the operator according to

the service conditions.

7.1 Replacement of stem sealings

7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design

g 3fe>

A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l lation inst ruc t ions

Str. thr. co ntro l valves - STEVI® 440 / 441,445 / 446

7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design

- The stuffing box packing (pos. 23) requires maintenance.

- If leaks develop, immediately tighten the screw joint (pos. 25) gradually until the packing

(pos.

23) stops leaking.

- The service life of stuffing box packings (pos. 23) can be increased by checking regularly



leakage.

- If leaks can no longer be stopped by tightening the screw join t (pos. 25), a new packing

ring (pos. 23) must be inserted into the gland.

Replacement of stuffing box packings:

A

ATTENTION

Refer to

item

10.0

and

11.0 before dismantling

th e valve.

• Remove actuator. (Refer to operating instructions for actuator )

•

Insert new packing ring as shown in Fig. 12 - Fig. 13.

A R M A T U R E N

Operating and Installation instructions

Str. thr. control valves • STEVI® 440 / 441 ,445 / 446

7.1.3 Bellows seal design

I f the stem leaks, the bel lows seal (p os . 20.3) is defect ive. Th e leak can in i t ia l ly be stopped

by t ightening the sc rew joint (pos. 20.1 7).

Stem and bel lows (pos. 20.3) can only be replaced together.

Replacem ent of bel lows seals:



A

ATTENTION

Refer to item 10.0 and 11.0 before

dismantling the valve.

20,17

- Remove actuator.

(Refer to operating instructions for actuator )

- Loose nuts (pos. 11).

- Detach bel lows assembly (pos. 20).

- Slacken screw joint (pos. 20.17) by about one turn.

- Press stem/bel lows uni t (pos. 20.3) down.

- D rive pin (pos . 4) out with a drift.

- Unscrew plug (pos. 3).

- Loose nuts (pos. 20.8).

- Detach mount ing bonnet (pes. 20.2).

- Extract stem/bel lows uni t (pos. 20 .3) f rom the

20,8

20,2

20,6

20,3

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. co nt ro l valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

7.2 Replacem ent of intern al parts

7.2.1 Replacem ent of plug and stem

ATTENTION

Refer to item 10.0 and 11.0 before

dismantling the valve.



A

-

Remove actuator.

(Re fer to operat ing instruct ions for actua tor )

Series 440/445:


- Detach mount ing bonnet (pos. 7),

- Slac ken screw joint (pos. 19 or 25) by about 1 turn.

- D N 15-100: Extract plug/stem assem bly (pos. 3).

- D N 125-150 : Extract plug (pos. 3) and stem (pos. 5).

- D N1 25- 150 : Drive pin (pos. 4) out wi th a d r i ft .

- DN125-150: Unscrew plug (pos. 3).

- DN125-150: Bolt new parts together, dri l l and pin them.

- Replace gasket (pos. 9).

- Assemble in reverse order.

Fig. 15: Series 440 / 445

DN15-100

g J i ^

A R M A T U R E N


Str. tlir. control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441 ,445 / 446

7.2.2 Rep lacem ent of seals of pre ssu re balanced plu gs

A

ATTENTION

Refer to item 10.0 and 11.0 before dismantling tfie valve.

-

Remove actuator.

(Refer to operating instructions for actuator )



- Remove plug as described in i tem 7.2.

- Prise worn piston seal (pos. 32) out of groove in

plug with su i table tool (e.g. screwd river).

- Insert new piston seal (pos. 32), taking care that

it is in the corre ct position (refer to F ig. 16 ).

- Replace guide ring (pos. 31).

- Clean sl iding surfac e of guide bush (p os. 30);

smoo th with f ine abrasive if necessary.

- Replace 2 ga skets (pos. 9).


- Secure with nuts (po s. 11) and t ighten them

crosswise.

(For tightening torques refer to item 7.3.1.)

7.2.3 Rep lacem ent of the seat ring

Fig .

16: Pressure balanced

A R M A T U R E N



- STEVI® 440

/ 441,445 / 446

7.3 Tightening torques

7.3.1 Tightening torques for

M 1 0 = 1 5 - 3 0 N m

M 1 2 = 3 5 - 5 0 Nm

M 16 = 80 -12 0Nm



7.3.2 Tightening torques for seat rings

DN 15/20

DN 25/ 32

DN

40 / 50

DN65

DN80

DN100

=

=

=

=

=

=

100 Nm

150 Nm

350 Nm

480 Nm

660 Nm

980 Nm

/ Refer to operating instructions for actuator concerned for

installing actuators I

8 .0 Troub leshoo t ing

In the event of m alfunction or faulty operating performance checl< that the installation and

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441,445 / 446

9 .0 T roub leshoot ing t ab le

ATTENTION

- read item 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair

work

- read

item

6.0

before

restarting

the

plant



A

Fault

No flow

Little flow

Valve stem moves in jerks.

Valve stem or plug cannot be

moved.

P os s ib le c a us e

Valve close d.

Flange covers not removed.

Valve not sufficiently open.

Dirt sieve clogg ed.

Piping system clogged.

Kvs value of valve unsuitable.

Stuffing box sealing too tight

(for valves with graphite packings).

Valve plug slightly seized owing to

solid dirt particles.

Seating and plug clogged with dirt;

especially with V-port and perforated

plugs.

Valve plug seized in seating or guide

owing to d eposits or dirt in medium .

Correct ive measures

Open valve (using actuator).

Remove flange cov ers.

Open valve (using actuator).

Clean / replace sieve.

Check piping system .

Fit valve with higher Kvs value.

Slacken screw joint (pos. 25/20.17)

slightly Valve must nor start leaking

Clean internals, smooth rough spots.

Clean seating and plug with suitable

solvent.

Replace plug and seating; use parts

made from different material if neces

sary.

A R M A T U R E N



- STEVI® 440

/ 441,445 /

446

10.0 Dismant l ing the valve or the top part

A

ATTENTION

The following points

must

be

observed:

-

Pressureless

pipe sys tem.

- Medium must be

cool.



-

Plant must be drained.

- Purge piping systems in case o f caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic

media.

11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and

Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG" va lid at the time o f delivery or, by way of

departure, in the contract of sale itself.

We guarantee freedom of faults In compliance w ith state-of-the-art technology and the

confirmed application.

No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling

or disregard of operating and installation Instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.

This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under

conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.

Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist

A R M A T U R E N


Str. thr. control valves - STEVI®

440

/ 441,445 / 446

12 .0 EC dec la ra t ion o f conformi ty / Manufac turers dec la ra t ion

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter Gm bH & C o. KG,

Mergelheide 56-60, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock

EC declaration of conformity

as defined by



the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC

Herewith we declare,

that according to the above m entioned Pressure Equipmen t Directive (PE D) the below listed

prod

ucts comp ly an d have been app roved according to table 6, annex II module H or module H1 (w ith

safety function: also EC type test according to module B+D) through LLOYD'S REGISTER QUAL

ITY ASSU RANC E (NB-No. 0525), M önckebergstr, 27 , D-20095 Hamburg.

Module H, Certificate-No: 50003/1

Straight through stop and control valves

Type 405 , 460, 440, 4 41 , 445 , 446, 470, 4 71 , 422, 462, 425 , 426, 480

Applied stan dard:

DIN EN 6 0534 part 1

VDIA/DE 384 4 sheet 1

DIN 3840

AD 2000 leaflet A4

- C ast iron with spheroidal graphite

- Cast steel

- Forged steel

ARMATUREN



-

STEVI®

440

/ 441,445 / 446



A R M A T U R E N


3-W ege-Stellventile - STEVI® 450 / 451



^M

d ia

A R M A T U R E N


3-Wege-Steilventiie

- STEVI®

450

/ 451

1.0 A l lge m eine s zur B et r iebsa n le i tun g

Diese Betriebsanleitung gilt als Anweisung, die Armaturen sicher zu montieren und zu

warten.

Bei Schwierigkeiten, die nicht mit Hilfe der Betriebsanleitung gelöst werden

können, nehm en Sie Kontakt mit dem Lieferant oder Hersteller auf.

Sie ist verbindlich für den Transport, Lagerung, M ontage, Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb,

Wartung,

Reparatur.



Die Hinweise und Warnungen sind zu beachten und einzuhalten.

- Handling und alle anderen Arbeiten sind von sachkundigem Personal durchzuführen bzw.

alle Tä tigkeiten sind zu beaufsichtigen und zu prüfen.

Die Festlegung des Verantwortungsbereiches, des Zuständigkeitsbereiches und der

Übenwachung des Personals obliegt dem Betreiber.

- Bei Außerbetriebsetzung, Wartung bzw. Reparatur sind zusätzlich die aktuellen

regionalen Sicherheitsanforderungen heranzuziehen und zu beachten.

Der Hersteller behält sich das Recht von technischen Änderungen und Verbesserungen

jederzeit vor.

Diese Betriebsanleitung entspricht den Anforderungen der EU-Richtlinien.

2.0 Gefahrenh inweise

2.1 Bedeutung der Symboie

A

ACHTUNG

Warnung vor einer allgemeinen Gefahr.

= ^ 3 T K > ARMATUREN


3-Wege-Stellventile - STEVI® 45 0 / 45 1

4 .0 Be s c h r e ib u n g

4.1 Anwendungsbereich

Armaturen werden zum „Regeln von flüssigen, gasförmigen und dampfförmigen M edien in

der Verfahrens- und Prozesstechnik sowie im Anlagenbau" eingesetzt.



A

ACHTUNG

- Einsatzgebiete, Einsatzgrenzen und -möglichil<eiten sind dem Katalogblatt zu

entnehmen.

- Bestimmte Medien setzen spezielle Werkstoffe voraus oder sctiließen sie aus.

- Die Armaturen sind ausgelegt fü r normale Einsatzbedingungen. Gehen die

Bedingungen über diese Anforderungen

hinaus,

wie

z.B.

aggressive

oder abra

sive Med ien, hat der Betreiber die höheren Anforderungen bei der Bestellung

anzugeben.

- Armaturen aus Grauguss sind fü r den Einsatz in Anlagen nach TRD 110 nicht

freigegeben.

Die Angaben sind konform mit der Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG.

Die Einhaltung unterliegt der Verantwortung des Anlagenplaners.

Besondere Kennzeichnungen der Armatur s ind zu beachten.

Die Werkstoffe der Standard-Ausführungen sind dem Katalogblatt zu entnehmen.

Bei Fragen ist Rücksprache mit dem Lieferanten oder Hersteller zu führen.

A R M A T U R E N

Betriebs- und iVIontageanleitung

3-Wege-Stellventile

- STEVI® 450 / 451

4.3 Schaubilder

4.3.1 Ausführung mit Mischkegel



Bild

1:BR450DN15-150

Bild 2 : ER

451

DN15-150

A R M A T U R E N


3-Wege-Stellventiie

- STEVI® 450 / 451

4.3.2 Ausführung mit Verteill^egei



Bild 5: BR 450 DN15-150 Bild 6: BR

451

DN15-150

A R M A T U R E N


3-W ege -Stel iventi le - STEVf® 450 / 451

4.4 Techiniscl ie Daten

wie z.B.

-

Hauptabmessungen,

- Druck-Temperatur-Zuordnungen, usw.

s ind dem Katalogblatt zu entnehm en.

4.5 Kennzeichinung



Kvs-Wert

Kegei-

ausführung

Typen-Nummer

Kennlinie

Nennweite

Hersteller

Nenndrucl<

CE-Kennzeichnung

, Benannte Stelle

kundenspezifsche

Angaben

Werkstoff der

Innengarnitur

Baujahr unverschlüsselt

( lu n d 2. Stelle)

Spindelabdichtung

Bild 9

Anschri f t des Herstel lers: s iehe Punkt 11.0 Garantie / Gewährleistung

Entsprech end der Druckgerätericht l lnle Diagram m 6, An ha ng II , dürfen Arm aturen ohne

Sicherheitsfunkt ion erst ab DN32 CE-gekennzelchnet werden.

5 . 0 M o n t a g e

« Ä M K >

ARMATUREN


3-Wege-Stellventile

- STEVI® 450 / 451

5.2 IVIontageangaben zum Einbauort

Die Einbaustelle soll gut zugänglich sein und genügend Freiraum zur Wartung und zum

Abnehmen der Stellantriebe aufweisen. Vor und hinter dem Stellventil sind

Handabsperrventile vorzusehen, die Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten am Stellventil

ermöglichen, ohne die Anlage zu entleeren. Das Stellventil soll vorzugsweise senkrecht mit

obenliegendem Antrieb eingebaut

werden.

Schräge bis waagerechte Einbaulage ist ohne

AbStützung nur bei Antrieben mit geringem Eigengewicht zulässig.



Der Antrieb muss jedoch so montiert sein, dass die beiden Distanzsäulen bzw. das Joch in

senkrechter Ebene übereinander liegen:

Bild 10; Rohrleitung senkrecht

Bild

11:

Rohrleitung waagerecht

Zulässige Antriebsgewichte bei waagerechter Einbaulage in Bezug auf die Spindel, ohne

bauseitige Abstützung, sind: 20 kg für DN 15 -3 2

25 kg für

DN

40 - 65

35 kg für DN 80-100

40 kg für DN 125-150

55kgfürDN125v-150v

Um die Stellantriebe vor zu hoher Wärm e zu schützen, sind die Rohrleitungen zu isolieren.

A R M A T U R E N


3-Wege-Steliventile - STEVI® 45 0 / 45 1

6 .0 Inbe t r i ebnahme

A

ACHTUNG

- Vor der Inbetriebnahme sind die Angaben zu Werkstoff,

Druck,

Temperatur und

Strömungsrichtung

zu überprüfen.

- Grundsätzlich sind die regionalen Sicherheitsanweisungen einzuhalten.

-

Rückstände

in

Rohrleitungen

und

Armaturen

(wie

Schmutz,

Schweißperlen,



usw.) führen zu Undichtigkeiten bzw.

Beschädigungen.

-

Beim Betrieb

mit

hohen

(> 50 °C) oder

tiefen

(<0°C)

Medientemperaturen

besteht

Verletzungsgefahr bei

Berühren

der A rmatur

Ggf

Warnhinweise

oder

Isoiierschutz

anbringen

Vor eder

Inbetriebnahme einer Neuanlage bzw. Wiederinbetriebnahme

einer

Anlage nach Reparaturen oder Umbauten ist sicherzustellen:

- Der ordnungsgemäße Abschluss aller A rbeiten

-

Die richtige Funktionssteliung

der A rmatur

-

Schutzvorrichtungen

sind angebracht.

7 .0 P f l ege und W ar t u ng

Die Wartung und Wartungsintervalle sind entsprechend den Anforderungen vom Betreiber

festzulegen

7.1 Austausch der Spindel-Abdichitungen

A R M A T U R E N



7.1.2 Ausführung mit Stopfbuchspackung

Die Stopfbuchspackung (Pos. 13) ist nicht wartungsfrei.

Bei auftretenden Undichtigkeiten sofort die Verschraubung (Pos. 42) bzw. stufenweise die

Sechskantmuttern (Pos. 24) gleichmäßig, bis zur Dichtheit der Packung (Pos. 13)

anziehen.

Durch regelmäßige Kontrolle auf Dichtheit wird die Lebensdauer der Stopfbuchspackung



(Pos. 13) erhöht.

Ist ein Abdichten durch Nachziehen nicht mehr möglich, muss mit einem neuen

Packungsring (Pos. 13) nachgepackt werden.

Nachpacken der Stopfbuchspackung:

A

ACHTUNG

Vor

Demontage der Armatur Punkt

10.0 und

11.0

beachten.

•

Antrieb abbauen. (Siehe Betriebsanleitung des Stellantriebs )

• Neuen Packungsring (Pos. 13) einlegen, Einbau gemäß Darstellung Bild 13 bzw. Bild 14.

A R M A T U R E N


3-Wege-Stellventile

- STEVI® 450 / 451

7.1.3 Ausführung mit Faltenbalg

Bei Undichtigkeiten an der Spindel liegt ein Defekt des eingebauten Faltenbalges

(Pos. 20.3) vo r Zunächst kann durch leichtes Anziehen der Verschraubung (Pos. 20.17)

bzw. der Überwurfmutter (Pos. 20.16) eine ausreichende Dichtheit erz ielt werden.

Bei einem Austausch können Spindel und Faltenbalg (Pos. 20.3) nur gemeinsam

ausgetauscht werden.

Austausch der Faltenbalgeinheit:



A

ACHTUNG

Vor Demontage

der Armatur Punkt

10.0

und

11.0

beachten.

-

Antrieb abbauen. (Siehe Betriebsanleitung des Stellantriebs )

- Verschraubung (Pos. 20.17) bzw.Übenwurfmutter (Pos. 20.16) um ca . eine Umdrehung

lösen.

- Unteren Sitzring (Pos. 2) herausschrauben (Punkt 7.2 beachten) -

bei Verteilkegelausführung (Bild 18, Bild 19) nicht nötig.

- Mutter (Pos. 4) abschrauben und dabei an der Schlüsselfläche (Spindel oben)

gegenhalten.

- Kegel (Pos. 3 bzw. 31) ausbauen .

7.1.3.1 Faltenbalg und Mischkegel

P NI 5-150

- Demontage gemäß Punkt 7.1.3.

A R M A T U R E N



DN125V-150V



- Fal tenbalgaufsatz (Pos. 20) abnehmen.

- M ut tem (Pos. 20.8) lösen.

20 16



- Stopfbuchsgehäuse (Pos . 20.13) abneh m en.

- Spindel-ZFaltenbalgeinheit (Pos. 20.3) aus dem

Faltenbalggehäuse (Pos. 20.1)

herausnehmen.

- Spannhülse (P os. 6) mit e inem Dorn

heraustreiben.

- Adapter (Pos. 37) abschrauben.

- Neue Tei le verschrauben, bohren und

verstiften.

- 2 Flachdichtungen (Pos. 20.6) und 1

Flachdichtung (Pos. 27) erneuern.

- Zusammenbau in umgekehr ter Reihenfo lge.

ACHTUNG

-

Beim Einsetzen der neuen Spindei-/

A R M A T U R E N



7.1.3.2 Faltenbalg und Verteilkegel

DN40-150


- Distanzhülse (Pos. 32) von dem Adapter (Pos. 38)

ziehen.

Hinweis:



Distanzhülse (Pos. 32) ist bei DN125-150 nicht

vorhanden.

- IVluttern (Pos. 11) lösen.

- Faltenbalgaufsatz (Pos. 20) abnehmen.

- DN15-100: Kegel (Pos. 40) von dem Adapter

(Pos.38) ziehen.

- DN125-150: Spannhülse (Pos. 33) mit einem Dorn

heraustreiben. Kegel (Pos.40) von dem Adapter

(Pos.

38) schrauben.

- IVluttern (Pos. 20.8) lösen.

- Traversendeckel (Pos. 20.2) abnehmen.


Faltenbalggehäuse herausnehmen.

- Spannhülse (Pos. 6) mit einem Dorn heraustreiben.


A R M A T U R E N


3-W ege-Stellventile - STEVI® 450 / 45 1

DN125V-150V

- De mo ntage gem äß Punl<t 7.1.3.


- Fal tenbalgaufsatz (Pos. 20)

incl.

Stopfbuchsgehäuse (Pos. 39) abnehmen.

- Spannhülse (Pos. 33) mit e inem Dorn

20,16

20,8



heraustreiben.

- Kegel (Pos. 40) von dem Adapter (Pos. 38)

abschrauben.

- Mu ttern (Pos . 29) lösen.

- Fal tenbalgaufsatz (Pos. 20) abnehmen.

- Muttern (Pos. 20.8) lösen.

- Stopfbuchsgehäuse (Pos. 20.13) abne hm en.


Fal tenbalggehäuse herausnehmen.

- Spannhülse (Pos. 6) mit e ine m Dorn

heraustreiben.


- Neue Tei le verschraube n, bo hren und verst i ften.

- 2 Flachdichtungen (Pos. 20.6) und je 1

A R M A T U R E N


3-W ege -Stellven tile - STEVI® 450 / 45 1

7.2 Austauscl i der Innengarni tur

A

ACHTUNG

Vor Demontage der Armatur Punkt 10.0 und 11.0 beachten.

-

Ant r ieb abbauen.

(Siehe Betriebsanleitung des Stel lantriebs )

Zum Herausschrauben des Si tzr ings (Pos. 2) ist e in Spezialschlüssel erforderl ich, der vom



Herstel ler bezogen werden kann.

Vor dem Einbau eines neuen bzw. überarbei teten Si tzes, Gewinde und Dichtkonus im

Ge häu se sä ubern und mi t geeignetem Schm iermi t te l best re ichen.

Der Austausch von Kegel und Spindel bei Armaturen mit Fal tenbalg (BR451) ist unter

Punkt 7.1.3 beschrieben.

7.2.1 Ausführung mit Mischkegel

D N 1 5 - 1 5 0

- Si tzr ing (Pos. 2 unten) herausschrauben und

erneuern oder überarbei ten.

- Vers chra ubu ng (Pos. 19 bzw. Pos. 42) um ca. 1

Umdrehung lösen.

- Kegel (P os. 3) mit Spindel (Po s. 5) heraus ziehen und

entsprec hend austauschen.

Hinwels:

g M f e > A R M A T U R E N

Betr iebs- und M ontageanle itung

3-Wege-Steliventile

- STEVI® 450 / 451

DN125v-150v

- Sitzring (Pos. 2 unten) herausschrauben und

erneuern oder überarbeiten.

- M uttern (Pos. 24) um ca. 2-3 Umdrehungen

lösen.

- Kegel (Pos. 3) mit Spindel (Pos. 5) herausziehen

und entsprechend austauschen.

2(oben)



- Zusammenbau in umgel<ehrter Reihenfolge.

(Anzugsdrehmomente der Sitzringe siehe

Punkt 7.3.2.)

Austausch des oberen Sitzrings:

- Demontage von Sitzring, Kegel und Spindel wie

vor beschrieben.

- M uttern (Pos. 11) lösen.

- Stopfbuchsgehäuse (Pos. 39) abnehmen.

- Sitzring (Pos. 2 oben) herausschrauben und

erneuern oder überarbeiten.

(Anzugsdrehmomente der Sitzringe siehe

Punl<t

7.3.2.)

- Flachdichtung (Pos. 9) erneuern.

- Zusam menbau in umgel<ehrter Reihenfolge.

2 (unten)

= K Q * >

ARMATUREN

Betr iebs- und Montageanle i tung

3-W ege -Stellventile - STEVI® 450 / 451

7.2.2 Ausführung mit Verteilkegel

DN40-150

- Verschraubu ng (Pos. 19 bzw. Pos. 42 ) um ca. 1

Umdrehung lösen.


- Traversendeckel (Pos.7) abheben.

- Mutter (Pos. 4) lösen.



- Kegel (Pos. 31) mit Distanzhülse (Po s. 32) nach

unten herausziehen.

Hinweis:

Distanzhülse (Po s. 32) entfäl lt bei DN 125 -150.

- Kegel (Pos. 40) mit Spindel (Pos. 41) nach oben

herausziehen und entsprechend austauschen.

Hinweis:

DN125-150: Neue Tei le verschrauben, bohren und

verstif ten.

- Sitzringe (Pos. 2 unten und oben)

herausschrauben und erneuern oder

übera rbeiten. (Anzugsdrehm omente der Sitzringe

siehe Punkt 7.3.2.)

- Flachdichtung (Pos. 9) erneu ern.

- Zusammenbau in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.

- Mit Muttern (Pos.11) befest igen und kreuzweise

2 (unten)

A R M A T U R E N

Betr iebs- und M ontageanle itung

3-Wege-Stellventile

- STEVI® 450 / 451

7.3 Anzugsdrehmomente

7.3.1 Anzugsdrehmomente der Sechskantmuttern

M 1 0 = 1 5 - 3 0 N m

M 12 = 35 -50 Nm

M 1 6 = 8 0 - 1 2 0 N m

M 20 = 150-200 Nm

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/Pos.11





7.3.2 Anzugsdrehmomente der Sitzringe

DN 15/20

DN 25/ 32

DN

40/ 50

DN65

DN80

DN100

DN125/125V

DN150/150V

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

100 Nm

150 Nm

350 Nm

480 Nm

660 Nm

980 Nm

1450 Nm

2000 Nm

/

A ntriebsaufbau siehe Betriebsan leitung für betreffenden

Antrieb

i ß ß > A R M A T U R E N



9 . 0 F e h l e r s u c h p l a n

A

ACHTUNG

- vor Mo ntage- und Reparaturarbeiten Punkte 10.0 und 11.0 beachten

- vor Wiederinbetriebnahme Punkt

6.0

beachten

S t ö ru n g

Kein Durchfluss

Mö g f ich e Ursach en

Armatur gesctilossen

Abhi l fe

Armatur öffnen (mittels An trieb)



Geringer Durclifluss

Spindel bewegt sicti nur

rucl<weise

Spindel bzw. Kegel sitzt

fest

Flansctiabdeckungen wu rden nicht ent

fernt

Armatur nicht ausreichend geöffnet

Verunreinigter Schmutzfänger

Verstopfung im Rohrleitungssystem

Armatur bzw. Kvs-W ert falsch gewä hlt

Zu fest angezogene Stopfbuchsabdich

tung (bei Armaturen mit Graphit-

Packung)

Kegel hat aufgrund von Fest-, Schm utz

partikeln leicht gefressen

Sitz und Kegel stark mit Schmutz ver

klebt, insbesondere bei Schlitz- und

Lochkegeln

Flanschabdeckungen entfernen


Sieb reinigen / austauschen

Rohrieitungssystem überprüfen

Armatur mit größerem Kvs-Wert einset

zen

Geringes Lösen der Verschraubung

(Pos. 42/20.17) bzw. der IMuttern

(Pos. 24)

Jedoch

muss Dichtheit

gewährleistet bleiben

Innenteile säubern, beschädigte Stellen

glätten

Sitz und Kegel mit geeignetem

Lösungsmittel reinigen

A R M A T U R E N


3-Wege-Stellventile

- STEVI®

450

/ 451

10.0 Dem ontage der A rm a tu r bzw. des Ob er te i les

A

ACHTUNG

Insbesondere sind folgende Punkte zu beachten:

-

Druckloses Rohrleitungssystem.

- Abgekühltes Medium.

-

Entleerte

A nlage.



- Bei ätzenden, brennbaren, aggressiven oder toxischen Medien Rohrleitungs

system

be lüften.

11.0 Garant ie / Gewähr le is tung

Umfang und Zeitraum der Gewährleistung ist in der zum Zeitpunkt der Lieferung gültigen

Ausgabe der "Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen der Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG"

oder abweichend davon im Kaufvertrag selbst angegeben.

Wir leisten Gewähr für eine

dem

jew eiligen Stand der Technik und dem bestätigten Verwen

dungszweck entsprechenden Fehlerfreiheit.

Für Schäden, die durch unsachgemäße Behandlung oder Nichtbeachtung der Betriebs

und Montageanleitung, des Katalogblattes und der einschlägigen Regelwerken entstehen,

können keine Gewährleistungsansprüche geltend gemacht werden.

Schäden die während des Betriebes, durch vom Datenblatt oder anderen Vereinbarungen

abweichenden Einsatzbedingungen entstehen, unterliegen ebenso nicht der Gewährleis

Betr iebs- und M ontageanlei tung

3-Wege-Steliventile

- STEVI®

45 0

/ 451

1 2 . 0 K o n f o r m i t ä t s - / H ers t e l l e re rk lä rung

ARI-Armaturen A lbert Richter GmbH & C o. KG,

Mergelhejde 56-60, 33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock

EG-Konformitätserklärung

im Sinne der

EG-Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG



Hierm it erklären wir,

das s gem äß der oben genannten Druckgeräterichtlinie, die unten aufgelisteten Produkte ausgeführt

sind und nach Diagramm 6, Anhang II, M odul H von LLOYD'S RE GISTER QUALITY ASSUR ANC E

(BS-Nr.

0525), Mönckebergstr. 27, 20095 H am burg, geprüft wurden.

Zertifikat-Nr: 50003/1

Stellventi l in Dreiwegeform

Typ 45 0 ,

4 5 1 ,

423, 463, 483

Angewendete Normen:

DIN EN 60534 Teil 1

VDI/VDE 3844 Blatt 1

DIN 3840

AD 2000 M erkblatt A4

g3 iS> A R M A T U R E N


3-way co n tro l va lves - STEVI® 450 / 451



CTZD

A R M A T U R E N


3-way

con trol valves - STEVI® 450 / 451

1.0 Ge nera l in fo rm at io n on op era t ing ins t ru c t io ns





and repair.





supervised and checked.


monitor the personnel.



The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.

These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of ED Directives.

2.0 Notes on poss ib le dangers


A

ATTENTION


A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l la t ion instruc t ions

3-way

co ntrol val ve s - STEVI® 450 / 451

4 . 0 D e s c r i p t i o n

4.1 Scope of appl icat ions

Valves are used for „controlling the flow of liquids, gases and vapours in chemical and other

processing plants and for plant engineering".

ATTENTION

- Refer to the data sheet for applications, iimits on use and possibilities.



A

- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.

- The valves are designed forstandard operating conditions. If conditions exceed

these requirements,

e.g.

aggressive

or

abrasive

m edia, the

operator should

state the higher requirements when ordering.

-

Valves made

from grey cast

iron

are not

authorised

fo r

use

in

systems

subject

to TRD

110.

The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.

It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.

The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.

Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.

Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.

4.2 Operat ing principles

g Ö > > A R M A T U R E N


3-way c on tr o l valves - STEVI® 450 / 451

4.3 Diagram

4.3.1 Mixing plug design



1 iSe r ies 450 D N15-150

i : ^ i « > A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l la tion instru ct ion s

3-way co ntro l va lve s - STEVI® 450 / 451

4.3.2 Diverting plug design



Series 450 DN15-150

Fig.

6 : Ser ies 451 DN15-150

< S 3 ^ A R M A T U R E N

Operating and instal lat ion instruct ions

3-way c on tro l va lves - STEVI® 450 / 451

4.4 Technical data

for

- Principal dimensions

- Pressure-temperature-rat ings, etc. refer to datasheet.

4.5 Marking

Type-Number

Nominal diameter

Manufacturer CE-marking



Kvs-value

Notified body

Customer-specific

information

Stem

sealing

IVIaterial

of

internal parts

Year of manufacture clear speech

(1.

and

2. position)

Fig. 9

Address of manufacturer: refer to i tem 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

Acco rding to the Pressure Equ ipmen t D irect ive table 6, annex I I , valves withou t safety

funct ion are only al lowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.

5.0 Instal lat ion

= : K ( I K > ARMATUREN


3-way con tro l va lve s - STEVI® 450 / 451

5.2 Requirements at the place of instal lation

The place of instal lat ion should be easi ly accessible and provide ample space for

maintena nce and remo ving the actuator. Stop valves should be instal led before and behind

the control valve to enable maintenance working without draining the piping system. The

valve should preferably installed vertically with the actuator at the top. Inclined or horizontal

installation without supports is permissible only with l ight actuators.

For this installation pos i t ion, the two distan ce columns (or joke ) have to be above each

other in the vertical plane.



X U ,

a

Fig.

10: Pip eline vertically Fig. 11 : Pip eline horizontally

Safe actuator weights for a horizontal installation position with reference to the stem,

without structural support, a re as fol lows:

20 kg for DN 1 5 -3 2

25 kg for D N 40 - 65

35 kg for DN 80-100

40 kg for DN 125-150

5 5 k g f o r D N 1 2 5 v - 1 5 0 v

The pipes must be lagge d to protect the actuators from exces sive heat. Suffic ient sp ace

A R M A T U R E N


3-way

contro l valves - STEVI® 450 / 451

6.0 Pu t t ing th e valve in to ope rat io n

A

ATTENTION

- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature

and direction of

flow.

- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.

- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leal<age.

-

Touching

the

valve when

it is

operating

at

high

(> 50

°C) or low (<

0

°C)

media

temperatures can cause injury.



Affix

warning notice

or

protective insulation

as appropriate

Before putting a new plant into operation o r restarting a plant after repairs or

modification, always make sure that:

- A ll works has

been

completed

- T he valve is in

the correct position

for

its

function.

- Safety devices have been

attached.

7.0 Care an d m aintenan ce

IVIaintenance and maintenance intervals have to be defined by the operator according to

the service cond itions.

7.1 Replacement of stem sealings

7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design


3-way control valves - STEVI® 450 / 451

7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design

The stuff ing box packing requires maintenance.

If leaks develop, imm ediately t ighten th e screw joint (pos. 42 ) respect ively the he xago n nuts

(pos.

24) gradually unti l the packing ring (pos. 13) stops leaking.

The service l i fe of stuffing box packings (pos. 13) can be Increased by checking regularly

leakage.

If leaks can no long er be stopped by t ightening the screw joint (pos. 42) respe ct ively the



nuts (pos. 24), a new packing r ing (po s. 13) must be Inserted Into the gland .

Replacement of stuff ing box packings:

A

ATTENION

Refer to point 10.0 and 11.0 before dismantling the valve.

Rem ove actuator. (Refer to ope rat ing Instruct ions for actu ator )

Insert new packing ring as shown in the Fig. 13 and Fig. 14.

A R M A T U R E N


® .

3-way contro l valves - S T E V r 450 / 451

7.1.3 Bellows seal des ign

I f the stem leaks the b el lows seal (pos. 20.3) is defect ive. The leak can ini tially be stopped

by t ighten ing the screw joint (pos. 20.17) respec t ively the sleeve nut (pos. 20.1 6).

Stem and bel lows (pos. 20.3) can only be replaced together.

Replacement of bel lows

seal:

ATTENION

Refer to point 10.0 and 11.0 before dismantling the valve.



A

20,17

- Re m ove actuator. (Refer to operat ing instruct ions for actua tor )

- Slack en screw joint (pos. 20.17) respect ively sleeve nut (pos, 20.16) by abou t one

turn.

- Unscrew the bottom seat ring (pos. 2) (refer to point 7.2) -

with diverting plug version (Fig. 18, Fig. 19) not necessary.

- Unscrew hexagon nut (pos. 4), (holding against spanner face).

- Remove plug (pos. 3 or 31).

7.1.3.1 Bellows seal and mixing plug

P N I 5 - 1 5 0

- Dismantle as point 7.1.3.




< Ä Q X >

ARMATUREN


3-way control valves - STEVI® 45 0 / 45 1

DN125v-150v

- Dismantle as point 7.1.3.

- Loose nuts (pos. 29 ).


- Loose nuts (pos. 20.8 ).

- Detach stuff ing box housing (pos. 20.13).



- Extract stem-/be l lows unit (pos. 20.3) from the

bel lows housing (pos. 20.1).

- Drive pin (pos. 6) out with a drift.

- Unscrew stem adapter (pos. 37).

- Bolt new parts together, dri l l and pin them.

- Replace 2 gaskets (pos. 20.6) and 1 gasket

(pos. 27).


A

ATTENTION

- Ensure that the torsion lock is

correctly positioned when inserting

new stem/beliows unit Introduce the

grooved pin (pos. 20.9) into the

A R M A T U R E N


3-way co ntr ol v alv es - STEVI® 450 / 451

7.1.3.2 Bellows seal and diverting plug

DN40-150

- Dismantle as i tem 7.1.3.

- Pul l distance bush (po s. 32) from adapter (pos. 38).

Note:

There is no distance bush (pos. 32) on DN 125-150.


20,17




- DN 15-100: Pul l plug (pos. 40) from adapter

(pos.

38).

- DN 125-150: Drive straight pin (pos. 33) out with a

drift. Screw plug (pos. 40) from adapter (pos. 38).


- Detach mounting bonnet (pos. 20.2).

- Extract s tem-/bel lows unit (pos. 20.3) from the




Note:

Ad apte r (pos. 38) and straight pin (pos. 6) are not

A R M A T U R E N



DN125v -150v

- Dismantle as item 7.1.3.


- Detach bellows assembly (pos. 20 ) i n d .

stuffing box housing (pos. 39).


- Unscrew plug (pos . 40) from ad ap ter (pos. 38).






- Detach stuff ing box housing (pos. 20.13).

- Extract stem/bel lows unit (pos. 20.3) from the




- Bolt new parts together, dri l l and pin them.

- Replace 2 gaskets (pes. 20.6) and each

1 gasket (pos. 27, 9).


g © Ä > A R M A T U R E N

Operat ing and insta l la t ion instruct ions

3-way co ntro l valve s - STEVI® 450 / 451

7.2 Replacement of internal parts

A

ATTENION

Refer to item 10.0 and 11.0 before dismantling the valve.

-

Remove actuator. (Refer to operat ing instruct ions for actuator )

A special wrench is needed to remove the seatr ing (pos. 2). I t can be obtained from the

manufacturer .

When f i t t ing a new or recondit ioned seatr ing, clean thread and seal ing taper in body and



apply sui table lubricant.

I tem 7.1.3 describes how to change the plug and stem in valves with a bel low seal

(ser ies 451 ).

7.2.1 Mixing plug design

P N I 5 - 1 5 0

- Unscrew seat r ing (pos. 2 bottom) and renew or

recondi t ion.

- Slacken screw joint (pos. 19 or 42) by about 1 turn.

- Extract and replace plug (pos. 3) and stem (pos. 5).

Note:

DN 12 5-1 50 : Bolt new parts together, dr i l l an d pin them .


A R M A T U R E N



DN125v-150v

- Unscrew seat r ing (pos. 2 bottom) and renew or

recondit ion.

- Slacken nuts (pos. 24) by about 2-3 turns.

- Extract and replace plug (pos. 3) and stem

(pos. 5).


(For tightening torques refer to item 7.3.2.)

2 (top)



Changing the to p seat r ing:

- Dismantle seat r ing, plug and stem as described

above.


- Detach stuff ing box housing (pes. 39).

- Unscrew seat r ing (pes. 2 top) and renew or

recondit ion. (For t ightening torq ues refer to

item 7.3.2.)


- Assemble in reverse order

- Secure with nuts (pos. 11) and t ighten them

crosswise.

2 (bottom)

A R M A T U R E N


3-way co ntro l va lve s - STEVI® 450 / 451

7.2.2 Diverting plug de sign

DN40-150

- Slacken screw joint (pos. 19 and 24) by about 1

turn.


- Detach mounting bonnet (pos. 7).

- Loose nut (pos. 4) and pull plug (pos. 31) with

distance bush (pos. 32) down.

Note:



There is no distance bush (pos. 32) in DN125-150.

- Pul l plug (pos. 40) with stem (pos. 41) up and

replace.

Note:

DN

125 -15 0: Bolt new p arts together, dri l l and pin

them.

- Unscrew seat r ings (pos. 2 bottom and top) and

renew or recondit ion.

(For tightening torques refer to item 7.3.2)



- Secure with nuts (pos. 11) and t ighten them

crosswise.

2 (bottom;

A R M A T U R E N


3-way

con tro l valves - STEVI®

450

/ 451

7.3 Tightening torques

7.3.1 Tightening torques for hexagon nuts

M 1 0 = 1 5 - 3 0 N m

M 1 2 = 3 5 - 5 0 N m

M 16 = 8 0 - 1 2 0 Nm

M 20 = 150 -200 Nm

7.3.2 Tightening torques for seat rings



DN 15 /20

DN 25/ 32

DN 40/ 50

D N 6 5

D N 8 0

DN100

D N 1 2 5 / 1 2 5 V

D N 1 5 0 / 1 5 0 V

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

100 Nm

150 Nm

350 Nm

480 Nm

660 Nm

980 Nm

1450 Nm

2000 Nm

Refer to operating and installation instructions for actuator

concerned for installing actuators

A R M A T U R E N



9.0 Troubleshooting table

A

ATTENTION

- read item 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work

- read item 6.0 before restarting the plant

Fault

No flow

Possible cause

Valve closed

Flange covers

not

removed

Corrective m easures

Open valve (using actuator)

Remove flange covers



Little flow

Stem m oves in jerks.

Stem

or

plug cannot

be

moved.

Valve

not

sufficiently ope n

Dirt sieve clogged

Piping system clogged

Kvs value

of

valve unsuitable

Stuffing box sealing too tight

(for valves with graph ite pacl<ings)

Valve plug slightly seized owing

to

solid

dirt particles

Seatring and plug clogged with dirt;

especially with V-port and perforated

plugs

Valve plug seized

in

seatring

or

guide

owing

to

deposits

or

dirt

in

medium

Open valve (using actuator)

Clean

/

replace sieve

Check piping system

Fit valve with higher Kvs value

Slacken screw joint (pos. 42/20 .17)

or

hexagon nuts (pos. 24) slightly;

valve must not start leaking

Clean internals, smooth rough spots.

Clean seatring and plug with suitable

solvent

Replace plug and sea tring; use parts

made from different material

if

neces

sary

A R M A T U R E N


3-way

control valves - STEVI® 450 / 451

10.0 Dism antling tlie valve or the top part

A

ATTENTION

The

following points must be

observed:

- Pressureless pipe system.

-

Medium must be

cool.

- Plant

must be

drained.

- Purge piping systems in case o f

caustic,

inflammable, aggressive or toxic

media.





Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG" valid at the time of delivery or, by way o f

departure, in the contract of sale itself.

We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the

confirmed application.

No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling

or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.

This warranty also does not cover any damage w hich occurs during operation under

conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.

Justified com plaints w ill be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist

A R M A T U R E N


3-way

control valves - STEVI®

45 0

/ 451

12 .0 EC dec la ra t ion o f conformi ty

/

iV Ianufacturers declarat ion

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG,

Mergelheide 56-60, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock

declaration of conform ity EC

as defined by

the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC




that according to the above mentioned Pressure Equipmen t Directive (PED) the below listed prod

ucts comply and have been approved according to table 6, annex II, module H through LLOYD'S

REGISTER QU ALITY ASSU RANCE (NB-No. 0525), Mönckebergstr. 27, D-20095 Hamburg.

Certificate-No: 50003/1

3-way

control valves

Type 45 0, 45 1, 423, 463, 483

Applied standard:

DIN EN 60534 part 1

VDIA/DE 3844 sheet 1

DIN 3840

AD 2000 leaflet A4

- Cast iron with spheroidal graphite

A R M A T U R E N

Operating and Installation Instructions

Thrust Actuator A RI-P REM IO



5.3 Instal lation inst ruc t ions for mo unt in g to valv es 16

5.3.1 M ount ing for valve- l i f t up to 30 mm (yoke ver s ion ) 16

5.3 .2 M ount ing for va lv e l if t over 30 mm to 80 mm (co lum n vers ion) 17

5.4 Elect r ical con ne ct ion 19

5.4 .1 Wir ing d iag ram AR I -PR EM IO 2.2 - 5 kN 19

5.4 .2 Wir ing d iagra m AR I -PR EM IO 12 -1 5 kN 20

5.4.2.1 ARI-PR EM IO 12 -1 5 kN 1 Ph~ / 3 Ph~ without reversing contactor 20

5.4.2.2 ARI-PR EM IO 12 -1 5 kN 1 Ph~ / 3 Ph~ with reversing contactor 21

5.4.3 Con nect ion 22

5.5 Se tt ings : 23

5.5.1 Torque and t rave l switch es - s tand ard featu re 23

5.5.2 Con nect ion boa rds PA or NA (only 2.2 - 5 kN) 23

5.5.3 Travel switch 24



5.5.3.1 Installation of additional trave l switches 24

5.5.3.2 Setting of standard travel switch (S3) 26

5.5.3.3 Setting the additional travel switches (S4/S5 and S24/S25) 27

5.5 .4 Potent iometers 28

5.5.4.1 Installing the potentiom eter 28

5.5.4.2 Setting the potentiometer 30

5.5.5 Heat ing 30

5.5.5.1 Installation of heating 30

5.5.6 Elect ronic pos i t ion indicator Ri2 1 32

5.5.7 Elect ronic pos i t ion control ler ES11 32

5.5.8 Elect ronic pos i t ion indicator (RI21 ) and pos i t ion control ler (ES11 ) toge ther in the actuator 33

5.5 .9 In tegra ted temp erature cont ro l le r dTR ON 16.1 34

5.5.9.1 Installation of the dTRO N 16.1 34

5.5.10 Integrated reve rs ing con tactor 35

5.5.10.1 Installing the reversing contac tor -. 35

5.5.10.2 Electrical connection with ES11 or dTRO N 16.1 35

5.5.11 Pha se con trol relay 36

5.5.11.1 Installing the phase control relay 36

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO

1.0 Ge nera l infornnation on op era ting instruc tions





and repair.



supervised and chec ked.




monitor the personne l.



The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.

These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.

2.0 Notes on poss ible dang ers



A

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PR EM IO

2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information

In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety

information are highlighted to attract special attention.

Information m arked with the above sym bol and

"ATTENTION "

describe practices, a

failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third

parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with

these practices and to m onitor com pliance.

All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating

and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions,



product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest

extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage

to property.

3.0 Storage and transport

Ä

ATTENTION

- Valve mountings such as drives, handwheels, i ioods must not be used to tai<e

external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing

aids,

or as

conne cting points for lifting gear.

Non-compliance m ay lead to death, injury or damage to property due to

persons falling or parts being dropped.

- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.

See "4.4 Technical data" for weights.

A R M A T U R E N



4 . 0 D escr i p t i on

4.1 Field of application

ARI-PREMIO linear thrust actuators are employed to actuate control or shut-off valves

requiring a nominal linear stroke distance of up to 80 mm and thrust from 2.2 kN to 15 kN.

The thrust a ctuators are set to the thrust forces specified in the technical da ta. If supplied

with the valve , the lift of the thrust actuator will be set to the stroke distanc e of the valve.

Selection of the proper actuator version in alignment with the corresponding fitting as well

as use of the thrust actuator in accordance with the specified technical data is the

responsibility of the systems engineer.



See data sheet for areas of application, application limits and potential.

Any use of the thrust actuator beyond the specified technical data or improper use of the

actuator is deemed to be not for the intended purpose.

The ambient conditions have to be conform to the actual electromagnetic compatibility

directives. Additional the compatibility to this directives has to be maintained in case of

expansion or other changing of the ambient conditions.

4.2 Method of functioning

The thrust actuator, fitted with a yoke or columns, is mounted to the valve.

Transfer offeree is effected via a coupling safeguarded against torsion.

The torsion safeguarding feature also serves as a lift indicator.

The lift settings can be read off on a lift dial attached to the yoke or betwee n the 2-ear

clamps mounted to the column.

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARl-PREIVIIO

4.3 Diagram

4.3.1 ARl-PRE M IO 2,2 - 5 kN

Yoke Vers ion

Column Vers ion



A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PREIVIIO

4.3.2

ARI-PREMIO

12 -1 5 kN



A R M A T U R E N



4.3.3 Parts list

50.1

50.1.1

50.2

50.3

Designation

Gearbox

Gearbox cover plate

Cable co nduit fitting

2.2-5l<N:

2 x P G 1 1

1 2 - 1 5 k N : 2 X P G 1 3 . 5 / 1 x P G 9

Blanking plate

50.34

50.35

50.36

50.37

50.38

50.39

Designation

Bellow

Grub screw DIN ISO 4766 - M6

Set co llar

Grub screw DIN 913-M3x5

Guide spindle

Hexagon nut DIN EN ISO 4034 - M5



50.4

50.5

50.6

50.7

50.8

50.9

50.10

50.11

50.12

50.12.1

Sealing plug 1 x PG11

Gasket

Hood

Hood seal

Counter-sunk screw DIN 7991-

M5x20

Sealing washer DIN EN ISO 7089

Column

Conical spring washer

Handwheel

Turning handle of handwheel

50.40

50.40.3

50.41

50.42

50.43

50.43.1

50.43.2

50.45

50.46

50.47

Synchronous motor, complete

Motor capacitor

Head cap screw

DIN EN IS0 47 62-M 4-18

Board support

Standard board

Directional switch (valve - up) S3

Torque switch

Shift lever

Washer

Wiring diagram sticker, standard

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PR EMIO

4.4 Technical data

Type

Thrust force l<N

Strol<e dista nce max. mm

Duty classification in accordance

with DIN VDE 0530

Control speed mm /sec.

Motor voltage

ARI-PREMIO

2,2 5,0

50

S1 -1 0 0 % duty cycle; S4 - 80% duty cycle

1200 c/h

0.25 ' 0.38 ; 0.38

230V - 50Hz / 60Hz *

1,0

12,0 15,0

80

SI -100% ED;

S4-50% ED 1200 c/h

0.79

0.38

230V - 50Hz



Power consumptionW

Torque switch

Travel switch

Enclosure IEC 60529

Max. permissible ambient

temperature

Handwheel

10.3 11.7 25.3 52.9

2 only, permanently w ired,

switching capacity 10A, 250V~

1 only, permanently w ired,

switching capacity 10A, 250V~

IP 65

-20 °C ... +70 °C

Yes (rotating during operation)

109 96

2 pes., permanently

wired

switching capacity

16A, 250V~

1 pes.,

permanently wired

switching capacity

16A, 250V-

Yes (engageable)

A R M A T U R E N



Accessories

Type

Thrust force

kN

I

Additional travel switches

ARI-PREMIO

2,2

5,0 12,0

15,0

2 additional travel switches, zero potential.

Switching capacity 10A, 250V

~

Additional travel switches

for

low-voltage

/

electronic system

2 additional travel switches, zero potential, with gold contacts,

fo r

low

breaking capacity a nd

in an

aggressive atmosphere,

switching capacity max.

0.1 A,

4-30V

Potentiometer max.

2

only Ohmage optional: 100, 20 0, 500, 1000, 1000 Ohm ;

1,5

Watt



Electronic position indicator

RI21

0(2)...

10V . 0(4)

...20mA, Only 1 potentiometer possible

Using the temperature controller, installation

is

only possible

in the

control

cabinet

Electronic position controller

ES

11

0(2)...

10V . 0(4)

...20mA, O nly

1

potentiometer possible

Not compatible for use with the temperatu re controller.

Heating resistor

(with automatic switching)

230V-50HZ, 115V-50HZ, 24V-50Hz, 15 Watt

Additional voltages

/

frequencies

24V

- 50 /

60Hz

1 1 5 V - 5 0 / 6 0 H Z '

24V-50HZ

24V -

60Hz*

115V-50Hz

115V-60HZ*

230V-60Hz*

24V

-

50Hz

24V

-

60Hz*

115V-50HZ

115V-60HZ*

230V

-

60Hz*

3~400V - 50Hz

3~400V

-

60Hz*

T I

cp'

CO

o

in

/////////////////////

Clearance required for

removal of hood

. 1 6 5 x 1 5 0

/////////////////////


removal of hood

/////////////////////


removal of hood

2 0 0 x 1 7 5

4^

b i

D

I'

(D

3

(A

5"

3

(A



ARI-PREMIO 2.2 - 5 kN

Nominal stroke max. 30 mm

J^K.

236

256

271

286

..X,

633

653

668

683

h

max.

30 mm

max.

50

mm

max.

65 mm

max.

80

mm

ARI-PREMIO 2.2 - 5 kN

Nominal stroke > 30 mm - 50 mm

ARI -PREMIO 12-15 kN

Nominal stroke max. 80 mm

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator A RI-P REM IO

5.0 Insta l la t ion

A

ATTENTION

' \ -

W ork on electrical systems or equipment m ust only be carried out by qu alified

electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supen/ision of

a

qualified electrician in compliance w ith regional electrical safety requ irements

and regulations.

- Valve mountings such as drives, handwheels, ho ods must n ot be used to take

external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as

conne cting points for lifting gear

Non-compliance m ay lead to death, injury or dam age to property due to



persons falling or parts being dropped.

- A ctuator comp onents which rotate or move during operation a re coloured red.

Crushing and injury hazard

5.1 General installation data

- In addition to gene ral installation g uidelines, the following points are required to be

observed:

- Planners / construction firms and operators are responsible for positioning and installing

the products.

A

ATTENTION

- A voltage is induce d in the thrust actuator mo tor This induction voltage may be

higher than the operating voltage.

A R M A T U R E N

Operating an d installation instructions


- Mains fuse rating max. 6A.

- C ircuit breakers in the plant to cut off the mains supply to the actuator.

- Conformity of technical data on thrust actuator with field conditions.

- Mains voltage in accordance with data specified on rating plate of thrust actuator.

- Thrust actuator complete with yoke or distance columns and coupling parts intended for

mounting to the corresponding valve.

- Ease o f access to installation s ite.

- Adequate clearance space above the thrust actuator for removing the hood



(refer to point 4.5 Dimensions).

- Install where there is protection against high-energy heat radiation.

- The ambient temperature must not exceed +70 °C.

If installed outdo ors, the thrust actuator must be provided with an additional cover to protect

against

-

rain,

- direct insulation,

- powerful draughts and

- dust.

In case of widely fluctuating am bient temp eratures and high atmospheric humidity, your are

recommended to install a heating resistor to minimise condensation buildup in the actuator.

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PREiVIIO

5.2 iVIanual operation

5.2.1 ARI-PREMIO 2.2 - 5 kN

A

ATTENTION

1

- The handwheel always rotates during motor-driven operation (running

indicator). Never activate manual operation while the motor is running.

Injury hazard

- In the manu al operating m ode pa y careful attention in the final positions tha t the

handwheel is only turned to the point where the torque switch trips (audible

click) as otherwise damage will be caused to the thrust actuator Since the

handwheel always follows during motor-driven operation (running indication),



never operate by h and while the motor is running - potential injury hazards

With the m otor in the stationary state, the thrust actuator can be run in the open and closed

state with the handwheel firmly meshed with the gear.

P roceed as follows:

- Swing out lever (50.12.1) from handwheel (50.12).

- Turning in clockwise direction --> closes valve.

- Turning in counter-clockwise direction - > opens valve.

Open Close

A R M A T U R E N



5.2.2 ARI-PREMIO 12 -15 kN

A

ATTENTION

- D o not attempt to engage manu al operation unti l the motor has stopped.

Switching over w hile the motor is running may dam age the thrust actuator.

- In the manua l operating mode pay careful attention in the final positions that the

handwheel is only turned to the point where the torque switch trips (audible

click) as otherwise damage will be caused to the thrust

actuator

With the motor in the stationary state, the thrust actuator can be run in the open and closed

state with the engagea ble hand whee l.



Proceed as follows:

- Fold the turning handle out of the handwheel (A)

- Turn the handwhee l slightly and push in the engaging button for manua l mode (B)

- > the button engages

- Turning in clockwise direction -> closes valve

- Turning in counter-clockwise direction - > opens valve

The m otor is no longer in mesh wh en the handwheel is engage d. The handwheel is

automatically disengaged when the motor starts and the motor is once more in mesh.

A R M A T U R E N



5 .3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves

5 .3.1 Mou nting for valve-lift up to 30 mm (yok e version)

A B C D E

turn

50.87

50.27

50.12.1



nut

•Vave spindle

ttf

å s::^Valvespi

Fig. 7

To moun t the thrust actuator to a valve hav ing a nom inal lift of up to 30 m m, proceed

as follow s:

- Screw coupling (50.27) out of torsion safety feature (50.32) of thrust actuator

(not illustrated).

- Pos ition valve cone approximately in mid lift position.

Fig.

A : - Turn flat hexagon nut if not present on valve spindle.

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PR EMIO

5 .3.2 Mounting for valve lift over 30 mm to 80 mm (column version)

A B C D E



5 0 . 8 7

5 0 . 2 7

lexagon nut

^aive spind le

Fig. 8

To mount the thrust actuator to a valve having a nom inal lift of over 30mm to 5 0mm ,

proceed as follows:

- Screw coupling (50.27) out of torsion safety feature (50.32) of thrust actuator

(not illustrated).

A R M A T U R E N


4B .^^-iiu^r,ii-iii-i> i Thrust actuator ARI-PREIVIIO

Move the valve to the lowest position.

Press 2-ear clamps (50.26) into position according to the stroke so they cannot

slip,

with the bottom clamp in the lowest valve position located directly below

torsion safety feature (50.32) and the top clamp in the highest valve position

located directly above the torsion safety feature.

M ove the valve to both travel positions and ch eck that it reaches them reliably.

Fold turning handle of handwheel (50.12.1) back in.

Make the electrical connection (see point "5.4 Electrical connection"). The

engaging button for manual mode (only 12-15 kN) disengages when the

motor starts up.



Set standard trave l switch S3 (see point 5.5.3.2 ).

F

g

9



f

3^

Rä

l

E

i

I

I

I«

a

^é

c

(

D

C

L

O

C

C

<

—

^

a

£

n

7i

-

O

)

<<

—

i^

•

C

Oo

^

-

^

^

0

0

2

F

g

1

P

2



I

M

U

X

a

:

s

i

£

i

I

8

^

i

f

T

5z

^

i

S

m

<

s

n<

^^

2

-

<<

<d

i

i

1

?

1

^

-I

f1

a

c

—

T

0

^

^

é

Ü

-

L

'

M

J

r

^

X

h

n

i

0

2

F

g

1



2

^

o

f

c

s

,

^

D

H

Æ

n

U

e

I

T

CI

Z

Æ

X

L

C

Q

o

H

d

-

n

^

E

s

^

0

0

2

A R M A T U R E N



5.4.3 Connection

A

ATTENTION

- Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified

electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a

qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical requirement and

regulations.

- Wh en connecting the thrust actuator the supply line m ust be disconnected from

the ma ins (no t live) during connection work. It must be imposs ible to switch the

power on unintentionally while the mains are disconnected in this way. Failure

to comply may result in death, serious injury or substantial damage to property.



To connect the thrust actuator up to the electrical power supply, proceed as follows:

- Run the thrust actuator a few mm out of the lower final position applying the manual mode.

- Loosen countersunk screw in hood, carefully remove hood in upward direction.

- Screw out one of the two cable inlets and re-assemble in the same w ay without the

supplied blank flange.

- Insert the conn ection line through this cable inlet until sufficient co nductor length is

available up to the corresponding terminals; then tighten the cable connection until the

connecting cable is clamped in place inside it.

- Strip connecting cable approx. 1-1.5 cm above cable inlet.

- Strip the individual conductors approx. 5mm away from the end and fit with conductor end

A R M A T U R E N



5.5 Settings

A

A

ATTENTION

- The thrust actuator may only be operated for a short time without the hood for

unavo idable setting operations to the potentiom eters, travel switches and the

electrical options. W hile these operations are in progress, the thrust actuator

has hazardous, live, uninsulated parts exposed as well as moving and rotating

parts.

- Improper execution of

the

setting operations or lack of

care

may cause d eath,

grievous bodily injury or substantial property damage.

- Operation of the thrust actuator without the hood for any purpose other than

that described above is strictly prohibited.



5 .5.1 Torque and travel switches - standard feature

As standard, thrust actuators are equipped with a load-dependent travel switch for the

closing direction (S1), a load-dependent travel switch for the opening direction (S2) and a

stroke-dependent travel switch for the opening direction (S3).

The load-dependent travel switches

(S1,

S 2) switch off the motor as soon as the factory-set

thrust force is attained.

A

ATTENTION

- The settings of the load-dependent travel switches must on no account

whatsoever be chan ged

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-P REM IO

The optional boards may only be installed at the factory due to the switching points of the

load-dependent switches having to be reset following installation of these boards

A

ATTENTION

" '^ - W hen using optional boards PA o r

N A ,

it mus t be warranted - due to the

operator's individual circuitry- that, when switching the load-dependent travel

switches

S11/21,

S12/S22 and S13/S23 the motor of

the

thrust actuator comes

to a standstill without

delay.

This function is not provided for on the optional boards PA and NA in the

supplied state

5.5.3 Travel switch



The thrust actuators can be equipped with an additional stroke-switch board containing two

travel switches (double-throw contact S4 and S5).

These switches can be set on infinitely variable lines over the entire stroke distance in both

lift directions and integrated at w ill into the facility control sys tem (no interlock-controlled

circuitry).

The maximum switching capacity of the switches (see point "4.4 Technical data") must not

be exceeded.

For low voltage (see point "4.4 Technical data"), the additional travel switches are supplied

with gold contacts (option: low-voltage travel switch).

5 .5.3.1 Installation of additional travel switches

To install additional travel switche s, proceed as follows .

- Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again

A R M A T U R E N



Proceed to strip the connecting cable that has been led in through the cable inlet and

fastened,

and connect the individual conductors to the terminal strip in accordance with

the desired circuitry and the wiring diagram.

Set switch points on travel switches in accordance with section 6.3.2. Setting the travel

switches

Insert motor connection plug in jack strip (50.43.4) provided for the purpose.

Insert mains connection plug in jack strip (50.43.3) provided for the purpose.

Carefully place hood onto gearbox and mount firmly on thrust actuator with rubber gasket

and countersunk screw.



50X4

50.62

A R M A T U R E N



5 .5.3.2 Setting of standard travel switch (S3)

On delivery of the thrust actuator, the standard travel switch (S3) is already set to the

existing valve-lift and the setting spindle for the travel switch S3 (50.51) is sealed with

screw glyptal.

This setting needs no changing for nornnal operation.

If reinstalling the thrust actuator on a straight-way valve, the travel switch S3 needs to be

set as follows:

- M ove valve out of the lowes t position so as to run valve-lift to up position.

- Using a screw driver, proc eed to turn setting spindle for switch S3 (50.51) until the trip cann

(50.54) arriving from below trips the switch (audible click).



- Run thrust actuator briefly in closing direction and then in opening direction once more,

checking to see whether the thrust actuator is switched off at the desired point (nominal

lift).

- If need be, correct the setting as described.

If reinstalling the thrust actuator on a three-way valve, the travel switch S3 needs to be set

as follows:

- Run valve in both final positions and check in each final position whether the valve

switches off via the load-dependent switch.

- Carry out a check in the top final position the see whether, after switching off the thrust

actuator, the trip cam (50.54) of the travel switch S3 is situated below switch S3 and has

not tripped the latter. If the trip cam (50.54) is situated above the travel sw itch S3 or trips

A R M A T U R E N



5.5 .3.3 Setting the additional travel switches (S4/S5 and S24 /S25 )

The two a dditional travel switches c an be freely set in both lift directions for indicating

certain valve positions.

To do this, proceed as follows :

- Run valve to desired position due to be indicated by the corresponding switch.

- Proceed to turn the setting spindle belonging to the appurtenant switch until the switch is

tripped (audible click).

- Run thrust actuator briefly in both directions, checking and, if need be, correcting the

setting.

The actuating feature on the travel switches is designed in such a way that both travel



switches can be overrun in both directions.

Standard design:

Fo rthat reaso n, care should be taken on additional travel switches to see that the actuating

state of the sw itches remains active on ly for a short time while the thrust actua tor co ntinues

to run and that switching back takes place afterwards.

The ac tuating state of the travel switches remains in force over a lift of 4 mm .

Special de sign:

At additional travel switches with extended switch levers, the actuating state of the travel

switches remains in force over a lift of 49 mm.

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator A RI-PRE MIO

5.5.4 Potentiometers

The potentiometers are used for electrical position acknowledgement on the facility control

system or for the options - electronic position controller ES11 or electronic position indicator

RI21

A maximum of 2 potentiometers can be installed (= 1 double potentiometer).

The potentiometers can be supplied with different resistance values (see point „4.4

Technical data").

For the electronic position controller ES11 and the electronic position indicator RI21 use

must be made solely of 1000 ohm potentiometers.

Conversion of the relevant valve-lift to the potentiometer angle of rotation is effected by

means of transmission determined in respect of each valve-lift between the toothed rack on



the trip slide and the pinion on the potentiometer shaft.

Use must only be made of the pinion specified for the valve-lift.

If the thrust actuator is supplied with the valve and built-in potentiome ter, the potentiome ter

is assembled and set ready for operation.

To achieve optimal electromagnetic compatibility it is recommended to use shielded cables

for connecting potentiometers or standardized active current or voltage signals.

5 .5.4.1 Installing the potentiometer

If retrofitting the potentiometer, proceed as follows:


accidentally.

A R M A T U R E N



Place hood carefully onto thrust actuator and fasten it on the actuator with rubber gasket

and countersunk screw.

red

grey

yellow



Fig. 13

X

50.47

A R M A T U R E N



5.5.4.2 Setting the potentiometer

To set the potentiometer, proceed as follows:

- Move thrust actuator to closing position.


accidentally.

- Turn potentiometer shaft in counter-clockwise direction until reaching the travel stop.

This places the potentiometer in the initial position (approx. 0 ohm).

- For checking purposes, the resistance of the potentiometer needs to be measured using

an ohmmeter.

- Measure resistance on potentiometer 1 between terminals 25 and 26 .

- M easure resistance on potentiometer 2 between terminals 28 and 29 .



- In this position of the actuator, the measured value should be approx. 0 ohm.

- Run thrust actuator to upper final position and read off corresponding resistance value on

ohmmeter.

- The resistance values thus measured need to be taken into account for the settings to the

facility control system .

5.5.5 Heating

A heating resistor can be fitted as a means of protection against the formation of

condensation water in cases involving widely varying ambient temperatures and high

atmospheric humidity (outdoor use). The heating resistor is self-regulating so that a

continuous supply of current merely needs to be connected up.

A R M A T U R E N



Mounting thread M3

for heating resistor

Mounting th read M3^

for

jacl<

strip

Mounting thread M3

for thermal circuit breal<er

Mounting thread M4

for options ES 11 and RI21

50.83.6

Fig.

15: Heating installation ARI-PREMIO

2.2-15

kN



50.83.1

50.83.2

50.83.3

Designation

Holding bracket

(Option: heating)

Head cap screw DIN 84-M3x8

Thermal circuit breaker

50.83.4

50.83.6

50.83.10

Designation

Jack strip

Connector, 2-pole

Heating resistor

A R M A T U R E N



5 .5.6 Electronic position indicator RI21

The electronic position indicator RI21 converts the resistance of the 1000 ohm

potentiometer corresponding to the lift into an optional output control signal 0 (2) ...10V DC

or 0 (4) ...20mA DC. For installing and setting the electronic po sition indicator RI21 the

operating instructions applicable to this unit must be observed in the appropriate valid

version. The corresponding operating instructions are supplied with each unit.

5 .5.7 Electronic position controller ES11

The electron ic position controller ES 11 converts co ntinuous input control signals 0 (2)

...10V DC or 0 (4) ...20mA into a 3-point output signal for the m otor, In which case

interrogation of the valve position takes place via a 1000 ohm potentiometer. For installing

and setting the e lectronic position controller ES11 the operating instructions applicable to



this unit must be observed in the appropriate valid version. The corresponding operating

instructions are supplied with each unit.

• 50,82

A R M A T U R E N



5 .5.8 Electronic position indicator (RI21) and position controller (ES11) toge ther in

the actuator

Except or the 5 kN , 12 kN and 15 kN type in 24V ve rsion , the e lectronic position indicator

RI21 and the electronic position controller

E S 1 1

can be build-in together in the A R I-

PREMIO.

It must be used a double potentiometer with 1000/1000 Ohm.

To install the R I21 and ES11 proceed a s follows:


accidentally.

- Loosen counter-sunk screw in hood, carefully remove hood.

- Mount RI21 and ES11 with mounting kit according to Fig. 17 .



5 0 8 2

5 0 1 0 6

5 0 6 7

A R M A T U R E N

Operating an d installation instructions


5 .5.9 Integrated tempe rature controller dTRON 16.1

The integrated temperature controller controls temperatures, which are measured by input-

connected tem perature sensors, to a m anual given setpoint by m eans of a three-step

output connected with the actuator.

5.5.9.1 Installation of the dTR ON 16.1

The dTR ON 16.1 can be mou nted in the ARI-PRE M IO as a complete unit with a mou nting

kit.

It cannot be combined w ith ES1 1.

To install the dTRO N 16.1 proceed as follows :

In addition to "5.4.3 Connection", the electrical connection of the dTRON 16.1 has to be

done in the following way:



- Mount the temperature controller on the gear plate by using the specific installation kit

(Fig.

18) .

- Plug in the connector X2 of the dTRON 16.1 to the plug-in connector

X1

(1/N, 1 1, 14) of

the actuator terminal.

- Connect the signal input and the individual wanted additional functions according the

wiring diagram to the dTRON 16 .1.

- Connect the power supply L I and N to the dTRO N 16 .1.

- For changing the working direction to heating signal = extending driving spindle, just

change the wires on the connectors 11 and 14.

A R M A T U R E N


Thru st actuator ARI-P REIVIIO

5.5.10 Integrated reversing contactor

The integrated reversing contactor is actuated using a 3-step input signal.

The reversing contactor swa ps over phases

L1,

L2 and L3 to achieve the desired direction

of rotation of the three-phase motor.

5 .5.10.1 Installing the reversing contactor

The reversing contactor can be mounted in the ARI-PR EM IO as a complete unit using a

mounting kit.

The reversing contactor can only be combined with one of the ES11, RI21 or tempe rature

controller options. It is also possible to install the heating and the phase control relay.

Proceed as follows to install the reversing contactor:

Switch off the mains voltage and take measures to prevent it being switched back on

inadvertently.



A

ATTENTION

- When the reversing contactor is installed without a phase control

relay,

the

thrust actuator may be dam aged if phases L1, L2 and L3 are wrongly

connected

The electrical connection procedure as described in 6.4.3 Connection is supplemented by

the following steps:

- Use the mounting kit to attach the reversing contactor to the gear plate (fig. 19).

- Con nect the three-phase conn ection L I , L2, L3 and the 3-step input signal as show n in

fig. 11.

- Wire up as shown in the table in fig. 10 if you are connecting the reversing contactor

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PR EM IO

5 .5.11 P hase control relay

The phase control relay monitors phases L1, L2 and L3 in the mains input supply. The

reversing contactor is only activated by the phase con trol relay providing phases L1, L2 and

L3 are connected correctly. This protects the thrust actuator.

5 .5.11.1 Installing the phas e control relay

The phase control relay is installed in the ARI-PREMIO next to the reversing contactor. It is

only possible to use the phase control relay in conjunction with the reversing contactor. It

cannot be combined with the dTR ON 16.1 temperature controller in the actuator.

Proceed as follows to install the phase control relay:

Switch off the mains voltage and take measures to prevent it being switched back on

inadvertently.



The electrical connection procedure as described in 6.4.3 Connection and 6.5.10 Integrated

Reversing C ontactor is supplemented by the following steps:

- Attach the phase control relay next to the reversing contactor

(fig.

19).

Conne ct the three-phase connection L I , L2, L3 and the 3-step input signal as shown in fig.

10.

50.105

50.57

Designation

Head cap screw

DIN EN ISO 47 62 -M 4x 10

A R M A T U R E N



6.0 P utt ing the actuato r into operat ion

A

ATTENTION

- Actuator componen ts which rotate or move d uring ope ration are coloured red.

Crushing or injury hazard

Before putting a new plant into operation o r restarting a plant after repairs or

modification, always make sure

that:

- all works has been completed

- Regional safety instructions must be observed as a matter of policy.

- hood of thrust actuator assembled.

W hen placing into service proceed as follows:

- Using the handwheel, run the thrust actuator to approximately mid lift position.



- Apply brief pulses to the thrust actuator for each direction of movement and check

whether the directions of movement correspond to those desired. If this is not the case,

the pulse lines governing the opening and closing action must be exchanged on the thrust

actuator.

- Run thrust actuator to the final position in each direction of movement and check whether

it switches off automatically and whether all externally moving parts are able to move

freely.

- If failing to function properly, check all installation and setting w ork p reviously carried out,

correcting if necessary, and afterwards place into service once again.

7.0 Care and m aintenanc e

The thrust actuator requires very little maintenance. Accordingly maintenance in specified

A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PREIVIIO

9 . 0 T r oub l eshoot i ng tab l e

A

A

ATTENTION I

- read point 10.0 a nd

11.0

prior to disman tling and repair work

- read point 6.0 be fore restarting the

plant

Fault

Thrust actuator fails to move

Possible Causes

Power failure

Fuse has blown

Thrust actuator not properly

connected

Remedy

Ascertain and eliminate cause

Replace fuse

Rectify connection on thrust

actuator in accordance with wiring



Short circuit due to:

- moisture

- wrong connection

- motor has burned out

Connector contacts not plugg ed in/

diagram

Ascertain exact cause,

- Dry the thrust actuator and

eliminate leakage

- Rectify connection on thrust

actuator in accordance with

wiring diagram

- Check whether the m ains voltage

agrees with the voltage specified

on the rating plate. Have motor

changed.

Insert connector firmly in jack strip

A R M A T U R E N


^Bi^^^-i.iiirinn.i-iri Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO

10.0 Dism antlem en t of thru st actua tor

A

A

A

ATTENTION

- The supply line for connecting up the thrust actuator must be in the dead state

i.e. disconnected while dismantlement work is being carried

out.

After being

disconnected, the mains power must be prevented from being switched back

on again accidentally.

- The system must be run down (depressurised state) as the valve cone is not

held without the thrust actuator and wou ld thus be conducted by the system

pressure.

- Valve plug approximately in mid lift position - on no account supported inside a

seat

To disma ntle the thrust actuator proce ed as follows:



- Loosen counter-sunk screw in hoo d, carefully rem ove hood.

- Disconnect all cables led into thrust actuator from outside and remove from thrust

actuator.

- Place hood on carefully from above and fix in place with counter-sunk screw and rubber

gasket.

- Loosen grub screw inside torsion safety feature; screw coupling out of torsion safety

feature.

- Loosen clamping bolts connecting the thrust actuator to the fitting.

- Remove thrust actuator from valve.



A R M A T U R E N


Thrust actuator ARI-PRE MIO

12.0 EC declaration of conformity

EC declaration of conformity

as defined by

Directive about electromagnetic compatibility 89/336/EEC and the

EG-Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC

Declaration of the manufacturer

as defined by

the M achinery Directive 98/37/EC




ARI-Armaturen A lbert Richter GmbH & Co. KG,

M ergeiheide 56-60 , 33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock

that the supplied model of

electric thrust actuator AR I-PREM IO

In the delivered version complies with the following regulations:

- Directive about electromagnetic compatibility 89/336/EEC

(amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC)

Applied harm onized standards:

Data sheet

Pressure switches and the rm os tats , type KPS

Description

_ .^-- ,^

- n H S ^ ^

)

€ f |



W

¥

•ß.

, ^ ä ^ f c

mk

f

'

^f\M

U

PS units are press ure-controlled switches.

The position of the contacts depends on the

pressure in the I nlet con nection an d the set

scale value. In this series, special attention has

been given to m eeting im portant dem ands

for:

• a high level of enclosure,

• robust and compact construction,

The KPS series covers mo st o utdo or as well as indoor

application requirements.

KPS pressure switches are suitable for use in alarm

and re gula tion systems in factories, diesel plant,

compressors, power stations and on board ship.

Data sheet

Pressure switches an d therm ostats, ty pe KPS

Approvals

Ship approvals

EN 60 947-4-1

EN 60 947-5-1

American Bureau of Shipping

Lloyds Register of

Shipping,

UK

Germanischer Lloyd , Germany

Bureau Veritas, France

Includes thermostats with fixed sensor

and pressure controls with armoured

capillary tube.

Reglstro Itallano Navale, Italy

Unde rwriters Laboratories Inc., USA

CCC, China Compulsory Certificate

RMRS, M aritim e Register of Ship ping, Russia

Nippon KaijI

Kyokal,

Japan

CCS, China Classification Society

Survey

Type KPS pressure switches



1. Standard pressure switches

-1 0 10 20

30 40 50

60 bar

Range

P

e

bar

0-2 .5

0-3 .5

0 - 8

6 - 1 8

10-35

Type

KPS

3 1

KPS

33

KPS

35

KPS 37

KPS 39

Further

informat ion

page

3

3

3

3

3

2. Type KPS pressure switches for high pressure and strongly pulsating media

-1 0 10 20

30 40

50

60 bar

Range

P.

bar

1-10

4 - 4 0

Type

KPS 43

KPS 45

Further

informat ion

page

3

3

Data sheet

Pressure switches and th ermo stats, typ e KPS

Technical data and or dering

When ordering, please state

type and code number

1.

Pressure switches

7-

KPS

31,33

Sett ing range

P

e

[bar]

0-2.5

0-2.5

0-3.5

0-3.5

0 - 8

0 - 8

0 - 8

6 - 1 8

6 - 1 8

Adjus table/

fixed

differetial

[bar]

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.4-1.5

0.4-1.5

0.4

0.85 - 2.5

0.85 - 2.5

Permissible

operat ing

pressure P

[bar]

6

6

10

10

12

12

12

22

22

Max. test

pressure

[bar]

6

6

10

10

12

12

12

27

27

Pressure

connect ion

G 1/4

G

3/8 A

G 1/4

G 3/8 A

G l / 4

G 3 /8 A

G l / 4

G l / 4

G 3 /8 A

Code no.

060-311066

060-310966

060-310466

060-310366

060-310566

060-310066

060-310866

060-310666

060-310166

Type

KPS

31

KPS

31

KPS 33

KPS

3 3

KPS 35

KPS 3 5

KPS

3 5

KPS 3 7

KPS 3 7



KPS

35 , 37 , 39

10-35

10-35

2.0-6

2 . 0 -6

45

45

53

53

G l / 4

G 3/8 A

060-310766

060-310266

KPS 39

KPS 3 9

2

Pressure switches for high pressure and strongly pulsating media

Setting

range P

[bar]

1-10

4 - 4 0

6 - 6 0

Adjustable

diff. see aiso

f igs.

1,2,

and 3

0.7-2.8

2.2 -11

3.5 -17

Permissible

overpres

sure

[bar]

120

120

120

Max. test

pressure

[bar]

180

180

180

M i n . burst

pressure

[bar]

240

240

240

Pressure

connect ion

G 1/4

G 1/4

G l / 4

Code no.

060-312066

060-312166

060-312266

Type

KPS 43

KPS 45

KPS 47

Terminology

Range setting

The pressure range within w hich the unit wi l l give

a signal (contact changeover).

Max. test pressure

The highest pressure the unit may be subjected

to w he n, for example, test ing the system for leak

age.

Data sheet Pressure switches and therm ostats, type KPS

Switch

Single pole changeover (SPOT)

Contact material: Gold-plated silver contact

Contact load

(whe n Au surface is burnt away)

1.

Alternating current:

Ohm ic: 10 A,440V,AC-1

Induct ive : 6A,440V,AC-3

4A,440V,AC-15

Startin g curre nt max. 50 A (locked rotor)

2. Direct current: 12

W,

22 0 V, DC-13

Ambient temperature

KPS 31 -39 : -40 to+ 70 "C

KPS 43 -47 : -25 to+ 70 °C

Temperature of m edium

K P S 31-39 : -40 to+100°C

KPS

43-4 7:- 25 to+ 100 °C

For wate r an d seawa ter, max. 80°C.

Vibration resistance

Vibration-stable in the range 2-30 Hz,

am plitud e 1.1 m m og 30-300 Hz, 4 G.

Enclosure

IP 67 t o IEC 529 a n DIN 40050.

The pressure switch housing is enam elled



1 0 0 0 -

pressure die cast alum inium (GD-AISi 12). The

cover is fastened by four screws whi ch are

anchored to p reven t loss.

The enclosure can be sealed wit h wi re.

Cable entry

Pg 13.5 for cable diameters from 5 to 14 mm .

Identification

The type des ignat ion and code no . of the unit is

stamped in the side of the housing.

Scale accuracy

KPS 3 1: ±0.2 bar

KPS 3 3: ±0.3 bar

KPS

3 9:

±3.0 bar

KPS 43 : ±1.0 bar

Data sheet

Pressure sw itches and th erm ostats, type KPS

Installation Installation

KPS pressure switches are fitte d wi th a 3 mm steel

mou nting plate. The units should n ot be al lowed

to hang from the pressure connect ion.

Pressure connection

When f i t t in g or removing pressure l ines, the

spanner f lats on the pressure conn ect ion should

be used to ap ply cou nter- torque.

Steam plant

To prote ct the pressure eleme nt from excessive

heat, the insert ion of a water- f i l led loop is

recommended. The loop can, for example , be

made of 10 mm copper tub e as shown in

f ig .

5.

Setting

When the pressure switch cover is removed, and

th e lockin g screw (5) is loosened, the range can

be set with the sp indle (1) whi le at the same t ime

th e scale (2) is bein g

read.

In units having an ad

justable differential, the spindle (3) must be used

to make the adjustment.

The

di f ferent ial ob tained

can be read dire ct on th e scale (4) or, w ith types

KPS 43,45 ,47, can be determined by reading the

scale value and using the nomo grams In figs. 1,2,

3 (page 3).The wo rk ing l ine for determin ing t he

differen tial mu st not intersect the shaded areas in

the nomograms.



1.

Range spind le

2. Range scale

3. Differential spindle

4. Differential scale

Data sheet

Pressure switches and therm ostats, ty pe KPS

Function 1.KPS 31

Contacts 1-2 m ake and contacts 1-4 break wh en

the pressure falls under th e set range

value.

The

contacts changeover to their initial position when

the pressure again rises to the set range value

plus the differential (see fig. 8).

I. Alarm for fallin g pressure given at the set

range value.

II. Alarm for rising pressure given at the set

range value plus the differential.

Scale setting

o 4

2



Mechanical \^^^^^

differential

Fig.

8

2.

Al l other KPS pressure switches

Contacts 1-4 make and contacts 1-2 break w hen

the pressure rises above the set range value. The

contacts changeover to their initial position when

the pressure again fails to th e range value minus

the differe ntial (see f ig. 9).

I. Alarm for rising pressure given at the set

rangevalue.

II. Alarm for falling pressure given at th e set

range value minu s the differential.

Data sheet Pressure switches and therm ostats , type KPS

Dimensions a nd weigFit

@

- 1 1 6 -

- 9 0 -

- 6 8 -

-^ ^

y

KPS 31,33

0

= » — \— ^

1

KPS

43 ,45 ,47

1

1

1

1

S

o

1



BJ

Weight :

KPS

31

- 39 approx. 1.0 kg

KPS 43-47 appro x . 1.3 kg

Data sheet

Pressure sw itches and therm ostats, typ e KPS

Accessories

Part

Connector wi th

nipple

Connector wi th

nipple

Reducer

Adapter

Nipple

Nipple

@

© L D ©

@

@ n ) ^

@ © >

e #

^ 0

« ^

Descr ipt ion

G 3/8 connector, nipp le and washer

(10 mm)

o.d.

x 6.5 m m i.d.), for braz

ing

G 3/8 connector, nipple and washer

(10 mm

o.d.

X 6.5 mm i.d.) for welding

G3/8 X 7/16-20UNF (1 /4 f l a re )

reduct ion wi th washer

G 3/8 X1/8 - 27 MPT with washer

G 3/8 o.d X 7/16 - 20 UNF (1/4 flare)

G 3/8 A -1 /4 NPT wit h washer

Code no.

017-436866

017-422966

017-420566

060-333466

060-324066

060-333566



Adapter

Nipple

Damping coi l

Damping coi l

o®D

0 @ @1

^

^

G 3/8 X1/4 -18 NPT wi th washer

G 1 / 4 A x G 3 / 8 A

G 1 /4 A X

o.d.

M l 0 X1 wit h washer

Damp ing coil wi th 1/4 f lare

connectors and 1 m copp er capil lary

t ube . Damping coils used for applica

t ions w ith 3/8 RG

connector requires the use of reducer.

For informations ab ou t capillary tube

lengths, please co ntact Danfoss

Dam ping coil wi th G 3/8 connectors

and

1.5 m copper cap il lary tub e

060-333666

060-333266

060-333866

060-007166

060-104766

Data sheet

Pressure switches and thermostats, type KPS

Tliermostats

Description

KPS thermostats are temp erature-control led

switches. The position o f the contacts depends

on the tempe rature o f the sensor and the set

scale value. In this series, special attention has

been given to m eeting demand s fo r:

• a high level of enclosure,

• robust and compact construction ,

• resistance to shock and vibr atio n.

Th e KPS series covers most ou tdo or as well as

indoor application requirements.

KPS thermostats are suitable for use in mo nitoring ,

alarm and re gulatio n systems in factories, diesel

plant, compressors, power stations and o n board

ship.

Approvals

Ship approvals

EN 60 947-4-1

EN 60 947-5-1

Det norske Veritas, Norway

American Bureau of Shipping

Lloyds Register of

Shipping,

UK

CCC,

China Compulsory Certificate

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., USA

Registro Italiano Navale, Italy

RMRS, Ma ritime Register of Shipping, Russia

Nippon Kaiji

Kyokai,

Japan



Germanischer Lloyd, Germany

Bureau Veritas , France

Includes thermostats w ith fixe d sensor and

pressure controls with armoured capillary tube.

CCS,

China Classification Society

Technical data and orde ring

Wheno

Setting

range

"C

- 1 0 - 3 0

rdering

Mech.

diff.

adjust

able/

f ixed

°C

3 - 1 0

please state type and code number

Max.

sensor

temp.

'C

80

Suitable sensor length

see also'Accessories"

m m

65

75 110

160

Cap.

tube

length

m

2

\ C D i

" f e r

1

Code no.

1« 0

n l

o l

iKrsi

060L311266

[

JO OT

o

IÄ5

oJ

060L311366

Type

KPS 76

Data sheet Pressure switches and therm ostats, typ e KPS

nnA

i

1000-

500

400

300

200

100

Contact load (Alternating

current):

(whe n Au surface Is burned away)

Ohm ic: 10 A,440V,AC-1

Induc tive: 6 A, 440 V, AC-3

4 A, 440

V,

AC-15

Starting c urrent m ax. 50 A (locked rotor)

Am bient temperature -40 to +70 °C

Vibration

resistance

Vibration-stable in the range 2-30 Hz, amplitude

1.1 mm og 30-300 Hz, 4 G.

Enclosure

IP 67 to IEC 529 an d DIN 40050.

The thermostat housing is enamelled pressure

die cast alu min ium (GlD-AISi 12).The cover is



60 I 1001 1401180 1220

80 120 160 200

Fig.l

Curve A gives the maximum load.

Hatched area

B:

Acceptable load for

the

gold

plating of the contact.

fastened by four screws which are anchore d to

preven t loss.

The enclosure can be sealed wi th fuse wire .

Cable

entry

Pg 13.5 for cable diameters from 5 to 14 m m .

identification

The type des ignatio n and code no. of the u nit is

stamped in the side of the housing.

Scale accuracy

KPS 76: ± 3 "C

KPS

77:

± 3 °C

KPS

80:

+3 °C

KPS

81:

±6°C

Data sheet

Pressure switches and the rmosta ts, type KPS

Installation

Installation

Location of u nit :

KPS

thermostats are designed t o

withstand the shocks that

occur,

e.g. in ships, on

compressors and in large machine installations.

KPS

thermostats w ith remote sensor are f i t ted

wi th a base of

3

m m steel plate for f ix ing to

bulkheads, etc. KPS thermostats with bulb sensor

are self-support ing from th e sensor pocket.

Resistance to media

Ma terial specifications for sensor pockets:

Sensor

pocket,

brass

The tub e is made of

M s

72 to DIN 17660, the

threaded por t ion of So Ms 58Pb to DIN 17661.

Flow velocity o f the med ium is also of s ignif i

cance. (The optimum flow velocity for liquids is

about 0.3 m/s).

For permissible media pressure see fig. 2.

ba r

2 0 0 -

150 -

100 -

80 -

6 0 -

4 0 -

3 0 -

2 0 -

y—Brass j — S t a i n l e s s s t e e

1

-i

/

.S

ii

- 4 0 ' 6 2 0 ' 6 0 ' l b o ' l 4 o ' l 8 o ' 2 2 o ' 2 4 o ' 2 8 o ' °C

Fig. 2 . P e r m i s s i b l e m e d i a p r e s s u r e o n t h e



Sensorpod<et, stainless steel 18/8

Mater ial designation

1.4305

to DIN 17440.

Sensor position

As far as possible the sensor should be pos itione d

so tha t its long itud ina l axis is at righ t angles to

the dire ct ion of f low. The act ive part of the sensor

is 013 mm x 50 mm long on thermostats wit h

rigid sensors and 2 m cap illary tu be. The active

length o n the other thermostats is 70 mm (5 m

and 8 m capillary tubes).

The

medium

The fastest react ion is obtained from a me dium

having high specif ic heat and h igh therm al

Setting

Whe n the thermosta t cover is removed, and the

locking screw (5, fig. 3) is loosened, th e range can

be set with the spindle (1) whi le at the same t ime

the scale (2) is being

read.

In units having an adjustable differential, the

spind le (3) can be used w hile the scale (4) is

being

read.

5 \ ^

- — 3

1.Range

s p i n d l e

2 . R a n g e

sca le

3 . D i f f e ren t i a l

Data sheet

Pressure sw itches and therm ostats, ty pe KPS

Electrical connection

KPS thermostats are fitted with a Pg 13.5 screwed

cable entry suitable for cables from 5 to 14 mm .

Contact functio n is shown in Fig. 5

Fig.

5

4 2 1

M

i

Examples Example 1

A diesel engine w ith cooling water tem perature

of 85 °C (normal). An alarm must be tr iggered if

the c ooling water tempe rature exceeds 95 "C.

Choose a KPS 80 therm osta t (ra nge 70 to 120 °C).

Main s pind le setting: 95 °C.

Example 2

Find the necessary scale correction for a KPS 80

set at 95 °C in 50 °C am bient tem pera ture .

The relative scale setting Z can be calculated

from the fol lowing formula:



Differentia l spind le settin g: 5 °C.

The required alarm function is obtained by

connecting to thermostat terminals 1 -4. After

the sys tem has been in operati on, assess the

operating differential and make a correction if

necessary.

Setting value - m in , scale value x 100 = %

max. scale value - mi n. scale value

Relative scale set ting : 95 - 70 x100 = 50%

1 2 0 - 7 0

Factor for scale dev iation Z (fig. 4 page 11),

Z sO.7

Correction factor a (table under

f ig.

4

page 11) = 2.4

Scale corre ctio n = Z x a = 0.7 x 2.4 = 1.7 °C

Th e KPS m ust be se t at 95 + 1.7 = 96.7 °C

Data sheet

Pressure switches and therm ostats, type KPS

Accessories:

Sensor pockets

fo r KPS thermo stats

O

M g

V~

m A » 1 /

M 1 Ö X 1 . 3

Sensor

pocket

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

A

m m

65

75

75

75

75

no

110

110

110

160

160

200

200

200

Thread

B

1/2 NPT

1/2

NPT

G 1/2 A

G

3/8 A

G 1/2 A

(ISO

228/1)

1/2 NPT

G 1/2 A

G 1/2 A (ISO 228/1)

G 3/4 A (ISO 228/1)

G 1/2

A

G 3 /4 A (ISO 228/1)

G 1/2 A

G 1/2 A (ISO 228/1)

G 3/4 A (ISO 228/1)

Code no.

0 6 0 1 3 2 6 5 6 6

060L326466

060L326266

060L326666

0 6 0 1 3 2 8 1 6 6

060L328066

060L327166

060L340666

060L340366

060L326366

0 6 0 L 3 4 0 5 6 6

060L320666

060L340866

060L340266

Sensor

pocket

S t e e l

8/8

Steel 18/8

Steel 18/8

Steel 18(8

A

m

75

110

110

160

200

200

I

Thread

B

G1/ 2A

G 1/2 A

1/2 NPT

G 1/2 A

G 1/2 A

G 3/4 A

Code no.

060L326766

0601326866

060L327066

060L326966

060L323766

060L323866



Supplied without gland nut,

gask

sts

ana wasner

Brass

Brass

Brass

250

330

400

G 1/2

A

G 1/2

A

G 1/2 A

0 6 0 L 3 2 5 4 6 6

0 6 0 L 3 2 5 5 6 6

0 6 0 L 3 2 5 6 6 6

>

I - ' - lA

V

*'

• • ^ ^

- •

Part

Clamping band

Heat-conduct ive

Descript ion

For KPS thermostats w i th remote

sensor (L = 392 mm)

For KPS thermostats with sensor fitted in a sensor pocket. Compound for

f i l l ing sensor pocket to imp rove heat t ransfer betwe en pocket and sensor.

Code no.

017 -420466

Instructions

Pressure

Transm itters

Types MBS 32, MBS 33, MBS 33M,MBS 2050, MBS 2100, MBS 2150, MBS 2200, MBS 2250

MBS 3000, MBS

3050, MBS 3100,

MBS

3150,

MBS 3200, MBS 3250,

MBS 4010, MBS 4050, MBS 4500, MBS 4510

A

Elektrisk tilslutning :

Electrical conne ction:

Elektrischer Anschluss:

Raccordement électrique:

Conexiön electrica:

Connessione elettrica:

Se produktskilt

See

product label

Siehe Produktschild

Voir etiquette du p roduit

Ver la pecatina en el produao

Vedi etichetta sulla confezione

lEC 947-5-2, M 12 x1

ISO15170A1-3.2-Sn/Au



A

(4 pin)

AMP Econoseal, J-Series

AMP Super Seal,

1.5 Series (3 pin)

Instructions

A

^^

MBS 32, MBS 33

MBS33M

MBS

2100,

MBS

2200,

MBS

3000,

MBS 3100,

MBS

3200, MBS

4500

MBS

2050,

MBS 2150,

MBS 2250, MBS 3050,

MBS

3150,

MB S

3250,

MBS 4050

MBS 4010

MBS 4510



^

MBS4500/MBS4510

60 Nm

MBS 4500/MBS 4510

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S


P.O. Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohm w eg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail : r tmw®aalborg-industr ies.nl



Accoun t No. 25.75.69.618


BIC Code FTSBNL2R

Cer t i f ied

Company

WORKING PRINCIPLE OF Q UICK OPENING V ALV E

The Econ quick opening valve Fig. 100/432 SO, 100/433 SO, 100/436SO and 100/43 7SO

has been designed to open a thermic oil (fuel) line rapidly in case of em ergency.

Operating can be manual, pneumatic or hydraulic. The last two options make it possible

to open the valve by rem ote controle. Hydraulic operation can be effected by means of

an impulse unit Fig.107 and Fig. 108.

Fluid flow is with the pressure above the disc. The reason for this is that the line

pressure helps closing the disc when the valve is closed.

Let's assume that the valve is open. To get the valve in operational position, start by





pulling the lever nr.17 down (direction to the body). Block nr.7 will move downw ards

untU the lever nr. 17 reach the end stop, (spring nr.6 and 9 are under tension).

The va lve is now in the operational position.

: : : :

A A L B O R G

I N D U S T R I E S

Differential Pressure Switch

With integral Working Pressure Gauge and Micro Switch



General features

These differential pressure gauges are particularly intended for the

Scale ranges

per EN 837

Differential pressure gauge: 0 - 0.6 bar

Working pressure gauge:

0 - 0,6 bar

146



Dimensions

in mm

oo

« I

measuring medium chambers

A A L B O R G

I N D U S T R I E S

Design and operating principle.

Pressure p' and p^ are given in + and

separated by an elastic d iaph rag m( l).

The differential pressure (Ap=pi - p^) causes axial movement (measuring

travel) of the diaphragm against the measuring range spring (2).

The transmission of the differential pressure proportional to the th e

measuring travel to the movement (4) within the indicating case and to the

plungers of the microswitches (5) and is carried out pressure sealed and

with little friction by means of connection rod (3).

The overpressure protection is provided by contoured metal bolsters for the

elastic diaphragm (6).

The adju stme nt of the switchpoint is made by setpoint screws accessible

from the fro nt (7). The assistant scales (8) enable a relatively accurate

adjustment of the sw itchpoints over 270< ° and indicate the setpoint tha t is

I l lustrat ion of operating principle

3



momentarily adjusted.

Technical data

Accuracy class

Differential pressure gaug e: 2,5

Working pressure gauge: 4

Working pressure max.(static pressure) 25 bar

Overpressure safety

Must be on both sides max. 25 bar

Operat ing temperature

Ambient: -10....+70°C

Medium: +90°C maximum

Pointer

Differential pressure gauge: white aluminium

adjustable pointer

Working pressure gauge: black plastic

Zero adjustment for differential pressure gauge

By means of adjustable pointer

Case

GD-AISi 12 (Cu) 3.2982, black painted

Window Acrylic

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg Industr ies NL BV

P o Box 145

3200 AC Spljkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spljkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 181 650 500

Fax +31 181 650 501


No. 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail: r tmw@aalborg- indus tnes .n l

h t tp : / /www.aalborg- indus t r ies .com

Bankers: Rabobank, Hoogvl iet

Accou nt No. 32.95.68.094

Swif t -address: RAB0NL2U

Magnetically controlled level Indicator, type ITA

Indicates the fluid level of irritant, toxid or inflammable media with a se

paration of the measurement and indication area

The magnetic transfer of the fluid level from the tank to the indicator is

continuous and vibration-resistant

May be used for level measurements in non-pressurised and presssuri-

sed vessels


http://www.aalborg-industries.com/





perfect legibility of the indicator elements even from some distance away

and after several years since there is no turbidity of the UV radiation

caused by product contamination

Simple, break-resistant and maintenance-free construction

Great reliability even at high temperatures and pressures

Alarm contacts may be secured on any position of the level indicator

The indicator may be fitted with a measurement scale for volume or

height (as required by the client)

Floats without gas prestressing from a minimum density of 0,35 kg/dm^

Maximum process pressure for sealed floats: 220 bar; at higher

pressures the floats must be pressure relieved (not to be used for

f

to®

Magnetic level indicators

can be

equipped with

an

arbitrary num ber

of

switch contacts.

In

contrast

to

electric

float switches, switch contacts

may be

installed

at any

position

of the

stand pipe. Wherever additional float

chambers are used for f loat switches, magnetically controlled level indicators offer a considerable price

advantage.

to

®

Electrical level measurement transducers which use the displacem ent principle must be recalibrated each time

the fluid density

is

changed.

The pr ice

of a

magnetically controlled level indicator with integral electrical measurement transducer

is

considerably lower than level measurement transducers.

The reed chain with

an R/l

measurement transducer

can be

changed without interuppting operation.

The measurement chamber

is

hermetically sealed

—

there

is no

contact between

the

f luid chamber and

the

reed chain.

Anz e ige r

T y p : 420



Fig. 5: Indicator

type 420

1250ir.v^i

With

the

microprocessor-controlled level indicator

unit type 420,

the

level

can be

displayed direct

in

any arbitrary physical measurement unit.

The in

dicator

has a

curve calculator with which

non

linear tank contents

can be

displayed direct

in

cubic metres.

l i

INTRA level indicators — overview of standard deslg

Level indicators for low and medium pressures,

series ITA-3/6/7

• Parts in contact with tine me dium made as

standard of stainless steel (316Ti)

• Pressure ranges PN16 to PN 64

• DIN or AN SI connection flange s

• precise float desig n for the opera ting cond itions

• Versions up to 12 m length (in two sections )

• Special ma terials for special opera ting

conditions:

— titanium, Hastelloy C4, Inconel 625, 1.4539

— PTFE lining . (PN16 only)

• Acces sories: vent and drain flanges, valves,



reducer pieces, etc.

• In ITA-3.0/6.0/7.0 version s w ith C-stee l flan ge s

Fig.8:

ITA-3/PN16

Fig.

9: ITA-7/PN64

Level indicators made of plastic — series ITA-8

• Plastics is now an essential material in pipline and tank construction

• For util ity and waste water applications and for use in corrosive me dia,

level indicators made of plastic replace expensive constructions such as

lined metal tubes, ceramic or glass tubes

O

1

— 1 —

1

i

1

i—

U v e l indicators - - special versions and additionat equipment

Special versions:

a) Two-piece versions

to order or for measurement lengths of over 6 m

b)

Steam jacket

with thread or flange connection; for heating the indicator with steam or hot water,

eg . for viscous media

c) Level indicator with

PTFE lining,

for use in corrosive media

d) Level indicator in

GL design

(Germanischer Lloyd)

e) To act as an

overfilling guard

for tanks for storing inflammable and non-flammable fluids which pose a

threat to water

f) ITA cryogenic version for refrigerants

g) Special versions to meet the client's requirements for specific operating conditions

Additional equipment:



a) Heating belt to act as a frost guard for use in the open air

b) Vent/drain valves, screw or flange connection

c) Measurement scale, divisions to client's specification

d) Armaflex insulation

e) Protective hose, additional protection of the indicator rail against dust, dirt and moisture

Switches/Alarm contacts

Type Diagram

enclosure

max. switch rating

Operating temperature (ambient)

Magnetically Operated Levelgauges Type ITA-3 ... ITA-13

Instal lat ion and operat ion manual

I . I n s t a l l a t i o n

As soon as instrument is received it should be carefully inspected to determine



i-x

any damage incurred by shipment.

Check whether the dimens ions of the indicator correspond with your order.

After inspection the indicator is installed as per following instructions:

Float (3) and indicator (2) are packed seperately in the sam e cardboard. Remove

the service flange (5) and put the float into the indicator (2) engraving "TOP"

upwards (Marking example see page 2).

Note, avoid ferrous material coming in contact with the float, since it must be able

to move freely. The magnetic system is exactly installed at immersed level of the

float correspondmg to liquid density.

i n . Electric alarm con tacts

Electric alarm contacts can be m ounted in

any position and direction. Th ere is a collection of alarm

contacts selected by temperature and electrical

load.

cable 3m

(standard)



I V . S t a r t u p

1. Close drain valve and service flange

2 . Open valve lA very slowly

3 . Open valve IB very slowly

The liquid inside the float chamber now moves up to the same level as in the vessel.

When the float passes the wafers they rotate 180° showing the observer opposite face.

AALBORG

N o U s T « i t s

Surface-mounting Thermostat

Series A TH

^

^ ^ i

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ -



"

( *

Description

All necessary settings and possible adjustments are described in these Operating Instructions. If, however,

any difficulties should arise during start-up you are asked not to carry out any man ipulations on the

instruments which are not permitted.- You could endanger your rights under the instrument warranty.-

Please contact Aalborg Industries NL B.V.

Phone:

The Netherlands (+31 181 650 500)

Arrangements to DIN 3440 as

Type designation

ATH.-.. /

Thermostat, surface-mounting,

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Temperature probe w i th and w i thout pocket

The temperature is sensed by means of the temperature

probe.

The prob e must be immerse d in the medium for

its entire length, otherwise there are appreciable

deviations in the switching point.

1 cap illary

2 temperature probe

3 pocket

'A/ith probe mounting ES

the probe is secured by fitting attached to the capillary at

the factory.

Securing the thermostat case

UJ

w



Code s (rigid stem)

the boss of the case is secured in the enlarged open

end of the pocket w ith a f ixing screw.

Electrical connection

Opening the case

Unscrew the 2 screws 1 (suitable for lead sealing) on

the case top 2 and rem ove the case top 2

1 screws (suitable for lead sealing)

2 case top

3 case bottom

4 case boss

AALBORG

I N D U s

T

« 1

E

s

Different ia l ( l iqu id- f i l led)

monitor TW

monitor

STW(STB)

Differential

monitor TW

monitor

3+1%

6+2%

1.5±0.5%

5±1%

9+2/-1%

2±1 %

(gas-fi l led)

5+5%

9+2%

1.5±0.5%

standard

optional

extra charge

standard

optional

extra charge

standard

optional

extra charge

Permit ted ambient temperature at probe

in operation

max. end of scale +15 °C

min,

-50°C

Permit ted storage temperature

thermostat head, capillary, temperature probe

max. +50°C

min.

- 5 0 X

Operating med ium

water,

oil, air, dry steam

Time constant

in water 45 sec max. in oil



^

STW(STB)

7±2%

9+3%

2±1%

standard

optional

extra charge

steam

60 sec max, in air/dry

120 sec max.

Action

to EN 60 730-1

TW , IB

Type 2BL = automatic action with micro-

disconnection in opera tion; no auxiliary energy

supply required.

Protection

IP54 to EN 60 529

Suitable for use in usual (normal) polluted

situation

Switching point accuracy

(in % of span, based on setpoint,

at +22 "C)

controller TR

in upper third of scale ±1.5 % *

at start of sca le ±6 %

monitor/limiter TW. STB, TB. STW(STB)

in upper third of scale +0/-5%

at start of scale +0/-10%

AALBORG

: N D ; s • « : t s

Connection diagrams

Code 2

With changeover contact

, (

1

1 1 - h

' — ' r

2 4

1 -4 -•

J

i

1

2

4

f ^ ^ ^

After the temperature has dropped by approx. 10% of

span below set limit (safe temperature limit) the

1 _

I

I



microswitch can be reset.

- Reset the screw cap 1.

- Push the reset button 2 until the microswitch is reset.

- Screw the cap 1 back into position.

Monitor and limiter TW, TB.

Code 2

Remove the case top and adjust the setpoint

arm 1 with a screwdriver. Place the case top

bacl< into position and screw it dow n.

2

•

1

q=^

V

C ode ?

Remove the case top and adjust the setpoint

arm 1 with a screwdriver. Place the case top

back into position and screw it down.

(iE

Industry controllers K FM 93 W0.

operating instructions

B 93W 0_ E

- page

1

-

1 Digital display actual valu e

2 2nd digital display attand ant unit of

measure or name of input

3 LED-display relais func tion

4 Key for setpoint and param eter mode

5 Setpoint adjustment

6 Param eter mode lock switc h (back face)

DIN-certificate: TR (TW) 949 ..

3

:: Kg

Q QQ

3

1



Controllers type 93W0. are depending on hardware adjusted in one of up to four possible preconfigured

types: 200, 701 70 0, 700E. The adjusted type can be recognized at the type plate, furthermore at the display

by pressing the P-button longer than 5 seconds if the parameterlevel is locked.

Types -2 00 and -70 1 contains additional analog inputs and switching contacts for full load lock and

expansian tank high alarm. In deviation to the preconfigured types it is also possible to use all existing

hardware with special individual adjustments.

Indu stry con troller type 9... B 9... E

Installation and conn ection -

page 2 -

Installation:

Before installation inspect the controller for any visible signs of damage caused during transport

Check power supply ace. to name plate.

Push the housing from the front into the DIN- panel cut-out and secure from behind with the

fastening devices sup plied.

Electrical wiring:

Plug bar on the back face of the controller; connect up the controller at the rear following the

wiring diagram; wire cross section m ax. 1,5 mm ^

- To avoid cross interference

all low voltage measuring lines and pilot wires

must be encased

in a shielded cable (the shielding must be earthed one-sided).

- The control leads must be fused

externally lo

protect the output relays.

- Phase wire and neutral wire must not be transposed.



P utting into operation:

Switch on power supply. Digital display and control lamps will light up according to

the setpoint after some seconds. If nothing happens check the fine-wire fuse on the back panel

of the controller and the electrical wiring. Adjust set value and check other adjustments.

IVIaintenance:

All electronic controllers In the KFM range are virtually maintenance-free.

Provided that the

controller is correctly installed and put into operation and is protected against mechanical

damage and inadmissible operating conditions, it should give years of trouble-free service.

In case of faults

repair wo rk by the customer should be restricted to the externally accessible

leads and connections and components the customer is expressly permitted to deal with himself,

Industry controller KFM 9.

Operation

B 9 ... E

- page 3

Operating status:

The upper display shows the actual value (channel / meas uring input 1),

6 3 5

the lower display shows the attendant unit of measure (°C, °F, %, bar...)

(depending on the settings)

types 93W00 200 and 701

only:

Switch over the upper display to the further actual values by pressing the O key,

the lower display shows the number of the attendant measuring input

("Ist2" = return temperature)

or an abbreviation of the input's name ("EP tH" = exp ansion tank high).

Return to operating level:

Press O - key shortly (or automatically after 30 seconds without any key-action)



Setpoint value setting:

5P

6 3 5

press B - key shortly (do no t hold down)

Th e upper display shows the abbreviation of

the activated setpoint adjustment mode,

the lower display shows the adjusted value.

The indicated value can now be changed by the D (lower) and O (higher) -keys.

Each variation of the set value is immediately active, without any more operating steps.

The arrow keys have a built-in accelerator mode:

Industry controller type KFM 9.

Parameter level

B 9... E

-

page 4

Access from operating level.

Unlock

the access first:

Turn the switch on the rear panel of the controller to position "U " = unlocked

(Lock acce ss after the adjustments: S witch position to "L" = locked).

After the parameter level (refer to the instructions to each level) has been invoked,

the first setting is shown and can be modified.

It is n ot possible to invoke the parameter level whe n the switch is locked.

In this case the d isplay shows the abbreviation o f

the

configured con troller type.

Confirm the entry and / or

move on

to next param eter:

press the Q -key briefly

Settings in detail:fnof ava ilable on all types)

Invoke: Hold down the B - key for more than 5 sec until the display changes

P

t y p

70 /

Level 1:



Code

Code number, password (1...9999)

factory setting:

1

Configuration 200:

Sd 1

switching difference for contact no.1

SA2 switching interval for contact no.2

Sd2 switching difference for contact no.2

SP 4 set point for independent contact no.4

Sd4

switching difference for additional contact no.4

SP 5

set point for independent additional contact no.5

Sd5

switching difference for additional contact no.5

Configuration 701:

3,0

5,0*

3,0

80,0

1,0

80,0

1,0

notes:

Industry controller type 9.. B 9... E

Optimization -

page 5 -

1.

manual optimization

An optimum adaptation of the control parameters (P,I,D) is necessary in order to balance

an appearing deviation as quickly, non-oscillating and exactly as possible,

according to the given op erating conditions.

Generally these adjustments require a lot of professional knowledge that cannot be replaced

by this brief information.

The following informations are for help purpose only:

P

=

proportional band Xp

(%):

/overvalue =/onger impulses, more sensitive reaction

highervalue -

srtorfer impulses, less sensitive reaction

Examples: -

Oscillating temperature without distinct initial overshot: Xp too low;

- The setpoint is reached very slowly after initial exceeding: Xp too high.

I

=

integral action time I n (min):



/oi/vervalue= shorter impulse gaps, faster balancing

higherva\ue=

/onger impulse gaps, slower balancing

Examples: -

the set va lue is reached very slowly without overshooting: Tn too high;

- high initial overshot followed by fading oscillation: Tn too low.

D

=

rate time Tv (m in):

increases the controller reaction in case of fast actual value or setpoint alterations

(adjust only if necessary). Higher values cause higher increase.

2. Self-adaptation

The self-adaptation is an automatic procedure that determines and self-adjusts

Indus try con troller type KFM 9.

Configuration

B 9... E

- page 6 -

CodE

0

Cod I

/

ConF

ID I

Access from the operating level.

Unlock

the access first: Turn the switch on the rear panel of the controller to position "U"

(= unlocked). It Is no t possible to configure the controller with locked switch.

(Lock access after the adjustments: Switch position to "L"= locked)

Hold down the O - key and press the D - key,

hold down both keys for more than 5 sec. until the display changes

Enter the code number (password)

I1. . .D

(1...9999), factory setting: 1

move on

to next input: orieffy press D - key

Alternatively: Hold down key after entering code for more than 10 sec.

Possibility to modify code number (optional)

Select control function (type dependent): the displayed ID number for the configured

control function can b e changed by pressing the D - key:

-



700 Three point step controller (temperature)

700E= Three point step controller (pressure)

only Type 93W00:

200 = 2 stage controller with additional contacts and a dvices

701 = Three point step controller (temperature) with additiona l contac ts and advices

Return

to operating lev el: briefly press the

B

- key

or

move on to following adjustments: hold down Q - key for more than 5 sec.

Note: w hen switching is continued after a function has been changed, the display will first

flash for several seconds, only then w ill the controller return to the selected level.

Industrial controller type 9..

Facilities for Setting Supplementary Contacts

B 9... E

- page 7

-

Selectable switching functions

(depending on version):

For setting please refer to configuration leve l under „reL..'

Switching functions for trailing c ontacts :

LC A

Break contact on either side of setpoint

(Limit comparator). Relay drops out as

deviation increases (Aus = off)

LC E M ake contact on either side of setpoint

(Limit com parator). Relay picks up as

deviation increases (Ein = on)

Su

A Break contact below setpoint. Relay drops

out as actual value decreases (Aus

-

off)

Su

E M ake contact below setpoint. Relay picks

up as actual value decreases (Ein = on)

A Break contact above setpoint. Relay drops

off

1 x=r

off

on

of f

on

off

l Ä ^

X ^

S d ^

SA

W I

A -

1 TZI

A -



So

out as actual value increases (Aus = off)

So E Make contact above setpoint. Relay picks

up as actual value increases (Ein

-

on)

St

A Heating stage below setpoint. Relay

drops out actual value increases

(Aus

=

off)

Switching functions for independent contacts:

US A

Relay drops out with increasing actual

on

off

on

off

o f f

T^,

1

^ÄHT

iZT

1 rg

^ d

u

actua l va l ue

S P

(se tpo in t )

Industry controller KFM 9.

Wiring diagrams

B9E

page 8 -

Wir ing d ia gram conf "2 00" (Type 93W00.. ): Example for co nne ct ing a 2 stage burner

A 927_W H I 0110118

controller electronics

measur ing input s

r iFuse:

[J230V:T0,1A

power supply relay outputs

LLL

99 10

JsM

11

1st? IsLa

^m^m'S

2 7

28 29

Rsl 1

5 0 5 l |

1 52

Bfil 2

53 54 55

Bel 3 Rfil 4

56 57158 59 6o|61

BaL

62

63 64

L N (é)

supply return exp. tank

(protect relay outputs by external fuse 2A)

fu l l l oad expan s ion

stage 1 s tage 2 unu sed i^^k tank high

Wir ing d iagram conf

" 7 0 1 "

(Type 93W00. . ): Example for co nne ct ing a m od . burner



A927_WMl01101ie

controller electronics

mrarømR

1+

9 9

10 11

,

measur ing i r

St 1

1 2 3

•t]

4

i p u t s

St ?

5 6

^tJ

7

St 3

8 9

*

^

power supp l j

27 28 29

L N ®

/

Rel 1

5 0 5 l | 5 2

relay outputs

Re l ?

53 54 55

Rel 3

5 6 5 7 | 5 8

Rel 4

5 9 6 0 | 6 1

(p ro tec t re l ay ou tpu ts by ex te rna l f use ;

Rel f

62 63

A)

6 4

ful l load exp ans ion

i

AALBORG:;

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg Industries A/S

Gasvaerksvej 24

P 0 Box 844

9100 Aalborg

Denmark

CVR No. 17830635

Tel. +45 99 30 40 00

Fax +45 98 16 83 16

Telex 69705 albor dk

Giro No. 844-7756

VAT No. DK 17937677

E-mail: aal9aalborg-industries.dk

httpyAmvw.aalborg-lndustries.com

Bankers: Danske Bank A/S, Copenhagen

IBAN: DK 73 3000 3201 669138

Nordea A/S, Copenhagen

IBAN:

DK 30 2000 0270 344283

INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER

Instruction Manual

for VESTA™ MX

Table of contents for instruction m anual

1. General Description 1

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/aal9aalborg-industries.dk

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/httpyAmvw.aalborg-lndustries.com

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/httpyAmvw.aalborg-lndustries.com

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/aal9aalborg-industries.dk



2.

Installation Space Requirements 2

3.

Storage 3

4. Mounting and Installation 2

5. Connecting the Heat Exchanger 3

6. Operation 3

7. Conservation during shut down periods 4

8. Maintenance and Cleaning 4


Safety valve, thermometer, and pressure gauge may be mounted on a standard

outlet tube (optional).

Regulating equipment for either oil, steam or water is optional.

All heaters have been hydrostatic pressure tested before delivery.

Vesta MX heat exchangers have been type approved by all major classification

societies.

2. Installation Space Requirements

2.1. Space allowance

When mounting the heater sufficient space must be allowed for withdrawal of

the tube insert for cleaning, inspection, or replacement purposes.

Please refer to dimensional drawing for withdrawal space requirements.



2.2 . Installation surface

The heater must be placed on a level and stable surface.

3. Storage

3.1. Dam p and humidity

Store the heater only in a dry storage room before installation. If the room is


The steam trap (optional) should be mounted as close to the condensate outlet as

possible and somewhat lower. The steam trap is always to b e placed horizon

tally.

Place the heater

on the

surface and drill the ho les for

the

foundation bolts. Place

the bolts into the holes and tighten up.

Connecting the Heat Exchanger

5.1.

Preparation and pipe connection of tlie heat exchanger

Remove all plugs and cover flanges before connecting the heater. Make sure

sand and other impurities are removed from all connections. Set up the pipe con

nections and make sure that no forces are transferred to the heat exchanger.



Operation

6.1. Commissioning

Before start-up it is important to m ake sure that all connections are securely

tightened.

Before start-up it is equally important that the heater is filled

100%

with liquid

and that all connecting

pipes

are thoroughly air-vented.

NOTE: Remember

to

retighten th e air ventilation plug.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUB E HEATER

6.4. Output

The output of the heater is subject to the supply of dry saturated steam at the in

let steam valve . The steam pressure applied to be as basis heater size calculation.

The output is furthermore subject

to

correct tj pe of steam trap be ing used. C or

rect layout of the condensate system avoids nega tive effect of counter pressure.

Conservation during shut down periods

Corrosion occurrences in shut down periods are mainly caused by oxygen. The

corrosion occurs if non-distilled or alkaline water remains in the heat exchanger.

However, even when fully emptied, heaters are exposed to corrosion caused by

water residues or condensation. Hence, heaters out of service should be protected

against corrosion.

If the heater is out of service for an extended period of time - in particular du ringwinter seasons with

frost

- it must be carefully em ptied. Open the air escape

^ ^



valve and check for clogging.

f B ^

8. IVIaintenance and Cleaning

8.1. Regu lar cleaning periods

The heater should be cleaned regularly every six months by removing the tube

insert or at any time there is a decrease in output not related to other causes.

No te: The heat exchanger m ust be emptied before removing the tube section.


Dismantling and reassembling of the tube

section

The tube section is inserted

into

the heater and fastened tightly between the shell

flange and the end flange. The back end o f the tube section is not fixed.

The steam connection for primary steam m ust

be

dismantled before dismantling

the tube section for inspection, cleaning, etc.

The

tube flange has threaded holes

for dismantling screws and for mounting eyebolts for lifting devices.

Gasket surfaces are to be cleaned and protected against damage. New gaskets are

to be fitted every time the flange connection has been dismantled.

IMPORTANT: Fluid flow through the heat exchanger must be established be

fore the heating medium is applied.

Tighten all mam flange bo lts according to below schedule. Operate the heater for

one hour, stop, and retighten a ll bolts according

to

schedule.



Heater

main

flang e bolts tightening schedule (dry va lues) -

T16

types

MXIO

MX15

MX20

MX25

MX30

No bolts

8

8

12

12

12

Size

M16

M20

M20

M24

M24

Torque [Nm]

50

83

79

137

186

Tightening schedule

1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6

1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6

1 7 1 1 4 9 2 6 1 2 5 1 0 3 8

1 7 1 1 4 9 2 6 1 2 5 1 0 3 8

1 7 1 1 4 9 2 6 1 2 5 1 0 3 8

ucav.1 ipii ui

Type number changed

A 2S0900 \ JBL

Option I

•pt- 1^4

c q . . l

,1



1. Safefy valve

8750032 -10 Bar

875 0033 -15 B ar

5. Tube insert'

Ref. serial No.

T r a n s f e r G e a r P u m p s

O p e r a t i n g a n d M a i n t e n a n c e I n s t r u c t i o n s



L is t o f Conten ts

Safety

Safety Instruction Symbols

General Safety Instructions

Address of Manufacturer:

The D ocumentation

Description of Equipment

General

Specified Use

Construction

Technical Data

Explanation of Type Code

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

4

4



General Data

Overview of Nominal sizes

Overview of Materials

Overview of Operating Pressures

Pump installation and removal

Mechanical Installation

5

5

6

6

6

6

Safety

Safety Instruction Symbols

The safety notes contained in these ope rating instructions are iden tified by the following warning sym

bol.

A

If these warnings are not heeded , the consequence can be danger to life and limb and damage to

equipment..

Other notes, which do not w arn of danger, but which provide tips for optimum operation, are symbo

lised by a hand.



A

General Safety Instructions

The operat ing safe ty of the pump suppl ied is only guaranteed i f the pump is

us e d a s s pe c i f i e d (s e e "D e s c r i p t i on o f e qu i pme nt " ) . The s ta te d l i m i t i ng v a l ue s

(see "Technica l data" ) must not b .e exceeded under any c i rcumstances .

Personnel hav ing the responsibi l i ty for ins ta l l ing, operat ing or repa i r ing the

pump mus t pos s e s s the a ppr opr i a te qua l i f i c a t i ons ; the s e ma y ha v e be e n ob

ta i ne d th r ough t r a i n i ng or a ppr opr i a te i ns t r uc t i on . S uc h pe r s onne l mus t be

fa mi l i a r w i th the c onte n ts o f the s e ope r a t i ng i ns t r uc t i ons .

The Documentat ion

Thes e operating instructions des cribe the installation, the operation and the repair of

the

KRACHT

KF 4...80 tranfer gear pump.

The equipment is manufactured in various versions. The specific version can be identified from the

type label affixed to the pump. The format of the type designation and a detailed description of the

individual versions and nominal sizes is to be found in the "Technical da ta" section (see "Description of

equipment").

Descr ipt ion of Equipment

General

KRACHT pumps in the KF Series are outside gear wheel pumps, which operate according to the dis

placement principle. Two gear wheels which are rotating in mesh with each other cause an increase in

volume to occur as the spaces between the gear wheels are exposed at the pump inlet (suction side),

so that the medium can flow into the pump. Simultaneously, a corresponding volume is displaced at the

pump outlet (pressure side) through rotation of the gear teeth into the filled area va cated by the prece



ding teeth. The transport o f fluid is ach ieved through the entrainment a long the cavities between the

gear teeth and the walls of the gear cham bers. The so-called ge ometric delivery volum e V^ is displaced

per revolution of the gearwheels. A value

Vg„,

referred to as the nom inal volume , is used in technical

documentation to identify the pump size.

Gear wheel pumps are self-priming over a wide envelope. The described displacement process is in

itially achieved w ithout noticeable p ressure rise. It is only after the burde n of external loading is applied,

for example if

a

delivery head is impos ed, there is resistance at the pum p outlet, pipeline com ponents,

etc., that a working pressure must be generated to overcome these resistances.

D i s p l a c e me nt pumps mus t ne v e r be ope r a te d a ga i ns t "c l os e d v a l v e s " , s i nc e

Specified Use

The KF is a pump for the continuous delivery of fluids. The different types of seals available enable the

pump to be used for various media.

It must be ascertained that the m edium to be delivered is compatible with the materials used in the

construction of the pump (see "Technical data").

The maximum perm issible op erating data given in the "Technical data" section m ust be unconditionally

adhered to.

Construction

The drawing below illustrates the principle features of the KF pump.

8

1



Tec hnical Data

Explanation of Type Code

Example:

Product name

K F

Nominal size

V g = 4 / 5 / 6 , 3 / 8 / 1 0 / 1 2 , 5

1 6 / 2 0 / 2 5 c m ^

V g = 3 2 / 4 0 / 5 0 / 6 3 / 8 0 c m ^

4 0

Direction of rotation

R

= right

L = left

D 1 5



B = right and left

U = universal

(Direction of flow delivery remains th e sa-

rnea s the angle of rotation changes)

Mounting

F

= DIN flange without support bearing

G = DIN flange with support bearing

General Data

Type of construction

Materials

Type of mounting

Drive siiaft end

Pipe line connection

installed attitude

Viscosity

Ambient temperature

Filtering

min

V

max

u mm

Umax

External gear pump

see "M aterials" overview

Flange DIN ISO 3019

ISO R 775 short/cylindrical

KF 4 to 25 Whitworth - pipe thread

KF 32 to 80 SAE - flange connection

Arbitrary*

12 mm^/s

20000 mm%

-20

'C

60 "C

Filter fineness < 60 pm

*

With exception of universal version

(KF.

..U...)



Overview of Nominal sizes

Nominal size

4

geom. Delivery Volume

cm^

4,03

RPMF

" m l n

1/min

tange

max

1/min

perm, radial Force**

'^radial

N

Overview of Materials

Type of

seal*

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Housing /

Cover

GG25

Gear

Carburising

steel

(1.7139)

Bearing

P 1 0

Shaft se als

NBR

FPM

PTFE

PTFE

Carbonaceous (in synthetic resin),

CrMo-Guß.FKM,

1.4571

SiC-Si,FFKM,

1.4571

FPM

O-Ring

NBR

FPM

FEP

FEP

FP

FEP

FPM

*

se e

Type

label on pum p: KF...

Overview of Operating Pressures



Type of

sealing*

1

2

3

4

Suctio

Pemin** bar

-0,4

Operatinc

n side

P

bar

e max

1

10

1

pressure

Pressu

Pb

bar

25

re side

Pbn,3x bar

40

Temper

deliverec

1

, °C

-10

ature of

medium

max

90

150

200

• Al ignment of the Cou pl ing

When installing the coup ling, care should be taken that the dimens ion E is precisely maintained, so

that during operation the coup ling is free to move axially. In order that the e lastic toothed rim is not

exposed to pressure on its fac e, for axial movement, the dimension "E " is to be taken as a mini

mum.

Shaft with adjuster spring

sits in toothed rim ( d j

haft separation "E "

r

1

•

- ^

J

. 1 .

rn

E

• K

1

•m?i^^

S



Fig. 4

iKa

A

The given permissible misalignment values for the couplings represent general guidelines which ta

ke the loading of the cou pling into consideration up to the n ominal torque T| ,an operating rpm

n = 1500 and an ambient temperature o f +30°C. For operating conditions outs ide these limits,

KRACHT GmbH should be consulted.

The misalignment values a re individually applicable, in the ca se of a simultaneous o ccurrence they

should be applied proportionately.

The couplings can either take up a radial or an angular m isalignment.

If

the

shaft clearance dim ension is less than the coupling d imension "E", then one of

the

shaft ends

can extend into the toothed rim section. The dimension "d„" corresponds to the maximum shaft

diameter which, with the adjuster spring, is allowed to pene trate into the toothed rim, dimension "d„".

If it is possible to remove th e adjuster

spring,

i.e., only the sha ft penetrates into the toothed rim sec

tion, then the shaft dimension can be increased to up to 2 mm less than the given dimension "dH",

so that the axial freedom of m ovement of the toothed rim is no t restricted.

Rotat ing par ts must be protected by the customer aga inst unintent iona l c o n

t a c t

• Mount the pump on the pump supports or feet.

• Before installing the pump, clean the pipework, removing dirt, sand,

swarf,

etc. Welded pipes, in



particular, must be scoure d or scavange d. Do not use cotton waste/rags for cleaning purposes .

• Remove the protective stoppe rs in the pump suction and press ure connections.

• Determining the Direction of Rotation

The direction of rotation of the pump is determined as follows :

When viewed on the end

of the pum p shaft, the di

rection of supply is from

When viewed on the end

of the pump shaft, the di

rection of supply is from

• Suction P ipework

Provision of the suction pipework should be carried out with great

care,

since the operational beha

viour of the pump is greatly affected by this factor.

The suction pipe should be as short and as straight as possible. Additional sources of pipeline

resi

stance, such as formed parts and valves, should be avoided.

The reduced pressure in the suction pipe depends on the sum of all the resistances in the suction

line and the suction head, taking account of the data specific to the m edium in the line.

The suction can be checked by installing a vacuum meter on the pump/suction connection.

The permissible pressure at the pump inlet must not fail below the value p , „,„ given in the "Techn i

cal data" sec tion.

The only exception to this is the start-up condition of the pump , when a pressure of - 0.6 bar (suc

tion) is tolerable for up to 30 m inutes.

The nominal diameter of the suction line can be chosen to be considerably larger than that of the

pump connection.



'A

I f t h e p erm iss ib le va lu es ( see "T ech n ica l d a t a" ) a re exceed ed , t h e co n se

quence is a reduct ion in the del ivery vo lume (caused by reduced f i l l ing of

the pump) , h igher no ise level and cavi tat ion .

If hosing is used on the suction side of the pump , then this must be of adequate stability such that

the hose does not deform and constrict the flow under the suction effect.

The provision of a funnel-shaped suction opening or an oblique intersection at the end of

the

suc

tion pipe are of value in increasing the cross-section on the suction side.

When operating a pump which is to feed, via a non-return valve, into a circuit which is under pres

sure (e.g. reserve pump in a lubrication circuit), suction difficulties can occur if the suction line is

fil

led with air. In these cases, the pressure line should be vented directly before the non-return valve.

This can be achieved, for example, by fitting a venting jet in the circuit (Fig. 8), or by providing a re

stricted by-pass (Fig. 9).

V

p^

V ^

) (

) (

^



'?,

M)

Fig.

8

?

Fig.

9

Y

?,

M)

A

In order to achieve optimum noise protection, it is recommended tha t an anti-vibration flange is fitted

between the pump and the pump supports and that damping elements are inserted b etween the elec

tric m otor and the installation.

Likewise, the use of suction and pressure hoses reduces the noise level of

an

hydraulic installation.

Pump Removal

The cleanest possible conditions should be assured during all work. Prior to loosening screwed

con

nections, their external surroundings should be cleaned.

Dur ing a l l work on the pump and pr ior to removal , the connect ing pipework

mus t be de pr e s s ur i s e d a nd the motor i s o l a te d

In addi t ion, precaut ions must be taken to ensure that the motor cannot run-up

dur ing work on the pump.

• Remove the depressurised pipelines from the pum p.

Leakages of dangerous media must be col lec ted and disposed of in such a way

that no danger resul ts to personnel or to the env i ronment . In so doing, the s ta



^

tu tor y r e gu l a t i ons mus t be obs e r v e d . .

• Secure the pump connections and pipelines against the ingress of dirt.

Commissioning

Commiss ioning is only to be carr ied out by appropr ia te ly t ra ined and qua l i f ied

personnel . Pr ior to s tar t ing up plant , i t must be ascer ta ined that an adequate

quant i ty of the operat ing medium is ava i lable , in order to avoid dry running.

A

• Special feature on sealing variants 4 and 7 (Double radial shaft sealing ring)

• The sealing chamber (see F ig. 10) must be filled with a

suitable barrier medium prior to initial operation of the

pump.

B e for e c ommi s s i on i ng , the s e a l i ng

chamber must be f i l led wi th a barr ie r me

dium. .

Sealing chamber

The pumps should be started up at either very low or zero pressure

loading.

The existing shut-off devices should be fully opened and

the pressure relief

valve,

installed in the pressure line, should be

adjusted to the lowest opening pressure setting.

Pressure setting of the pressure relief valve

Fig. 10



Applies only to pumps w ith a built-in pressu re relief valve

(Pump Type Code: KF ... -D15 and KF ... -D25)

Response pressure lower Response pressure higher

start-up is achieved by repeated rapid switching on and off of the drive motor (inching mode), wi

thout reaching full rpm, until it is apparent that the pump is operating satisfactorily. The satisfactory

operation being detectable either from manometer readings, or from the noise generated by the

pump, and being achieved over a period of not longer than 30 seconds . This particularly applies

when a cold pum p must be started-up w ith a fluid medium that has already been warmed , in order

to achieve a slow heating up of the pump and to prevent jamming of the pump due to heat shock.

After switching on the motor, it is then allowed to run for a few m inutes , under zero or low pressure.

The pressure loading can then be increased in stages until the desired operating pressure is re

ached.

• On attaining the required operating values, the tempe rature of the medium and of the pump should

be checked. The control points on the pump are the shaft bearing positions and the shaft seals. The

temperatures reached on the surface of the pump housing should be approx. 10°C greater than the

temperature of the medium.

• After several hours of running time, the final operating temperature shou ld be checked (for maxi

mum temperatures, see the section on "Technical data").

Maintenance

Assuming correct installation in accordance with the conditions of use and correct

operation,

KRACHT



gear pumps are of such construction tha t a long and fault-free operational life should be obtained. The y

require a minimum of maintenance which, however, is necessary for reliable operation, since experi

ence has shown that a high percentage of the faults and damage which can occur are attributable to

the ingress of dirt and inadequate maintenance. The extent of servicing required and the service and

inspection intervals are, in general, laid down by the m anufacturer in an app ropriate plan.

The regular examination of

all

operating data, such as pressure, temperature, current consumption,

degree of filter soiling, etc., contributes to the early detection of potential failure.

Changing the direction o f rotation of the pump

On pump types K F... R.. . and K F...L ... , i.e. pure left or right rotating pumps , a change in the direc

tion of rotation is only possible by re-building the pump.

cover

fixing

scews

cover fixing scews

cover

fixing

scews cover

fixing

scews



Tightening torque for co ver fixing

Nominal size**

Tightening torque

screws

4 . „ 2 5

25 Nm

32

. ..

80

49 Nm

*

see Type code on unit: KF...

A

Repai rs must only be carr ied out by t ra ined spec ia l is t personnel .

Given the appropriate know-how and adequate equipment, the repa ir may also be carried out by the

end user or the initial equipper. Assistance in this is available in the form of spares lists and repair

instructions.

Diagnosis

Lack of adequate sealing is a freque nt source of failure. If this occurs at the pipeline connec tions, it

may be eliminated by simply tightening the screwe d fittings.

In the case of a lack of sealing o n the pump, the respective seals m ust be replaced (see spares list).

Detection and Elimination of Faults

The following list gives the causes of faults which are most frequently encountered during operational

failures together with an indication of the problem areas to be rectified.

In the event of the occurrence o f a fault which canno t be iden tified, please request assistance from

KRACHT.

Fault P ossible cause



Increased noise

Pump cavitation • Suction level too high

> Suction filter blocked or too small

> Internal dia. Suction line too small

> Suction line too long

• Too many curves in suction line

> Too many local constrictions in suction line

> Suction line blocked or not sealed

Fault

Pump does not suck

Insufficient supply flow

Possible cause

•

•

•

•

•

Fluid level in reservoir too low

Incorrect direction of rotation

Throttling element in suction line

Foreign body in suction line

Volume of the pressure linebetween pum p and

non-return valve too sm all, pump cannot com

press the air found in the suction line into the

pressure line

Non-return valve in the pressure line not vented

Throttling element in suction line

> Fluid leve l in reservoir too low

> Suction filter blocked or too small

> Viscosity too high

' Rpm too high

> Pressure too high



Insufficient pressure Supply flow too low «

Working resistances In '

pressu re line too low '

• Pressure relief valve set too low

> Pump sucks air

> Pump is worn out

> Viscosity too low

» Rpm too low

» Drive power too low

» Pump worn out

f • • • • •

il{ll{lti

I l^^^k R I E S

Aalbo rg Industries NL BV

P o Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

The Netherlands

Tel. +31 181 650 500

Fax +31 181 650 501


No .

24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01


http://www.aalborg-industries.com

Bankers: Rabobank, Hoogvliet

Account No. 32.95.68.094

Swift-address: RABONL2Ü

153

Oil Burner Controls

LAL...

Series 0 2

ISO 9001

C€

Supplementarv data sheets 7713 and 77 14







Oil burner controls designed for use with atomizing expanding flame burners of

medium to high capacity (intermittent operation*) with air checic supervision for

supervised air damper control. Flame supervision with photoresistive detector

QRB..., blue flame detector QRC1... or selenium photocell detector RAR...

The oil burner controls are tested and certified in accordance with EN 230. They

carry the CE mark in compliance with the directives on electromagnetic

compatibility.

M o d e o f o p e r a t i o n

A

A-B

B-C

C

C-D

Prerequisites for

burner

start-up

The diagrams above show both the connections and the control program of the

permissible or required input signals to the control section of the bumer control as well

as to their flame supervision circuit. If the required input signals are not present, the

burner control interrupts the start-up seque nce at the points m arked by the sym bols and

initiates lockout w here this is required b y the safety regulations. The sym bols used are

identical to those on the bumer control's lockout indicator.

Start comm and (e.g. given by the control thermostat or pressurestat R of the installation)

Start-up sequence

Burner operation (according to the control commands given by load controller LR)

Controlled shutdown through R

Sequence switch runs into start position A , post-purge

During burner off periods the flame supe rvision circuit is under voltage, in order to carry

out the detector and extraneous light test.

- Burner control not interiocked in lockout position

- Sequen ce switch in start position (with

LAL1...

indicated by voltage on terminals 4

an d

11 ;

with LAI_2... indicated by vo ltage on temninals

11

and 12)

- Air damper closed. Limit switch zfo r th e CLOSED position must feed voltage from



terminal 11 to terminal 8

- The con tact of the limit thermostat or pressure monitor W as well as the contacts of

any other switching devices in the control loop between terminal 4 and terminal 5

must be closed (e.g. control contact for oil pre-heated temperature)

Additional prerequisites for start-up of LAL2...:

- Control contacts between temninal 12 and the air pressure monitor LP must be closed

*

With LA L2...:

Shortly after the beginning of the pre-pu rge time , the air pressure monitor must change

over from terminal 13 to terminal 14, as otherwise the bumer control initiates lockout

(start of air pressure check).

t3 '

Long pre-ignition time

(Ignition transformer connected to term inal 15)

With the LAL1... bumer controls the ignition transformer is switched on with the start

command;

with the LAL2... types only when the air pressure monitor LP has changed

over, that is on completion of tlO a t the latest.

After completion of the pre-purge time, the burner control drives the air damper via

tenminal 10 into the low flame position which is determined by the changeover point of

auxiliary switch m. During the running time the sequence switch stops until terminal 8

receives voltage via

m .

Then the m otor of the seq uence switch is switched to the control

section of the bumer control. Hence, from now on control signals to terminal 8 do not

affect the further start-up of the burner and the subsequent bumer operation.

t3 Sho rt pre-ignition time,

provided Z i s connected to terminal 16; then release of fuel at

terminal 18.

t2 Safety time

On completion of the safety time, a flame signal m ust be present at terminal 22. It must

be present until controlled shutdown takes place, otherwise the burner control initiates

lockout and interiocks itself in lockout position.

tSn P re-ignition time ,

provided the ignition transformer is connected to terminal 15. With

short pre-ignition (connection to terminal 16), it remains switched on only up to the endof the safety time .

t4 interval. On completion of t4, terminal 19 is under voltage. Thus the fuel valve at



auxiliary switch vo f the air damper actuator is supplied with voltage.

t5 Interval. After ts has elapsed, terminal 20 receives voltage; at the same time control

outputs 9 to 11 and input 8 are galvanically separated from the control section of the

bumer control, so that the latter is protected against reverse voltages from the load

control c ircuit.

W ith the release of load controller LR at terminal 2 0, the start-up sequence of the burner

control ends. After a few so-called idle steps, i.e. steps without change of the contact

positions, the sequence switch switches itself off.

B Operating position of the burner

Funct ions

With

regard to

standards

With

regard to the

control of the burner

The following LAL... features exceed the standards, thus offering a high level of

additional safety:

- Detector and extraneous light test are restarted imm ediately after the tolerate d after-

burn time. This means that open or not fully closed fuel valves initiate lockout

immediately after this time has elapsed. Th e test ends only o n completion of the pre-

purge time of the next burner start-up

- The correct functioning of the flame superv ision circuit is automa tically chec ked

during each burner start-up sequence

- The control contacts for the fuel release are checked for welding during the post-

purge time

- A built-in unit fuse protects the control contac ts against overloading

- The units permit burner operation with or without post-purge

- Fan motors with an amperage of up to 4 A (starting current 20 A max.) can be directly

connected

- Separate control outputs for: pre-ignition from start comm and, post-ignition until

shortly before completion of the burner start-up program

as well as for

short pre-

ignition w ith post-ignition to the en d of the safety time

- Separate control outputs for

OPEN,

CLOSE and M A/o f the air damper actuator

- Checked air damper operation to ensure pre-purge with the nominal amount of air.

Checked positions: CLOSED or MIN (low flame position) at the start, OPEN at the

beginning and MIN on completion of the pre-purge time. In case the actuator does not

drive the air damper to the required position, the burner start-up sequence will beintermpted

- Two control outputs for the release of the 2 nd and, if necessary, 3rd output stage (or

load control)



With

regard to flame

- When load control is enabled, the control outputs for the air damper actuator are

galvanically separated from the control section of the unit

- Connection facilities for a remote lockout warning device, remote reset and remote

emergency shutdown

- With the LAL2... types in addition: possibility of air pressure supervision with

functional test of the air pressure monitor at start-up as well as possibility of semi

automatic burner start-up

- Methods of flame supervision:

Technical data

U^ns voltage AC 220 V -1 5 % ... 240 V + 10 %.

LAL2...

also

A C 100 V -15 % ... 110 V + 10%

50 Hz-

6 %

... 60

Hz +

6

%

3 .5 VA

Mains frequency

Consumption

Unit fuse, built-in

T6 , 3H 250

V

according

to

IEC

127

Unit fuse, external 10 A max.

Radio interference protection

N according to VDE 0875

Permissible input current to tenninal

1

5 A permanently, peaks of up to 20 A max.

Permissible current load of control terminals

4 A permanen tly, peaks

of

up

to

20

A

max.

to ta l 5 A max.

Environmental conditions

- Transport

Climatic conditions

Temperature

Humidity

Mechanical conditions

- Operation

Climatic conditions

Temperature

Humidity

IEC721-3-2

class 2K2

-50...+60 °C

< 95 % r.h.

class 2M2

IEC721-3-3

class 3K5

-20...+60 °C

< 9 5 % r.h.

Weight

- Burner control

- Baseplate

approx. 1000 g

approx. 165 g

Required switching capacity

of

switching devices

- Between terminals

4

an d

5

1

A

- Between terminals 4 an d 12 1 A

- Between terminals 4 and 14

5 A, peaks 20 A

Pennissible mounting position

Degree of protection

optional

IP 4 0

CE conformance

Accordng to the dreclives of the European Community

Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

89/336 EEC include. 92/31 EEC

Gas appliance directive 90/396 EEC

Emissions EN 50081-1

Immunity EN 50082-2

Condensat ion , fo rmat ion of Ice and ingres s of water are not permitted.



QRB...

QRC...

RAR...

See data sheet 7714

See data sheet 7716

See data sheet 7713

Type summary

Switching times

are

given

in

seconds,

in the

sequence

of

burner start-up, valid

for a

frequency

of 50

Hz.

in

case of 60 Hz, the times are reduced by approx. 20 %.

Connec t ion

diagrams

LAL1.. .

[1

®D ^

(ZJOC

BV1

g

BV2

S

|fe(|biy=a'

X

LK



7153a01/0496

LAL2...

Flame supervision

LAL1... with detector

QRB..

QRC1.

Required min. detector cun^nt at

AC

230 V

l^ax. p erm , detector current without flame

Max. possible detector current

+pole of instrument

Length of detector line

- In the same cable as the control lines

- Separate cable in cable duct

- Three-core cable

- Two-core cable for

the

detector line

(bl, sw ], separate one-core cable

for the phase (br)

95 ^A

160

|iA

to term. 23

3 0 m max.

1000 m max.

BOpA

12nA

to term. 23

1 mmax.

2 0

m

max.

23 LAL1...I I 22 23 1

LAL1...|

QRB1..



LAIZ... with detector

QRB..

QRC1...

RAR...

Required m in. detector current at AC 230 V

It ax. pe mi. detector current without flame

Max. possible detector current

+pole of instalment

length of detector line

- In the same cable as the control lines

- Separate cable in cable duct

- Shielded cable

8 ^

35 pA

to

term.

22

not perm.

20 m

200 m

3.9 nA

0.8 tiA

to tenri. 22

2 0 m*

6. 5

MA

25 ^A

to term. 22

RAR7: 30 m

RAR8; 100 m

Connect ion

diagrams

L A U . . .

QRC1...

EKI*



LAL2...

Legend a

for the entire data sheet

AL

AR

AS

B

BR

BV...

d.;.

Etc..

FR

FS

H

L...

L3

UK

LP

LR

M...

bl

br

Changeover limit

switch

for OPEN position

of the air damper

Remote lockout warning device (alarm)

Main relay (load relay) with contacts ar...

Unit fuse

Wire link

(on

the plug section of

the

burner control)

Lockout relay w ith contacts br...

Fuel valve

Contactor or relay

Lockout reset button

Rame relay with contacts fr...

Rame signal amplifier

Mains isolator

' Fault signal lamp

Operational readiness indication

Air damper

Air pressure monitor

Load controller

Fan or burner motor

Blue core

Brown core

m

NTC

QRB...

QRC1...

R

RAR...

RV

S

SA

SB

SM

V

V

W

Z

z

sw

Auxiliary switch for the M IN position of

the air damper

NTC resistor

Photoresistive detector

, Blue flame detector

Control thermostat or pressurestat

Selenium photocell detector

Continuously adjustable fuel valve

Fuse

Air damper actuator

Safety limiter (temperature, pressure, etc.)

Synchronous motor of the sequence

mechanism

Rame signal amplifier

In the actuator auxiliary changeover

switch for the release of fuel in function

of the air damp er position

Limit thennostat or pressure monitor

Ignition transformer

In

the actuator limit

switch

for the

CLOSED position of the air damper

Black core

For circuit variants refer to "connection examples"

Warnings

• In the geographical areas wh ere DIN standards are in use, the installation m ust

be in compliance with VDE requirements, particularly with the standards



DIN/VDE 0100 and 0722

• The electrical wiring must comp ly with national and local standa rds.

• The LAL ... is a safety device. It is therefore not permitted to op en, interfere with

or modify the unit

• ignition cable must always be laid separately, observing the greatest po ssible

distance to other cables

Control program

under fault conditions

and lockout indication

In case of any disturbance, the sequence switch stops and with it the lockout indicator.

The symbol above the reading mark of the indicator gives the type of d isturbance:

^

No start,

because one contact has not been closed (see also

"Prerequisites for

^ burner

start-up")

or

lockout during or after, completion of the control sequ ence

due to extraneous light (e.g. non-extinguished flame, leaking fuel valves, defects

in the flame supervision circuit, etc.).

J^

Interruption of start-up sequence,

because the OPEN signal has not been

delivered to terminal 8 by limit switch a. Terminals 6, 7 and 15 remain under

voltage until the fault has been corrected

p

With LAL2...:

lockout,

because there is no air pressure indication at the beginning

of air pressure control. Every air pressure failure after this moment In time

leads to a lockout, too

I Lockout due to a fault in the flame su pervision circuit.

y^

Interruption of start-up sequence,

because the position signal for the low flame

position has not been delivered to terminal 8 by auxiliary switch m . Terminals 6, 7

and 15 rem ain under voltage until the fault has been corrected

1 Lockout, because no flame signal is present after completion of the safety time .



Lockout,

because the flame signal has been lost during burner operation.

a-b

Start-up sequence

Notes

Engineering

LAL2

7 15 16 17 18

(T) @ 7153s03ffl396 ®

Switches, fuses, earthing, e tc. must be in compliance with the local regulations. For the connection of v alves

and other components, the diagram provided by the burner manufacturer is valid.



G) Phase and neutral may not be interchanged

Max. p ermissible input current: 5 A permanently, peaks of 20 A m ax.

Safety limit therm osta ts (manual reset, e.g . STB) are normally connected in the line.

(D Remo te reset: when button EK 2 is connected to terminal 3, only remote reset is possible; when

connected to tenTiinal 1 , em ergency shutdown is possible, too .

(D Required switchin g capacity

C o n n e c t i o n

e x a m p l e s

19

20 91 1 1 0 8 Connection of actuators without changeover

TIT^

N

S A E V

iwg

^ ^ -

TlK

limit switch for the CLOSED position

z

is

adjusted

to the air

volume required

for low

flame operation.

18

19 17 9 20 11 10 8 6

LR

N^^^^_5>^1K

Control of the air damper actuator during

operation by control signals at terminal 17.

Signal path: refer

to

"connection

diagrams".

19 20 9 11 10 8 6

S

^ i i

Control of a fuel valve via terminal 20

(Burner w ithout

air

damper

or

with

an air

damper

not c ontrolled by the burner control).

The

relay

is



not required

if

the valve connected

to

terminal

20

is hydraulically connected in series, with

a

valve controlled via terminal

18 or 19.

C o n n e c t i o n

e x a m p l e s

Two-stage expanding

flame burner

C

Mi^m

1 5(13"/t3n)

16(13) 1 7 1 8

U'¥>

19 9 20 11 10 8

SA 11

L R

^

[^lE [A

IV

3 1 1 — r x

^VJ

^ ^ f ^ - H i

7153a05/1195

; *TK

Load control with an on/off controller. The air dannper is closed during burner off

periods.



Modulating expanding

flame burner

16 17 18 19 20

1110

U

LR

SA

-M—^M

BV1

i

LR

N'

-z-

( f> jy HE Rv LK

SA

, a . ^ z .

7153a06/119S

Load control with a m odulating controller w ith galvanically separated control contacts for

OPEN and CLOSED positions.



GO

CEl

X L K

Sequence d iagram

Control output

®

®

®

A ... B C æ

1 J

"»IT

II S

" b

III b

IV

V

I

VI

VII

I

VIII

I

IX

X

I

XI =

XII I *

XIII

I

XIV ^

116

LLLLU

l l l l l l

tio*

n - r m

i r

u

I J J I M

M i l l

M I M I

J?.

" • -

. I 2 _

1311

. "

•

l u l l

• T i l l

I I I M

BO

M i l l

I I I M

inn

I H

. •"

D at termin

f7\(Pfi'

(A) (35

Of

— ®

®

iSSk

(S9

1

— ©

— @

®

®

Positions of

the

lockout indicator

I \ \ 1

7 1 5 3 d 0 1 E / 0 1 9 7

H h

^ I I ^ i i i i i iMii i i i ii i i i P i i i ii i i i i • i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i ^ i i i i i i imii i i i i i i i i i

^ 1 i i i i i i i i i i ii i i i i i i i i i i ii i i i i i i i i i i

["-(iiiiMiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiii

^



Legend for the times

t1 Pre-pure time with air damper fully open

t2 Safety time

t3 Pre-ignition time, short (ignition transfomier connected to terminal 16)

t3'

Pre-ignition time, long (ignition transformer connected to terminal 15 )

t3n Post-ignition time (ignition transformer connected to terminal 15)

t4 Interval between voltage at terminals 18 and 19 (BV1 - BV2)

Dimensions

Dimensions in mm

LAL...

with baseplate AGM 41049055 0

123

^

27,5 27,5

/^ i X

7153m 02/0396



wm)

;

^

3

7,

1

103

5

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Jj,

^'

i-.-


3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

Tlie Netherlands

Tel. +31 (0)181 650 500

Fax +31 (0)181 650 501

Traderegis ter Rot terdam

No . 24234179

VAT No. NL0081.91.694.B.01

E-mail : r tmw ®aalborg- indu st r ies .nl


Bankers: Fort is Bank, Rotterdam

Account No. 25.75.69.618


BiC Cod e FTSBNL2R

E.S1SO

9001:2000

m

Cer t i f ied

Company

Mgi lß l tT MOBRiV:

'S^-

^,^iéeli.;-

L IQ W IK lp f i t ; AiAR M Til ilØ PUJHI» eONTR OL

4^*^^/





f""

T H E C O M P L E T E M O B R E Y H O R IZ O N T A L F L O A T S W IT C H R A N G E



S W I T C H S E L E C T I O N

AL ARM SWIT CHING • EL ECT RICAL OR PNEUM AT IC

H or iz on ta l o r ve r t i c a l :

High or low alarm switches are of

robu st construction, making them ideal

for a wide range of liquids in industrial

applications.

Dirty

l i qu id a pp l i c a t ion s :

The shrouded model should be

specified, thus eliminating fouling of

the float movement due to deposits or

large particles becom ing wed ged.

S u b m e r s i o n :

Fo r those applictions where the

equipment may b e subject to occasional

or continuous submersion the

submersible mode l should be specified.

H o s e p r o o f

m ar ine

a p p l i c a t i o n s :

Switches have be en specifically designe d

for the reqtiirements of these m arkets

& approval au thorides, (for details o f

approvals contact th e &ctory).

Vacuum applications:

All metallic floats are capable of

operating in full vacuum conditions.

High Alarm

Low Aiarm

High or Low

Aiarm

Viscous liquids

Cranked arm float units should be

specified to enable the o perating

mechanism to be ke pt clear of th e

liquid. Rod extensions shaped to

individual requirem ents are available

to fit all Mobrey level switches.



P U M P C O N T R O L • E L E C T R IC A L O R P N E U M A T I C

H o r i z o n t a l m o u n t i n g :

V e r t i c a l moun t ing :

| ( c )

C H O I C E OF S W I T C H M E C H A N I S M S

ELECTRICAL

T Y P E D

Fo r alternative ma ke and break circuits.

Fu nct ion : 2 independent s ingle pole

single throw con tact sets: "Snap Action" .

May be wired

S.P.CO.

on site.

T Y P E D 6

Fo r switching two independ ent circuits.

Fu nct i on: Do uble pole change over (2

independent circuits): "Snap Action".

T y P E P & P 6

As type D & D 6 b ut with gold plated

contacts for sw itching low power (e.g.

intrinsically safe) elec trical circuits.

T y P E H 6

For use in corrosive area an d/ or lo w

temperature applications. As type D 6

but with gold plated contacts and all

W A R N I N G

Th e plating of gold contact switches

may be perm anendy damaged if this

mechanism

is

used to switch circuits

above the following limits:

300V: 12mA Resistive

24V: 2m H/2 00m A Induct ive

24V: 250m A Resistive

24V : 750mH /10mA Induc t ive

L V D - L o w V o l tag e Direc t iv e .

Thes e switches complywith

the^|;|Ä;.^?',

provisions o f the machinery directive

8 9 / 3 9 2 / E E C a n d t h e L o w V o l t ^ é V . '

Direct ive 73 /23 /E EC . ' -^ -^ r '

Standardsappl ied: EN60947Parts 1

and 5.1

T Y P E B 6

For use in Zone 11 Hazardous A reas.

As type H6 but BASEE FA approved

c oded EX N IIT 6 to BS

4683:

Part 3:



RATING

mov ing parts hou sed in an inert gas

filled hermetically sealed enclsoure.

1972.

M e c h a n i s m T y p e

D & D 6

P & P 6

H 6 & B 6

GENERAL PURPOSE APPLICATIONS

A L U M I N I U M B R O N Z E W E T S I D E M O D E L S

S0 1 D B/F8 4

4

Contact switc h

Eifrl

-^3

s U J Z i ™



ttru

S01D 6B /F84 6 C on ta c t sw i t c h

f l l W M d

1—MZO

X t.5

10BS3M3

Weatherproof toIEC144:IP66

O R D E R IN G IN FO R MA TIO N

V ^

Code

S

General purpose a luminium bronze wetside m odels

Switch

Code

01

Fla ng e (H e a d)

Size Rating Standard

M obrey A 18 bar Mobrey

Code

D B

P B

D 6 B

F6 B

A PA

A M A

Switch mechan ism

4 Contac t-generali» short end cap

4 Contact

-

gold plated contacts

1>

short end cap

6 Co ntact - general

1>

long end cap

6 Conta ct - gold plated contacts t long end cap

Pneumatic on/ off

Pneumatic modtüating

C O D E

F84

F185

F 6 8 / +

F264

F 2 1 / +

F 1 0 4 / +

F9 3

Float - appl icat ion information

High or low alarm or 2 off

for pump control wide differential

Horizonta l pum p control

Hor izontal limited differential

Verticat pum p control or alarm

Crank ed arm vertical or horizon tal ( See pag e 19 for arm lengths )

Shro uded for dirty liquids Silicone rubb er gaiter with 316 stainless steel

shroud and float



t 1 1

J

i

5

01

D B

/

F84

Typical order ing information

+ Refer to pages 18,19 & 20 for technical float details and length opti ons

Refer to page 14 for nozzle and smd lengths.

M A R I N E A P P L I C A T I O N S

S U B M E R S I B L E

•

H O S E P R O O F

•

M A R I N E

Aluminium bronze submersible /hoseproof

Stainless stee l sub mersible /hoseproof

103

i S03*B

,: S179*B

1 S195*B

1 ^

101

^

IT

Sld3*

S181*

ConduKanry

PQisteDttMtwao

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S



A L U M I N r U M B R O N 2 æ W E T S I D E M O D E L S

Enclosure & wetside:

End cap

Ma x imum te mp:

Aluminium bronze to BS1400 - ABl max. iron content 2 .5%

Brass BS1400-DCB3

210°C except shroud ed Boat. F93 = 180°C

S T A I N L E S S S T E E L W E T S I D E M O D E L S

ORDE RING INF ORM AT ION

Code

S

General purpose, submerisb le . hoseproo f & ma rine appl icat ions

S^witch

Cod e

03

179

195

163

181

Plange (bead) S ize

MobreyA

MobrejrA

MobrevA

M o b rey A

MobreyA

Code

D

P

D 6

P6

Rating

18 bar

18

bar

18

bar

18

bar

18

bar

Switch mechanism

Standard

Mobrey

Mobrey

Mobrey

Mobrey

Mobrey

4 contact

-

general

4 contact - gold plated conta cts

*6 conta ct - general

*6 contact - gold plated contac ts

* No te: n ot for use with stainless steel wetside/en closure models SI 63 & S181

Code

B

Enclosure bousing

Aluminium bron ze: no cod e letter with 5163 or 5181 stainless steel models

Cod e

F84

F185

F98

F 6 8 / +

F 2 1 / +

F 264

Float - appl icat ion information

General purpo se high or low alarm

or 2 off for pu m p control

Hor izon tal pum p cont ro l

Vertical pum p control o r alarm

Hor izonta l limited differential



1

J 1

J

t

r

t

7

F104+

F 9 3

Cranked arm vertical or horizo ntal

Shro uded for use with dirty Hquids, silicone rubb er gaiter with 316SS shroud and float

03

B / F8 4 Typical ordering information

G E N E R A L P U R P O S E A P P L I C A T I O N S

ST AINL ESS ST E^L WET SIDE M ODEL S

S 3 6 D A / F 8 4

TTvead

M20x1.5-6n

toBS3643

Weatherproof to E C 144:IP66

» 126



T 7 ^

TKHEAO

TO B.S.3M3

S 440DA/F 84

c

3 . 1 . 1 .

ORDERING

_ . i —

C OD E

S

II FOR

Mi

UTIO

H

Genual purpose stainless steel wetside models

Switch

C O D E

3«

190

440

441

424

425

489

490

428429

430

431

432

417

418

419

433

434

488

435

436

43 7 V

i-lange

(Head)

Size

Mobrey

A

Mobrey A

3"

4"

3"

4"

3"

3"

DN65DN80

DNIOO

DN12S

D N I 5 0

D N 6 5

D N 8 0

DNIOO

DN125

DN ISO •

D N 8 0

DNIOO

DN125

DN150

C OD E

D

P

Rating

33.8

bar

33.8

bar

150 RF

I50RF

300

R F

300 RF

600

RF

900 R F

PN 16

PN 40

PN 64

Switch Mechanism

4 Contact

-

General

4 Contact - Gold Plated Contacts

Standard

Mobrey

Mobrey : Use float F93 only

To BS 1560

o r

ANSI

B16.S

to BS 4504

or

DIN 2633

To BS 4504

or DIN 2635

To BS 4504

or DIN 2636



D 6

P6

H 6

B6

AP

AM

6 Contact - General


6 Contact - Hermetically Sealed

6 Contact - Zone II Areas

Pneumatic

-

On/Off

Pneumatic - Modulating

CODE Enclosure

/

Hous ins

A Aluminium allov

H A Z A R D O U S A R E A A PPL IC A T IO N S

FLA ME P R O O F ZO N E 1 G A S G R O U P I & | IC MO D E LS

133

IJhM

S2S0D A /F84

Weatherproof to IE C 144: IP66

C ondu i t e n t ry th re a d

Gunmeta l body 25tnm

Aluminium body 20nim

/ 3 6 5

For min in g a pp l i c at ions

S276 & S277 are supplied with flanged

adaptor suitable for a bander type cable

gland, the use o f which is obligatory


( '-

B a c k f l a nge

(where fit ted)

W e t s i d e m a t e d a l

Carbon steel to BS 15 01 :22 4: Gra de 430B LT50. T his material has guaranteed properties

at both high (400° Q and low (-50°Q temperatures. Painted surfaces are stove paint finish whilst

all unpainted surfaces are corrosio n p rotected .

Stainless steel to BS 15 04 :31 6 C I 6



E n c l o s u r e / h o u s i n g

m a t e r i a l

Max. working temp* : Alum inium body 400°C

Gun metal body 350OC

Gunm etal to BS 1400: Grade L G2 .

Max. working temp*: S275 &S 277 200°C

Aluminium alloy to BSl 490: LM 25

Finish is Chromate phosphate treated and externally stove painted

r

O R D E R I N G

1 C O D E S

I N F O

RM

lATIO

N

Swi tc l f fo r haz ard ous area app l i c a t io ns , f lameproof zon e 1 gas e«> "P I »" d l i e m ode l s

C O D E

250

275

2 7 6 < >

2 7 7 < >

256

257

278

251

254

260

261

253

2 5 5 ^

26»

2 7 2 '

268

270

271

F l a n g e ( H e a d ) S i z e

C O D E

D

P

D 6

P 6

H 6

M o b r e y G

Mobrej r G

M o b r e y G

M o b r e v G

3"

4"

6"

3"

4"

3"

3"

O N 8 0

D N I O O

D N 1 2 5

D N 8 0

D N I O O

D N 1 2 5

D N I S O

Rat in f r

21 bar

21 bar

21 bar

21 bar

150 RF

150 RF

150 RF

300 RF

300 RF

600 RF

900 RF

P N 4 0

P N 6 4

W e t s i d e

Stainless s teel

G u n m e t a l

Stainle ss s teel } ^o ne 1 gas group I models

G u n m e t a l

To BS 1560

o r

ANSI

B 1 6 . 5

ro BS 4504

o r D I N 2 6 3 5

To BS 4504

o r D I N 2 6 3 6

S w i t c h M e c h a n i s m

4 Contact - General


6 Con tac t - Genera l

6 Con tac t - Go ld Pla t ed Conuct s

6 Con tac t - Heimedcal ly Sealed

C O D E

A

G

X

N o t e : T h e B A S E E F A / C E N E L E C

cert i ficat ion covering use -20°C to -60°C

ambien t t empera tu re requ i res the

hermedcal ly sea l ed swi t ch mechan i sm type

H6 to be fitted.

E n c l o s u r e / H o u s i o e - J

A l u m i n i u m A l l o y

Gunmeta l (mandato ry on gas g roup 1 swi t ches : <>)

Suffix X must be specified for appl icat ions with ambient temperatures -20°C to -60°C



C O D E

F 8 4

F185

F 9 8

F106

F107

F 9 6

F 6 8 / +

F l o a t - A p p l i c a t i o n I n f o r m a t i o n

Genera l pu rpose h igh a l arms o r l ow a l arms

or 2 o f f fo r pump con t ro l

H o r i z o n t a l p u m p c o n t r o l

CHEMICAL APPLICATIONS

P.T.F.E. WETSIDE

S3S7D/F317.

S357P/F317

1 J

^ ^ g J L f

71

- 1

124

18 —

Mr

é- ^

i

_

1 Conduit entry

^ P g 1 6 t o D I N 4 0 4 3 0

ST'

297

1063

\

\

1

)

I

112


T y p e n u m b e r

Sw i tc h me c ha n i sm

H o u s i t i g n i a t e d a l -

W e t s ide ma te z i a l

Fin ish : .

I P r a t i n g

S357D/F317

General

Aluminium alloy

P T F E

Chromate phos/pa inted

IP66

S357P/F317

Gold plated

Aluminium alloy

P T F E

Chromate phos/pa inted

IP66

N ote s :



1. S357D level switch has a comb inedM obrey A & E flange and may be used with either m ounting flange.

2.

M obr ey offers a wide range of "Engineer to or der " level switches for chemical applications with higher pressures or

temperatures. Consult factory for details.

S TO C K A V A ILA B IL ITY

F L OAT CHAMBE RS

Fabricated chambers

UITHORAUAL

175

Switch

Switch



C a s t c ha mbe rs

Process

connections

moun t ing

flange

Process

connections

moun t ing

flange

I N T R O D U C T I O N

Float chambers are used to feidlitate the external mounting of a

S E L E C T I O N

Th e choice of chamber will depend on the type of M OB RE Y

F A B R IC A T E D C H A M B E R D I M E N S I O N S



F A B R IC A T E D C H A M B E R S S tan da r d d im ens i ons : Re f. on lv - m u s t be ce r ti f ied on o rde r

M o d e l

144C

145C

148C

S w M o u n t i n g F i g

A N S I 3 " # 1 5 0

A N S I 3 " # 3 0 0

M O B R E Y ' A '

P r e s s u r e

19.6 bar

S l b a r

18 bar

X

143

143

143

Y

185

185

169

Z

168

168

168

M o d e l

305C

306C

307C

S w Mount ing f ig

BS4504 80-64

BS 4504 65-40

A N S I 3 " # 6 0 0

Pressure

64 bar

40

bar

102 bar

X

143

143

143

Y

183

162

162

Z

168

168

168

r

v.

FA BR IC A TED C H A M BER S : O R D ER IN G IN FO R MA TIO N

Code

144C

14SC

148C

150C

IS lC

305C

306C

307C

308C

309C

O

MatéSial switch flange max . Pressu re aO'C Max Tem p °C See page 4 for gasket l imits

Carbon steel/A NS I 3" Class 150 19.6 bar 400°C

Carbon steel/ANSI 3 " Class 300 51 bar 400''C

Carbon steel/Mo brey'A' 18 bar 400°C

Carbon steel/Mobrey TB/R' 34.5 bar 400°C

Carbon steel/M obrey 'G' 21 bar 400°C

Carbon steel/BS 4504 DN8 0 PN64 64 bar 400°C

Carbon steel/BS 4504 DN6 5 PN40 40 bar 400''C

Carbon steel/ANSI 3" Class 600 102 bar 400''C

Carbon steel/ANSI 3" Qass 900 153 bar 400°C

Carbon steel/BS 4504 DN6 5 PN I 6 16 bar 400''C

C O D E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Process Coimecdon Style

Side & top or side & bottom Flanged

Side & side Flanged

Side & top or side & bottom Flanged 'with %" flanged vent/d rain

Side & top or side & bottom Flanged with %" threaded vent/dr ain

Top & bottom Flanged

Side & top or side & bottom Flanged (dose centres)

Top & bottom stub pipe

Top & b ottom threadolet or sockolet

Side & side Flanged with '/«" flanged ven t/dr ain

Side & side Flanged with %" threaded vent/d rain

C O D E

00

01

02

03

Process Connect ion size / ra t ins

1"NB Sockolet

1" NPT threaded (female)

1 'A" NPT direaded (female)

2"

NPT threaded (female)

C H A M B E R O P T I O N S T O

C U S T O M E R O R D E R

• Chambers can be manufactured in



04

08

10

11

12

13

1"

BSPT threaded (female)

l " N B S c h 8 0 s m h p i p e

2"

NB Sch 80 stub pipe

ANSI 1" Qass 150 RF Weld Neck

ANSI 1" Class 300 RF Weld Neck

ANSI 1" Qass 600 RF Weld Neck

a wide variety of m aterials,

including

321

& 3 16 stainless steel,

Incoloy Monel CrM o steels &

other more exotic materials.

• Paint finish to custome r

spedficarions.

F L O A T S P E C I F I C A T I O N

H O R I Z O N T A L F « 8 P U M P C O N T R O L A N D A L A R M F L O AT

S 3 6 D A / F 6 8 / 4 w i th r od c u t t o / 3 d i m e n si o n

1

>

•

/

r

L

- IW EW

10 B.S.3M3

Switches fitted wi th F 68 tj pe float unit may be adjusted o n site to meet pu m p co ntrol differential re quirem ents.

Th e float is available as a F6 8/1 or F 6 8 / 4 .

Th e F6 8/ 4 has pre-diilled holes along the rod to allow the user to achieve the / 2 and / 3 differentials in the table below:

Maximum intrusion

• \ ^ t s i d e ( m n n ) x ":•••:/:',•"••.'-'^"; ;;> " •.'' '"• *

Min imum SG

Minimum ta nk d im e ns io n

a bo v e /be lo w c e ntr e l ine (mm )

Maxim um differentia l (mm )

F6 8 /1

360

0.72

216

247

F 6 8 / 2

470

0.8

292

360

F 6 8 / 3

590

0.82

368

483

F 6 8 / 4

643

0.85

406

555



Full details of the o perating levels and differentials are in the manual. No te, thes e dimensio ns are approxim ate for cold water and

will vary for liquids of different SG.

V E R TIC A L F21 P U MP C O N TR O L A N D A LA R M FLO A T

C R A N K E D A R I^ FLO A TS F l 04

H O W T O O R D E R :

Specify - F104 float with:

1. A and B or V and W dims. 4. Mobrey magnetic switch head

2 Liquid in contact type

no .

(eg. SOID B/F)

3.

Specific gravity of liquid 5. State land or mar ine application

A + B , Must not

f e x c e e d

V + W 7 5 0 i n m

A or V ' Shou ld not

be less

B or W than 75 mm

For Straight arm float, suffix float number with "B' dimension as required

H O R I Z O N T A L L Y M O U N T E D S W I T C H E S

F o r l a n d a p p l i c a t io n

A and B dimensions with relevant minimum specific gravity

O

A ^ 75 100 125 190 17 5 2 00 2 2 5 2 5 02 75 3 0) 3 2 5 3 5 03 75 40 04 2 5 450|475 500|S25|5SO|575| eOo|625|6So| 675l'B'rriril

ISO

200

250

.64

J64

er

.70

SB

.73

.70

Æ7

^

.73

.76

.72

IS

.78

.71

.73

yr

.78

X

71

.75

* l

.72

79

.80

Si

.73

.77

X

sa

.73

.82

.74

.80

.84

.85

.75

.78

.76

.86



300

325

450

4 ^

500

.70

.73

.74

.76

.72

.73

.74

76

.78

.80

Æ

.79

.80

.82

.83

.78

.86

m

.85

.78

.84

S7

30

SB

sa

5 1

J M

sr

.90

.33

55

S3

32.

X

-W

JO

æ .

.92

For miar ine appl ica t ion

>^l

0179

100

125

75

.67

.68

.69

100

jsr

.68

.70

125

.68

.é9

.71

150

.68

,7o

.71

175

.69

.70

.72

200

.68

.71

.73

225

.70

.72

.74

250

.71

.73

.75

275

.72

.74

.76

300

.73

.74

.76

325

.73

.ii

.77

350

.74

~M

.7»

375

.75

.77

.79

400

.76

.78

.80

425

.77

.79

450

.78

.80

.82

4 ^

.79

.81

.83

s n

.79

3 1

3 4

525

3 0

3 2

3 4

550

3 1

33

3 5

srs

3 2

3 4

3 6

6G0

3 3

3 5

3 7

625

.84

3 6

.88

650

3 5

.87

675 "B'minl

.86

F L O A T S F O R U S E W I T H S T A I N L E S S S T E E L

F l o a t

T y p e

F 8 4

F 9 6

F 9 8

F106

F107

F 6 8 / +

F 2 1 / +

F 1 Ö 4 / +

F 8 8

F 9 3

F317

n?5

F 2 6 4

M i n .

S.G.

0.65

0.60

0.45

0.51

0.71

0.72 to

0.82

0.70

Various

0.8/1.0

0.75

0.7

0.65

0.85

M a x . .

P t e s s u r e

a t 20°C

(BAR)

34.5

74.0

34.5

74.0

200.0

34.5

30.0

34.5

74.0

Atmosphcctc

0.6

34.5

32.0

Y

T empera tu re

>c

M a x i m u m

4 0 0

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

400

180

6 0

210

210

X

W E T S I D E S W I T C H E S

Dif fe ren t ia l

( m m )

1 3

13

1 4

1 3

1 3

15 to 483

13 to 4420

-

2 6

1 3

1 3

1 3

2 3 ,

29 or 33

— 1 ' "

D i m e n s i o n X

L e n g t h f r o m

P r i v o t P o i n t

164

164

184

185

172

294 to 522

Variable

As ordered

359

183

229

164

179

D i m e n s i o n

Y

M a x i m u m

T r a v e l

119

119

127

108

120

204 to 736

-

198

124

112

119

Variable

(V

r

D i m e n s i o n Z

M a x .

E x t e r n a l

D i a m e t e r

6 5

65

65

65

6 5

6 5

129

6 5

6 5

65

67

6 5

63.5

.Float

Material

316

Stainless

Steel

PTFE

Monel

Monel



\ ^ *

' VJ i^

k

A

1

Jr

M OBREY F L ANGES F L OAT SWIT CH RANGE

A C C E S S O R IE S

a_

Test devices for Mo brey 'A'

flanged

switches to facilitate mechanical testing of electrical circuit

a r-

11

'T

TD lOOM (Sandwich)

1

ä

.-'_.

. . 1 .

i

c

•-e-

1

i -

TO

ioi/A(wad)

h

b —»j °rD102/10 & / 1 6 ( F l a i ^

Ty pe

T D 1 0 0 / A

T D I O I / A

T D 1 0 2 /1 0

TD 1 (^/1 6

Vesse l Flange

Mobrey'A'

Weld on

P N 1 0 D N 8 0

P N 1 6 D N 8 0

M ax. Pressure

Bar

1 8 "

18

10

16

Max.

Te mp.°C

c d

Ø n u n

120

120

120

120

120

85

200

200

35

64

85

85

155

155

155

155

-

92

92

92

-

-

21

21

67.5

67.5

67.5

67.5

No te: Maximum temperature can be increased to 210°C with Viton 'O ' ring. Please state when ordering.



MA TE R IA LS

T D 1 0 0 / A

Carbon steel

BS1501-151-360

T D I O I / A

Cast steel

BS1504-161-430A

T D 102/10 and TD 102/16

Cast steel body-B S1504-161-430A

Carb on steel

flange

BS 1 5 0 3 -2 2 W 3 0

A P P L I C A T I O N S

V

g

A LA R M D U TY

Perhaps the most common application for the original Mobrey float switch is liquid

level dete ction for alarm duty. W hethe r for high or low alarm,

th e

" M o b r e / '

is

on e

of

the mo st reliable and cost effective in strum ents available today Using the time

prov en princip le of magnetic coupling, the switch is gjandlcss, snap-acting and

suitable for almos t any

liquid.

Manufactured w ith a range of wetside m aterials and

with a choice of electrical or pneumatic output, side or top mounting models have a

tough IP6 6 weatherproof housing and are flange moun ted to provid e the "fit and

forget" so lution for liquid level alarm.

R u ^ e d , Rel iable, Glandless , Weatherproof

P U M P C O N T R O L

Mobrey sw itches m aybe specified with pump control float mechanisms which can be

site adjusted to give contro l ove r the required liquid differential. Side m oimtin g

models ope rate ov er 500mm —ideal for small hea der o r filling tanks, and vertical

mo unting m odels with cüfferenrials up to 450 0m m are commonly used in sumps

and storage tanks.

Side mou nt , Top m oun t. Site iadjustable

S U B M E R S E D A P P L I C A T I O N S

If it is no t possible to side or top mou nt a switch, then specify the Submersible m od el

This switch is watertight IP6 8 to 30m sub mersion, an d may be tank floor mounted to

provide low level alarm or pum p cut-off/pu mp protection in sumps and pits. For

heavily fouled liquids, a shro ude d m odel

is

ideal as all the moving p arts are pro tected

inside an and-fouling shroud. Switches may be supplied with or without factory fitted

and tested cable, with the option of Rubber or copper Pyrotenax cable to suit.



These m ode ls are also ideal for applications exp ose d to pressure ho sing or occasional

submersion, and as such have become an industry standard for shipboard use.

IP68

/ 30nQ, Fac tory

fitted cable, Hoseproof

H A ZA R D O U S A R E A U S E

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

Aalborg Industr ies NL BV

P

O Box 145

3200 AC Spijkenisse

Ohmweg 8

3208 KE Spijkenisse

Tl ie Netherlands

0

•* I i ^ - ^m



REX OMEGA COUPLINGS

N O O T H E R C O U P L I N G C A N O F F E R

A L L T H E S E F E A T U R E S & B E N E F I T S

r i f i f

W

Features

Benefits

Split-In-Half Flex Element Design

Polyurethane Flex Element

Torsionally Soft

High M isalignment Capacity

Visua l Inspection

Interchangeable Hubs

Adjustable Spacer

Easy replacement without moving the hubs or connected equipment

No lubrication required, excellent ch emical resistance

Protects equipment by cushioning shock loads and torsional v ibration

Accommodates unavoidable misalignment with low reactionary forces

No need for coupling disassem bly to inspect

Standard and spacer cou pling hubs are identical

One spacer coupling size can accom mod ate different shaft separations

Rex Omega Standard Coupl ing

standard "close coupled" design available in 15 sizes covering

applications up to 48,000 Nm torque a nd bores up to 229mm.

Rex Omegja Spacer Coupl ing

Spacer design available In 12 sizes covering applications up to

5,580 Nm torque and bores up to 155mm.



Ifffif

REX OMEGA COUPL INGS

I N S T A L L A T I O N . . . A S S I M P L E

AS

P E E L I N G A N O R A N G E

Mount one hu b to shaft, leave other

hub loose for adjustment of spacing.

#

Place ha l f of the O me g a e le me n t

a round hubs and secure wi th sel f-

locking capscrews. Omega e lement

will space the other hub. Now secure

the other hub.

T e s te d T o u g h

Rigorous testing demonstrates that the

Rex O mega coupling protects connected

equipment from the damaging effects of

misa l ignment , v ib ra t ion , and g ross

overload.

Where other coupling designs

Mount o ther ha l f of the O m e g a

e lement . T igh ten al l ca p sc r e ws to

recommended torques (below) and

you're don e



might al low equipment damage, the

super flexible element of Rex Omega

couplings minimizes bearing and shaft

overloading under severe misalignment

conditions and won't transmit excessive

OMEGA STANDARD COUPLING

With Straight Bore Hubs

%

Note: l-lub/shoulder

design

varies per coupling size.

Consult Rexnord for spe

cific size assembly draw

ings.

(Hubs Outboard)

(Hubs Inboard)

ü

Specification Data With Straight Bo re Hubs



OMEGA

COUPLING

NO.

E 2- M

RECOM.

MAX.

BORE

mm

28

MIN.

BORE

mm

13

P OWE RO

RATING

KW

RP M

0.0023

TORQUE©

RATING

(Nm)

21.5

MAX

RPM

7500

DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS

A

OUTER

DIA.

-

89

B

HUB

LENGTH

24

C

SHAFT

SPACING©

IN

36

OUT

4 6

D

MAJ.

HUB

DIA.

47

E

MIN.

HUB

DIA.

38

F

TOTAL

LENGTH

IN

8 4

OUT

94

WEIGHT

Kg.©

0.55

OMEGA STANDARD COUPLINGS

With Compression Buslied Hubs

Specification Data Witii TAP ER-LOCK™ Hubs

RECOM.

POWER©




OMEGA

COUPLING

NO.

E3-iVl

:E 4 -M

BUSHING

NO.

1008

1008

MAX

BORE

mm

25

25

RATING

KW

RPM

0.0043

0.0066

TORQUE©

RATING

(Nm)

41.2

62.0

MAX

RPM

7500

7500

A

OUTER

DIA.

102

116

B

HUB

LENGTH

2 2

2 2

C

SHAFT

SPACING

43

43

D

HUB

DIA.

59

66

F

TOTAL

LENGTH

87

87

WEIGHT

Kg .«

1.0

1.3

OMEGA SPACER COUPLING

With Straight Bore Hubs

Note: Hub/shoulder design

varies per coupling size.

Consu lt Rexnord for spe

cific size assembly draw

ings.

OMEGA

COUPLING

NO.O

ES2-R-M

RECOM.

MAX

BORE

mm

28

MIN.

BORE

mm

13

POWER

RATING

KW

RPM®

0.0023

Specifica tion Data With Stra ight

TORQUE

RATING

(Nm)@

21.5

MAX

RPM

®

7500

Bore Hubs

DIMENSIONS

IN

MILLIMETERS

A

OUTER

DIA.

89

B

HUB

LENGTH

24

C

SHAFT

SPACINGO

MIN

91

MAX

100

D

MAJ.

HUB

DIA.

47

E

MIN.

HUB

DIA.

38

F

TOTAL

LENGTH

MiN.@

146

MAX

149

W EI GH T

K g . ®

1.0



ES3-R-M

ES4-R-M

ES5-R-M

ES10-R-M

ES20-M

34

42

48

55

60

13

13

13

13

21

0.0043

0.0066

0.011

0.017

0.027

41.2

62.0

104.5

163.8

260

7500

7500

7500

7500

4800

102

116

137

162

184

38

38

44

44

50

85

85

89

89

67

140

140

140

140

180

59

66

80

93

114

50

57

70

84

102

184

184

184

184

238

216

216

228

228

280

1.8

2.3

3.4

4.7

7.1

OMEGA SPACER COUPLINGS

With Compression Bust led Hubs

OIVIEGA

COUPLING

NO.O

BUSHING

NO.

RECOM.

MAX

BORE

mm

Specification Data With TAPE R-LOCK™ Hubs

POWER

RATING

KW

TORQUE©

RATING

(Nm)

MAX

RPM

@


A

OUTER

DIA.

B

HUB

LENGTH

C

SHAFT

SPACINGO

MIN. MAX

D

HUB

DIA.

F

TOTAL

LENGTH

MIN.

MAX

WEIGHT

Kg.©



ES3-R-M

ES4-R-M

ES5-R-M

ES10-R-M

1008

1008

1210

1610

25

25

32

4 2

RPM®

0.0043

0.0066

0.011

0.017

41.2

62.0

104.5

163.8

7500

7500

7500

7500

102

116

137

162

22

22

25

25

97

97

94

94

137

137

133

133

5 9

66

80

93

184

184

184

184

184

184

184

184

1.5

2.0

3.4

3.7

O M E G A S P A C E R C O U P L I N G " A D J U S T A B I L I T Y "

Shaft Spacing Possibi l i t ies

(Using Straight Bored Hubs)

The Omega spacer coupling design provides a clear space between hubs. The element is split longitudinally and there are no

interfering center members or spools. Thus, shaft spacings as small as 6 mm can be achieved by recessing the hubs on the

shaft (see Figure F below). However, for such small spacings, use of the standard Omega coupling would be recommended.

The maximum shaft spacing ("C" dimension) for each coupling is shown on page E6 and E7. However any ANSI, ISO or DIN

spacing between 6 mm and the m axim um listed can be achieved without any additional parts. Hubs can be placed on the shafts

as shown below.

Figure A

Both hubs mounted outward

Figure B

One hub mounted Inward

One hub mounted outward



Rsxnord

i/fffffl

OMEGA EXTENDED SPACER COUPLING

Omega extended spacer couplings are designed to connect equipment with shaft spacing requirements beyond the Omega

spacer coupling capabil i t ies. They are ideal for applications with wide non-standard shaft gaps, and can be an economic

alternative to floating shaft couplings (i.e. stock pump applications).

Sleeve extensions

("SE")

are furnished in steel. They mount to regular Omega spacer elements (standard elements for sizes

E l 00 & El2 0) and cast iron or steel hubs — straight bore or com pres sion bu shed des ign. By adjusting the hub/shaft

engagement (see f igures E & F on page E-8) and spacer element mounting posit ion, the Omega extended spacer coupling

can be utilized for many shaft spacing requirements.

'Z/^'///.

^-

^

r m

^ ? ^ % : ^ 5 ^ ^

0

® e

— C

V

/

j^K^j^yf,

e e ®

^.fCT.

F=Ci

^5n-l

, \ , , x -

&

Single Extension

Maximum Spacing O

Double Extension

" C" Dimension - Millimeters

SPACER

MAX

RPM

MAX RPM©

MATCHED

WITH SHRB / SHRB HUBS With HTUHTL Hubs

WEIGHT



COUPLING

SIZE

ES3-R-M

ES4-R-M

E S 5 -R-M

STD.

1800

1800

1800

MACHINED

3600

3600

3600

STD.

SPACING

140

140

140

O N E S E

EXT.

190

190

190

T W OS E

EXT.

240

240

240

STD.

SPACING

137

137

133

ONE S E

EXT.

187

187

183

T W OS E

EXT.

237

237

233

(Kg.)

ONE S E

0.55

0.84

0.68

OM E GA P ILOTE D

FLOATING S HAFT COUPLINGS

Super Flexible Polyurethane Elements:

Protects equipment from the damaging effects of misalignment

and shock loads. Elements are split longitudinally for easy

assembly/disassembly.

Specially Designed Capture Feature:

Minimizes chances for catastrophic fai lures result ing from

fatigue or excessive misalignment.

Option al Center IVIembers:

Steel ,

stainless steel or composite materials are avai lable

depending on application and environmen tal requirements.

No Lubrication:

Pi lo t bush ing and po lyure thane e lement do not requ i re

lubrication.

Corrosion Resistance:

Zinc plated steel, stainless steel, composite material, or acid

and alkali protective coatings a re available.

Long Span Capability:

Optional composi te tubes al low s igni f icant ly longer span

capabilities than conve ntional steel tubes.

Rex Omega Piloted f loating shaft couplings are uti l ized to

connect equ ipment wh ich i s re la t i ve ly fa r apar t . Such

arrangements are particularly suited to transmit torque into

areas where moisture, dust or corrosive conditions would be

detrimental to driving machinery.

Typical applications Include cooling tower drives, steel mill roll

drives and paper machine drives®.

The Omega coupling's floating center member may be either

solid or tubular, depending upon the system requirements. The

assembly is piloted at each end by a resilient rubber bushing

assembly which eliminates the need for intermediate support

bearings.

Besides reliability, safety was engineered into the design by

incorporation of the captured center member feature, which

minimizes the possibility of a catastrophic failure due to fatigue

or severe misalignment.

Omega Pi loted f loat ing shaft coupl ings are designed to

alleviate situations where excessive misalignment in cooling

tower applications are trouble-some.

Self aligning:

Omega Piloted Floating



Captured Center iUlember

Feature:

M inimizes chances

for catastrophic failure

resulting from fatigue or

Shaft couplings allow up to 1.50°

angular misalignment.® The Piloted

Rubber Bushings are press fit into the

bushing housing to allow for axial

movement d ue to possible chang es in

OM E GA P ILOTE D

FLOATING SHAFT COUPLINGS

(COOLING TOWER DRIVE COUPLINGS)

Floating Tubular Assembly

( F T A )

Ome ga Composite Floating Tubular Assembly

(CFTA)

SPECIFICATION DATA

Omega

Size

No.

E10-M

E20-M

E30-M

E40-M

PowerO

Rating

KW

RPM

0.017

0.027

0.043

0.066

Torque©

Capacity

(Nm)

164

260

412

622

Max

RPIVI

1800

1800

1800

1800

Max@

Bore

(mm)

5 5

60

75

85

Dimensions

(mm)

A

162

184

210

241

B

43

4 8

5 4

5 9

Minimum

Span

(L)

mm

213

251

267

292

Maximum Span (L) in mm

@Ma x RPM@

Steel

FTA

1905

2 1 59

2286

2540

Composite

(CFTA)

2642

2642

3277

3277



E50-M

E60-M

E70-M

E80-M

0.090

0.148

0.262

0.467

864

1412

2486

4463

1800

1800

1800

1800

90

105

120

1 55

279

318

356

406

65

78

87

119

337

365

400

527

2540

2718

2870

3124

3277

3988

3988

4623

COUPLING SELECTION

SELECTION PROCEDURES

1.

Calculate KW/RPM

2.

Determine service factor from table on page E-13. If not l isted,

see load classification table below. Remember

to

consider both

driver and driven equipment and tempe rature limitations.

3 . Mu l t i p l y KW/RPM

by the

se rv i ce fac to r

to get

equivalent

KW/RPM.

4.

Select coupl ing size from Table

1

with

a

rat ing equal

to or

greater than

the

equivalent KW/RP M determined

in

step

3.

5.

Be

sure that

the

operat ing speed

of the

coupl ing does

not

exceed maximum RPM ratings.

6. Select desired hub type from descript ion on page E-14. Check

maximum allowable coupling bore.

OR

Table

1

Size

standard

E2

E3

E4

E5

E10

E20

E30

E40

E50

E60

E70

E80

El 00

E120

El 40

Spacer

ES2

ES3

ES4

ES5

ES10

ES20

ES30

ES40

ES50

ES60

ES70

ES80

NA

NA

NA

KW/RPM

0.0023

0.0043

0.0066

0.011

0.017

0.027

0.043

0.066

0.090

0.148

0.262

0.467

1.0

2.0

4.0

1. Calculate operating torque

KW

RPM

(9550)

2.

Multiply operating torque by service factor obtained from table

on page

E-13.

3. Select coupling size from Table

2

with

a

capacity equal

to or

greater than determined

in

step

2.

4.

Follow steps

5 and 6

above.

Table

2

Size

2

3

4

5

10

TORQUE CAPACITY

Torque (Nm)

21.5

41.2

62

104.5

163.8

Size

40

50

60

70

80

100

Torque (Nm)

622

864

1412

2486

4463

9605

H P



20

30

260

412 120

140

19221

38442

Rexnoid

//////ffffii

COUPLING S E LE CTION

TYPICAL SERVICE FACTORS*

—

MOTOR

AND

TURB INE DRIVEN EQUIPMENT

General Applications

Typical

Service Factor

Industry Applications (cont'd)

Typical

Service Factor

AGITATORS

Vertical and Horizontal Screw Propeller, Paddle 1.5

BLOWERS

Centrifugal 1.0

Lobe or Vane 1.5.

CAR DUMPER AND PULLER 2.0

CLARIFIER

OR

CLASSIFIER

1.0

COMPRESSORS

Centrifugal ,. 1.0

Rotary, Lobe or Vane 2.0

Rotary, Screw 1.25

Reciprocating **

CONVEYORS

Apron,

Assem bly, B elt. Chain Fl igti t, Oven 1.5

Reciprocating **

Screw 1.25

CRANES AND HOISTS

Main Hoist — IVledium Duty 2.0

Main Hoist •— Heavy Duty 2.5

Skip Hoist 2.0

Bridge, Travel

or

Trolley

2.0

DREDGES

Cable Reel, Conveyor

2.0

Cutter Head Drive, Jig Drive 3.0

Pump, Screen, Drive, Stacker, Utility V^inch 2.0

DYNAMOMETER

1.0

ELEVATORS

Bucket, Freight 2.5

FOOD INDUSTRY

Bottle and Can Filling

1.0

Cereal Cooker 1.0

Dough Mixer, Meat Grinder 2.0

LUMBER INDUSTRY

Band Resaw, Circular Resaw 2.0

Edger,

Head Rig,

Hog, Log

Haul

2.5

Planer 2.0

Rolls, Non-Reversing 2.0

Rolls,

Reversing. 2.5

Sawdust Conveyor 1.5

Slab Conveyor, Sorting Table 2.0

OIL INDUSTRY

Chiller 1.0

POWER INDUSTRY

Ash Handling Conveyors 1.5

Baghouse Air Handling Fans 1.5

Ball Mill 2.5

Belt Conveyors

1.5

- Circulating Pumps (centri fugal) -.: 1.0

Coal Grinders

and

Crushers

2.5

Coal Pulverizers an d Hammerm il ls 2.5

Cooling Tower Fans

2.0

FGD Slurry Pumps (centri fugal) 1.0

Forced Draft Fan and Induced Draft Fan 1.5

Primary Air, Recycling Fans 1.5

Traveling Water Screens 1.0

PULP & PAPER MILLS

Agitator 1.5



EXCITER, GENERATOR 1.0

EXTRUDER, PLASTIC 2.0

FANS

Centrifugal 1.0

Cooling Tow er

2.0

Forced Draft and Induced Draft 1.5

Barking Drum 3.0

Beater and Pulper 2.0

Bleacher 1.0

Calendar 2.5

Chipper

3.5

Couch, Cylinder Dryer 2.0

OR D E R IN G IN S TR U C TION S

S T A N D A R D AND S P A C E R C O U P L I N G S

When ordering

a

complete coup ling, specify size/type

of

element

and

hubs

(two

hubs

per

complete coupling) options include:

Element

—

[E2-M

-

E140-M] standard (close coupled)

[ES2-R-M

-

ES80-M] S PACER

[2MSHRB - 140M SHR B] straight hub-rough bore

Hub

—

[2MSHCB

-

140MSHCB] straight hub-custom bore (specify bore

&

keyway)

[3MHTI -140MHTL ] hub-TAPER-LOCK" (bushing not included)

OTHER AVAILABLE DESIGNS (Consul t Rexnord)

Sleeve Extens ion s

—

[3SE

-

120SE]

[10FTA

-

140FTA] specify bore, shaft spacing

&

material class

Float ing Pi lo ted Shaf t Coupl ings — [10PS A-14 0PS A] specify bore, shaft spacing & material class

[1OFSA -140F SA ] specify bore, shaft spacing & material class

GE N E R A L A L IGN M E N T IN S TR U C TION S

C A L I P E R

AND

S T R A I G H T E D G E M E T H O D

EQUIPMENT ALIGNMENT

Coupling alignment is directly related to equipment and coupling life.

Although Omega couplings can withstand gross misalignment, care should be taken for best possible alignment to assure

optimum performance.

The

caliper/straightedge alignment procedure

is

described below.

If

greater alignment accuracy

is

desired,

a

dial indicator m ethod

is

recommended. There

are

occasions when equipment manufacturers require more specific



alignment tolerance s,

in

which cas e

the

manufacturer's recommendations should

be

followed.

1 .To correct

for

angular misalignment,

use

calipers

to

check

the gap

between hubs. Adjust

or

shim equipment until

the gap is

the same

at all

points around

the

hubs.

2.To correct parallel offset, place

a

straightedge across

the hub

f langes

in two

places

at 90° to

each other. Adjust

or

shim

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

P h y s i c a l P a r a m e t e r s

Cplg.

Size

E2

ES2-R

E3

ES3-R

E4

ES4-R

E5

ES5-R

E10

ES10-R

E20

ES20

E30

ES30

E40

ES40

Norn.

Torque

(Nm)

21.5

41.2

62.0

104.5

163.8

260

412

622

Max

Torque

(Nm)

53.8

103.0

155.0

261.3

409.5

650

1030

1555

Max

Speed

(RPM)

7500

7500

7500

7500

7500

7500

7500

7500

7500

7500

6600

4800

5800

4200

5000

3600

Moment

of Inertia

J

(Kgm=)

.000323

.000528

.000733

.001670

.001230

.002670

.003230

.005860

.006450

.009970

.016100

.021100

.033700

.044000

.080600

.100000

Max

Axial

Misalign

(mm)

4.7

4.7

4.7

6.3

6.3

6.3

6.3

6.3

Max

Radial

Misalign

(mm)

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

2.4

2.4

2.4

Max

Angular

Misalign

rad

.070

.070

.070

.070

.070

.052

.052

.052

deg

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

Static**

Torsional

Stiffness

(Nm/rad)

433

842

777

1490

1750

2460

4855

7315

Static**

Axial

Stiffness

(N/mm)

105

114

123

181

251

272

280

314

Static**

Radial

Stiffness

(N/mm)

226

235

245

264

468

482

503

522

Static**

Angular

Stiffness

(N/rad)

102

133

175

264

654

822

971

1754



E50

ES50

E60

ES60

864

1412

2160

3530

4200

3100

3800

2800

.158000

.188000

.267000

.343000

6.3

9.5

2.4

3.2

.052

.035

3

2

15 200

27 200

409

446

543

560

3470

6195

Rexnofd

i/ffllffl

S P E C I A L D E S I G N S '

Stainless

Steel

O m e g a S t a i n l e s s S t e e l E l e m e n t

Corrosion resistant stainless steel shoes

for severe environments i.e: cooling towers.

Stainless steel hubs & capscrews also available.

O meg a M i l l Co u p l i n g s

Tapered hub design for mill motor applications,

(i.e.,

steel mill roll table drives).



8 3 0 4 0 2 0 2 - 1 / 9 9

Installation and operating instructions

Weishaupt oil burners L, RL, M /M S . R M /R M S ,

Sizes 5 to 11

weishaupt-



Contents

Con formity ce rt if ication

W e hereby conf i rm that Weishau pt oi l burners conform to

the basic requirements of the following EU guidelines:

- 98/37/EC Machinery Direct ive

- 89/336/EEC E lec t romagnet ic Compat ib i l i t y

- 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Direct ive

Therefore the burner carries the CE Label.

Extensive quality assurance is guaranteed by a cert if ied

Qual i ty M anagement System to DIN ISO 9 0 0 1.

Max Weishaupt GmbH

Burner and Heat ing Systems

D-88475 Schwend i

1. Ge ner al instructions 4

2.

Burner installation 5

3. Oil supp ly 6

4. Installation instructions for metallic oil hose s 8

5. Oi l prehea ting system 10

5.1 Prehe aters 10

5.2 Hea ted comp onen ts 10

6. Oi l pum ps 12

7. Attaching the fan 14

8. Burner fuel systems 15

9. Regulat ing systems 17

9.1 Regula ting sys tem -R L5 and RL71 7 17

9.2 Regulat ing system - RL8 to RL 11 ,

R M S 7 t o R M S 1 1 1 8

9.3 Oil meters and oil regulators 19

10 .No zzle recirculation on M S burners 20

11.Capacity graphs 23

11.1 Capacity graphs

for burner types L and RL 23

11.2 Capacity graphs



f o r bu rne rs t ype M / M S and RM / RM S 29

12 .

Noz zle selection 33

12.1 Two and three stage burners 33

1.

Genera l ins t ruc t ions

Safety

To ensu re safe burner operation, the burner has to be

instal led and comm issioned by qual i f ied personnel

and all guidelines in these operating instructions have

to be followed.

In particular, attention m ust be paid to relevant

installat ion and safety requirem ents (e.g. DIN, VDE ).

Flame monitoring devices, l imit controls, correcting

elem ents and all other safety devices m ay only be

com missione d by the m anufacturer or their authorised

agent.

Failure to comply can lead to serious injury or death

and can cause con siderable da ma ge to the plant.

Qual i f ied personnel

Quali f ied personnel according to this operating

ma nual are persons who are famil iar with the

installation, mounting, setting and commissioning of

the product and who have the neces sary qual if ications

such as:-

- P ersons who are trained to oper ate electrical

circuits and units to the safety standards given and

are qual i fied to earth and m ark the se.

Operating instructions

The operat ing inst ruct ions inc luded with ea ch burner must

Installation

The installat ion of oil f ired pla nt must be ca rried ou t in

accordance with extensive guidelines and regulat ions. I t is

the duty o f the installer to familiarise he r/himself w ith all

regulat ions. Instal lat ion, commissioning and maintenance

must be carried out with care. Fuel oils used must comply

with DIN

5 1

603 .

Electrical wiring diagram

A detailed electr ical wir ing diagram is included in every

burner delivery.

Maintena nce and service

In acco rdan ce w ith DIN 47 55 , the whole instal lat ion

including the burner should b e inspected o nce a year by a

representat ive of the manu facturer or a compe tent and

qual i fied perso n. The combu st ion f igures should be

che cked after every service and each t ime a fault has been

rect if ied.

Ambient requirements

The burners material, construct ion and type of protect ion is

designed for use indoors. The permissible ambient

temperature is -1 5°C to + 40 °C .

Electrical installation

W hen instal ling the elect r ical connect ion cables ensure

that these are long enough to allow the burner and boiler

door to be hinged open .



be displayed clearly in the boiler room. In conjunction with

this we refer to DIN 4755, Point 5. The address of the

nearest service centre must be entered on the reverse side

of the operat ing instruct ions.

Control circuits, which are taken from one of the supply

phases, must only be con nec ted w ith an earthed neutral

conductor .

2. Burner installation

The dra win g is an examp le of refractory for a heating

appl ian ce w ithout coo led f ront . The ref ractory m ust not

extend beyo nd the f ront edge of the com bust io n head

(dimension IJ. The refractory may, however, take a conical

shape f rom the com bust ion head front edg e (> 60°).

Refractory may not be required on boilers with water

coo led f ronts, depe nding on the boi ler m anufacturers

inst ruct ions.

The boi ler f ront plate must be prepared in accordance with

the above dimensions. The burner hinged f lange can be

used as a temp late for the dri l l ing. The threa ds of the bo lts

and tapp ings must be coate d with graphite pr ior to f i tt ing.

Example for burners with head extension see page 13.

Moun ting the burner on the heat exchang er

Example of installat ion on a

heating appliance with refractory

S izes

5 - 1 0

The gap be tween com bust ion head and ref ractory must

be f i l led with f lexible insulat ing material. Do not make

solid.

Burner

size

5

5

7

7

Combust ion

head type

M5/ 1a

M 5 / 2 a

M 6 / 1 a

M7/ 1a

Dimensions in mm

d i

180

160

200

220

d2

M I O

M 1 0

M I O

M I O

d3

210

210

235

235

d4

185

185

2 1 0

210

ds

220

190

240

260

1 Combust ion head

open

145

130

216

226

closed

154

144

228

2 3 8



8

8

8/2

M7 / 1a

M B / l a

M9 / 1a

220

240

240

M I O

M I O

M 1 2

235

235

2 9 8

2 1 0

2 1 0

275

260

280

280

226

236

226

238

248

251

3. Oil supply

Ope rat ional safety dep end s to a large degree on the oi l

supply. Pipe system layout and dimensions can be found in

our technical workshe ets.

Ring main system

The us e of a ring main system for oil sup ply to the burner is

recommended.

Note

The installat ion dependent r ing main pressure increases

the factory pre-set burner pump pressure.

Single pipe installation on request.

Suction lift operation

Suction l if t operat ion is possible for individual burners

operat ing on dist i l late oil EL. For installat ion and funct ional

diagrams for r ing main and suct ion l if t operat ion, see

technical worksheets 5

Strainer

A strainer is f it ted into the burner oil pipe wo rk (f low) to

prevent debr is , such as loosened swarf f rom the we lded

joints, from reaching the solen oid valves. The strainer

should be cleaned periodically, part icularly during init ial

operat ion.

Air /ga s separators

A Weishaupt air/gas separator should be f it ted at the point

at wh ich the burner two pipe system is conne cted. The

Termination of the oil sup ply pipes must allow tens ion free

connection of the f lexible oil hoses. Both oil and electr ical

conn ect ions must allow the burner to swin g open.

Pressure regulating valve in the ring main

Setting for oil EL

Ring main pressure 1 -1 .5 bar

Setting for oil S

To avoid vapo risat ion of wa ter in the fuel oil, the minimum

ring main pressure, including a safety margin, must be set

acco rding to the fol lowing table. It is based on the

pressure which is measured at the burner pump inlet (r ing

main pressure).

Oi l temperature

at the b urner °C up to

Ring main pressure

bar

125

130

135

140

145

150

2.5

2.7

3.2

3.8

4.4

5.0

Note

Isolating de vices in the return flow line m ust be

protected from unintentional closure (e.g. ball valves

with mechanical connection or burner interlock



air/gas separator should be installed as close to the burner

as possible (see technical worksheets). This is part icularly

impo rtant on residual fuel oil installat ions. The air/gas

separator must be installed in the correct direct ion, as

switch).

Shut-off combination befo re the burner

The ball cock is normally only closed during lengthy service

Oil hose connection a ccording to burner type

Oil hoses

DN

Length nnm

Supply Return

Connection

thread

punnpside

Connection

thread

installation side

L5Z

L5T

L7Z

L8Z

L 8Z / 2

L9Z

L7T

L8T

L8T/2

L9T

L10T

RL5

RL7

RL8

RL8/2

RL9

RL10

RL11

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

20

20

20

20

20

25

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

R 11T

R1 /2 "

R 11T

R 11T

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

R1/2"

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

R1/2"

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

R 1

1T

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

M 30x1 .5

R1/2"

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

R1 /2 "

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1300

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1300

R1 /2 "

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

M 30x1 .5

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

M 30x1 .5

M 38x1 .5

R 11 T

R 1 "

R 1

R1

R1

R 1

R 1

M 5 Z

MS7Z

IVIS8Z

13

20

20

1000

1300

1300

700

1 0 0 0

1000

R 11T

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

R 1 / 2 "

R 1 "

R 1 "



M S 8 Z / 2

MS9Z

RIVIS7

20

20

20

1 3 0 0

1300

1300

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

M 3 0 x 1 . 5

R 1 "

R 1 "

R 1 "

4. Ins ta l la t ion ins t ruc t ions for me ta l l i c o il hos es ( res idua l o i l S)

General

The oil and pressure hoses used are of corrugated high

grade steel with a high grade woven wire sleeve cover.

The oil hoses and pressure hoses are well suited for

residual oil operat ion if the following applicat ion rules are

observed.

Resistance against the chemical ef fects and

temperature of the fuel oil is designed for long term

service.

The new TR D 4 1 1 , D IN 4787 and DIN 4755 s tandards

specify me tall ic hose s for residual oil installat ions.

Oil and pressure hoses must be protected from external

mechanical damage . Wh en instal l ing care must be taken

that the ho se is not twiste d. It must not receive tors ion

strain either during installat ion o r during later moveme nt. It

is important that the two hos e ends and the mo vem ent

lie at one level.

In order to gua rantee tors ion free installation, the hose

should f irst be only loosely f ixed at one end, then move d

through the required hose m oveme nt 2 to 3 t imes so that

the hose can align without distort ion, and only then be

t ightened in posi t ion.

It is important to use a second spanner to counter hold

when t ightening.

Care should be taken that the ho ses do not come into

Example

Use second spanner for counter holding



contact with each other or other equipment (burner, oil

l ines or boiler) during operat ion.

Adequ ate curve radi i and minimum hose lengths must be

Conne ct hose without twisting

The minimum curve radius of the ho se depen ds on the

nominal clearance on the applicat ion, the material and the

type of manufacture.

The hose appl icat ion on our products has been agree d

with the manufacturer, using original parts.

For free usage and installat ion, the following minimum radii

must be adhered to as given in the installat ion instruct ions.

Minimum radii

DN r = Minimum

curve radius in mm

6

8

10

70

100

110

12

16

20

25

110

210

240

250

Hose s sho uld be selected of suff icient leng th. An

addit ional length must be al lowed for on the hose ends .

This len gth m ust remain straight, i.e. the curv e radius m ust

not commence unti l after this straight sect ion.

Addit ional length

#

When installat ion has been carried out the minimum radii

must be checked in the most adverse posit ion. I f

necessa ry a f ixed stop must be f it ted on site to l imit the

movement .

DN Z = Addit iona l length in mm

6

8

10

12

16

20

80

85

90

100

125

130



25 135

5. Oil preheating system

5.1 Preheaters

Th e

oil can

be heated electr ically

or

wi th a heating m edium,

or

by

a combinat ion of both electr ical and media preheater.

Hot water ,

low

pressure steam, high pressure steam

or

thermal f luid can be used

as

heating media.

On installat ions with

a

med ia preheater and without

electr ical preheater, the fo l lowing m inimum pressures and

tempe ratures are required for heating the residual oil S :

High pressure steam over 7.5 bar

Hot water f rom 180 - 2 0 0 ° C

Thermal f luid from

200

-

3 0 0 °

C

These temperatures and pressures must always be

available

so

that the

oil can be

heated to

the

temperature

and v iscosi ty required

for

a tomisat ion.

The ball valve f it ted betw een

the

media and e lectr ical

preheater (see technical descript ion of electr ical

and

media preheaters)

is

closed wh en

the

heating m edium

is

available. The valve must o nly be open during start up on

a

cold plant and remain open unti l the f inal working

temperature or pressure of the installation is reached.

During this period only the electr ic preheater heats the oil

an d the t h roughput of the b urner must be adapted to the

preheat capaci ty of the electr ical preheater during

the

start ing t ime of

the

cold plant.

On d ow nwa rd f i ring burners, media preheaters

are

rotated

through 90 °C. The

oil

p reheaters M V9 and MV 10

can

only

be f it ted w ith

the

media out let

on top for

liquid m edia or

below when using steam. If

the

burner

is

o rdered

for

dow nwa rd f i r ing, th is is already allowed for. If the burner

to

be changed to downward f i ring at a later sta ge, then extra

brackets are required to fix the media preheater.

5.2 Heated components

#

All burners have nozzle head heating controlled by an NTC

sensor.

The ROB

regulat ing control can

be set

to

65°

or

130°C and is pre-set to 65 °C

for

delivery. The heating

elements

in the

burner are usually con trolled

by

the burner

operat ing switch.

heat ing elem ents in the pum p bod y as standard . Heat ing

allows

the oil

to

be

kept

in

a pumpable condit ion and

the

pump

to be

protec ted f rom dam age. The heat ing

cartr idges

in the

nozzle h ead

and

pump

are

act ive

as

long

as the burner operat ing sw itch is on.



Pump heat ing

When

oil

viscosit ies

of

152

mmVs

at

50 °C

are

exceeded,

Nozzle head heating M5Z to MS9 Z Nozzle head heating RMS 7 to RMS 11

i-;,,- I

NTC sensor

Heating cartridge

Valve block heating M5Z to MS9Z

äiw*

NTC sensor

Heating cartridge

Valve block heating RMS7 to RMS 11

Heat ing

cart r idge

tm,.

« u l t - . •

ilé-l

K m

I Heating cartridge



Pump heating M5Z to MS9Z Pump heating RMS7 to RMS11

6. Oi l p um ps

The pumps are supplied suitable for connection in a two

pipe oil system.

Pumps are supplied with pressure regulating and shut off

valves. The pressure regulating valves keep the p ress ure

constant .

Adjustment

• The oil l ine on the suction side must be primed and the

pum p vented pr ior to comm issioning, otherwise the

pump will be damaged due to running dry.

• Insert gauge to chec k the vacuum or supply or ring

main pressure on the suction side of the pump.

• A pressure gaug e must be conn ected in to tappin g (5)

to measure the pump pressure.

• To adjust the oil pressure, remove cap nut (4) and se t

the required pressure.

Cloc kwis e rotation = pressure increase

Ant ic lockw ise rotat ion = pressure decrease

The suction resistance should not exceed 0.4 bar.

Max. supply pressure on pump type J

on pumps typ es E and TA

(measured at the pump).

Maximum oil supply temperature

on pumps typ e E and TA

. 2.0 bar

5.0 bar

90°C

The pum p fi lter will require cleaning from tim e to t ime,

depend ing on the degree of

fouling.

With a high degree of

foul ing,

the vacuum on the su ction side increas es. To

remove the f i lter for cleanin g, extract the eight scre ws (1 2)

on the pump cover.

After replacing the filter

erasure

that the pump cover is

tightly sealed.

Single pipe operation

In some instances when operating with oil EL,

J

and TA

pump s can be used with one p ipe systems.

The fo l lowing should be noted :

As there is no suctio n lif t by the pump in a single pipe

system,

the oil supply m ust have a guaran teed posit ive

head at the pum p inlet.

The bypass plug in the pump should be removed and the

pump return connect ion p lugged.

The supply l ine should always be vented when

commissioning.

As it is not possib le to vent via the pum p return on s ingle

pipe installat ions, the supp ly l ine must in this instance be

fu lly vented when comm issioning.

P ump coupling

A flexible coupling is f it ted between fan rotor and pump.



Filter for J and E pumps

When adjusting the intermediate coupling ensure that

#

Pump coupling

Pump J6 + J7

8

Pump E4, E6, E7

Q

.sP

10 11

t

2a 3 12

Pump TA2, TA3, TA4

7 4 6 2 5 2a 3



Legend

1 Suct ion connect ion 7 Locking scre w

7. Attaching the fan

Attaching the fan Rennoving the fan

Burner size 5

The fan f its onto a cylindrical shaft. A key on the s haft

transmits the power. The fan is secured to the motor shaft

by an M6 x 25 screw with washer.

Burner sizes 7-8 and 9-11

O n b urners size 7 to 8 the fan fits onto the cylindrica l shaft.

A key on the shaft transmits the po wer. The fan is sec ure d

to the motor shaft by an MB countersunk screw and

washer.

Burners sizes 5 and 7 - 8

The ext ractor part No. 111 111 0001/2 can be appl ied to

the two

MB

threaded holes and the fan removed.

Burners sizes 9

-

1 1

To remove the fan, the ext ractor part No. 121 3 62 0 0 1 3 /2

is appl ied to the two M l 0 threaded screw s.

O n b urners size 9 to 11 the fan fits onto a cone sh aft. The

self locking cone t ransmits the pow er to the motor fan. The

coupling piece is connected to the fan cylindrical pins. For

secur i ty , the coup l ing piece is connecte d to the m otor

shaf t by an M l 0 X 40 screw with lef t hand thread.



8. Burner fue l sy s tem s

L5Z L7ZtoL9Z

I .

t I

L5T

O

<

<

<

<

<

X

t *

L7TtoL10T

A

<

<

<

<

<



M5Z MS7Z to MS9Z

5 16

11

t i

115V ^

115V

i B

^ —

J

Ä

• { H -

n

I — \ ^

<

<

11

5 17

t I

t > > < i -

J

-ce-

— E ^

<

<

17

RMS7 to RMS11

^

1 14 6 16 18 3 13

12

Z ,

115V

K J t i"' ' t

Burner types M5 Z, MS7Z to MS 9Z, RM S 7 to

RMS11

Sole noid valve (5) / (6) in the supply and (5) / (7) in the

return are electr ically connected in series. Solenoid

valve (5) / (7) is fitted in the return line against the flow

direct ion.

<



1 1 5 V

- 0 ^

9. Regu la ting sys tem s

9.1 R egulating system - RL5 and RL7

The oil system is not fitted with a n ozzle shu t off valve.

Th e solenoid va lves control th e oil shut off function .

Operat ion

During prepurge solenoid valves (3) and (5) are closed. Oil

is supplied under pressure by the pump to the closed

solenoid valve in the supply (5). Soleno id valves (3) and (5)

are electr ically connected in series.

Operational diagram 1

After the prepurge period has elapsed, solenoid valves (3)

and (5) ope n. Oil f lows to the nozzle via the nozzle supply

and to the o il regulator (15) via the return. The oil regulator

is in the ope n po sition ( ignition load po sition). Due to the

lower return flow pressure, less oi l leaves the nozzle. The

greater p roportio n of oi l f lows via the nozzle return to the oil

regulator or the pum p return l ine. The return flow pressure

is approx. 8 bar at partial load position. The integral oil

pressure switch (17) shuts down the plant i f the pressure

is too high.


Full load is obtaine d by reducing th e m etering slot in the oil

regulator. This is don e rotation of the oil regulator

(clockwise as viewed from the shaft) . This thrott les the f low

of oi l in the return an d the oil quantity increases at the

nozzle outlet. On shutdown the solenoid valves close and

shut off the flow of oi l to the nozzle and from the oil supply.

For legend and notes on the wiring and installation

direction of the solenoid valves see Chapter 8

RL5 and RL7 nozzle head

Nozzle flow

Regulating nozzle



9.2 R eg ula t ing systenn - RLS to RL11 , RM S7 to RM S1 1

Operation


During burner shutdown and the prepurge period, the shut

off devices (6), (3) and (7) are clos ed and shut off device

(4) is ope n.

The ring main pressure during burner shutdown or the

pump pressure during prepurge is present at shut off

devices (6) or (7).


After the prepurge period has elapsed on RL burners (the

servom otor is in ignition posit ion), the shut off devic es (6),

(3) and (7) open and shut off device (4) closes. The fuel is

then released for combustion.

On RMS burners, shut off devices (6) and (7) only open for

oil circula tion. After the oil circulation period has elapsed

(max. 45 s), shut off device (3) opens and shut off device 4

closes and releases the fuel oil for co mb ustion .

The integral pressure switch (17) checks the pressure in

the return. If the pressure increase is too h igh, the burner

shuts down. In shutt ing down, Shut off devices (6), (3) and

(7) close a nd shut off device (4) ope ns simultaneously.

Attention

The shut off devices (solenoid valves (6) and (7)) are

electrically con nec ted in series. The voltage of the

solenoid coi ls is therefore 11 5V with 23 0 V mains voltage

On th e shut off device (solenoid valve) (7), the dire ctional

arrow > on the solen oid valve must point towa rds the

nozzle. This means that the solenoid valve in the nozzle

return is f it ted against the f low direction -4 during bu rner

operat ion.

The shut off device in the nozzle head (nozzle shut off

valve) acts as a safety shut off device in the f low and the

return.

Together with the safety shut off devices (6) and (7) an d

the safety shut off device in the nozzle head, the

requirement for two shut off devices in both the supply and

return is fulfilled.

For legend and notes on the wiring and installation

direction of the s olenoid valves se e chapter 8.

RL and RMS burner nozzle head



Supply control circuit

9.3 Oil meters and oil regulators

Installation of oil meter

W he n m eters are f it ted in the supply and return, the system

must be protected from excess pressure by a pressure

relief valve installed in the return (see pipeline diagrams in

our work sheets).

A blocked return meter can cause the fol lowing:

- Burs ting of oil hoses

- Pum p damage (glands on pump leaking).

- Cha nges to the oil f low without cha nges in com bustio n

air can occur du ring burner operation if the meter is

blocked.

The return pressure wh ich results renders the

oil regulator ineffective. Renewed burner start may lead

to an explosion.

Setting exam ple: key on number 00

Primary sett ing

shaft identif ication No.

oil regulating cam

Isolating elements in the return should be protected from

uninten ded closing (e.g. ball valves by m echanical

connection). Non-return valves must not be installed. With

residual oils all pipew ork and f itt ings m ust be adequately

heated.

Oil regulator - RL5 to RL11; RMS7 to RMS11

The oil regulator is driven by the servomotor. The variable

oil throu ghp ut is controlled by a V-slot gro ve.

Each regulator has two regulating groves, which can be

changed .

Each regulator has two identif ication numbers

mark ed on the shaft, e.g. 00 -0 (see il lustration).

The slot depths are assigned by both identif ication

numbers. The following il lustration shows the assignment

Selected shaft identif ication No. visible from above

Cam identif ication



to the oil throughput.

e.g. cam 6

Primary setting

10. Nozz le rec ircu la t ion on M S burners

Noz zle recirculation on two stage M S burners

After the minimum temperature has been reached by the

thermal switch contact in the ROB regulating control and

oil preheater, burner start is released. The tw o s witches are

sw itch ed in series. The oil pum p circ ulates the oil via fi lter

and solenoid valve to the oil preheater, the oil is heated and

the viscosity reduced.

The heate d oil forces the oil in the supply system through

the burne r supply, nozzle head, the normally open solenoid

valve 1 to the pum p return. Hot oil is now present

throu gho ut the whole sy stem. The shut off device in the

nozzle head remains closed and oil cannot f low through

the nozzle.

Various burner components are also heated by a heating

cartridge (see chapter 5.1).

After termination of the pre-purge period, the solenoid

valve (3) in the nozzle return is energised and closes. The

oil pressure increases in the nozzle shut off valve and at a

pressu re of approx. 1 2 bar the nozzle shut off valve opens

to commence s tage

1

operation.

After a delay the solenoid valve (2) for sta ge 2 is opened

by the b urner co ntrol. Oil pressure is applie d to the nozzle

shut off valve which o pens stage 2. Nozzle dribble is

largely prev ented by the secure closure of both nozzles.

Nozzle head heating

Hea ting takes place directly in the nozzle head which is

insulated.

A heating cartridge with a 100 W capacity is

When the burner shuts down solenoid valve (3) is de-

energised and opens. The atomising pressure reduces

immediately a nd the nozzle shut off valves clo se.

Nozzle head maintenance and cleaning

Both nozzles can be replaced without affecting the

function of the hydraulic nozzle shut off valves.

If the no zzle sh ut off valves 1 or 2 are remov ed, the

isolating device in the oil supply and return must first be

closed.

Nozzle head heating on RMS7 to RMS 11 burners

As with two stage burners, regulating burners for residual

oils are also f it ted with temperatu re con trolled nozzle head

heating.

This enables the nozzle head to b e ke pt at a

constant temperature. The heat ing cart r idge, whose

thermal output is controlled by the ROB regulating control,

has a 100 W capacity. The RO B co ntrol can be set to a

tempe rature of 65 °C or 13 0°C. The factory pre-set is

65°C.

An NTO sensor is f it ted on the heating cartridge support to

measure the temperature.

The tem pera ture release sw itch in the regulating control is

con nec ted in series with the oil preheater release

thermostat and only allows burner start after the selected

nozzle head temperature an d minimum oil preheater

temperature has been reached.



fitted in the nozzle body. The nozzle temperature is

Cold start with

2

purge times

O

•*->

O

E

o

>

0)

120°

100°

80°

60°

40°

20°

Pre-purge

Second pu rge

First purge

Post heat ing t ime

Safety va lve open -S af ety va lve c losed

Safety va lve ope n

Burner start

3 5

4 0

Start up t ime approx. 175 s.

>

Time [ s ]

Start in warm conditions with oil line temperature in supply > 60°C

120°

100°



V-

80°

Addit ional start circuit with two purge t imes for RM S7

to RIVIS11 burners, DIN 4787

Operat ion

After prepu rge has taken place and the ignit ion posit ion

has been reach ed, the safety valves are opened for 3 5 s to

enable the burner fuel system components to be heated.

The safety solen oid valves are then close d for approx. 40

s. In the meantime the oil preheater will regain heat and

can give the maximum tempe rature after the 40 s have

elapsed.

After this period the safety solenoid valves are re-ope ned

and at the same tim e a return signal is given to the burner

contro l to continue the start up seque nce. An interval,

determined by the burner controller, of about 6 s produces

a secon d purge t im e up to the oil release where the

temperature peak of the oil preheater is uti l ised for the

moment of ignit ion.

So that the cold start process does not take place when

start ing from warm co ndit ions or after a short shut d ow n

per iod,

a therm ostat f it ted in the bu rner fuel line system

between oil preheater outlet and distribution piece

determines w hether it is a cold sta rt or a warm start w ith

short purge period. The thermostat switching point is

approx. 55 - 60 °C. If the oil l ine temperature is more than

this f igure before the boiler regulator s witches on , then

only the short purg e t ime of 6 s is used for the sub sequ ent

burner start. This m onitoring ass ures that there will be no

unnecessary delays during the start process.

i i i . :

s m :

X

=

, - i . .* .* .

/ ; » , . . . * . . .

{

: ,* .

" :

: : i ^ ; • •

«M4vt * : ^ "*"

•• .^t »*> fc'irl"**'" *

-' • ihi'.:...:

• • : : ; ? . . .

' ' • ' • - * ' : j . •

• - •

T

r^

' • • - f . / ' . . : •

. . 4 » V . « » * • • ' •

K • ; • • * •

' , • * « . • V * * * * * . *

-..rrr--

> . , .^

• > • * » * • -

The circuit is design ed in such as way tha t there is a ballast

effect as far as the sw itching cond it ion of the thermostat is

conce rned .

This m eans that once start up has begun, any

thermostat response will not produce an alteration in the

seq uen ce of operations, so that either a cold or a warm

start always clearly takes place .

If the oil tempe rature s t ipulates a warm s tart, the start up

time of the burner is shortene d by 45 s, the t ime usually

used as the delay period.

The circulation return is always f it ted into the pump return.



Nozz le heads are tested safety devices and according

11. Capac i ty g raphs

11.1 Burner typ es

L

and RL

Fig. I

-m

0 - 1 0

Fig. II

^ '

^ 1

1 , ^

" t

a

-J '^

0 - 1 0

Fig. Ill

Fig. IV

m

0 - 1 0

0 - 1 0

Impo rtant infornnation relating to capacity charts

The capacity charts s how the oil through put relative to the

combustion chamber pressure. They are maximum values

measured on idealised test f lame tubes to DIN 478 7.

All ratings data given relate to an air temperature of

20°C and an installation elevation of 500 m.

Sizes

Dimensions mm



No. Combust ion head

Fig.

1

d

Size

7

Dimensions

mm

No. Combustion head

Fig.

(1)

(2)

(3)

M6/1a-155x50

1

M7/1a-155x50

1

M6/1a-165x50

1

M7/1a-165x50

1

M6/1a-175x50 1

M7/1a-175x50 1

1 90

1 90

1 90

1 100

1 90

1 100

200

2Ö0

200

220

200

220

(1)

mbar

- 2

•

Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg/h

k W

L7Z,L7T

M 6 / 1 a - 1 55x50

4 1 - 1 5 0

490-1785

M7/1a-155x50

55-165

655-1965

V

No.

(4)

(5)

(6)

Combustion head

M6/1a-155x50

M7/1a-155x50

M6/1a-165x50

M7/1a-165x50

M6/1a-175x50

M7/1a-175x50

Fig. 1

9 0

9 0

9 0

100

9 0

100

d

200

2 0 0

200

2 2 0

200

220

(4)

mbar

^

- 2

•

Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg /h

k W

i

/

/

RL7

M6/1a-155x50

42-155

500-1845

y

/

M7/1a-155x5C

55-165

655-1965

kW 200

600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

k W 200 400

1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

kg/h 600 1800



(2)

(5)

Sizes

Dimensions mm

No. Com bustion head Fig.

(1)

(2)

(3)

M 7 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0 1

1 100

1 110

1 100

i 110

1 100

1 110

220

240

220

240

220

240

(1)

mbar

-2 •

Burner types L8Z, L8T

Comb, head M7/1 a - 1 55x50

Rating kg/h 57 -1 95

kW 680 - 2320

M 8 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0

70 - 230

835 - 2740

No.

(4)

(5)

(6)

Com bust ion head 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0 1

M B / l a - l 5 5 x 5 0 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0 1

iV IS /la - l 6 5 x 5 0 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0 1

-ig-

1

1 100

1 110

1 100

1 110

1 100

1 110

d

220

240

220

240

220

240

(4)

mbar

10

8

-2

Burner types RL8

Comb, head M7 /1a-155x 50

Rating kg/h 51 -2 10

kW 605 - 2500

>

M8/1a -155x50

6 5 - 2 3 0

775-2740

^ 5 ^

(2) (5)



mbar

Burner types L8Z, L8T

Comb, head M7/1 a • 165x50 M 8 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

mbar

Burner types RL8

Comb, head M7 /1a-165 x50 M 8 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

Sizes 8/2

Dimensions mm

No.

(1+5)

(2)

(3)

Combust ion head

M 9 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

IV IQ / la - l 8 5 x5 0

U 2 / 1 - 1 4 5 x 4 0

U 2 / 1 - 1 5 5 x 5 0

G 7 / 2 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0

Fig.

Ill

III

II

1

9 0

9 0

8 5

85

120

d

2 4 0

2 4 0

2 2 0

2 2 0

265

(1)

mbar

i n

-2 -

Burner types

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

kW

L8Z/2,

L8T/2

M9/1a -165x50

64 - 240

7 6 0 - 2 8 6 0

M9/1a -185x50

52 - 203

6 2 0 - 2 4 2 0

\

KW 500

(2)

No.

(4)

(6)

(7)

Combust ion head

U 2 / 1 - 1 6 5 x 5 0

G 7 / 2 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

U 2 / 1 - 1 5 5 x 5 0

G 7 / 2 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

U 2 / 1 - 1 6 5 x 5 0

G 7 / 2 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0

Fig.

1

8 5

1 120

8 5

1 120

8 5

1 120

d

2 2 0

265

2 2 0

265

220

265

(4)

mbar

- 2 •

Burner types

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

kW

L8Z/2,

L8T/2

U2/1 -165 x50

52 - 200

6 2 0 - 2 3 8 0

^-

f^

S,

s .

s

G7/2a-165x50

9 0 - 2 6 5

1070-3155

V

\

\

^

V

V

\ ,

N,

S

S,

S,

(6)



mbar

Burner types

Comb, head

L8Z/2, L8T/2

U2/1 -145x40

mbar

Burner types

Comb, head

RL8/2

U2/1 -155x50 G7/2a -165x50

(5)

mbar

-2 -

Burner types

C o m b , head

Rating

kg /h

k W

/

RL8/2

M9/1a-165x50

58-248

690-2955

M9/1a-185x50

5 2 - 2 1 8

6 2 0 - 2 5 9 5

Size 9

Dimensions m m

No. Combustion head Fig.

( 1 - 3 )

M9/1a-165x50

M9/1a-185x50

9 0

9 0

240

240

(1)

(2)

bar

Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg /h

k W

L9Z

M9/1a-165x50

6 8 - 2 6 0

810-3095

M9/1a-185x50

6 3 - 2 5 0

7 5 0 - 2 9 8 0

mbar Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg/h

k W

L9T

M9/1a-165x50

6 7 - 2 9 0

8 0 0 - 3 4 5 5

/

M9/1a-185x50

6 3 - 2 5 0

7 5 0 - 2 9 8 0



,,

/ _

^

r

Sizes 10 and 11

Dimen sions nnm

No.

(1+2)

Combust ion head

M 1 0 / 2 - 1 8 5 x 5 0

M l 0 /2 - 2 0 0 x 5 0

Fig.

iV

IV

1

140

140

d

265

265

(1)

No.

(3)

Combust ion head

M 1 1 / 1 - 2 4 5 x 7 0

M i l / I - 2 6 0 x 7 0

Fig.

IV

IV

1

170

170

d

3 2 5

3 2 5

(3)

mbar

1 4

„

°

°

,

^

-

-2 •

Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg/h

k W

L10T

M l 0 / 2 - 1 8 5 x 5 0

9 5

-

380

1 1 3 0 - 4 5 2 5

M l 0 / 2 - 2 0 0 x 5 0

85 - 325

1 0 1 0 - 3 8 7 0

mbar

1 o

1 K

I D

. -

i n

l U

- 2 •

Burner types

C o m b , head

Rating kg/h

k W

y

y

' /

/

y

' ' i

RL11

M l 1/2-245x70

1 3 0 - 4 4 0

1 5 5 0 - 5 2 4 0

TC.

"•

S ^ : ^

M l 1 /2-260x70

1

2 0

-

3 8 5

1 4 3 0 - 4 5 8 5

S

1

1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 1600 2000 4000 4500 5000 5500

(2)

mbar

1 0

1 2

Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg/h

k W

RL10

M l 0 / 2 - 1 8 5 x 5 0

9 0 - 380

1 0 7 0 - 4 5 2 5

M l 0 / 2 - 2 0 0 x 5 0

8 0 - 3 1 5

9 5 5 - 3 7 5 0



.-

11.2 Burner types M /M S and R M /R M S

Combustion of residual oil

With residual oi l burners types M S and R MS , the oi l

throughput in relation to nominal rating must not be

less than 10 0 k g/ h. It is also recom me nde d that sl iding

two stage RMS burners are used when burning this

fuel.

Sizes

Dimensions mm

No.

Com bust ion head

( 1 ) M 5 / 2 a - 1 2 5 x 4 0

M 5 / 1 a - 1 2 5 x 4 0

M 5 / 1 a - 1 4 5 x 4 0 *

* Specia l combust ion head

Fig.

II

II

II

1

5 0

6 5

65

d

160

180

180

(1)

mbar

Burner types

C o m b ,

head

Rating kg/h

k W

M 5 Z

M 5 / 2 a - 1 2 5 x 4 0

2 0 - 7 0

2 2 5 - 8 1 0

M 5 / 1

2 8 -

3 1 0

a -1 2 5 x 4 0

0 6

1 1 9 0

v^~

M 5 /

2 5 -

2 8 0

a - 1 4 5 x 4 0

81

- 9 1 5



Size?

Dimensions m m

No.

Combustion head

Fig.

(1)

(2)

(3)

M6/1a-155x50

M7/1a-155x50

M6/1a-165x50

M7/1a-165x50

M6/1a-175x50

M7/1a-175x50

II

II

II

1

II

II

100

100

9 0

100

9 0

100

220

220

200

220

200

220

(1)

mbar

14

- 2 H

Burner types

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

kW

/

MS7Z,

RMS7

M6/1a-155x50

50-159

560-1785

~L

7L.

/

/

/

M7/1a-155x50

70-175

785-1965

• v

(2)

mbar

14

-2 •

Burner types

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

kW

MS7Z,RMS7

M6/1a-165x50

45-127

505-1430

,,

/

/

/

'

y.

M7/1a-165x50

65-175

730-1965

\

1

k W 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

kW 200 400 600

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

(3)

mbar Burner types

MS7Z,

RMS7



Comb, head M6/1a-175x50 M7/1a-175x50

S iz e s 8 , 8 /2 a n d 9

Di men si o n s mm

No.

Com bust ion head Fig.

(1)

(2)

(3)

M 7 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0 * 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0 * 1

M 7 / 1 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0 1

M 8 / 1 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0 1

1 100

1 110

1 100

1 110

1 100

1 110

220

2 4 0

220

240

220

2 4 0

No.

(4)

(5+7 + 8)

(6)

Combust ion head

G7/2a-165 x 50

G 7 / 2 a - 1 7 5 x 5 0

M 9 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

M 9 / 1 a - 1 8 5 x 5 0

U 2 / 1 - 1 5 5 x 5 0

U 2 / 1 - 1 6 5 x 5 0

Fig.

II

II

III

II

1

120

1 2 0

9 0

9 0

8 5

8 5

d

265

2 6 5

2 4 0

240

220

220

Specia l combust ion head

(1)

(4)

mbar

10

6

4

2

0

-2

Burner type:

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

kW

MS8Z, RMS8

M7/1a-155x50

7 0 - 2 0 6

7 8 5 - 2 3 2 0

M 8 / 1 a - 1 5 5 x 5 0

7 5 - 2 4 4

845 - 2740

_

mbar

-2 -

Burner types

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

kW

> ^

C^

MS8Z/2 ,

RMS8/2

G7/2a-165x50 G7/2a-175x50

9 5 - 2 8 0 9 0 - 2 7 4

1070-3155 1010-3075

•^

\

\

^\

\ \

\ \

S.S



(2) (5 )

(7)

(8)

mbar

1 4

"2 -

Burner types

Comb, head

Ra t ing kg /h

k W

/

/

/^

/

/

(

M S 9 Z

M 9 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

9 0 - 2 7 5

1 0 1 0 - 3 0 9 5

7 ~

/L_

'T

/

N ,

'•

M 9 / 1 a - 1 8 5 x 5 0

8 0 - 2 6 5

9 0 0 - 2 9 8 0

mbar

14

- 2 •

Burner types

Comb, head

Ra t ing kg /h

k W

y

/

>/

/

>7

/

/

r

R M S 9

M 9 / 1 a - 1 6 5 x 5 0

9 0 - 3 2 8

1 0 1 0 - 3 6 9 0

cz

'

M 9 / 1 a - 1 8 5 x 5 0

8 0 - 265

9 0 0 - 2 9 8 0

Sizes 10 and 11

Dimensions mm

No.

Com bust ion head Fig.

(1)

M 1 0 / 2 - 1 8 5 x 5 0 IV 1 4 0 2 6 5

M l 0/2-200x50 IV 140 265

No.

Com bustion head Fig.

(2) M l

1/1-245x70

IV

M l

1/1-260x70

IV

* Specia l com bust ion head

1

170

170

d

325

325

(1)

mbar Burner types

Comb, head

Rating kg/h

k W

R M S 1 0

M l 0/2-185x50

1 0 0 - 4 0 3

1 1 2 5 - 4 5 2 5

M l 0 /2-200x50

9 0 - 3 3 4

1 0 1 0 - 3 7 5 0

(2)

mbar

Burner types

Comb, head

Ra t ing kg /h

k W

RMS11

M l 1 /2-245x70

1 4 0 - 4 6 6

1 5 7 5 - 5 2 4 0

M l 1 /2-260x70

1 3 0 - 4 0 8

1 4 6 0 - 4 5 8 5



JO

•>

12.

Nozz le se lec t ion

12.1 Two and three stage burners

I t is reco mm ende d that solid or semi-solid nozzles are used

with a spray angle of 60° or 45°. Due to the various

conf igurations of combust ion chambers encountered on

individual heating appliances, no binding information can

be given.

Please note that nozzle spray angles and patterns alter

with the atomis ing p ressure. The data given on the nozzle

only applies with a pressure of 7 bar.

On two stage burners the total burner capacity must be

divided be twee n two nozzles. Usually nozzle

1

is sized to

have suff icient capac ity for basic load at approximately 2/3

of the total

load.

At peak dem and nozzle 2 is ad de d to the

throughput of nozzle

1.

A different nozzle ratio may be

required depending upon the heat demand and the design

of the heating appliance (e.g. boilers with high c om bustio n

chamber resistance).

Nozzle spray characteristic

Hollo w spray Sem i-solid spray

Solid spray

Spray angle

Nozzle selec tion for residual fuels

Nozzles that are too small are frequently used for residual

fuels and therefore soon becom e blocked. W e recomm end

the following nozzles sizes as minimum s izes:

f rom 2 - 3 U Sg ph up to approx. 76 mm2/s at 5 0 C

from 3 US gph up to approx. 45 0 mm 2/s at 5 0 C

On two stage burners neither nozzle should be smaller

than indicated.

The charts are base d on dist i l late oil EL with a viscos ity of



t'S

08S oos ost' oot- ose

W i l ' I 1

[ 4/ß>l ]

005

081 091- O t't

_l_

OSI-

_ 1 _

oos 0S1? oot' ose

I MB> ]

[ 4 /6 > | ] [ , i i i p /ß > | ] ^ 6 ' 0 = ' ^ l O | B n p S 9 y

OSZ

0 0 5 081. 091. O t - l 051 - 0 01

oot" ose ooe

[4/6>|][,ujp/ß>|] e e o =^

\\o

lenpisay

001

06

[ 4/B>l ]

[ 4 /1 ] 009 oos

0 0 5

0 9 1 - 0 9 1

O f

I-

. I

,

. ,1 . . , I , I , I ,

0 5 1 .

I I I

001? ose ooe

0 S5

005 081 09 1 O t^ l 051 . 00 1

1111 111II i i i i IIII 1111 \y[\ W('\\V7P(''^

i>f ~

' ' ^'

/ ' ' ' ' ^ ' ' ' '

.<' ' « ' ' '

/''

y

i'/^i^t*

' ^ ^

/ ^ ' ' I ^ i ^ / ' ^ ^é.

'" ^ -/ '' 2,' i / ' Z^

/

y ^* // ^ / ^^j

j ' 2 7 I I ' > ^ Z v

1 / 2 / ^ f / i . ' / '

yfe_ Jfe_ /^gLjRil fe. fy - i ' ^ ty^J&v

,

^6

^

'cT

/ o / o " / o / o " /ö~| /cT ^ Q ^ ' ^ ö "

"""X^""^'^

^ ^ ^ ^ ' ^ ; i ^ i ^ ^ ^

^ — y ^ — - j ^ / ^ j^Å^--T^Y-}^x/^/^/ \

/ i / ^ -, Z J "i IT^

: : : : : : : : ? : : : : :V : : : : - ; / ; - ^ : :Z : : , . j ' i ; ^ ^ : : : : :: : : : -

:::::::r::::

:::-,?;^^::^:v±:, :::::::::::-

}ndL|ßnojL|; IJO

T jeq 3jnss3j(j

Ofrt 051

1 . 1 . 1 , 1 ,

[ 4/6>l

]

051

. , 1 . 1 .

1

[ 4/ß>l ]

1 1

OOl

11

3 0 1

l i n

0 6

n i l

36 08

1 . , , ,1

08

OZ

Oi

1

I I I

0 9

• I I I .

0 9

, 1 1

, ,

OS S I '

[M/ß>1]k

os st"

, l , , , l l , , , .

[4/Nk

ot' se 08

, , , 1 . . , . 1 . . . , 1 ,

Lup/ß>l]

i 6 ' 0 =

'if se oe

I I , , , 1 , , , ,1 , , ,

Lup/ß>i] ee'o =

S5 0 5

, , , 1 , 1 , 1

1,

k \\o

S5

, 1 ,

X| o

|Enp S9y

05

, , , 1, ,,

IBnpjssy

indLjBnojqi no



12.2 Sliding tw o stag e and mo dulating burners

The charts show s the throu ghpu t of the spil l type nozzle in

relation to the supply pres sure. The pum p pressure on RL

burners should be between 20 and 30 bar.

I t should be ensured that the minimum pressure does

not fal l below 20 bar even at the lowest regulator c am

position.

On RMS burners the pump pressure must not fall below

25 bar. Whe n, due to nozzle sizing, the bu rner rating with

the return f low closed (regulator posit ion 10) can only be

achieved at a pressure below 25 bar, the pump pressure

must be increased to 25 bar and the higher oil throughput

that results is reduc ed by limit ing the oil regulator

movem ent. This is don e by adjusting the limit switch in the

servomotor to the appropriate lower regulating posit ion.

The range of regulation is reduc ed by this action.

Nozzle return pressure

Spil l type N ozzle K3

/

W B3

The nozzle return pressure must be measured when

commissioning. In normal cases it should not be set below

5 bar for partial load.

Spil l type nozzle W S4

The nozzle return pressure must be measured when

commissioning. In normal cases it should not be set below

8

ba r

for partial load.

Atomising pressure

Burner type Atomising pressure

bar (approx.)

R L 5 t o R L 1 1

R M S 7 t o R M S 1 1

2 0 - 3 0

2 5 - 3 0

Spill type nozzles

T y p e W B 3 / K 3

TypeW

Note

Each burner is additionally subje cted to an oil throughpu t

ratings test w ith the spil l type nozzle during f inal testing.

This ratings test is usually carried out with oil EL. The

differences which occ ur on oil S, i.e. on RM S burners

(density and viscosity) are taken into accoun t with a

correcting factor. These test bed measurements can only

be used as guidelines. Exact measuring has to be carried

out on site. Site specif ic co ndit ion s, such as oil quality and

ring main pressure must be taken into account.

Solenoid valve group, sizes 5 to 7

Cleaning the nozzles

The nozzle is dismantled into its individual parts and



was hed in petrol or paraff in. The f ilter should alway s be

Nozzle selection chart type W B3 /K3

Spill type nozzle type W B 3 to 70 kg/h

type K3 80 to 180 kg/h

Spray angle 50 °

Nozzle selection chart type W, series 4

Spill type nozzletype W, series 4

Spray angle 50°

190 190

CO

^

Q.

N

N

O

4 6 0

4 4 0

4 2 0

4 0 0

3 8 0

3 6 0

3 4 0

3 2 0

3 0 0

2 8 0

2 6 0

2 4 0

2 2 0

W 4 6 0

y^ A2Q

W 3 9 0

W 3 6 0

W 3 3 0

W 3 0 0

W 2 7 5

W 2 5 0

W 2 2 5



13.

Ad jus tmen t of the co m bus t ion head

We ishaup t M onarch and R type oil burners are delivered

with different com bustion he ads and diffusers for each size

and capa city range. It is advisable to ch eck whe ther the

correct com bust ion head is f i t ted. Combu st ion heads and

diffusers are marked with their type design ation. The

identification of the flame tube is on the neck. The external

diameter of the diffuser is stam ped on the side towa rds the

burner.

Dimensions for adjustment can be taken from the capacity

charts (see Ch . 11).

The measurem ents given are empirical values, which

usually meet the requirements of most combustion

chambers.

The combustion head for each burner is designed for the

maximum oil throughput indica ted in each case .

If the burner is operated in the middle or lower oil

throughput range, the air gap betwe en diffuser and

flame tube must be altered.

The combust ion head can be adap ted to the combus t ion

cham ber condit ions as fo l lows:

Moving the combustion head from the basic posit ion in the

direct ion of the combust ion chamber.

Fitt ing the next size diffuser or smaller com bustion head

(see capacity ch art).

Bo th com bust ion head f ix ing screws should be

unsc rewed .

The comb ustion head or diffuser can b e

moved or replaced. This reduces the air gap and adapts

the air velocity to the corres pond ing lower oil throughpu t

range.

Sizes 9, 10 and 11 also offer the advan tage that the

combustion head with intermediate ring can be pulled

through the hinged f lange opening, after unscrewing both

hold ing screws.

Flame tubes m ade of steel with a higher resistance to

tem peratu re are available for spec ial req uirements.

Diffuser distance

Removal of combustion liead, sizes 9, 10 and 11



Connbustion head extensions

Combustion head extensions are required on boilers with

very thick doors and on reverse f lame boilers. When

com bustio n he ad extensions are f it ted it is no longer

possible to hinge the burner open.

* To enable installat ion and service work to be c arried out,

the refractory sh ould not be longer than dime nsion I4.

This only applies for standard b urners, not for s pecia l

com bust ion chambers, ovens, etc.

1 Oil l ine extension

2 Ignit ion line plug conn ection

3 Burner f lange

4 Flange gask et

5 Burner plate

6 Ignition line extensio n

7 Co mb ustio n head extension

8 Refractory

9 M ovable insulation material (e.g. Cerafelt), under no

circum stances make sol id

10 Nozzle support

Designation and dimensions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Burner

size

Combust ion

l iead type

Dimensions in mm

I2

Total length

l3 U*

Is Com bustion head

open closed di

ds

d6

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

M5/1a

M5/1a

M5/1a

M5/1a

M5/2a

M5/2a

M5/2a

100

150

200

250

100

150

200

252

302

352

402

240

290

340

103

153

203

252

103

153

203

245

295

345

395

230

280

330

254

304

354

404

244

294

344

180

180

180

180

160

160

160

220

220

220

220

200

200

200

140

140

140

140

140

140

140



14. Ign i tion e lec t rod e s et t ing

The distan ce of the ignit ion electro des to the nozzle and

dif fuser should be chec ked.

The ignit ion electrodes must not be touched by the

atom ised oil spray.

The distance of the ignit ion electrode to the diffuserand

the nozzle must always be greater than the distan ce of the

spark gap.

Setting the ignition electrodes on sliding two stage and modulating burners

3 . 5 - 4

Setting the ignition electrodes on two and three stage burners

3 . 5 - 4



15 . Air regulation, two and three stage burners

Two and three stag e oi l burner with two air d am pers

Sizes 5 to 11

The air intake has two air dampers.

Bo th air dampers are con nec ted by a rod so that they are

ope rated in parallel by the servomotor.

When commissioning the installat ion, the following

mechanical sett ings are necessary:

• Set the air damp er for part ial load opera tion (operation

with nozzle I) by adjusting the cam switch II - partial

load in the servom otor.

Two and three stage oil burner with two air dampers

Sizes 5 to 11

• Set the air dam per for full load opera tion (operating

wit h b oth nozzles) by adjusting the air damper for full

load via the servom otor cam switc h III - full load.

• Set the switch point for solenoid valve 2 to about

1

/3 of

the way between stage 1 and stage 2.

• The f inal sett ing of the cam switc hes in the servomotor

for full load - switch III and partial load - switch II takes

place after the f lue gas measurements.

On L7T to LI OT (three stage) burners, a t yp e 1 0 5 5 / 8 0

servom otor is used. This servomotor is the same

construct ion as the 1055/23 but has a running time of 8

s and an additional l imit switch

related to 90° angle of

rotat ion.



Servomotor type 1055/23

Servomotor

Air damper

posi t ion ind icator

Socket p in (must

be removed

when changing

prin ted c i rcu i t

board)

Fixing for air

damper shaf t

Pr in ted c i rcu i t

board cover

.

^

' S » « « , ,

....•:- ,rt

r m m

H -

..

Bot tom

o f

housing

Switch posi t ion

indicator

Gear wheel (may

be

uncoupled for manual

adjustment)

Con t ro l cams:

Auxil iary switch

II

part ial load

Auxil iary switch full

load valve

Limit switch II I full load

Limit swi tch IV c losed

Terminal rail

Servomotor type 1055/80

Bot tom

o f

housing

Servomotor

Sw i t ch

identif ication

Switch posi t ion

ind icator

Gear wheel (may be



15.1 Desc r ip t ion o f fun c t ion s fo r se rvo mo to r

type 1055

Burner control with LAL2 control box

Sequenc e of operat ions:

1. After the boiler regulator has clo sed betw/een terminals

4 and 5, terminal 6 of the burner control is energ ised.

2.

The burner m otor starts. The voltag e from terminal 11 of

the LAL2 controller is supplied via the closed switch IV

to terminal 8 of the LAL.

3. After a short delay the air dam per is opened to the

switc h point of full load limit switc h III with voltage from

terminal 9. A return interlock sig nal is given to terminal 8

of the burner con trol.

4. After the pre-purge terminal 9 is de-energised. By

energising terminal 10, the serv omo tor closes the air

dampe r to the part ial load switch ing point. Auxiliary

switc h II.

5. After f lame establishm ent term inal 19 on the LA L

controller is energised to control stage 2 or intermediate

load but remains without function.

Version

Z

6. The servomotor opens the air damper with voltage from

terminal 20 via switch S2 and stage 2 regulator to the

switching point of l imit switch III .

7. W hen the auxil iary switch I is overrun, the stage 2

solenoid valve is switched on.

8. After the burner is shut dow n voltag e from terminal 11

of the LAL closes the air damp er until the limit switc h IV

switches off the servomotor.

Version T

6. The servomotor opens the air damper with voltage from

terminal 20 via switch S4, intermediate load regulator

(see burner wiring diagram )and limit switch III .

7. The intermediate load solenoid valve is switched on by

auxiliary sw itch I.

8. Dep ending on the sett ing of the regulator for part ial load

the servomotor is stopped at the switching point of

auxil iary switch V or the air dam per is opened further.

9. On demand for heat from the full load regulator, the

servomotor opens the air damper with voltage from

terminal 20 via switch S2, to the switching point of the

limit switch III.

10. W hen the auxil iary switc h VI is overrun, the full load

solenoid valve is switched on.

1 1 . A fter the burner is shut dow n the voltage on terminal I I

of the LAL closes the da mp er until the limit switch IV

switches off the servomotor.



15.2 Setting the cam s limit and auxil iary

switches on servomo tor type 1055

Th e air damp er po sit ion is indicate d o n a scale of 0° to 90 °

by a pointer on the shaft.

There is a set ting scale between the cam sw itches. The

set t ing knobs on the cam switch po int to this scale with a

small pointer and give the switching point of the

appropriate switch in relat ion to the air damper posit ion.

The cam s witches are set as fol lows using the se t t ing

scale:

Ca m swi tches

* VI - Auxiliary switch

Stage 3 valve

Dep ende nt on burner rat ing,

but set below V

* v -

I V -

I I I -

I I -

Auxiliary s witc h

Intermediate loa d -

air

Limit switch closed

Limit switch

Full load

Auxiliary s witc h

Partial load


set between

i

and IV

for air sett ing

0°


up to 80°

Dep ende nt on burner rating,

betw een 0 and approx. 5 0°

Auxiliary s witc h

Stage 2 valve

Dependent on burner rat ing,

between part ia l and

intermediate load at approx.

10° to 40°



16.

Oil/a ir compound regulation, sliding two stage and modulating burners

The cam segment is driven clocl<wise by the

servomotor to the full load posit ion. The adjustable

spr ing band on the cam segm ent ope rates the air

dam per l inkage and holds the damper ope n dur ing full

a i r prepu rge.

At the en d of the prepurge per iod, the servom otor

bring s the oil regulator, wh ich is on the sam e axis of

rotat ion as the cam disc, and the air damper to the

ignit ion load p osit ion. In this po sit ion the oil regulator is

wide open, which means that only a small quantity of oil

is atomised at the nozzle, the larger proport ion f lows

bac k via the return.

The air damper is closed so that the air supplied is

matched to the atomised oil quantity.

Adjusting the air quantity

• The cam has an adjustab le spring band on its side,

which adjusted with settable cams. The air quantity is

matched to the oi l throughput required by adjust ing the

spr ing band.

• The sett in g of the spring band is determ ined at various

load posit ions by f lue gas measurements.

The outer scale on the camshaft serves as a posit ion

indicator.

W ith the lever f i t ted to the gear box the cam shaf t can be

disengaged from the drive. This makes it possible to

manually adjust the cam to any posit ion required.

The servomotor dr ives the comp ound mechanism in a

continuous movement from part ial load to full load. In

other wo rds, the air damper is opened and the oil

regula tor clo ses and less oil flow s to the return l ine.

Compound regulat ion

Full load (10 0% )

Part ial load (from 30 - 70%)

Igni tion load ( from 20 -30% )

Basic set t ing



16.1 Setting the cam s limit and auxil iary switches on servom otor type SQM

Descript ion

The limit and auxiliary switches are set manually on the

adjustable cams. The cams have a small pointer which

indicates the appropriate switch point on a scale between

the cam discs.

Wh en com missioning, these sett ings must be adjusted to

the requirem ents of the installat ion.

The outer scale on the cam shaft serves as a po sit ion

indicator.

The servomotors are suppl ied with the fo l lowing standard

set t ings:

I - Ope n 120°

II - C los ed 0°

III - Ignition load 30 °

IV - Free

V - Free

VI - Free

VII - Partial load e.g. 50 °

The connection diagram is also shown on the servomotor

cover.

Setting the limit and auxiliary switches

• ^ .

.8.-

•9»

Disengaging the drive

.^-.r |f lT;. .ä-

i



17.

Com missioning

17.1 Checks prior to first c om m issioning

The w hole installat ion m ust be chec ked prior to the

first com missioning.

• Has the heat exchanger been installed ready for

opera t ion?

• Are the heat exchanger and system fil led suff iciently

w i th med ium?

• Are the f lue gas ways f ree f rom ob struct ion?

• Ar e movable explosion f laps f it ted?

• Is the f lue gas damper open?

• Ar e the fans of air heater operating co rrectly?

• Is there suff icient ventilat ion to the plant?

• Have you taken the operating requiremen ts of the heat

exchanger in to account?

• Has the who le installation been wi red correctly?

• Have the temperature switch, pressure switch, and

safety l imit ing systems been set to operating

requirements?

17.2 Setting

Is suff icient load available?

Has the low water safety interlock been a djusted

cor rect ly?

Have all fuel carrying p arts been vented (free of air)?

Check rotation of burner motor.

Is there enough fuel oil in the tank?

Has the soundness of the oil hydraulic system been

ch e cke d ?

Is the oil supply pump (where f it ted) switched on?

Are the oil shut off devices open?

Have the oil l ines and pump been primed with oil?

Have the correct oil nozzles been f it ted?

It is possib le that other site-spec if ic tests w ill have to be

carried out.

Refer to the operating ins tructions of individual site

components .

General

Before comm issioning can com menc e, the entire p lant

must be ready for operation and ha nde d over by the

installer.

The sole noid valves fit ted on the burner and the isolating

valves in the oil supply l ine should be te ste d for correc t

operat ion.

The direction of rotation of the burner motor should be

verif ied before commissioning. With control circuit and

Full load setting:

After approx. 11 s the servom otor runs from ignition

(partial) load to full load (ensure that this is carried out with

excess air reducing the selected pump pressure

beforeh and). For full load the required oil throug hput has to

be set and m easured (the nozzle selection tables are only a

guideline for sett ing and testing).

Carry out combustion test:

L-(M-/MS-) burners:



Interm edia te control (Full load to partial load) only for

sl iding two st age and modu lating burners:

A step by step combustion control is required for the

whole of the burner regulating range. Set the cam

sequen ce st ep by step by hand in the direction of ignit ion

load (selector switch to STOP, disengage servomotor,

adjust by hand, re-engage). Regulate combustion values

by adjusting the air band. Ensure that the cam bands

scribe a smooth arc.

Partial load setting:

Set selector switch in the control panel to stage

1

or partial

load.

L-(M-/MS-) burners:

Ad apt excess air to the oil throug hput of the

selec ted nozzles with the auxiliary sw itch for

partial load (No . II).

Measure oil throughput, if necessary select

different nozzles. Set the switch point for the

start of the sec ond nozzle with auxil iary s witch

No I so that the excess air phase before the

sw itch point is not too large to extinguish the

f lame,

but on the other hand that there is not

too much smoke after the connection has

been made.

Three stage burners:

L7T to LI OT:

in the same way the excess air of the

intermediate load is set with the auxiliary

sw itch V and with the moveable auxil iary

switch on the air damper shaft (S8 on wiring

diagram) the connection point for the third

sta ge is set.

Finalising wor k:

Test ignit ion load sett ing when burner has been

com mis sione d. The sett ing is corre ct if the burner starts

without start impact.

Sliding two stage and modulating burners:

If necessa ry co rrect s ett ing at auxiliary sw itch

No.

III.

Two and three stage burners:

If necessary select new nozzles. Sett in g of full

load and partial load will then have to be

repeated.

Test and check the function of all safety equipment (i.e. oil

pressure switch, thermostat, pressure stat, etc.) when the

plant is in operation.

Documentat ion:

On full and part ial load the followin g values have to be

noted in the commissioning report:

Oil throughput

Type of nozzle

Pump pressure

Ssupply and return pressure (on RL burners)

CO2

Smoke

Flue gas temperature

Fan pressure

Draught or pressure in the combustion chamber

Sensor current

Room tem perature

Atomising temperature (on M S and RM S burners)

Air damper sett ing

Cam sett ing on the air band (on R burners)



18.

Se qu en ce of op era t ion s for LAL 2 and LOK 16 burn er co ntro l ler

Version Z oil burner

Servomo tor sequ ence d iagram Air

Full load

Switch points I - IV

Ignit ion load /Part ial load

Regulator

O n

LAL2 .../

L O K 1 6 .

C losed

Posi t ion ind icator 1> I 1 1 ^ 111 11 I

r eg ul ato r c ir cu it 1 2 / 4 / 5 ^ ^ ^

Time sequence ind icator for

servomotor

Burner fan

Oi l sequence d iagram

14 I

8 I

9 :

10 :

11 I

2 0 :

6 i

7 :

Nominal load

prepurge

ignit ion and fuel

re lease

Capaci ty regulat ion

/

I P I D I I I I I I I I I I I V I I I I

I I I

Seq uenc e d iagram for ign i t ion 15 '

and fuel release ^o

19

I ] I I I 1 1 1 I I '

-If

• -

Regulator Off



18.2 Symbols o n the lockout indicator

In the event of fault con dit ions the fuel supply is always

interrupted immediately. Simultaneously the sequence

switch stops and thus lockout is indicated. The symbol

appea ring above the reading mark indicates the kind of

fault.

M No start,

because a contact has not been made

between terminals

1

2 and 4 or 4 and 5, or because the

closed signal has not been supplied to terminal 8 by

the limit switch / auxiliary switch.

• Controlled shut dow n because the open signal has

not been supplie d to terminal 8 by the limit sw itch.

P Lockout

on burners f it ted with air switch because the

air pressure signal has not been received at the start of

the air pressure che ck. Any pressure failure after this

point in time also causes the control to go to

lockout

• Lockout

due to a fault in the f lame supervision circu it.

• Controlled shutd own because the posit ion signal has

not been supp lied t o terminal 8 by the auxil iary switc h.

1 Lockout because no f lame signal has been received

on completion of the

1

st safety period .

Any f lam e

signal failure after completion of the first safety

t ime also cause s the control to go to lockout

I Lockout beca use the f lame signal has been lost du ring

burner operation or air pressure failure has occu rred .

A Lockout on com pletion of control program me

a

- b Start up sequence

b -

a

Post purge sequence after controlled shut down. In

start posit ion a the sequence switch switches itself

off automatically.



18.3 Basic wiring diagram for LAL 2 / LOK 16 ... burner controllers

V RAR



I

I I

I I I

IV

V i

V I

V I I

,

V I I I ,

IX

X

X I

XI I

X I I I

X I V

\

E

JM.

^

^

til

m m

nnn

nnn

m m

tioJ

nnn

ti

t 3 "

(• ^

t12

l l l l U

nnn

nnn

r m n

nnn

« 9, t6 ?

i ^

^

^

^^ -

^

-

t4 .

. t 2 .

t 3 n

. t5 .

t 8

•"

nnn

i i i i i i

Mill

t 2 0

TTIfTT

m m :

'^~^~

—

^m

. t13 .

^^^^^^^^^^^^M

-(^f^

- 6 0 )

- (§)

(

- @

M -

"5

Q .

0

"5 'S

-t to

S

c

0 O

Position of locl<out indicator

®

®

®

®



18.4 Sw itching t imes

Sw itching t imes in seconds* in star t up sequence.

LAL 2 .1

4 /

LOK 16.1

4 0

2

4

optional

6

10

opt ional

LAL 2.25/

LOK 16.250

2

5

optional

10

22,5

optional

LAL 2.65 /

LOK 16.650

2,5

5

optional

10

67,5

opt ional

f rom start orde rf rom star t orderf rom star t order

2

4

10

8

2,5

5

15

7,5

2,5

5

15

7,5

t7

t16

t i l

t lO

t1

t12

t3 "

t3

t2

t3n

t4

t5

t20

t6

t13

Start up delay for burner motor G2

Interval f rom star t to O PE N comm and for air dam per

Running t ime for air damper to OP EN posi t ion

Interval from s tart to start of air pressure ch eck ( if pro vid ed )

Prepurge t ime with air damp er o pen

Running t ime for air damper to M IN posi t ion

Pre-ignit ion t ime long (Z on terminal 15)

Pre-

ignit ion t ime short (Z on terminal 16)

(1

st) safety t ime

Post ign it ion t ime (Z on terminal 15)

Interval BV1 - BV2

Interval between end of t4 and release of load controller

or valve at terminal 2 0

Interval to self shutdown of sequence switch after

burner sta rt up ( idle steps, i.e. no change in the

controller posit ion)

Durat ion of start up (without t11 and 12)

Post purge t ime

Permissible after burner t ime

7,5 7,5

3 2

3 0

10

10

3 5

47,5

15

15

12,5

92,5

15

15

' Val id where m ains frequency is 50 Hz. For 60 Hz f requency sw itching t imes are reduced by approx. 20% .

18.5 Technical data

Nominal vol tage

Frequency

Consumpt ion

.

220 V - 15 % t o 240 V + 1 0%

50 Hz - 6% to 60 Hz + 6 %

3.5 VA

Flame supervision with QR B (not on LOK 1 6)

Reco mm ende d i l luminat ion in Lux

Response sensit ivity of the amplif ier

4 0

B i j A



19 . Faul t con d i t ions and proce dures

If faults occur the basic re quirements for correct operation

mus t f irst be examined:

1.

Check the electrical wiring

2.

Ensure oil supply is available

3. Check that all components, e.g. thermostats, water level

interlocks, l imit switch es or set correctly.

When it is established that the fault is not due to external

condit ions, the operation of individual burner parts must be

checked.

Condit ion

Cause

Remed y

1. Ignition

No ignit ion

Ignition electrod es too far apart

Ignit ion electrodes dirty or damp

Burner con trol faulty

Isolating body cracked

Ignition transformer faulty

Ignition cable charred

Adjust

Clean and adjust

Replace burner control

Replace

Replace

Replace, f ind and remedy cause.

2.

Burner motor

Does not start

Overload t r ipped

Contactor defect ive

Capacitor faulty

Burner motor faulty

Check set t ing

Replace

Replace

Replace



Condi tion Cau se Remedy

4. Nozzle

Uneven atomisation

No oil f low

Nozzle leaking

Swirl disc loose

Orif ice part ly blocked

Filter blocked

W orn due to use

Nozzle blocked

Nozzle cut off faulty

Remove nozzle, t ighten swirl disc

Remove and clean

Remove an d clean

Replace

Remove an d clean

Replace

5. Burner control with f lam e sensor

Does not respond to f lame

Interruption in sequen ce of ope rations

Lockout lamp on

Flame sensor obscured

Thermally overloaded

See chapter 18

Flame fault

Clean

Replace

Check connect ions and voltages

Reset

6. Com bust ion head

contaminated with oil or has

heavy carbon deposits

Incorrect sett ing

Incorrect combustion head

Nozzle size in correct

Combustion air quantity

incorrect

Boiler room not adequately ventilated

Correct set t ing measurements.

Replace

Replace

Readjust burner

The boiler room ventilat ion must be

via a permanent op enin g, the cross



Condi tion Cause Remedy

9.

Cleaning and lubrication req uirements

Dep end ing on the environment, fan rotor, ignit ion electrodes , flame sensor and air intake should be cleaned as req uired.

M oving parts of the burner require no lubrication .

Motor bearing damage which is recognised and remedied quickly, prevents more extensive damage to the burner.

Developm ent of noise in the motor bearings must be investigated immediately.



Weishaupt products

and service

weishaupt-

Max Weishaupt GmbH, D-88475 Schwendi

Tel. (0 73 53) 8

30,

Fax (0 73 53) 8 33 58

Print No. 40 2 G B, February 99

Printed in Germany. All rights reserved

Weishaupt (U.K.) Ltd

Stoke Gardens, Slough SL1 3Q D

Tel. (01753)51 23 45

Fax (017 53) 51 25 85

Neachells Lane, Willenhall

West Midlands WL13 3 RG

Tel.(01902)60 98 41

Fax (01902) 63 33 43

Oil,

gas and dual fuel burners types W and WG /WG L

up to 570 kW

They are used mainly in houses and sm all buildings.

Advantages: fully automatic, reliable operation, individual

components easily accessible, easy to service, quiet operation.

D P '

Oil,

gas and dual fuel burners types Monarch

R, G, GL, RGL - up to 10 .90 0 kW

These are used on all types and sizes of central heating

plant. The basic model which has proved successful over

many years is the basis for a variety of versions. These

burners have founded the outstanding reputation of

Weishaupt products.

(nT



M a i 1996

Ersatzteile für

Weishaupt Brenner

Größen 5 bis 11

Spare parts

for Weishaupt bu rner

Sizes 5 to 11

Pieces de rechange

pour brüleurs types

Grandeurs 5 å 11

weishaupt

Sach gruppe / Sub jec t index / Fami l le



^ J

• " f t S S S T "

1.1

1.4

1,5

1,7 1.,

1.10 1.1 i 1.12

Bi ld

P ie t .

P h o t o

B e z e i c h n u n g

B r e n n e r - T y p e n r e i h e

B u r n e r s e r i e

T y p e b r ü l e u r

i G r ö ß e ; B e s t e l l - N r .

S i z e j O r d e r - N o .

G r a n d , i N o d e c o m m a n d e

ca .

kg

appr . kg

env. kg

D e s i g n a t i o n


1.

1.2

1.3

1.4

Brennergehäuse und

Einzelteile

Brennergehäuse

L, M, RL

L,

MS, RL,

RMS,

L, MS, RL,

RMS

L, MS, RL, RMS

RL, RMS

G, GL , RGL

G,

GL ,

RGL

G, GL , RGL

Schwenkflansch

L,

M,

RL

L, MS, RL, RMS,

L,

M S,

RL , RMS

L,

MS, RL,

RMS

RL,

RMS

G. GL, RGL

G. GL , RGL

G, GL , RGL

G, RGL

0

mm

242

281

350

380

450

242

281

380

450

Klemmschraube

G. G L, RGL

7 - H 8

8/2

9 + 10

11

5

7 - ^ 8

5

7 - H 8

8/2

9 - H O

11

5

7 - H 8

9 -1 -10

11

5

1 1 1 5 5 2 0 1 0 3 / 2

1 1 1 6 5 2 0 1 0 3 / 2

1 1 1 8 6 2 0 1 0 2 / 2

1 1 1 9 7 4 0 1 0 4 / 2

1 8 1 1 7 4 0 1 0 2 / 2

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 1 0 4 / 2

1 5 1 7 0 7 0 1 0 4 / 2

1 5 1 9 0 7 0 1 0 4 / 2

1 1 1 5 5 2 0 1 0 2 / 7

1 1 1 6 5 2 0 1 0 2 / 7

1 1 1 8 6 2 0 1 0 1 / 7

1 1 1 9 7 4 0 1 0 2 / 7

1 8 1 1 7 4 0 1 0 2 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 1 0 5 / 7

1 5 1 7 0 7 0 1 0 3 / 7

1 5 1 9 0 7 0 1 0 1 / 7

1 9 1 1 0 7 0 1 0 1 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 1 0 7 / 7

1 3 , 8 5 0

2 0 , 7 8 0

2 0 . 4 0 0

3 1 , 8 8 0

4 8 , 0 0 0

1 0 , 6 0 0

1 5 , 6 0 0

2 8 , 8 0 0

1 ,650

2 ,780

5 , 1 6 0

3,880

5,900

6,600

7,400

4 ,000

1 3 , 9 0 0

0,048

Burner casing and

individual parts

Burner cas ing

Swive l f l ange

Carcasse Brüleur

et pieces détachées

Carcasse de brü leur

Bride a charniére

Lock ing screw Bouchon hexagona l



^9 %JStf

OD

1 .M-1 .15 1.16

1.17

l . l i 1 .20 1.21 1.22

I B e z e i c h n u n g

Bt ld I Brenne r-Typenre ihe

Pict . i Burne r sene

Photo Type brü ieur

: Größ e I Bes te l l -Nr.

i S i ze I Orde r -No .

I Grand , j No de comm ande

j ca. kg

I appr. kg

I env. kg

Des igna t ion

; Designation

1.14

1.15

1.16

1.17

1.18

1.19

1.20

1.21

1.22

Versch lußdecke l

f ü r B renne rgehäuse

L (zweistu f ig)

RL , M . M S, RM S

G L

R G L

G

RGL (o. Bi ld)

Bl inddecke l 1 x 40 x 6 0 (Gas)

Tülle

f ü r B renne rgehäuse

L, M , M S , R L , R M S , G L , R G L

L, GL

L, GL

M , M S , R L , R M S , R G L

Luft le i tblech

L , M , RL , G, GL , RGL

5-10

5-11

5-9

8-11

5 -11

5-7

5-11

5-11

5-9

5-9

5-11

5

7-^8

111 361 0004/2

112 361 0005/2

155 327 0002/2

112 361 0005/2

151 327 0009/7

1 5 6 3 2 7 0 0 0 1 / 2

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 1 0 8 / 7

1 1 1 3 5 1 0 0 0 4 / 7

1 1 1 3 5 1 0 0 0 5 / 7

111 351 0006/7

112 351 0010/7

111 552 0009/7

111 652 0008/7

0 .040

0 .040

0 , 1 0 0

0 ,040

0 ,045

0 ,045

0 ,019

0 ,002

0 ,002

0 ,004

0 ,004

0 ,084

0 ,097

Closing cover

for burner casing

two stage

(wi thout p icture)

Cover

Transit ion nipple

for burner casing

Shee t meta l a i r de f lec tor

< P laque de fe rm eture

{pour carcasse de brü ieur

deux al lures

(sans photo)

Plaque pour ca rcasse

Jo in t de passage

pour carcasse de brü ieur

Töle de guidage d'air



% /

2.13-2,14

2,10

2,15

2,16

Bi ld

Piet,

Pho to

'


• Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner ser ie

i Type brü ieur

1 Größe

{ Size

1 Grand ,

1 Beste l l -Nr ,

1 O r d e r - N o ,

j No de c omm ande

1

ca , kg

appf- 1*9

[ env, kg

Des igna t ion Des igna t ion

2.

2,1

2,2

2,3

2.4

Luftregelung

L u f t r e g l e r k o m p l e t t

1 zwe i - und dre is tu f ige Brenner

L, M

L, MS,

L. MS,

L

L

G

G

G L

G L

gle i tend-zwe is tu f ige Brenner

RL

RL, RMS

RL, RMS

G

G

G

G, Ausf, ZMI

G, Ausf, ZMI

GL, RGL

G L . R G L

GL, RGL

1

1

i

i

5

7-f8/2

9-t-IO

7T-fST

9T-H0T

5

7 - ( -8

5

7-1-8

5

7-H8/2

9-11

5

7-1-8

9-11

5

7-8

5

7-1-8

9-11

1 1 1 5 6 4 0 4 0 1 / 0

1 1 1 7 6 4 0 4 0 1 / 0

1 1

1 9 6 4 0 4 0 2 / 0

1 1 1 7 9 4 0 4 0 2 / 0

1 1 1 9 9 4 0 4 0 1 / 0

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 2 0 2 / 0

1 5 1 7 1 6 0 2 0 2 / 0

1 5 5 5 1 8 0 2 0 1 / 0

1 5 5 7 1 6 0 2 0 2 / 0

1 1 1 5 8 2 0 2 0 2 / 0

1 1 1 7 8 2 0 2 0 3 / 0

1 1 1 9 7 4 0 2 0 2 / 0

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 2 0 3 / 0

1 5 1 7 0 7 0 2 0 1 / 0

1 5 1 9 0 7 0 2 0 1 / 0

1 5 1 5 1 8 0 2 0 4 / 0

1 5 1 7 0 7 0 2 0 3 / 0

1 5 5 5 1 8 0 2 0 2 / 0

1 5 5 7 0 7 0 2 0 1 / 0

1 5 6 9 0 7 0 2 0 1 / 0

E

1

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

5 ,480

6 ,317

9 , 6 3 4

6 ,402

1 1 , 5 0 0

4 , 5 1 0

5 , 0 0 0

4 , 5 6 0

5 , 2 6 4

4 ,380

5 ,141

8 ,420

4 ,578

4 , 6 5 0

8 ,239

4 ,500

6 ,500

5 ,190

5 .010

8 ,226

Air regulation

A i r r e g u l a t i o n c o m p l e t e ,

two and th ree

s tage burners

sl iding two stage

burners

[Regulation d'air

[ R e g u l a t i o n d ' a i r

i comple te

brCileurs deux et

trols al lures

brüleurs deux al lures

progress ives



2.17 2.18

t f ®

2.19

2.20 2.22 2.23

2.24

2,25

2.26

2.27

2.28

T

O»

2.29 2.30

2.31 2.32

2.33

2.34

O

2.35

Bi ld

Piet.

Photo

1 Bezeichnung

; B renne r -Typen re i he

i Burner sene

j Type bru leur

Größe

Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr .

O r d e r - N o .

N o d e c o m m a n d e

,

ca. kg

appr. kg

env. kg


2.17

2.18

2.19

2.20

2.21

2.22

2.23

2.24

2.25

2.26

2.27

2.28

2.29

Lagerschraube

L, M,

M S, G, GL, RGL, RL, RMS

Lagerbuchse

RL. R MS, G, GL, RGL

L,

MS, RL, RMS, G, GL, RGL

Nadelhülse

L, MS, RL, RMS, G, GL, RGL

Antriebshebel

zweistufige Brenner (ohne Bild)

G, GL

gleitend-zweistufige Brenner

RL, RM S, G GL, RGL 7,0 x 15

RL, RMS,

G

GL,

RGL 5,5 x 15

RL, RMS, G GL, RGL 5,5 x15

RL, RM S, G GL, RGL 7,0 x 15

Verbindungsleiste

RL, G, GL, RGL

RL, RMS , G, GL, RGL

L, MS ,

RL, RMS, G,

G L,

RGL

Lagerbolzen

L,

RL, M, RMS, G, GL, RGL

5-8

5-8

9-11

9-11

5-8

5-11

5-8

5-8

9-11

5

7-H8

9-11

5-11

111 582 0207/7

111 151 0204/7

111 97 4 0205/7

460 027

151 518 0211/7

111 582 0216/7

111 582 0217/7

111 582 0218/7

111 582 0219/7

111 582 1504/7

111 782 1503/7

111 97 4 1502/7

111 582 0220/7

0 ,021

0 , 0 1 0

0,025

0 ,011

0,034

0,022

0,025

0,040

0,045

0,039

0,045

0 ,041

0 ,016

Bear ing screw

Bear ing bush

Need le s leeve

Drive lever

two s tage burners

(wi thout p icture)

sl iding two stage b

Connec t ion s t r ip

Bear ing bo l t

Vis paller

Logement axe

Douille aiguille

Levier de mouvement

brüleurs a llures

(sans photo)

brüleurs deux allures

progressives

Barette de jonction

Vis tete plate



3,4 3.5

Bild

Piet.

Photo

Bezeichnung

Brenner-Typenreihe

Burner serie

Type brüleur

Größe

Size

Grand.

Besteil-Nr.

Order-No.

No de commande

ca.

kg

appr. kg

env. kg

Designation Designation

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

Stellantrieb f. Olbrenner

zweistufige Brenner

Stellantrieb 105 5/23

110V 50 Hz

110V 60 Hz

230V 50 Hz

230V 60 Hz

Stellantrieb 105 5 /80

110V 50-60 Hz

230V 50-60 Hz

Abdeckhaube 1055/23, 1055/80

S QM10

gleitend-zweistufige Brenner

Stellantrieb SQM 10, komplett

RL

RL

RL

RL

RL

5

7

8

9-HO

11

110 500 0009/2

110 500 0010/2

110 500 0011/2

110 500 0012/2

110 500 0013/2

110 500 0014/2

651 399

651 428

111 5 74 1501/0

111 774 1501/0

111 782 1503/0

111 9 74 1503/0

181 174 1502/0

1,140

1,131

1,183

1,185

1,125

1,195

0,140

0,267

6,969

6,984

7,300

6,840

7,000

Servo drive for

oi l burners

two stage burners

Servo drive

type 1051/23

Servo drive

type 1051/80

Cover

sliding two stage burners

Regulating drive SQM10,

complete

Servo-moteur pour

bruleur fuel

bruleurs deux allures

Servo moteur

type 105 1/23

Servo moteur

type 105 1/80

Capot

bruleurs deux allures

progressives

Organe de réglage

SQM10, complet



3.31

^ » ^ - « . s «

3.41

3.32

3.33

3.34

3.35

3.36

3.37

3.38

O

3.39

3.40

3.43

^ * - .

3.45

X

3.46

3.47 3.48

i4.

3.49

Bi id

Piet .

Pho to

3.30

3 .31

3 .32

3 .33

3 .34

3 .35

: B e z e i c h n u n g

1 B renne r -Typen re i t ie

i Burner sene

I Type brü leur

Stellantrieb für Gas- und

Zweistoffbrenner

mit Rege lges tänge fü r

zwe is tu f ige Brenner

S t e l l a n t r i e b T y p 1 0 5 5 / 8 0

komple t t

G

G

G L

G L

ohne Rege lges tänge fü r

zwe is tu f ige Brenner

S t e l la n t r ie b T y p 1 0 5 5 / 8 0

G, GL

S t e l l a n t r i e b T y p 1 0 5 5 / 8 0

110V 50 -60 Hz

2 3 0 V 5 0 - 6 0 H z

A b d e c k h a u b e f ü r Typ 1055 /80

f ü r T y p S Q M I O

Regle rsche ibe

1 Größe

Size

Grand .

5

7-8

5

7-8

5-8

5-8

5-8

5-8

5-8

Beste l l -Nr.

O r d e r - N o .


1 5 1 5 1 6 1 5 0 2 / 0

1 5 1 7 1 6 1 5 0 2 / 0

1 5 5 5 1 6 1 5 0 2 / 0

1 5 5 7 1 6 1 5 0 2 / 0

1 5 1 1 0 1 1 5 0 4 / 2

1 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 / 2

1 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 4 / 2

6 5 1 3 9 9

6 5 1 4 2 8

1 5 1 1 0 1 1 5 0 6 / 2

151 101 1528 /7

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

ca .

kg

appr. kg

env. kg

3,445

3,470

3,343

3,370

2 ,926

1,125

1,195

0 ,139

0,267

0,390

0 ,012

i Des igna t ion

Servo-drive for gas

and dual fuel burners

with regulat ing rod for

two s tage burners

Servo dr ive Type

1 0 5 1 / 8 0 , c o m p le t e

without regulat ing rod for

two s tage burners

Servo dr ive

T y p e 1 0 5 1 / 8 0

Servo dr ive

t y p e 1 0 5 1 / 8 0

Cover

Cont ro l segment

Stee l band

Designation

Servo-monteur pour

brüleurs gaz et m ixtes

avec t ige de réglage

pour brüleurs 2 al lures

Servo-moteur Type

1 0 5 1 / 8 0 , c o m p l e t e

sans t Ige de réglage

pour brüleurs 2 al lures

Servo moteur

T y p e 1 0 5 1 / 8 0

Servo moteur

t y p e 1 0 5 1 / 8 0

Capot

Disque de rég lage

Lame d'acier



3,51

3.64 3.65

3.52

3.66

t

3.53

3.54

,1r

' N W /

3.56

3.58

3.63

3.67 3.68 ).69

3.70

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to

3.50

3.51

3.52

3.53

3.54

3.55

i B e z e i c h n u n g

^ B renne r -Typen re i he

Burner ser ie

j Type brü leur

ohne Rege lges tänge fü r g le i tend

zwe is tu f ige Brenner (o , Bi ld)

G . G L

i RGL

R G L

'' R G L

R G L

Ste l lan t r ieb Typ SQIM10

220 -240V/50 -60 Hz (42 Sek. Lau fze i t )

110 V /50 -60 Hz (42 Sek. Lau fze i t )

2 2 0 • 2 4 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

(mi t 20 Sek. Laufze i t )

1 1 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

(mit 20 Sek. Laufzeit)

Grundpla t te

N a b e G

G L

Ö l r e g l e r b i s 70 kg /h We l l e 00 / 0

R G L ,

RG M S b i s 280 kg /h 1 /2

b is 280 kg/h 1/2

b i s 420 kg /h 3 /4

H e i z p a t r o n e 20 Watt (o . Bi ld)

G r ö 6 e

Size

Grand .

5-11

5

7

8 -10

11

5 -11

5-11

5-9

5

7

8 -10

11

7-11

; Beste l l -Nr.

1

O r d e r - N o .

, N o d e c o m m a n d e

: 151 327 1510 /2

: 1 5 6 5 1 8 1 5 0 8 / 2

1 1 5 6 7 0 7 1 5 0 4 / 2

' 1 5 6 8 0 7 1 5 0 1 / 2

1 9 6 1 0 7 1 5 0 2 / 2

6 5 1 4 1 8

6 5 1 4 1 7

6 5 1 4 2 2

6 5 1 4 2 3

1 5 1 3 2 7 1 5 2 2 / 7

1 5 1 3 2 7 1 5 1 1 / 2

1 1 1 5 7 4 1 5 0 1 / 2

1 1 1 7 7 4 1 5 0 1 / 2

1 1 1 8 7 4 1 5 0 1 / 2

1 8 1 1 7 4 1 5 0 4 / 2

1 1 2 3 8 1 1 3 0 2 / 2

1

ca. kg

i appr- kg

1 j env. kg

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

4 , 4 0 8

8,884

9,000

8,259

8,263

1 ,700

1 ,700

1 ,700

1 ,700

0,365

0 , 1 0 8

2 , 3 7 0

2 , 3 6 0

2 , 3 8 0

2 , 4 0 0

0 , 1 2 4

Des igna t ion

wi thout regu la t ing rod

for sl iding two stage

burners (wi thout p icture)

Servo drive

T y p e S Q M I O

Base p la te

Hub

Oil regulator

Hea t ing ca r t r idge

1

Des igna t ion

isans t ige de réglage

I pour brü leur progressif

j

(sans photo)

Servo moteur

T y p e S Q M I O

(

Plaque de base

M o y e u

Régula teur fue l

Car touche chauf fan te



3.72 3.73

3.74

f m m

;.75 3.76 3.77

3.78

3.79

3.80

3.81

A

i •

3.82

3.83

3.S4

H- fil

3.36 3.S7

3.89

Bild

PiCt.

Pho to


1 Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner ser ie

1 Type brüleur

Größe

Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .


c a . k g

appr. kg

env. kg

i Des igna t ion

; Des igna t ion

3 .72

3 .73

3 .74

3 .75

3 .76

3 .77

3 . 7 8

3 .79

3 .80

3.81

3 .82

3 .83

Buchse

Gleit lager

Lagerbuchse

Buchse

H e b e l 2 7 mm

Regle rhebe l

Reg le rhebe l

Stel lr ing

Stehbo lzen M8 x 1 3 4

M 8 X 2 0 4

Leiste

Rege lges tänge (Lu f t )

G, GL, RL, R G L

G, GL. RL, R G L

G, GL, RL, R G L

Rege lges tänge (Gas )

G GL

5

7-8

9 -11

5

121 464

4 9 9 0 8 9

151 327

156 327

156 327

151 32?

151 518

151 327

151 327

156 327

2 1 1 2 / 7

1 5 1 2 / 2

1 5 0 5 / ?

1506/?

1 5 1 3 / 2

1 5 0 7 / 2

1 5 3 2 / 7

1 5 2 4 / 7

1 5 0 3 / 7

1 5 1 3 2 7 1 5 3 3 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 5 0 8 / 2

1 5 1 7 0 ? 1 5 0 3 / 2

1 5 1 9 0 ? 1 5 0 5 / 2

151 518 1 509 /2

0 , 0 0 1

0.005

0,098

0,048

0,086

0 , 1 4 3

0 , 1 9 4

0 , 0 1 3

0,238

0,327

0,060

0 , 1 2 0

0 , 1 3 5

0 , 1 3 9

0 , 1 6 6

Sleeve

\ Bear ing

Bear ing s leeve

Sleeve

Lever

Regulat ing lever

Regulat ing lever

Adjusting ring

Stay bolt

Strip

Regulat ing rod (air)

Regulat ing rod (gas

Couss ine t

'Axe

I

I Axe couss ine t

Couss ine t

j

Levier

Levier de réglage

Levier de réglage

Ronde l le g radué

Ent re to ise

Born ie r

Tige de réglage (air)

T ige de rég lage (gaz)



5.1-5.5

5.6

4.5

4.4

• •^T*

5.8

4.6

5.9

5.10 5.11 5.12

Bild

Pict.

Photo


1 Brenner-Typenreihe

j Burner serie

i

Type brüleur

Größe

Size

Grand.

Bestell-Nr.

Order-No.

No de commande

; ca. kg

i appr. kg

i env. kg


4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

Brennermotor

Be i Beste l l ung Spannung und

Frequenz angeben .

B r e n n e r m o t o r e n ,

50 Hz, 2800 1/min.

Typ V

D K 0 8 / 9 0 - 2 / 3 2 3 0 / 4 0 0

D K 2 - 2

D K 3 / 1 1 5 - 2

D K 3 / 1 1 5 - 2 a

D K 3 / 1 1 5 - 2 a

D K 3 / 1 1 5 - 2

D 1 3 2 / 1 2 0 - 2 a

D I 3 2 / 1 2 0 - 2

D I 3 2 / 1 5 0 - 2

2 3 0 / 4 0 0

2 3 0 / 4 0 0

2 3 0 / 4 0 0

3 8 0 / 6 6 0

3 8 0 / 6 6 0

3 8 0 / 6 6 0

3 8 0 / 6 6 0

3 8 0 / 6 6 0

Zwischenr ing

L, MS, RL, RMS, G, GL, R G L

Sche ibenfeder

P a ß f e d e r

5 x 6 , 5

6 X 6 X 4 5

7

8 /2

8

8

8 /2

9

1 0

11

5

5

7 -8 /2

1 1 1 5 5 4 0 7 6 3 / 0

1 1 1 7 6 2 0 7 0 3 / 0

1 1 1 8 6 6 0 7 0 2 / 0

1 1 1 8 6 2 0 7 0 8 / 0

1 1 1 8 6 2 0 7 0 6 / 0

1 1 1 8 6 6 0 7 1 4 / 0

1 1 1 9 7 4 0 7 0 6 / 0

1 8 1 0 7 4 0 7 1 2 / 0

1 8 1 1 7 4 0 7 0 5 / 0

1 1 1 5 5 2 0 1 0 3 / 7

490 151

4 9 0 3 1 6

1 1 . 1 4 0

2 5 , 1 2 0

3 3 , 5 2 0

3 4 . 0 6 0

3 4 , 0 2 0

3 4 , 0 6 0

4 4 , 5 0 0

4 5 , 5 0 0

5 4 ,0 0 0

1,015

0,003

0 , 0 1 2

Burner motor

When o rde r i ng i nd i ca te

vol tage and f requency

Burner motor

In te rmedia te r ing

Woodruff key

Adjus t ing spr ing

Moteur de brüleur

A l a commande i nd i que r

la tension et la f requence

Moteur de brOleurs

Br ide in te rmédia i re

Clave t te d isque

Clave t te



w

4k

6.1-6.3 GAwK fKm

6.8

Ü

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.21.-6.22

6.25 6.26

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to

Bezeichnung

Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner ser ie

Type brü ieur

G r ö B e

Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

No de c o m m a n d e

ca . k g

app r . kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

Des igna t ion

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

P u m p e n

L G L

L, G L

L. GL

M ,

M S

M S

RL, RGL

RL, RMS, RGL

RL, RMS, RGL

RL, RMS, RGL

P u m p e n t y p

J6

J6

J7

E 4

E 6

E 7

E 7

T A 2

T A 3

T A 4

AnschluBtei le f ü r P u m p e : (o. B.)

J6 , J7 L

T A 2 L

E4 M

E 6 / E 7 M S

E7 RL , RG L

T A 2 ,

TA3 RL , RM S

TA4 RL , RM S

TA2 (RL7 m it K3 Düse )

Sieb (ohne Bild)

5

7

8-9

5

7

8-9

7

8-10

11

5-9

10T

5

7-9

5

7-10

11

601 005

601 005

601 006

601 047

601 048

601 049

601 049

601 050

601 051

601 052

111 564 0602/2

181 094 0603/2

112 564 0602/2

112 764 0605/2

111 574 0602/2

111 774 0603/2

181 174 0602/2

111 774 0604/2

3 720

3 720

3 900

4 050

4,165

4 290

4 290

5,470

5,760

6,040

0 ,190

0,275

0,600

0,560

0,605

0,590

0,720

0,608

P u m p s

P u m p t y p e

Connec t ion par ts

for pump

Filter (wi thout p icture)

P o m p e s

P o m p e t y p e

Elements de raccorde -

m e n t pou r pompe

Filtre (sans photo)



t f e

6.41

O

6.43 6.44

6.45

6.46

/

6.51

6.52

^ \

%

X

V „. .ar

6.53

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to

6.40

6 ,41

6 .42

6 .43

6 .44

6 .45

6 .46

6 .47

1 B e z e i c h n u n g

1 Brenner-Typenre ihe

j Burner ser ie

Type bru leur

M a g n e t k u p p l u n g

M a g n e t k u p p l u n g ( G l e i c h s t r o m )

W M K 1 R G L

W M K 2 G L

W M K 2 / 1 R G L

Lagerf lansch

G L,

RGL

G L, R G L

G L, R G L

Hal tesche lbe

G L, R G L

Dis tanzsche ibe

GL ,

R G L

Pumpenf lansch

G L, R G L

G L,

R G L

Gle ichr ich te rgerä t

D G / 2 , 2 2 0 V - 2 4 0 V /24 V

D G / 2 ,

110 V - 1 2 0 V / 2 4 V

Abziehvorr ich tung

W M K 1 , W M K 2 , W M K 2 / 1

Größe

Size

Gr and.

5

7-9

7-11

5

7-8

9 -11

5-11

5

5

7-11

5-11

Beste i l -Nr.

Orde r -No .


1 5 5 1 0 1 0 9 0 3 / 2

1 5 5 7 0 7 0 9 0 2 / 2

1 5 5 9 0 7 0 9 0 3 / 2

1 5 5 5 1 8 0 9 0 1 / 2

1 5 5 7 0 7 0 9 0 1 / 2

1 5 5 9 0 7 0 9 0 1 / 2

1 5 5 1 0 1 0 9 0 3 / 7

1 5 5 1 0 1 0 9 0 4 / 7

1 5 5 1 0 1 0 6 0 1 / 7

1 5 5 9 0 7 0 6 0 1 / 7

710 565

710 566

1 5 5 9 0 7 0 0 0 2 / 2

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

ca . kg

appr. kg

env. kg

0 ,615

1,100

1,099

0,850

1,100

1,050

0,005

0 ,011

0,555

0,723

1,810

1,862

0 ,210

Des igna t ion

M a g n e t c o u p l i n g

l\^agnet

coupling

(d i rect current)

Hold ing d isk

Dis tance sh im

P u m p f l a n g e

Rec t i f i e r aggrega te

Remover

Des igna t ion

l A c c o u p l e m e n t

m a g n é t l q u e

l A c c o u p l e m e n t m a g n é

t lque (courant cont inu)

Ronde l le de ma in t ien

Ent re to ise

Suppor t de pompe

Redresseur

Arrache accoup lement



6.63

6.64

; Bezeichnung

Bi ld ] Brenner-T ypenre ihe

Piet . I Burner ser ie

Pho to j Type br i j ieur

I Größe

I Size

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

I Gran d . No de comm ande

I ca. kg

I appr- l^g

env. kg

I Des igna t ion

: Des igna t ion

6.60 Ölleitungen

6.61

6 .62

6 .63

6 .64

Öl le i tungen ohne Schne id r i ng und

Übe rwu r fmu t te r zum se lbs tb i egen

6 x 1 ,

X 625 mm

8x 1

l O x 1

12x 1

18x 1

X 625 mm

X 625 mm

5

X

625 mm

5x 625 mm

6 x 1

X

1 2 5 0 m m

8 x 1 X 1 250 mm

1 0 x 1 X 1 2 5 0 m m

12 X

1,5x1250

m m

18

X

1,5

X

1 2 5 0 m m

Schne idr ing

DPR-L

D-LL

IJberwurfmutter

M-L

6 L

8 L

10L

12L

18L

6LL

8LL

6 L

111 111 4919/7

111 111 4920/7

111 111 4921/7

111 111 4922/7

111 111 4923/7

111 111 4914/7

111 111 4915/7

111 111 4916/7

111 111 4917/7

111 111 4925/7

452 770

452 771

452 772

452 773

452 775

452 801

452 809

452 834

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

0 . 0 7 8

0 , 1 1 0

0 , 1 3 1

0 , 2 4 2

0 , 3 8 0

0 , 1 6 5

0 , 2 2 6

0 , 2 8 8

0 , 4 7 7

0 , 7 3 9

0 , 0 0 2

0 , 0 0 2

0 , 0 0 2

0 , 0 0 3

0 . 0 0 5

0 , 0 0 2

0 . 0 0 3

0 , 0 1 0

Oil lines

Oil lines

for se l f bending

(wi thout p icture)

jCanalisation fuel

jCondu i te d e fuel

ja former

(sans photo)

Cutt ing ring

Union nut

Olive

Cent re éc ren



f * * *^

7.1

B i l d

Piet .

Pho to


Brenne r -Typen re i he

Burner ser ie

Type bn j l eu r

i Größe

I Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .


ca. kg

appr, kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

Des igna t ion

7.1

7.2

7.3

M agnetventi le für Öl

M a g n e t v e n t i l T y p 1 2 1 C 2 3 2 3 , 1 / 8 "

mi t Spu le 3764 , 9 Wa t t , IP65

s t r o m l o s g e s c h l o s s e n

1 1 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H Z

1 8 7 - 2 4 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

M a g n e t v e n t i l T y p 1 2 1 K 2 4 2 3 , 1 / 8 "

m i t S p u l e 4 8 3 8 2 4 , 1 9 W a t t

s t r o m lo s g e s c h l o s s e n Stufe 2

5 5 V / 5 0 Hz*

1 1 0

V / 5 0

Hz*

2 2 0 V / 5 0 Hz*

5 5 V / 5 0 H z * *

1 1 0 V / 5 0 H z "

2 2 0 V / 5 0 H z * *

5 8 V / 6 0 Hz*

1 1 5

V / 6 0

Hz*

2 3 0 V / 6 0 Hz*

5 8 V / 6 0 H z * *

11 5 V / 6 0 H z * *

2 3 0 V / 6 0 H z * *

M a g n e t v e n t i l T y p 1 2 2 K 9 3 2 1 , 1 / 8 "

m i t S p u l e 4 8 3 8 2 4 , 1 9 W a t t

s t romlos o f f en

110 V /50 Hz*

220 V /50 Hz*

110 V /50 Hz* *

2 2 0 V / 5 0 H z * *

Stufe 1

1 1 5 V / 6 0 Hz*

2 3 0 V / 6 0 Hz*

1 1 5 V / 6 0 H z * *

2 3 0 V / 6 0 H z * *

604 450

604 451

604 601

604

602

604 603

604 604

604 605

604 606

604 597

604 598

604 599

604 600

0,250

0,250

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

0,480

Solenoid vatves

for oil

Soleno id va lve

wi th co i l 3764

cu r ren t l ess c l osed

Soleno id va lve

wi th co i l 3 8 2 4 ,

cu r ren t l ess c l osed

stage 2

Soleno id va lve

wi th co i l 3824

cu r ren t l ess open

stage 1

Vannes magne-

t iques pour fuel

V a n n e m a g n é t i q u e

f e rmée ho rs t ens i on

V a n n e m a g n é t i q u e avec

avec bob ine 3824

fe rmée ho rs t ens i on ,

a l lure 2

Vanne nnagné t ique

avec bob ine 3824

ouverte hors tension

allure 1



7 .8 . - . £ _ - » . . 7 . 1 0 7 . 1 1 7 , 1 3

7 .9 ^ ^ 7 . 1 2

0 ^

7 . 2 2

Bi ld

Piet.

Photo


Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner ser ie

Type brü leur

G r ö 8 e

1 Size

j Grand .

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

No de commande

ca .

k g

appr. kg

env. kg

Designation 1 Des igna t ion

1

1

7.8

7.9

7.10

7.11

Magnetvent i l Typ 121 G2320 , G3 /8 "

mit Spule 4 8 3 5 4 1 , 2 0 W a t t

s t romlos gesch lossen

55 V /50 Hz ' , 58 V / 60 Hz*

110 V /50 Hz* , 115 V /60 Hz*

220 V /50 Hz* , 230 V /6 0 Hz*

Magnetvent i l Typ 121 G2320 , G3 /8 "

mit Spule

4 8 3 5 4 1 ,

2 0 W a t t

s t romlos gesch lossen

55 V /50 Hz* * , 58 V / 60 Hz* *

110 V /50 Hz* * , 115 V / 60 Hz* *

2 2 0 V / 5 0 H z " , 2 3 0 V / 6 0 H z * *

* * Spu len -Gehäuse S tanda rd IP44

** Spulen-Gehäuse wasserd icht IP67

M a g n e t - S p u l e

Typ 3764 9 Wat t

11OV/50 -60 Hz

2 2 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

T y p 4 8 3 8 2 4 , 19 Wa t t

5 5 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

11 OV/50 -60 Hz

1 8 7 - 2 4 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

604 518

604 519

604 520

604 521

604 522

604 523

604 452

604 453

604 551

604 552

604 553

0,330

0,930

0,930

0,930

1,039

0,930

0 , 1 3 5

0 , 1 3 0

0,075

0 , 1 5 0

0 , 1 4 0

Solenoid valve cu r ren t -

less closed

So leno id va lve cu r ren t -

iess closed

* Co i l cas i ng s tanda rd

* * Co i l cas i ng w a te rp roo f

Solenoid valve coi l

Vanne magnét ique

fermée hors tension

Vanne magnét ique

fermée hors tension

* Boi t ier de bobine

standa rd

** Boi t ier de bobine

e tanche

Bobine de vanne

magnét ique



m ^

~-T3C O

7,23 7.26

7.27

7.28

B ØO"

7.29 7.30

(D

,31

7.32

7.34 '.33 7.35 7.36

7.39 7.40

,0-

.41

S3

7.42

; B e z e i c h n u n g

Bi l d ; B renne r -Typen re i he

Piet . i Burne r ser ie

Photo ; Type br i j leur

Größe

Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr.

O r d e r - N o .


ca .

kg

appr. kg

env. kg


7 .23

7.24

7.25

7 .26

7 .27

i

E inschraubs tu tzen

j 6L LM 1 0x 1 x G 1 /8 " x 71

6 L L M l O x 1 x G 1 / 8 ' x 2 3

8 L L M 1 2 x 1 x G 1 / 8 " x 2 3 , 5

8 L L M 1 2 x 1 x G 1 / 8 " x 2 5

8 L L M 1 2 x 1 x G 1 / 8 " x 7 1

1 0 L L M 1 6 x 1 , 5 x G 1/4"x35

1 0 L L M 1 6 x 1 , 5 x G

1/4"x71,5

12 X G 1 /4 " X 4 2

1 2 X

G 3 / 8 "

X

4 6

1 2 L L M 1 8 x 1 . 5 x G 1 /4 " x 3 5

1 2 L L M 1 8 x 1 , 5 x G 3 / 8 "

X

36 ,5

B u n d s c h r a u b e G 1/8"

( o h n e B i l d ) G 1 / 4 "

G e w i n d e b u c h s e G 1 / 4 "

M 2 0 x 1 ,5 (ohne B i l d )

A u f n a h m e h ü l s e für Heizpatrone

Dicht r ing C U

10 ,0 X 14 X 1.5

13 ,5

X

17

X

1,5

1 3 ,5 x 2 5 x 2 , 0

1 6 , 0 x 2 0

X

1,5

5-11

7-11

7-10

5-11

9 -11

5 -10

9-11

5 -11

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-11

5-11

1 1 2 1 5 1 1 3 1 7 / 7

1 1 1 5 7 4 1 3 0 7 / 7

1 1 1 3 8 1 1 3 0 7 / 7

1 1 1 5 7 4 1 3 0 8 / 7

1 1 2 2 6 1 1 3 1 0 / 7

111 5 74 1301/7

111 9 74 1302/7

121 464 8502/7

121 464 8505/7

111 5 74 1302/7

111 9 74 1303/7

111 57 4 1304/7

112 564 1305/7

112 564 1307/7

112 564 1304/7

440 034

440 010

440 014

440 048

0,064

0 ,013

0 ,017

0 ,015

0,059

0,039

0,083

0,045

0,020

0,038

0,053

0,008

0,026

0,026

0 ,110

0 .001

0 ,001

0,006

0 ,001

Adapte r

Co l la r sc rew

(wi thout p icture)

T h r e a d e d s l e e v e

(w i t hou t p i c tu re )

Mount ing socke t

Copper r ing

Raccord droit

Ecrou

(sans photo)

Douil le f i letée

(sans photo)

Suppor t

Joint cuivre



•;.il

8.2

8.3

U

i.401

• • > /

8.6

8.8

8.9

3.10

3.11

8.12 8.13

111

»-If*

;,14

O

8.15

8.16

j Bezeichnung

Bi l d

I

Brenner-Typenre ihe

Piet . i Burner serie

P h o t o

I

Type brüleur

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .


ca .

kg

appr.

kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion I Des igna t ion

8.

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

. 401

Magnetventile für Gas

Magnetventi le

Baugruppe A mit Mengene ins te l lung

Druckbere ich 0 - 500 mbar

Ty p

Rp

Spannung /F requenz

D M V - D 5 0 7 / 1 1

1/2-1

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0

Hz

D M V - D 5 1 2 / 1 1 1 2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H Z

D M V - D 5 2 0 / 1 1

1 1/2-2

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0

Hz

D M V - D 5 0 4 0 / 1 1 D N 4 0

D M V - D 5 0 5 0 / 1 1 D N 5 0

D M V - D 5 0 6 5 / 1 1 D N 6 5

D M V - D 5 0 8 0 / 1 1

D N 8 0

D M V - D 5 1 0 0 / 1 1 D N 1 0 0

D M V - D 5 1 2 5 / 1 1 D N 1 2 5

M V D 5 1 5 0 / 5

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 Hz

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 Hz

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0

H z

2 3 0 V / ' 5 0 - 6 0

H z

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 H z

2 3 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 Hz

Magnetvent i l zur En t lü f tung Baugru ppe A

stromlos of fen

L G V 5 0 7 / 5 Rp 3/4" mba r

Magnetventi l für Z ü n d g a s , B a u g r u p p e A

M V D 5 0 7 / 5 Rp 3/4 " mba r

605 204

605

206

605 208

605 212

605 214

605 216

605

218

605 220

605 222

605 465

605 707

605 453

2,200

4,700

5,800

9,000

9,400

14,700

23,700

30,700

50,700

60,875

1,147

Solenoid valves

Solenoid valves qual i ty

class A wi th quant i ty

ad jus tment Pressure

Type

ID

4,740

Soleno id va lve for

venting qual i ty c lass

A

current less open

Soleno id va lve for

venting qual i ty c lass A

Vannes magné-

tiques DMV

Vannes magnét iques

c lasse A, réglables

Pression d'ut i l isat ion

Type

DN


ga z

de

m i s e

ä

I'air

l ibre classe A

ouvertes hors tension


g a z de m i s e ä I'air

l ibre classe A



9 .1

9 .2 9 .3

9.5

'J-

. TI '

9 .6 9 .7

4

- fc

1 0 . ' 10 .2

Bi ld

Pict .

Pho to

Bezeichnung


Burner ser ie

Type brOleur

Beste l i -Nr.

Orde r -No .


ca . k g

appr. kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

I Designation

9.

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

Druckwächter

für Luft und Gas

D r u c k w ä c h t e r T y p L G W 5 0 A 2 P

T y p G W 50 A4

T y p G W 150 A 4

T y p G W 5 0 0 A 4

T y p G W 5 0 A 2

Ty p G W 150 A 2

Ty p G W 5 0 0 A 2

K a p p e f ü r LGW

S t e c k e r 4 -po l i g , 250 V , 16 A

Anschlußteile für Druckwächter

Luft

Ansch lußkabe l 4 x 0 , 7 5 x 750

G , G L , R G L

Rohrflansch konnplett

Doppe ln ippe l R 1 /4 " x 50 (Gas)

5-11

691 353

691 355

691 356

691 357

691 367

691 368

691 369

446 011

2 1 7 3 0 4 2 6 0 2 / 2

1 5 1 3 1 6 2 4 0 1 / 2

1 5 1 3 1 3 2 4 0 2 / 2

1 3 9 0 0 0 2 6 0 1 / 7

0 , 1 9 0

0,258

0,256

0,275

0,207

0,256

0,275

0 , 0 0 1

Pressure monitor

j

Pressostat pour

for air an d gas air et gaz

P r e s s u r e moni tor

0,064

0,064

0,055

0,028

Cap

Plug

Connection parts

for pressure monitor-air

Connection cable

Pipe f l ange

Double n ipp le

Pressos ta t

C a p u c h o n

F iche

R a c c o r d s

p o u r p r e s s o s t a t

d'air

Cable de raccordement

Bride å tube

M a m e l o n d o u b l e



1 1.1-1 1.3

1

1,17-1

1.9

11.5

11,6

1 1.1 1

11.12

11.1 3-1 1.15 1,16

1 1.17

1 1.18

1 1.19

11.2C

Bi l d

Piet .

Pho to


Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner serie

Type brü leur

Größe

Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

No de commande

ca . kg

appr. kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

Des igna t ion

11.

11 .2

11 .3

11 .4

11 .5

11 .6

Flammkopf für Olbrenner

Flammrohr , ohne S tausche ibe

L, M, RL

L, M, RL

L, MS, RL, RM S

L, MS, RL, RMS

L, MS, RL, RMS

L, MS, RL, RMS

L, MS, RL, RMS

L, MS, RL, RMS

L, RL,

RMS

RL, RMS

F lamm

rohrtyp

M 5 / 1 a

M 5 / 2 a

M B / I a

M 7 / 1 a

M 8 / 1 a

G 7 / 2 a

U2 /1

M 9 / 1 a

M I O / 2

M 1 1 / 1

Flammrohr , ohne S tausche ibe

fü r höhe re Wärmebe las tung

(z. B. : schamott ier te Brenn

kammern)

5

5

7

7 - h 8

8

8 /2

8 /2

1 0

11

1 1 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 2 / 7

1 5 1 3 2 7 1 4 0 2 / 7

1 1 1 6 1 2 1 4 0 1 / 7

1 1 1 7 6 2 1 4 0 4 / 7

1 1 1 8 6 2 1 4 0 3 / 7

1 2 1 2 6 2 1 4 1 3 / 7

1 2 1 2 6 2 1 4 1 0 / 2

1 1 1 9 6 4 1 4 0 1 / 7

1 8 1 0 7 4 1 4 0 3 / 2

1 2 1 3 6 2 1 4 0 5 / 2

1,340

1,128

2 ,190

2 ,408

2 ,720

2 ,900

2 ,390

2 ,275

3,403

6,500

Combustion head

for oil burners

F l a m e l u b e , w i t hou t

a i r d i f fuser d isk

Flame

tube t ype

Flame tube , wi thout a i r

d i f fuser d isk, for h igher

thermal s t ress ( f . i. f i re

c l ay l i ned combust i on

Tete de combus

tion pour bruleurs

Tube de combust ion ,

sans déf lecteur

Tube de

combust i on t ype

Tube de combust ion ,

sans déf lecteur pour la

puissance ca lor i f ique

supér ieure (par exemple:



Bi ld

Piet.

Pt io to


i Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner ser ie

Type brCileur

i Größe

: Size

1

G r a n d .

; Beste l l -Nr.

: Orde r -No .

i No de commande

ca . k g

appr. kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

Des igna t ion

11.30 Flammkopfverlängerung

11.31

11 .32

; F lammkopfver längerung , kompl . '

' f ü r B renne r Ve r i änge rung mm

L 5 Z 1 0 0

RL5

120

150

Ver l änge rung 1 50 mm

L 7 Z / L 8 Z

RL7

L 5 Z

L 7 Z / L 8 Z

L 8 Z / 2

L 9 Z

RL5

RL7

RLS

R L 8 / 2

RL9

R L 1 0

R L 1 1

M 5 Z

M S 7 Z / M S 8 Z

M S 8 Z / 2

M S 9 Z

1 1 0 0 0 0 2 9 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 9 8 1 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 1 0 5 8 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 0 3 4 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 0 4 6 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 6 7 5 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 9 8 2 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 1 0 5 9 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 2 4 2 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 2 4 6 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 0 6 7 6 0 1 / 2

1 8 0 0 0 0 4 6 0 1 / 2

1 8 0 0 0 0 2 4 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 1 0 8 1 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 1 0 8 3 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 1 0 8 5 0 1 / 2

1 1 0 0 1 0 8 7 0 1 / 2

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

2 . 1 0 0

2 , 1 0 0

2 , 6 9 0

2 , 7 5 0

2 , 4 2 8

2 , 9 2 0

3,000

3,000

3,500

3,500

3,640

3,650

4 , 3 2 0

4 , 1 0 0

4 , 3 0 0

3,420

4 , 1 0 9

4 , 8 8 3

4 , 9 2 2

Com bust ion head

extension

C o m b u s t i o n h e a d

e x t e n si o n c o m p l e t e "

for burner

Rallonge tete de

combust ion

Ral longe te te de com

bus t ion , comple te *

pour brü leur



12.5

12.6

Bi l d

Piet .

Pho to

12.

12 .1

12 .2


; Brenner-Typenre ihe

j Burner sene

[ Type brü leur

M 5 / 1 a 1 4 5 x 4 0

l M 6 / 1 a 1 4 5 x 4 0

M 6 / 1 a, M 7 / 1 a . M 8 / l a 1 5 5 x 5 0

M 5 / 1 a , M 7 / 1 a . M 8 / 1 a 1 6 5 x 5 0

M 6 / 1 a , M 7 / 1 a , M 8 / 1 a 1 7 5 x 5 0

Zündkabe l f ü r Ve r l änge rungen

siehe Pos. 12 .60

Flammkopf für

G/GL/RGL-Brenner

Mischgehäuse , komple t t

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G L

G L

G L

5

5 -NA

7

7 -NA

8

9 + 10

11

5

7

8

Beste l l -Nr ,

Orde r -No .


1 1 1 5 1 2 8 3 0 5 / 2

1 1 1 7 6 2 8 3 0 3 / 2

1 1 1 7 6 2 8 3 0 2 / 2

1 1 1 7 6 2 8 3 0 4 / 2

1 1 1 8 6 2 8 3 0 2 / 2

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 4 2 1 / 2

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 4 2 8 / 2

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 1 3 / 2

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 2 8 / 2

1 5 1 8 0 7 1 4 0 7 / 2

1 5 1 9 0 7 1 4 0 1 / 2

1 9 1 1 0 7 1 4 0 1 / 2

1 5 5 5 1 8 1 4 0 7 / 2

1 5 5 7 0 7 1 4 0 5 / 2

155 807 140 3 /2

j oa. kg

1 appr. kg

env. kg

E 1

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

0 ,463

0 ,615

0 ,719

0 ,759

0 ,783

3 . 8 4 0

2 , 1 6 3

4 , 7 0 0

4 , 0 7 9

5 ,286

7 ,383

1 1 , 1 5 0

4 , 1 0 0

4 , 9 4 0

5 ,526

i Des igna t ion

Ign i t ion l ines for exten

sions see pos, 12.60

Combustion head

for G/GL/RGL-

burner

Mix ing chamber ,

c o m p l e t e

Des igna t ion

Lignes d 'a l lumage pour

ra l longements vo i r

p o s . 1 2 .60

Tete de combu s

t ion pour brüleurs

G/GL/RGL

C h a m b r e d e m e l a n g e ,

c o m p l e t e



^

o

^-^

2.10 12,11 12.12

12.19

3> O

12.20 12.22 12.23

12.15 12.16

12.1;

12 . U

Bi ld

PiCt.

Photo

Bezeichnung


Burner ser ie

Type b rü l eu r

1

G r o ß e

1

Beste l l -Nr.

j S i ze j Orde r -N o .

1

Grand . ; No de comm ande

ca .

k g

app r . kg

env. kg


12 .10

12 .11

12 .11

12 .12

12 .13

\

Regu l ie rhü lse

1 G , G L . R G L

i G , G L , R G L

G , G L , R G L

G , R G L

D ü s e n e i n s a t z G {o. Bild)

G

D ü s e n r i n g

Elek t rodenha l te r

komplet t

G

G

G

G

G

Düsenkopf , komple t t

G L

G L

G L

G L

G L ,

Ausf.

T

G L , Ausf.

T

5

7-8

9 -10

11

5 -NA

7-NA

5

7

8

9

11

5

7

8

9 + 1 0

11

5

7

8

9

8

9

1 5 1 3 2 7 1 4 5 3 / 7

151 707 1425 /7

1 5 1 9 0 7 1 4 2 0 / 7

1 6 1 4 0 8 1 4 2 9 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 4 5 4 / 7

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 5 1 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 4 4 7 / 7

151 707 1445 /7

1 5 1 8 0 7 1 4 0 5 / 7

1 5 1 9 0 7 1 4 2 1 / 7

1 6 1 3 0 8 1 4 7 4 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 4 2 2 / 2

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 0 6 / 2

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 1 9 / 2

1 5 1 9 0 7 1 4 0 2 / 2

1 6 1 3 0 8 1 4 4 2 / 2

1 5 5 5 1 8 1 4 0 8 / 2

1 5 5 7 0 7 1 4 0 6 / 2

1 5 5 7 0 7 1 4 0 8 / 2

1 5 5 9 0 7 1 4 0 2 / 2

1 5 5 8 0 8 1 4 0 2 / 2

1 5 5 9 0 8 1 4 0 2 / 2

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

0,302

0,292

0,580

1 ,080

0.054

0 , 1 2 0

0 , 1 7 4

0 , 2 1 3

0,205

0,246

0 , 2 4 1

0,540

0,359

0,580

0,770

2 , 0 0 0

0 , 7 3 1

0,750

0,820

0,769

1 ,030

1,131

Regulat ing socket

Nozzle inser t ion

Nozzle r ing

Electrode holder

comple te

Nozzle head comple te

P ipe de rég lage

Element de g ic leur

Rondel le de gicleur

Suppor t e lec t rodes

c o m p l e t

Ligne de gicleur

c o m p l e t



i ' ^ n

12.27

12.24 12.25 12.28

- O

12.29 12.30 12.32

3su

12.33 12.34

12.35

ÄB^%

• • •

12.36 12.37

12.38

rxs:

12.39 12.40 12.41

12.43

Bi l d

Piet .

Pho to


j Brenner-Typenre ihe

i Burner sene

I Type brQteur

1

G r ö ß e

i Size

I Grand .

; Beste l l -Nr.

j Orde r -No .

1 No de com man de

c a.

k g

appr. kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

Des igna t ion

1 2 . 2 5

12.27

1 2 . 2 8

1 2 . 2 9

1 2 . 3 0

G, GL

G, RGL

Haltering

G, GL

G, GL, RGL {o. Bi ld)

G, RGL (o. Bi ld)

S t e h b o l z e n Länge mm

G, GL 177

G, GL 219

G , G L 2 1 8

G , G L 2 3 6

R G L 1 1 3

G, RGL 192

Düsenkopf

G L

G L

G L

Düsenabsch luB, 2 ,5 bar

Drucksch lauch

G L , R G L

G L ,

R G L

R G L

D N

6

X

6 0 0 / 8 m m

6

X

8 0 0 / 8 m m

8 x 6 4 0 / 1 0 m m

8 + 9

11

5-7

8 - 1 0

11

5

7

8

9 + 10

8

11

5

7

8-9

5-8

9 -11

11

1 1 5 5 9 0 7 1 4 0 6 / 7

1 6 1 3 0 8 1 4 8 8 / 7

151 101 1425 /7

1 5 1 9 0 7 1 4 0 2 / 7

1 6 1 3 0 8 1 4 8 2 / 7

1 5 1 5 1 8 1 4 4 6 / 7

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 4 2 / 7

1 5 1 7 0 7 1 4 2 6 / 7

1 5 5 9 0 7 1 4 0 1 / 7

1 5 6 7 0 7 1 4 0 7 / 7

1 9 6 1 0 7 1 4 0 2 / 7

1 5 5 5 1 8 1 4 0 9 / 2

1 5 5 7 0 7 1 4 0 9 / 2

1 5 5 3 2 7 1 4 1 4 / 2

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

1 1 2 2 6 1 1 0 1 0 / 2

491 214

491 227

4 9 1 2 2 0

0 , 1 3 1

0,202

0,026

0,060

0 ,101

0,063

0,082

0,067

0,072

0,034

0 , 1 1 5

0,074

0,084

0,060

0 , 0 1 3

0.099

0 , 1 3 1

0 , 1 7 4

Suppor t r ing

Threaded rod

N o z z l e t u b e

Nozzle c losure

Pressure hose

Ronde l le suppor t

TIge f i letée

Tube gicleur

Blocage g ic leur

Flexible pression



p

2.44

12.45

12.53

12.55

-•mjf

^^^g^s:^

12.52

12.54

12.56

Bild

Piet.

Photo

12.44

12.45

12.50

12.51

Bezeichnung

Brenner-Typenreihe

Burner serie

Type brüleur

Flammrohr,

ohne Stauscheibe

0 mm

G G5/3-a

G, GL.RGL 200 G5/1a

G,

G L,

RGL 250 G7/1a

G G7/3-A

G, GL, RGL 265 G7/2a

G, GL, RGL 325 UG2/1a

G, RGL 380 UG3/1a

Flammrohr, ohne Stauscheibe

für höhere Wärmebelastung (z. B.:

schamottierte Brennkammern)

0 mm

G, GL, RGL 200 H1M6/1a

G, GL, RGL 250 H1G7/1a

G, GL, RGL 265 H1G7/2a

G, GL, RGL 325 H1UG2/1a

G, RGL H1UG3/1a

Flammkopfverlängerung

Mischgehäuse, komplett

Verlängerung mm

G 100

G

Größe

Size

Grand.

5-NA

5

7

7-NA

8

9 + 10

11

5

7

8

9 + 1 0

11

5

5-NA

Bestell-Nr.

Order-No.

No de commande

151 518 1432/2

111 612 1401/7

151 707 1412/7

151 707 1427/2

121 262 1413/7

161 208 1462/7

161 308 1471/7

111 612 1408/7

151 707 1430/7

111 862 1405/7

161 208 1471/7

161 309 1401/7

150 003 0901/2

150 518 1406/2

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

ca. kg

appr. kg

env. kg

2,012

2,190

2,720

5,840

2,900

3,500

7,410

2,200

2,980

2,640

3,480

7,450

4,876

2,345

Designation

Flame tube ,

without

air diffuser disk

Flame tube , without air

diffuser disk for higher

thermal stress (f.i. fire

clay lined combustion

chambers)

Combustion head

extension

Combustion head

extension complete

Extended by mm

1 Designation

t

1

Tube

de combustion,

sans deflecteur

Tube de combustion

sans deflecteur pour la

puissance calorifique

supérieure (par exem- |

pie:

chambre de com-

chamotte)

Rallonge tete de

combust ion

Rallonge tete de com

bustion,

complete

Rallonge mm



i

2.57

12.58

12.59

Bild

Piet.

Photo

1 Bezeichnung

j Brenner-Typenreihe

1

Burner serie

1 Type brijleur

Größe

Size

Grand.

Bestel -Nr. |

Order-No. i

No de commande

i

ca .

k g

appr. kg

1 env. kg


12.57

12.58

12.59

12.60

RGL

RGL

RGL

Veriängerungsrohr

G GL

GL

GL, RGL

GL

GL

GL, RGL

RGL

100

200

G GL 300

G

GL

G

GL, RGL

G RGL

Zündkabel, komplett (ohne Bild)

Verlängerung mnn

340

390

440

490

540

590

640

8

9 + 1 0

11

5

7 + 8

9 + 1 0

5

7 + 8

9 + 10

11

5

7 + 8

9 + 10

11

150 007 8601/2

150 001 2901/2

190 000 1701/2

150 518 1405/7

150 707 1406/7

150 907 1421/7

150 518 1406/7

150 707 1407/7

150 907 1422/7

160 001 3101/7

150 518 1401/2

150 707 1408/7

150 907 1423/7

160 001 0101/7

111 151 5734/2

111 151 5735/2

111 151 5736/2

111 151 5737/2

111 151 5738/2

111 151 5739/2

111 151 5740/2

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

10,800

12,986

1 7,000

1,400

1,752

2,285

2,190

2,716

3,520

6,280

3,120

3,780

4,920

8,740

0,049

0,052

0,055

0,058

0,062

0,065

0,066

Extension pipe

Ignition line, complete

(without picture)

Tube de rallonge

Ligne d'allumage

complete (sans photo)

Rallonge mm



13.1-13,3 13.4

«

m

13.5 13.7

13.6 13.8

13.9 13.10

13.-

• l < | | M H M M M # « # M P ~ * '

"

R

1 3 . 1 2 1 3 . 1 4 - 1 3 . 1 5 '


Bi l d B renne r -Typen re i he

Piet . j Burner sene

P h o t o 1 Type bru ieur

13.

13.1

13 .2

13 .3

13 .4

13 .5

13.6

13.7

13 .8

13 .9

13 .10

13 .11

Düsenstock

D ü s e n k r e u z 0

L 140

L 180

L 180

L 234

RL 140

RL , RM S 180

R L . R M S 2 3 4

R L . R M S 2 3 4

D ü s e n k r e u z , Boh run g 55 0

M

M S

M S

M S

Düsenkopf

L (zweistu f ig) mi t Düsenkreuz

RL ohne A bspe r rven t i l

G r ö ß e

S i ze

G r a n d .

5

7-1-8

8 /2

9

5

7 -8 /2

9H-10

11

5

7 - f - 8

8 /2

9

5

7 - H 8

8 /2

9

5-7

C

y

. 1 7 1 3 . 1 8 1 3 . 1 9

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

No de commande

1 1 1 5 5 2 1 0 0 1 / 7

111 652 1002 /7

1 1 1 8 6 2 1 0 0 1 / 7

1 1 1 9 6 4 1 0 0 1 / 7

1 1 1 5 5 2 1 0 0 1 / 7

1 1 1 7 8 2 1 0 0 1 / 7

1 1 1 9 7 4 1 0 0 1 / 7

181 174 1001 /7

11 2 564 100 3 /7

1 1 2 7 6 4 1 0 0 3 / 7

1 1 2 8 6 6 1 0 0 3 / 7

1 1 2 9 6 4 1 0 2 1 / 7

1 1 1 5 6 2 1 0 0 3 / 2

1 1 1 7 5 2 1 0 0 1 / 2

1 1 1 8 6 2 1 0 0 2 / 2

1 1 1 9 6 4 1 0 0 2 / 2

1 1 1 2 7 3 1 0 0 1 / 2

e

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

c a.

kg

appr. kg

env. kg

0 . 2 7 3

0 , 3 9 0

0 , 3 6 5

0 , 5 5 7

0 , 2 7 3

0 . 3 6 0

0 , 5 5 7

0 , 6 0 0

0 , 3 7 7

0 , 4 9 6

0 , 4 8 2

0 ,671

0 , 8 2 0

0 , 9 7 0

0 , 9 5 9

1,175

0 , 4 2 0

1 3 . 2 0 / 1 3 . 2 1

1 3 . 2 2

1 3 . 2 3

Des igna t ion

Nozzle assembly

Nozzle suppor t

N o z z l e s u p p o r t ho le 55 0

N o z z l e h e a d

( two stage) wi th nozzle

support

wi thout shut-o f f

I tJ l

1 3 . 2 4 1 3 . 2 5

1

Des igna t ion

Ligne de gicleur

Croisi l lon porte l igne

g ic leur

Cro is i l lon 0 55

Ligne de gicleur

(deux al lures)

sans b l ocage



5 P

1 4 . 1

B i l d

Piet .

Pho to

Bezeichnung


Burner ser ie

Type brü leur

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

No de commande

ca. kg

appr. kg

env, kg


14.

14 .1

Düsen

Düsen Fabr ika t Monarch

Größe in US Gph bei 7 bar

Ty p R - 45° Vol lst rah l

Ty p R - 60° Vol lst rah l

Typ PLP - 45 ° Halbst rah l

Typ PLP - 60° Halbst rah l

3,50

3,50

3,50

4,00

4,50

5,00

5,50

6,00

6,50

7,00

7,50

8,50

9,50

3,50

4,00

4,50

5,00

602 314

602 366

602 014

6 0 2 0 1 5

602 016

602 017

602 018

602 019

602 020

602 021

602 022

6 0 2 0 2 3

602 024

602 215

602 216

602 217

602 218

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0.027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

0,027

Nozzles

Monarch manufac ture

Size in US G ph at 7 bar

Sol id spray

Sol id spray

Semi -so l i d sp ray

Gicieurs

Fabr ica t ion Monarch

g randeu r en US Gph

ä 7 bar

Cöne -p l e i n

Cöne p l e i n

C ö n e 112 creux

Semi -so l i d sp ray

Cöne 1/2 creux



14,2

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to

Bezeichnung

Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner sene

Type brOleur

i Bestel l-Nr.

I Orde r -No .

I

No de

c o m m a n d e

I ca.

kg

I appr. kg

I env.

kg


Typ PLHO

- 60°

Hohlst rah l

14.2

Düsen Fabr ika t S te inen

G r ö ß e in

US

G p h

be i

7 bar

3 , 5 0

4 , 0 0

4 , 5 0

5 ,00

5 ,50

6 ,00

6 ,50

7 ,00

7 ,50

8 ,50

9 ,50

1 0 , 5 0

12 ,00

13 ,50

15 ,50

17 ,50

19 ,50

2 1 , 5 0

2 4 , 0 0

2 8 , 0 0

3 0 , 0 0

602

653

602 654

602

655

602

656

602 657

602 658

602 659

602 660

602 661

602 662

602 663

602 664

602

665

602 666

602 667

602 668

602 669

602 670

602 671

602 672

602

673

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0.022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

0,022

Hol low spray

•Cöne creux

Ste inen manufac ture

Size in

US

G p h at 7

bar

Fabr ica t ion Ste inen

g r a n d e u r

en US Gph

ä 7 bar



"'I

c

14.1 1

14.14 14.15

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to


1 Brenne r -Typen re i he

i Burner ser ie

1 Type brOleur

Beste l l -Nr.

Orde r -No .

N o d e c o m m a n d o

i ca. kg

I appr. kg

1 env. kg


Des igna t ion

Typ SS - 60° Halbvol lst rah l

1 6 , 0 0

1 8 , 0 0

2 0 , 0 0

2 2 , 0 0

2 4 , 0 0

2 6 , 0 0

612 239

6 1 2 2 4 0

612 241

6 1 2 2 4 2

612 243

612 244

0 , 0 2 1

0 .021

0 .021

0 ,021

0 , 0 2 1

0 , 0 2 1

Semi -so l i d sp ray C6 ne

1/2creux

14 .10

14 .11

Regeldüsen

Typ WB3, 45 °

14 .12

T yp K3, 50°

Regulating nozzles

Gicleur ä retour

15 kg /h

20 kg /h

25 kg /h

30 kg /h

35 kg /h

40 kg /h

45 kg/h

50 kg /h

55 kg /h

60 kg /h

65 kg /h

70 kg /h

80 kg /h

90 kg /h

100 kg /h

110 kg /h

1 20 kg /h

602 570

602 571

6 0 2 5 7 2

602 573

6 0 2 5 7 4

602 575

6 0 2 5 7 6

6 0 2 5 7 7

6 0 2 5 7 8

6 0 2 5 7 9

6 0 2 5 8 0

602 581

6 0 2 5 5 8

602 559

6 0 2 5 6 0

6 0 2 5 6 1

6 0 2 5 6 2

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 0

0 , 0 3 4

0 , 0 3 4

0 , 0 3 4

0 , 0 3 4

ii.mi'-'

^w^*



15.14

15.15

15,16 15.17

15.1

15.8

r

15.9

15.13

15.19 15.22 15,24

15.20 15.23 15.25

15.10

15.26

15.27

i>i » t » f t t l '

o

15.11

15.12

15,28

Bild

Piet.

Photo

i Bezeichnung

I Brenner-Typenreihe

; Burner serre

} Type bruleur

Bestell-Nr.

Order-No.

No de commande

j ca. kg

appr. kg

1 env. kg


15.

15 .1

15.2

15 .3

15 .4

15 .5

Feuerungsautomaten

Preise für

Sonde rspannungen au f An f rage

F e u e r u n g s a u t o m a t , 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V

LOA 24.171 50 -6 0 Hz

L O A 2 5 . 1 7 3 50 -60 Hz

L O A 4 4 . 2 5 2 5 0 - 6 0 H z

LAL 2.14

LAL 2.25

LAL 2.65

LAL 3,25

L F L 1 . 1 2 2

LFL 1.322

LFL 1.335

LFL 1.622

LFL 1.635

LOK 16 .250

LOK 16 .850

LGK 16 .122

LGK 16 .322

LGK 16 .622

50 -60 Hz

5 0 - 6 0 H z

5 0 - 6 0 H z

5 0 - 6 0 H z

50 -60 Hz

50 -60 Hz

50 -60 Hz

50 -60 Hz

50 -60 Hz

5 0 - 6 0 H z

50 -60 Hz

50 -60 Hz

5 0 - 6 0 H z

50 -60 Hz

600 206

600 208

600 213

600 1 75

600 177

600 1 78

600 1 79

600 161

600 163

600 1 72

600 165

600 1 74

600 192

600 220

600 200

600 195

600 201

0 , 1 8 0

0 , 1 8 4

0 , 1 4 0

1 ,000

0,892

1 ,000

1 ,040

1 ,000

1 ,000

1 ,000

1 ,000

1 ,000

0,989

1,000

0,986

0,990

0,992

Burner controls

Price for

specia l vo l tages on inqui ry

Burner control

Coffret de sécurité

Prix pour tension

spec ia l e demande

Coffret de sécuri té



o ^

6,5

16.6

16i

16,9

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to


j Brenner-Typenre ihe

i Burner sene

1 Type br i j leur

1

G r ö ß e

Size

j Grand .

Beste l l -Nr

Grde r -No .

No de commande

c a.

kg

app r , kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

Des igna t ion

16.

16.1

16.2

16.3

16.4

16.5

Zündtrafo

Zündtrafo, 230V /50-60 Hz (2 x 5000V)

L. G. GL

RL,

RGL

G (2 X 7000V)

Zündtrafo (2 x 7000 V mit 100% ED)

L

RL, RGL

M

M S

RMS

G, GL, RGMS

Trafobügel

L

G,GL,RGL

G

G,GL,RGL

Tülle

LW 0 8

5-8

5-7

5/7-.NA

9-1OT

8-11

5

7-9

7-11

9-11

5-7

5-7

5/7-NA

7-11

603 100

603 077

603 112

111 211 1102/7

251 103 1101/7

151 907 1101/7

756 122

2,120

0,946

6,140

0,140

0,122

0,169

0,003

Ignition

transformers

Ignition transfornners

Attachment bracket

Bushing

Transformateur

d'al lumage

Transformateur

Etrier de fixation

Passage

• • » i »



/f^

17 1

1 7 . 9

1 7 . 2

1 7 . 1 2 1 7 . 1 3

1 7 . 3

1 7 . 1 4 1 7 . 1 5

1 7 . 4

» r ? - ^ - » W - ^ s i - T f l * * *

17.6

17 .7

ri

Bi ld

Piet .



Burner ser ie

Ph oto I Type brü leur

Gr öße I Beste l l -Nr.

S i ze Orde r -No .

G r a n d , i N o d e c o m m a n d e

ca .

kg

appr. kg

env. kg

Des igna t ion

\ Des igna t ion

17.

17.1

17 .2

17 .3

17 .4

17 .5

Einbauklemmleiste

E i n b a u k l e m m l e i s t e komp le t t

f ü r Ö l - , Gas- u nd Zweistoff

b renne r ohne Scha l t e i n r i ch tung .

Be i Beste l l ung Brenne r t ype

und Spannung angeben .

Einbauscha l t te i l komplet t für

G5 -7 . Be i Beste l l ung Brenne r

t ype und Spannung angeben .

Einbauscha l t te t I komplet t für

Ö ib renne r . Be i Beste l l ung

Brenne r t yp und Spannung

angeben ,

Abdeckp la t te

L,G,GL,RL,RGL

L,MS,G,GL,RL,RGL,RMS

L

L,G,MS

5

7-8

9 -11

auf Anfrage

auf Anfrage

auf Anfrage

1 1 1 5 5 2 0 1 0 6 / 2

1 1 1 6 5 2 0 1 0 5 / 2

1 1 1 9 6 4 2 2 0 7 / 2

1 1 1 9 7 4 0 1 0 6 / 2

0 752

0 860

1,466

1,733

Terminals

incor

porat ion box

Termina ls incorpora t ion

box, comp le te f o r O i l -

Gas- and Dual fue l burners

w i thou t sw i t ch i ng equ ip

men t . W he n o rde r i ng

ind icate burner type and

vol tage.

Bui l t in swi tch ing co m

ponent c o m p l e t e , f o r

G5 -7 when o rde r i ng

ind icate burner type and

vol tage.

S w i t c h i ng e q u i p m e n t

complete for o i l burners


burner type and vo l tage.

Cover p la te

jBornier de

iraccordement

B o r n i e r comp le t pou r

b rü l eu rs

fuel,

gaz et

mi x te sans commande

inco rpo rée . Lo rs de

commande p rec i se r l e

type du brü leur e t la

tens i on .

C o m m a n d e i n c o r p o r é e

comp le t pou r G5 -7 l o rs

de commande p rec i se r

le type du brü leur e t la

tens i on .

C o m m a n d e i n c o r p o r é e

comp le t pou r b rü l eu r

fuel inquer le type

du brü leur e t la tension.

Töle protectrice



17 .1 '

n n

7.1J 17.19 ' .20

17.21

Bi l d

Piet .

Pho to


Brenner-Typenre ihe

Burner serie

Type bruleur

G r ö ß e

Size

Grand .

Beste l l -Nr. j

Orde r -No .

No de c o m m a n d e |

ca .

kg

appr.

kg

env, kg

D e s i g n a t i o n Des igna t ion

1 7 . 1 7

1 7 . 1 8

1 7 . 1 9

1 7 . 2 0

17 .21

Ubers t romre la is

(ohne Bild)

Be i Beste l lung B renne r t ype ,

M o to r t ype , S t romstä rke und

Spannung angeben .

Leistungsschütz

2 3 0 / 3 8 0 V , 5 0 - 6 0 Hz

8

9 - 3 0 - 1 0

B 1 2 - 3 0 - 1 0

B 1 2 - 3 0 - 2 2

B 1 6 - 3 0 - 3 2

B 1 6 - 3 0 - 1 0

8 2 5 - 3 0 - 1 0

8 3 0

-

3 0

-

2 2

Hilfsschütz K22 E 2 S -H 2 Ö

Schalter 1300 Z i f f e r 1

1302 Z i f f e r

2

Ze i t zäh le r 50 Hz

6 0 Hz

Tempera turreg le r Typ ROB

2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V / 5 0 - 6 0 Hz, 65 -130°G

5-11

auf Anfrage

701 897

701

901

701 903

701 908

701

905

701 898

701

900

701 930

700 914

700 916

709 574

709

575

691 120

0 310

0 307

0 346

0 354

0 305

0 460

0 588

0 305

0 010

0 012

0 044

0 044

0 189

Over load re lay

(wi thout p icture)


burner type, motor type,

amperage and vo l t age .

Air break contactor

Relais

(sans photo)

Préc i se r le type du

brCileur moteur, intensité

et tension.

Contac teur

Auxi l iary contactor

Swi tches

Serv ice hours counte r

Tempera ture cont ro l le r

ROB type

Relais auxi l ia ire

in te r rup leur

C o m p t e u r d'heures

Regula teur de

t e m p e r a t u r e ROB



Bi ld

Piet.

Photo

Bezeichnung


Burner ser ie

Type brü leur

G r ö ß e

Size

Grand .

1 Beste l l -Nr.

1

Orde r -No .

i No de commande

1

ca.

kg

appr. kg

1 env. kg

D e s i g n a t i o n 1 D e s i g n a t i o n

1

1

17.50 Anschlußkabel

17 .51

17 .52

17 .53

17 .54

Brenner - Endschal ter , 2 x 0 ,75

L, M, MS und

RL , RM S und

G, GL und

R G L u n d R G M S 7 5 0

Olvo rwärmer - E i nbauscha l t t e i l

f ü r S teue rung

M 9 8 0

M S 1 0 4 0

für Heizung

M

M S

1 1 4 0

1 1 1 0

Olvo rwärmer - E i nbauk lemmle i s te

für Steuerung

M , M S , R M S

6 X 1,5 X 1100

6 X 1,5x1300

6

X

1,5

X

1 3 2 0

für Heizung

M

M S , R M S

M S , R M S

4 X 2, 5 X 1 1 4 0

4 x 4 X 1 1 0 0

4 x 4

X 1

300

5 - 9

5 - 1 1

5 - 10

9 - 1 1

5

7 -1 -8

5

7-1-8

5-8

9 -10

11

5

7-8

9 -10

1 1 1 9 7 4 1 2 0 1 / 7

2 1 2 3 6 4 2 2 0 4 / 2

1 1 2 7 6 2 0 0 0 3 / 2

1 1 2 5 5 2 0 0 1 3 / 2

1 1 2 7 6 2 0 0 0 2 / 2

1 1 2 9 6 4 0 0 0 2 / 2

1 1 2 9 6 4 1 7 1 8 / 2

1 1 2 8 8 2 0 0 0 4 / 2

1 1 2 5 5 2 0 0 1 3 / 2

1 1 2 6 5 2 0 0 0 3 / 2

1 1 2 9 6 4 1 7 1 7 / 2

0,089

0 , 1 8 0

0 , 1 6 0

0 , 1 5 2

0,240

0 , 1 7 5

0 , 2 1 4

0 , 2 1 4

0 , 1 5 2

0,237

0,348

Conn ection cable

Burner - l imi t swi tch

Oi l p rehea te r - Sw i t ch i ng

equ ipmen t f o r con t ro l

for heat ing

Oi l preheater - Terminals

i nco rpo ra t i on box

for contro l

for heat ing

Cable raccordement

Br i j l eu r -con tac t de b r i de

Réchau f feu r - commande

inco rpo rée pou r

c o m m a n d e

pou r pu i ssance

Réchauf feur - born ier

sans commande i nco r

po rée pou r con t rö i e

pou r pu i ssance



18.12

18,101

18.13

18,4

18.5

C

18.6

18.7

18.9 18,10

18 ,1 1

B.ld

Piet .

Pho to

Bezeichnung


Burner sene

Type brü leur

Beste i l -Nr ,

Orde r -No .


ca. kg

appr. k g

env. kg


18.

Olvorwärmer EV2B-D

Be i Beste l l ung Spannung angeben

Olvorwärmer komple t t ,

j edoch ohne Ö labgang

Type

E V 2 B / 0 1

E V 2 B / 0 1

E V 2 B / 0 1

EV2C

EV2C

EV2C

EV2D

EV2D

EV2D

-80°C

8 0 - 1 0 0 ° C

1 0 0 - 1 6 0 ° C

-80°C

8 0 -1 0 0 °C

loo-ieo'C

-80°C

8 0 - 1 0 0 " C

1 0 0 - 1 6 0 ° C

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

O l v o r w ä r m e r i n Sch i f f sausfüh rung

Typ

E V 2 B / 0 1

E V 2 B / 0 1

E V 2 B / 0 1

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

2 4 0 / 4 1 5 V

2 5 4 / 4 4 0 V

5 1 1 2 2 1 0 1 0 1 / 0

5 1 1 2 2 2 0 1 0 1 / 0

5 1 1 2 2 0 0 1 0 1 / 0

5 1 1 2 3 1 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 1 1 2 3 2 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 1 1 2 3 0 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 1 1 2 4 1 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 1 1 2 4 2 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 1 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 1 1 2 2 5 0 1 0 1 / 0

5 1 1 2 2 5 3 1 0 1 / 0

5 1 1 2 2 5 4 1 0 1 / 0

1 6 , 4 0 0

1 6 , 4 0 0

1 4 , 5 3 9

1 4 , 7 6 0

1 4 , 7 6 0

1 4 , 7 6 0

2 3 , 8 8 0

2 3 , 8 8 0

2 3 , 8 8 0

1 6 , 4 0 0

1 6 , 4 0 0

1 6 , 4 0 0

Oil preheater

EV2B-D

When o rde r i ng Ind i ca te

vol tage

Oi l p rehea te r comple te

however wi thout o i l

out le t Type

Oi l p rehea te r

r r iar lne execut ion

Type

Réchauffeurs

EV2B-D

ä l a commande i nd i que r

la tension

Réchauf feur comple t

sans depart fue l

Type

Réchauf feur

execu t i on mar i t ime

Type



18.16

18.U

18.21

Bild

Piet.

Photo

Bezeichnung

Brenner-Typenreihe

Burner serie

Type brüleur

Bestell-Nr.

Order-No.

No de commande

j ca. kg

appr. kg

1 env. kg


18.16

18.17

18.18

18.19

18.20

Heizeinsätze

EV2B

EV2C,

EV2D

Volt Watt

230

1500

240

1500

254

1500

29 0

1500

230

240

254

290

Heizeinsätze für Schiffsausführung

EV2B 230

240

254

EV2C, EV2D

230

240

254

2200

2200

2200

2200

1500

1500

1500

2200

2200

2200

Kabelschuh (AM P), M5, für EV2B-EV2D

Isolierschlauch (2 Stück erforderlich)

(ohne Bild)

Ölwendel komplett

EV2B

EV2C

0511 230 102/2

0511 220 107/2

0511 220 105/2

0511 220 104/2

0511 210 101/2

0511 210 107/2

0511 220 102/2

0511 220 103/2

0511 220 108/2

0511 220 110/2

0511 220 109/2

0511 210 105/2

0511 210 109/2

0511 210 108/2

794 400

0511 210 006/7

0511 220 111/2

0511 230 101/2

0,878

0,889

0,878

0,857

0,893

0,880

0,907

0,868

1,065

1,063

1,045

1,092

1,066

1,082

0,001

0,001

5,200

5,120

Heating elements

(for mains voltage 220V)

j

Elements chauffants

i (pour voltage 220V)

Heating elemen ts Elements chauffants

Cable socket

Isolation hose

(without picture)

Oil coil complete

Cosses

Flexibles d'isolement

(sans photo)

Serpentin complet



18.40

18.4:

:S.42 18.43 18,44 8,45

Brid

Piet.


Brenner-Typenre ihe

Bu rne r sene

Photo Type br t j leur

i Beste i i -Nr.

j Orde r -No .

1 No de c o m m a n d e

I oa.

kg

i app r . kg

i env.

kg


18.30

18.31

18 .32

18 .33

18 .35

Ölvorw/ärmer

WEV 2.2/01 und WEV 3/01

W E V 2 . 2 / 0 1 3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

2 4 0 / 4 1 5 V

2 5 4 / 4 4 0 V

2 9 0 / 5 0 0 V

W E V 3 / 0 1 3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

2 4 0 / 4 1

5V

2 5 4 / 4 4 0 V

2 9 0 / 5 0 0 V

O l v o r w ä r m e r W E V 2 . 2 / 0 1

und

WE V

3/01

in Sch i f fsaus führung

W E V 2 . 2 / 0 1

(mit

Sch lauchve rsch raubung )

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

2 5 4 / 4 4 0 V

2 9 0 / 5 0 0 V

W E V 2 . 2 / 0 1 (mit Sch i f f sve rsch raubung )

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

2 5 4 / 4 4 0 V

W E V 3 / 0 1

(mit

Sch lauchve rsch raubung )

3 8 0 / 4 0 0 V

5 1 2

22 0

0 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2 22 0 3 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2 22 0 4 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2 22 0 5 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

30 0

0 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

30 0

3 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

30 0

4 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

30 0

5 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

225

0 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

225

4 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

225

5 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2 229 0 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

229

4 1 0 2 / 0

5 1 2

30 5

0 1 0 2 / 0

2 6 , 5 0 0

2 6 , 5 0 0

2 6 , 5 0 0

2 6 , 5 0 0

4 5 , 5 0 0

4 6 , 0 0 0

4 6 , 0 0 0

4 6 , 0 0 0

2 6 , 5 5 0

2 6 , 5 0 0

2 6 , 5 5 0

2 8 , 4 0 0

2 8 . 4 0 0

4 6 , 2 0 0

Oil preheater

WEV 2.2/01 and

WEV 3/01

Oi l p rehea te r

in marine execution

Réchauffeurs

WEV 2.2/01 et

WEV 3/01

Réchauf feur execut ion

marit ime



s*4%t

18.54

18.51-

Bi ld

Piet.

Pho to

18.50

18 .51

1 8 . 5 2

1 8 . 5 3

1 8 . 5 4

1 8 . 5 5

18 .56

18 .57

1 8 . 5 8

18 .59

8,53



Burner sene

Type brü ieur

Olvorwärmer MV9C, MV I CA

u n d MVIO B

Olvo rwärmer . ohne

Ansch luß te i l e und ohne Arma tu ren

M V 9 C

M V 1 0 A

M V 1 0 B

K u g e l h a h n N D 6 4 , P N 100 M18 x 1 , 5

G 1 /2 " , PN 2 5 0

T h e r m o m e t e r

0-160°C

Einschraubs tu tzen

f ü r The rmome te r

Schne idr ing (ohne Bi ld) DPR 12-L

Ü b e r w u r f m u t t e r ( ohne B i l d ) M I 2 L

Tempera turreg le r ATH-2

5 0 - 2 5 0 C

Füh le r l änge 280 mm

1 Beste l l -Nr.

• Orde r -No .

1 N o d e c o m m a n d e

1I

5 2 3 9 3 0 0 1 0 2 / 0

5 4 3 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 / 0

5 4 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 / 0

4 5 4 0 4 0

454 181

6 4 2 0 0 9

5 8 5 1 0 1 0 0 0 2 / 7

4 5 2 7 7 3

4 5 2 8 3 6

690 247

E

E

E

Z

Z

z

E

Z

z

z

18.53

ca. kg

appr. kg

env. kg

3 8 , 3 4 0

7 4 , 2 0 0

6 3 , 4 0 0

0,727

0,805

0,085

0,095

0,003

0,025

0,467

1 8 . 6 4 1 8


Oil preheater

MV9C, MVIOAand

MV10B

Oi l preheater . wi thout

connect i on pa r t s and

wi thou t a rma tu res

Bali cock

T h e r m o m e t e r

A d a p t e r for thermo

meter

Cutt ing ring

(wi thout p icture)

Union nut

(wi thout p icture)

Tempera ture regu la tor

t e m p e r a t u r e

65 18.66

Des igna t ion

iRéchauffeur

MV9C, MVIO Aet

MV10B

Réchauf feurs , sans

racco rds e t sans

accesso i res

Robinet a bi l le A

T h e r m o m é t r e

Raccord pou r t he rmo

mé t re

Ronde l le

(sans photo)

Raccord union

(sans photo)

Régula teur de

f •

1 ^~ "'

T A

,

''nr

' . ,»



19.1

19.3

19.1 1

19.17

.

m

% I-

. r-"'y

19.2

19.4

' F o •

19.12 ,q

19.22 ^ ^

B 19.27

M

•

1

a

K

• J ^ - ^ j '^^ r-^ ^.-,

* t

•6 19.8

19.10

1 l

' i % ' » 1 9 1 6

19.14

19.25

Bi ld

PiCt.

P t i o to

19.

19.1

19 .2

19 .3

19 .4

19 .6

19.7

19.8

19.15

19.21

Bezeichnung

Brenne r -Typen re the

Burner ser ie

Type brCileur

Armaturen für

Medium-Ölvorwärmer

mit nachgeschaltetem

Elektro-Vorwärmer

W a r m w a s s e r b i s 1 1 0 ' C

Kugelhahn G 1/2"

DN 15

H e i ßw a s s er ü b er 1 1 0 - 1 8 0 0

Kugelhahn G 1/2"

ON 15

DN 20

Regler für Heißw asse r DN 20

Wärmet rägerö l b is 250=0

Kuge lhahn DN 15

D N 2 0

Reg le r f ü r Wärm e t räge rö l DN 1 5

9.26 ly- iö

9.31

MV

Größe

Size

Grand .

9 - H O

9 - H O

9-1-10

9 - H O

9 - H O

9-1-10

9

10

9

Beste l i -Nr.

O r d e r - N o .


4 5 4 1 8 8

454 191

4 5 4 1 8 8

454 191

4 5 4 1 9 2

690 Ol 7

454 191

4 5 4 1 9 2

6 9 0 0 1 9

f ""•

* • - « .

4 i

'

39

j

1 19.13

1 19.20

J Ä

\ * 1

1,

1 9 1 9 ' 9 - 3 1 9 .2 4 i q g n

^ • • ^ 1 9 . 2 8 1 9 . 2 9

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

z

ca . kg

appr. kg

env. kg

0,807

2 ,440

0,807

2 ,440

3,480

5,300

2 ,440

3,480

4 ,460

1 Des igna t ion

i

Valve train for

medium oil pre

heater with added

electric preheater

W a r m w a t e r

u p t o 1 1 0 ' C

Ba l l cock

Hot wa te r

above 110 -180°C

Ba l l cock

Regulator for hot water

Heat carrier oi l

u p t o 2 5 0 ' C

Ba l l cock

Regulator for heat

1

D es igna t ion

1

1

1

iTuyauterie et

raccord pour re-

chauffeur ä fluide

avec réchauffeur

électrique en serie

Eau chaude

jusqu 'å 110 'C

Robinet ä b i l le

Eau surchauf fée

110 -180=C

Robinet ä bi l le

Réguiateur eau chaude

Thermof lu ide

2 5 0 ' C m a x .

Robinet ä b i l le

Réguiateur d 'hu i le

• * > «



19.4"

:9.45

•9.55

' 9 .6 '

•0 8 «

19.42

19.46

:9.5 t

19.56

19.62

19.69

.«^

i

'^»<-'

19.44

•9.48

19.53

19.49

19.54

19.67

19.75

19 58

19.64

19.72

^ 9.50

i 9.70

Bezeichnung

B<\ö '

Brenner-Typenreihe

Pict. • Burner sene

Photo Type brCiieur

MV

Größe

Stze

Grand.

Bestell-Nr,

Order-No.

No de commande

i '^3- ^9

i appr. kg

env. k g


19.45

19.46

19.47

19.48

19.49

19.50

19.51

19.52

19.53

19.40 Armaturen für

I IVledium-Vorwärmer

ohne nachgeschaltetem

; Elektro-Vorwärmer

,

Heißwasser

bis 200 C

19.41 ; Kugelhahn DN 15

19.42 Schmutzfänger DN 15

19.43 Regelventil 15/6 H1F

19.44 Thermostat 4.05

i

Wärmeträgeröl bis 25 0C

Kugelhahn

DN 15

Schmutzfänger

DN 15

Regelventil 15 Hl F

Thermostat 4.05

Kühlstücl(

KS5

Wärmeträgeröl 250-300 C

Faltenbalgventil DN 15

Schmutzfänger

DN 15

Regelventil

15/6 Hl F

Thermostat 4.05

1

9+10

;

9-HO

9-HO

9-HO

9+10

9+10

9+10

9+10

9+10

9+10

9+10

9+10

9+10

1

i

i

454 191

i 4 99 087

60 5 105

69 0 002

454 191

49 9

087

60 5 102

69 0 002

60 5

111

45 4 138

49 9

087

60 5

105

69 0

002

1

i

1

i i

Z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

z

'

2.440

2,350

3,200

3,000

2,440

2,350

3.100

1 3.000

\

0,600

3,800

2,350

i

3,200

3,000

1

Valve train

for

medium

i preheaters withou t

1 added electric

i preheater

Hot water

up

to 200 C

Ball cock

Dirt trap

Regulating valve

Thermostat

Heat carrier oil

up to 250 C

Ball cock

Dirt trap

Regulating valve

Thermostat

Intermediate piece

Heat carrier oil

250-300 C

Sipon valve

Dirt trap

Regulating valve

Thermostat

Tuyauterie

et

raccord

pour réchauffeur ä

fluide sans réchauf fer

électrique en serie

Eau surchauffée

2 0 0 0

max.

Robinet

ä

bille

Tamis

Soupape

Regulateur

Thermofluide

250'C max.

Robinet

ä

biüe

Tamis

Soupape

Regulateur

Piece intermedlaire

Thermofluide

250-300 C

Vanne a souffiet

Tamis

Soupape

Regulateur

weishaupt



f

^

manual

Installation and operating instruction

Contents

1

1 General instructions



2 Safety information

3 Technical description

3.1 Permissible applications

4

4 Electric oil preheater type EV 2. . .

4.1 Safety instruct ions

4.2 Funct ion

4.3 Electr ica l con nec t ion

4.4 Safety instruct ions for init ial commissioning

4 .5 Commiss ion ing

4.6 Technical data EV 2.. .

7

7

7

8

9

9

11

5

5 Electric oil preheater type WE V2.2 /01 and WE V3/ 01


5.2 Function

5.3 Electr ica l conn ect ion


for

init ial commissioning

5.5 Commissioning

12

12

12

13

14

14

6

6 Media oil preheater type MV9C and MV1 OA

6.1

6.2

6.3

Safety instruct ion

Funct ion

Media f i t t ings

17

17

17

18

General instructions

Th ese installation and operating instructions Hand over and operating instructions



• are an integral part of the equipm ent and must be kept

permanently on site.

• are to be used by qualif ied personn el only.

• con tain the relevant information for the safe assembly,

comm issioning and servicing of the equipme nt.

• are for the attentio n of al l personnel workin g with the

equipment.

Explanation of notes and symbols

This symbol is used to mark instructions,

which,

i f not fol lowed, could result in death or

serious injury.

DANGER

A

DANGER

A

ATTENTION


which,

i f not fol lowed, could result in l i fe

threatening electr ic shock.


which, i f not fol lowed, could result in damage

to , or the destruct ion of the equipment and

environmental damage.

The contractor is responsib le for passing the operat ing

instructions to the plant operator pr ior to hand-over. He

should also inform the plant operator that these

instruct ions shou ld be kep t wi th the heat ing appl iance. The

address and telephone number of the nearest service

centre should be entered on the reverse of the operating

instructions. The plant operator must note that an agent of

the contractor or other suitably qualif ied person must

inspec t the plant at least onc e a year. To ensure regular

inspect ions, -weishaupt- recomm ends a service contract.

The contractor should instruct the plant operator in the use

of the equipment pr ior to hand-over and inform him as and

when necessary of any further inspections that are

required before the plant can be used.

Guarantee and liability

Weishaupt wil l not accept l iabil i ty or meet any guarantee

claims for personal injury or damage to property ar ising as

a result of one or more of the caus es b elow :

Failure to use the equipment as intended

Improper assembly, commissioning, op erat ing or

servicing of the equipment.

Ope rat ing the appl iance w i th defective safety

equipment, or wi th non-recommended or non

funct ioning safety and protect ion devices

Failure to fol low the information in the Instal lation and

Operat ing Instruct ions

Al terat ions made to the construct ion of the equipment

by the plant operator

Fi t t ing addi t ional components not tested or approved

for use wi th the equipment.

2 Safety information

Dangers when us ing the equipment

Elect r i ca l

safety



Weish aupt products are manufactured in accordance wi th

the relevant existing standards and guidelines and the

recognised safety laws. However , improper use of the

equip men t cou ld endan ger l i fe of the user or a third party,

or result in damage t o the plant.

To avoid unnecessary danger, the equipment is only to be

used:

• for i ts intended purp ose

• under ideal safety con ditio ns

• with reference to ai l the information in the instal lation

and operat ing instruct ions

• in acc orda nce with inspec tion and service woric

Faults, which could affect the safe operation of the burner,

should be rectif ied immediately.

Personnel training

Only com petent personnel m ay work on the appl iance.

Com peten t personnel acc ord ing to th is operat ing manual

are persons who are famil iar with the instal lation,

mount ing ,

sett ing and comm issioning of the product and

have the necessary qual i f icat ions s uch as:-

• Training, instruction or authorisation to sw itch electr ical

circuits and electr ical devices on and off, to earth them

and to mark them in accordan ce w i th the safety

standards.

Organisational measures

• Everyone working on the plant sho uld we ar the

necessary protect ive cloth ing.

• All safety devices sh oul d be chec ked regularly.

• Befo re starting work - isolate plant and prote ct

against reactivation, check voltage is isolated, the unit

is ear thed, and protected from adjacent equipment

that might sti l l be under voltage

• W ork on the electr ical sup ply shou ld be carr ied out by

a qualif ied electr ician.

• Electr ica l comp onents shou ld be check ed dur ing

serv ic ing.

Loose connect ions and heat damaged

cables should be dealt with immediately.

• The con trol panel sho uld be locked at al l t ime s.

Access should be restr icted to author ised key holder

personnel .

• Sh ould it be necessary to carry out wo rk on l ive parts,

country specific safety regulations must be observed

and too ls to EN 609 00 must be used . A second

person should be present to swi tch off the mains

supply in an emergency.

iVIaintenance and fault rectification

• Allo w the unit to cool pr ior to servicing and

maintenance work to avoid injury through high

temperatures.

• Necess ary insta l la t ion, service and inspect ion work

should be carr ied out at the spec i f ied t ime.

• Inform the operator befo re beginn ing any service work.

• For al l service, inspec tion and repair work , electrically

isolate the equipment and ensure the mains switch

cannot be accidenta l ly swi tched back

o n .

Cut off the

fuel supply.

• If, durin g servicing or tes ting , contro l seal joints have to

be open ed, these have to be thoroughly cleaned to

ensure tight sealing when re-assembling.

Dam aged seals must be replaced. Carry out a

3 Technical description

On burners for use with medium and heavy residual fuel



oils the oil has to be preheated to the temperature required

for atomisation.

Oil preheating can be carr ied out electr ically or with

heat ing m edium, as we l l as wi th a combinat ion of e lectr ic

and me dia heaters. Ho t water, low and high pressure

stea m or thermal f luid oi l are used as h eating me dia.

3.1 Permissible applications

We ishaupt o i l preheaters are sui table:

• for residual fuel oi ls :

In their standa rd version for a visco sity up to

50 mm^/s at 100°G (approx. 570 mm^/s at 50°G)

In specia l versions for a viscosity o f up to

60 mm^/s at 10 O' C (approx. 700 m mV s at 50°C)

• for instal lation on W eishau pt med ium and heavy

residual oi l burners

• for a maximum oil tempe rature of 160 ° C

Any other application is only permitted with pr ior written

agreement o f Max Weishaupt G mb H.

The oil preheater must only be used within the ratings

given on the name plate.

The oil preheater is not suitable for operatio n out of

doors.

The oil preheater must not be operated outside of i ts

permit ted temp erature range.

4 Electric oil preheater type EV2.

4.1 Safety instructions



Electrically isolate plant

T T

I Prior to com mis sionin g and service switc h off

X j \ the mains sw i tch and the safety sw i tch.

X J \ Failure to com ply co uld cause dea th or

^ ^ ™ "

serious injury by electr ic shock.

Allow oil preheater to cool

T T

I Allow the oil preheater to coo l pr ior to

# l \ commiss ion ing and serv ice work.

X J \ The hot surfaces and the hot oi l co uld lead to

" ^ ^ " burns if to uc he d.

4.2 Function

Heat exchanger

The heat produ ced by e lectr ica l energy is cond ucte d by a

copper plate to the oil pipe

coi l .

The oil preheater has a large hea t exchange surface with

relatively small oil volume. It is therefore possible to heat

the fuel oi l up to the necessary atomising temperature

within a short p eriod of t ime . The heat distr ibution prevents

localised overhe ating. The fuel oi l wil l not carb onise .

The maximum achievable oi l temp erature at the nozzle is

approximately 150° C and depends on the oil throughput

and the tem perature of the fuel o i l inlet.


The oil outlet temperature is set at the temperature

control ler © . This operates the heat elements via a

contactor . The temperature contro l ler is equ ipped wi th an

integrated temperature switch for burner release. The

Electric oil preheater EV2A

4.3 Electrical connection



Connection diagram EV2A

1 3 2 3 a

I I

Col

mj[f^

I

5 ^

o

EV2A

4 5

- I 1 ^

2 3 0 V/1 ~N

© N L 1

o 1 o

o 2 o

O 3 O

O 4 O

O S O

O 6 O

— X J I

6A

-10

I

I

[ 1

v^

^

8 7

6A

Connection diagram EV2B, EV2C and EV2D

4 0 0 V / 3 ~ N

6 9 © N LI L2 L3

-4

6 A ( EV2 B/EV2 C)

4.4 Safety instructions for init ial connmissioning



The init ial commissioning of the oil preheater must only be

carr ied out by the supplier, manufacturer or their appointed

agent. During this init ial commissioning, al l regulating,

contro l and safety devices must be checked to ensure

correct operation and, i f i t is possible to adjust them,

it should be checked that they have been set correctly.

Furthermore the correct fusing of the circuits and the

measures for conta ct protect ion of e lectrica l equipm ent

and of al l wir ing must be checked.

4.5 Com nnissioning

Check oil inlet temp erature

Determine minimum inlet temperature into the oil preheater

for the required oil throughput and adjust i f necessary (see

ratings diagram).

Determine pressure loss

Determine pressure loss using the oil throughput and

increase the pump pressure accordingly (see pressure

loss diagram).

Fill oil prehe ate r with oil

Ensure the oil preheater is f i l led with oi l pr ior to th e first

heat-up proc edure.

If the oil preheater is heated up emp ty it cou ld

damag e the heat ing e lements.

Check hydraulic connections

Temperature controller and limit control EV2A

Reset button

Ratings diagram EV2...



Oil throughput depen ding on At at maximum rat ing

360

340

320

300

280

2 260

240

220

200

180

160

140

120

100

8 0

6 0

4 0

20

S

3

Q.

I

-

^*^^^EV2D

'-...,,..,^EV2C

. ^ ^ ^ E V 2 B

' - ^ — - ^

40 50 60 70 80 90

Temperature increase At [K]

100 110 120

Pressure loss EV2.

4,0

4 .6 T ech n ica l d a t a E V 2 .



Oil preheater type

EV2A/01

EV2B/01

EV2C EV2D

Oil throughput

Heat rating

Oil pressure

Oil content

Weight

kg/h

k W

max. bar:

cm ^

:

approx. kg:

5 0

2.2

3 0

240

8

1 0 0

4.5

3 0

8 0 0

1 5

1 5 0

6.6

3 0

8 0 0

15

270

13.2

3 0

1 6 0 0

2 4

Dimensions EV2.

202

9 8 -

5 5

_ ^ Oil outlet

_ l M 20x1 .5

&

5 Electric oil preheaters type W EV 2.2/0 1 and W EV 3/0 1





Æ

Pr ior to comm issioning and service sw i tch off

the mains swi tch an d the safety swi tc h.

Failure to comply could cause death or

' serious injury by elec tr ic shock.


^ T

I Allo w the oil preheater to coo l pr ior to

X l \ comm issioning and service work.

^ ^ \ The hot surfac es and the hot oi l cou ld lead to

^ ^ • ^ " b urn er s if t ou c he d .

5.2 Function

Heat exchanger

The heating oil is heated to the required atomising

temperature by electr ic heating elements via pipe coils

cas t in an aluminium alloy plate.

Due to the eve n and rapid transfer of heat, local

overheating is prevented.

Via the bridging loop of the terminal str ip @, the electr ical

connection of the heating elements (5) (Ch. 5.3) can be

star swi tch ing (e.g. 40 0 V ma ins vol tage) or del ta

switch ing (e.g. 23 0 V) .

Temperature limit control

The tempera ture l imit contro l Q sw itches , i f the oil

temperature exceeds the set va lue and acts on the con tro l

vo l tage of the contactor , as wel l as the safety con tactor

and thus switc hes the heat ing e leme nts off .

Restart is only possible once the temperature l imit control

has been reset.


Electric oil preheater WE V2.2/01

5.3 Electrical conn ection



Connection diagram WE V2.2/01

r

U1

I I I I

K-n

V 2

Z

V I

I I

T71J

®

U : : ^

^

W . V. V.

I

W 2

W 1

U2

-®

61

U1

V 2

V I V\ /2

W 1

U2

U1

V 2 V I

W 2

3 8 0 - 5 0 0 V ~

J

W 1

U2

3 A

20 - 290V -

61 7

, ^

LI

62

^

63 64

® '

Other vol tages

available on

request

PE N LI L2 L3

—

• • w

®-

l O r -

Controller

DR100

^

f i f i n

K2

W\^'

5.4 Safety instructions for init ial commissioning



The initial com miss ioning of the o il preheater mu st only be

carr ied out by the supplier, manufacturer or their appointed

agent. During this init ial com mis sion ing, all regulating ,

contro l and safety devices must b e checked to ensure


it should be checked that they have been set correctly.

Furthermore the correct fusing of the circuits and the

measures for contac t protec t ion of e lectr ica l e quipment

and of ai l wir ing must be checked.

5.5 Co mm issioning

Chec k oil inlet tem perature

Determine minimum inlet temperature into the oil preheater

for the required oil throug hput an d adjust if necessary (see

ratings diagram).

Determine pressure loss

Determine pressure loss using the oil throughput and

increase the pum p pressure accordingly (see press ure

loss diagram).

Fill oil preheate r w ith oil

Ensure the oil preheater is f i l led w ith oi l pr ior to the first

heat-up procedure.

If the oil preheater is heated up empty it could

damag e the heat ing e lements.

Chec k hydraulic conn ections

Temperature controller D R 100

1

0

5

@

2

e

6

9

3

e

7

®

4

e

8

e

O o

K1 @

K 2 @

Ratings diagram WE V..



Oil throughput dependin g on At at maximum rat ing

1600

1500

1400

1300

1200

S

1100

3

a.

I

1000

900

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

\ ^ .

\ %

*v

V

% f,

\

V-^IS?'

F^t^>^

"

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Temp erature increase At [K]

Pressure loss WEV...

Oil preheater type

WEV2.2/01

WEV3.1/01

WEV3/01



Oil throughpu t kg/h

Heat rating kW

Oil pressure max. ba r:

Oil con tent cm^

Weight approx. k g :

3 0 0

13.8

3 2

750

27

5 0 0

170

3 2

1 5 5 0

4 2

5 0 0

22.4

3 2

1 5 5 0

4 2

Dimensions

WEV...

WEV2.2/01

I nff

L

Ä

w

^

ro

- i - i > i

-@>-

r -

_f._

i_.

M 10 I

J ^

wU

L

O i l i n l e t G I / 2 "

Oil outlet G 1/2"

6 Media oil preheaters type MV9C and

MV1 OA





^ ^ I Pr ior to comm issioning and service sw i tch off

^ j \ the mains swi tc h and the safety swi tch.

X t \ Failure to com ply cou ld caus e death or

" ^ ^ ^ s er io u s in ju ry b y e le ct ri c s h oc k .


Allow the oil preheater to cool pr ior to

comm issioning and service work.

The hot surfaces and the hot oi l could lead to

burners if touched.

6.2 Function

Heat exchanger

The compact media oi l preheaters are high efficiency heat

exchangers wi th f low acco rding to requirements.

The media (hot water, ste am or therm al f luid oil)

heats the oil f lowing through the pipe coils to the required

atomising tempe rature.

The oil preheaters guarantee an almost constant oi l

temperature and therefore good com bust ion values.

Application

The universal media oi l preheaters ca n be use d alone or in

additio n to an electr ic oi l preheater.

The preheaters are equipped with the fi tt ings required for

the relevant media used. The media can be changed at any

time by fi tt ing new fitt ings accordingly.

Ratings range

See rat ings d iagram C h. 6.5.3

Electric preheating

If operating with steam or hot water and sufficient

temp erature is available, or i f the start is effected wit h

Installation position

The unit can be installed vertically or horizontally. The

condensate out le t (steam) must a lways be downwards,

the water or thermal f luid outlet always upwards.

Installation position and connections

Outlet for

l iquid heating

medium

6.3 Media fitt ings



6.3.1 Connection variations

The f i t tings are selected de pending on the type of media

used.

On instal lations to TR D 4 1 1 a condensate sight g lass is

necessary when

the

heat ing media

is

returned back into

the boiler. This unit

is

supp l ied

at

extra co st.

Please note that the d imensions of the fi tt ings are not

determinative when sizing the connection l ines.

Version

Fittings

No. per DN DN

pre-

heater IVIV9C MV10A

1 - Warm water up to 1 1 0 ° C

I X B -

^

f ^ i X WW-outlet

Z

W-inlet

Ball valve

R 1 / 2 " R1/2"

2. Hot water above 110 - 1 8 0 ° C

I X B -

^

^ i ^ ^ X

WW-outlet

HW-inlet

Ball valve

2 15 + 20 20

Regulator for thermal f luid

1

20 20

3.Hot

wa te r up to 200"* C

[ > < H H ~ < H H > < } t t

'—7 - H t x

WW-outlet

Ball valve 2

Strainer

1

Reg. va lve wi th thermostat

1

1 5

1 5

15/6

1 5

1 5

15/9

Version Fittings

No. per

pre

D N

6

DN



heater

M V 9 C

IVIV10A

9.

High pressure steam 1.5

-

1 5 b ar

H PS inlet

z

z

\ K >l

\f'~^

\ t ^ ^ Condensate

' outlet

Ball valve

Ball valve (inlet)

Ball valve (outlet)

Strainer

Pressure control ler

Pressure gauge

Condensate sight g lass

Steam trap

R 1/2 "

R 1 / 2 "

R 1 / 2 "

R 1 / 2 "

R 1 / 2 "

R 3 /4 "

R 1/2 "

R 3 /4 "

R 3 / 4 "

R 1 / 2 "

R 1 / 2 "

10 . H ig h p r es s ur e s te a m 6 - 2 5 b ar

• T . / , , ^ ~ ^ 1 1 / ^ ^ i i i ^ ^ C on den sa te

outlet

H PS Inlet '— ^— '

Ball valve

Strainer

Pressure control ler

Manometer


Steam trap

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

11 . High pressure s team 7,5 - 1 3 bar*

9

l><JfOlHH><KH+

PS inlet

7

I / ^ M | ^ ^ ^ Condensate

outlet

Ball valve

Strainer

Reg. valve with thermostat

Pressure gauge


Steam trap

15

15

15/6

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

12 . High pressure steam 13

-

25 bar *

ixWI<WYiJ»|^[*H<K^«tx

SS

HPS inlet

Condensate

Ball valve

Strainer

Reg.

valve with thermostat

Pressure gauge


Steam trap

15

1 5

1 5 /6

15

15

15

15

15/9

15

15

13. High pressure steam 20 - 25 bar * Ball valve

15 15

6.3.2 Fittings



Sliu t off devices:

Bal l va lve R 1 /2 "

R 3 /4 "

CO

01

w t

Q :

77

Ope rat ing pressure max.:

1 5 b a r a t 2 0 0 * C

Bal l va lve DN 15

Operating pressure max.:

25 bar at 250*'G

Bal l va lve D N 20

°' ,1

CM

2

Q *

ft^r~

1 5 0 -


25 bar at 250' 'G

Bel lows valve DN15

in*

°r

i n

a

-r^X^

- 1 3 0 -


1 3 b a r a t 3 0 0 ° C

Strainer:

Nominal diameter R 1

1T

CM

L

«—72 >

^ \ \ ^

Nominal d iameter R 3/4"

- 8 2 -

Nominal d iameter DN 15

in i L

nj ij

Ope rat ing pressure max.:

15 bar at 200''G


25 bar at 250°C


25 bar at 250' 'C

P ressure controller:

Nominal d iameter R 1 / 2 " Nominal d iameter R 3/4" Nominal d iameter DN 15

Nominal d iameter D N 15

Control valve:

Nominal d iameter DN20




130

L

in

i 0 22

with intermediate piece

o n H P S 1 3 t o 2 0 b a r

and therm al f luid oi l

Operating pressure max.

T y p e M :

1 3 b a r a t 2 0 0 ° C

T y p e H : 25 bar at 250° C

Set va lue range wi th thermostat : 40-160" C

- 1 5 0 - ^

L

in

i 0 22

with intermediate piece

on HPS 13 to 20 bar

and therma l f luid oi l

} } I I }

Operating pressure max.

T y p e M :

13 bar at 200' 'C

T y p e H : 25 bar at 250° 0

Set va lue range wi th thermostat : 40 -16 0° 0

Controller for thermal fluid oil

Nominal d iameter DN 15 Nominal d iameter DN 20

II

I I

J' \

S.^

- V -

o

Controller for hot water


6.4 Safety instructions for initial commissioning



The ini tial com miss ioning of the oi l preheater must only be

carried out by the suppl ier, manufacturer or their appointed

agent. During this ini tial com mission ing, all regula t ing,

contro l and safety dev ices must be checked to ensure


it sho uld be ch eck ed that they have been set co rrectly.

Furthermore, i t should be checked that the hydraul ic

connections have been made correctly.

Danger of getting burnt

If touc hed , the hot surfaces of the individual

com pone nts and f i t tings can cause burns.

6.5 Commissioning

6.5.1 Hot water and thermal f luid operat ion

Hot water and thermal f luid oi l operat ion with

combined electr ic preheater

The me dia oi l preh eater s are supp l ied with the f i t t ings in

posit ion 1, 2, 4 or 5 (Ch. 6.3.1) depending on the

operat ing medium used.

By sett ing the relevant closing temperature of the

control ler f i t ted in the media outlet, the des ired or high est

possible oi l temperature is attained.

The control ler senses the media outlet temperature and

only releases the heating media once i t has cooled to

below the c los ing tem perature set t ing.

With hot water, the dif ferential pressure at the control ler

sho uld be approx. 2 bar, with thermal f luid oi l at least 1

bar.

The combined electr ic oi l preheater carries out any

addi t ional heat ing wh ich may be requi red and moni tors the

oi l temperature.

Hot water and thermal f luid oi l operat ion without

combined electr ic preheater

The media oi l preheaters are suppl ied with the f i t t ings in

pos i t ion 3, 6 or 7 (Ch. 6.3.1)depending on the operat ing

medium used.

The desired oi l temperature is attained and maintained by

a temper ature c ontrol ler w ithou t auxil iary energy.

This tempe rature co ntrol ler con sists of a regulat ing valve

with therm ostat an d sensor. The sensor loc ated in the oi l

outlet f low monitors the oi l temperature and controls the

regulat ing valve in the m edium inlet via the thermo stat. The

regulat ing valve controls the media f low accordingly.

With hot water, the dif ferential pressure at the control valve

sho uld b e approx. 1 bar, with thermal f luid oi l at least

0.5 bar.

Sett ing the oi l temperature

The requ ired oi l tem peratu re is set by turning the knob of

the thermostat within the set value range of 40 to 160° C.

6.5.2 Steam operat ion

W ith steam operat ion, care should be taken



that dry steam is available at the med ia fi tt ings.

Steam operat ion with combined

electric oil preheater

Steam operat ion iv/f / iouf combined

electric oil preheater

The media preheaters are sup pl ied w i th the f i t tings in

position 8, 9 or 10 (Ch. 6.3.1) depending on the available

steam pressure.

The desired oil temperature is achieved by the appropriate

steam pressure setting of the pressure control ler.

The cond ensate that forms is dra ined via the steam trap,

cooled 8° K be low the actual saturated steam temperature.

It is not possible to adjust the opening temperature of the

steam trap. Due to the steam pressure in the oil preheater

the conde nsate is forced in to the cond ensate l ine via the

steam trap. Therefore the pressure in the condensate l ine

must always be lower than the steam pressure in the oil

preheater (see Tab. Condensa te line pressure). The

maximum differential pressure of 17 bar must not be

exceeded.

Sett ing the oil temp erature

Pre-set pressure control ler to

Ratings diagram

(Ch. 6.5.3).

The o i l temperature atta ined dur ing operat ion should be

measured and if necessary adjusted at the control ler.

The media oi l preheaters are supplied with the fi tt ings in

posi t ion 1 1 , 12, or 13 (Ch. 6.3.1) d epend ing on the

available steam pressure. The desired oil temperature is

achieved and mainta ined by a temperature contro l ler

without auxil iary energy. This temperature control ler

consists of a regulating valve and thermostat with sensor.

The sensor located in the o il f low out le t m oni tors the o i l

temperature and controls the regulating valve in the

me dium inlet via the thermo stat. The regu lating valve

contro ls the media f low accordingly.

With a steam pressure of up to 13 bar the differential

pressure at the regulating valve should be 2 bar, and at

13 to 20 b ar it sh ou ld be approx. 4 bar.

If the steam pressure available is between 20 and 25 bar, a

pressure reducing valve should be fi tted before the

regulat ing valve, becaus e the temperature c ontro l ler do es

not work satisfactori ly in this pressure range.

The con densate that forms is dra ine d via the steam trap,

coo led 8 " K below the actual satura ted steam temperature.

It is not possible to adjust the opening temperature of the

steam trap. Due to the steam pressure in the oil preheater

6

6.5.3 Rat ings and pressure loss diagram

Ratings diagrams (maximum actiievable oil temperature with hot water and steam)



Hot water

Saturated steam

The HW temperatures and steam

pressures must be available at the

oil preheater inlet.

IVIVSC

s

3

a

.c

O )

3

O

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

Ü S

2 in

1- O"

(B

n

o

f—

Ü

O

O

CO

T—

Co

J 3

i n

CN

()

o

o

i n

T—

Co

X

O

i n

Ü

0

O

C O

J 3

i n

IS"

C B

JQ

O

I—

C O

i n

Ä ^ k ^ \ \ _ ^ il ^ .

Fuel oil

pressure

losses MV9C / MV10A

The values have been determined using fuel oil S



(max. viscosity 150 mmVs at 50 ° C and an outlet

temperature of

1

30 ° C).

å

I

I

1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 00

Burner oil throughput [kg/h ]

800

9 0 0

1 0 0 0

6.6 Technical data MV

Oil preheater

type

M V 9 C

Contents

oil coil [dm^]

2.6

Contents Oi l pressure

cover spa ce [dm^] max. [bar]

7.8 40

M edium pressure max.

at 2 50 °C [bar] at 30 0 °C [bar]

25 25

6.7 Saturated steam and conden sate l ines

Application example for the diagram below

Nominal diam eter of the condensa te l ine



An oil preheater type

MV1

OA is used to preheat 900 kg/h

residual oi l from 60 ° C to 13 0° C.

Saturated steam withi 0 bar pressure is available.

At the end of the condensate l ine a pressure of 0 bar

(1 bar abs olute pressure) wil l exisit.

Saturated steam quantity required

Wit h an oil throughpu t of 9 00 kg/h a nd a At oi l of 70° K a

saturated steam quantity of 68 kg/h is required.

With 11 bar absolute pressure and a conden sate cool ing

of 8° K the condensate temperature prior to the pressure

release am ount s to 1 75° C.

Based on th is temperature and wi th 1 bar abs olute

pressure at the end of the condensate l ine, the

condens ate l ine at 68 kg/h condens ate f low must be

D N 2 5 .

Nominal diameter of saturated steam line

For a saturated steam quantity of 68 kg/h and a pressure

of 10 bar (11 bar absolute pressure) the saturated steam

line must be DN 15.

2600

2400

2200

2000

1800

1600

1400

1200

1100

1000

900

800

700

6 0 0 - 1

500

—

_::

—

-:

-

:

-

^

Saturated s team quant i ty requi red

250 "

-~I I I _ _ •

^ ^ • * " * * * * * . Ö 0 "

5 0 "

4 0 "

3 0 -

'^ 2 0 -

1'

— a u

- 70

— 60

- 50

Nom inal diameter of saturated s team l ine

D N 5 0

^ ^ — •

• 7 ^

D N 4 0 D N 3 2 D N 2 E

•^

^

D N 2 0

^ :::::::::::::

, . • • '

^ - ' '

•:.

,*

:;:;:_::::::::

DN15

DN10

Appendix

Viscosity - temperature cliart

Temperature [°F]



40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340

I

1

000

2 0 0

1 0 0

__

4 0

1 0

8

4

1

^

\

V

\

\

\

\ .

—-1

1

——

\

1 1 1

Max.

pump viscosity

\ • V

X.

X

\ •«

\

\

\

\

^

1 ' v ^

1 V -

^

L S

i

\

^

\

I

\

\

Recomiiici— »- ••-

\

?,

.. v^

^

>

\

^

if

\

\

\

>

:s;

j i w -

—'

^ V

\

\

V.

s

^ ^

\

N

S

\

e viscosity

—•

s

>

\

\

1

%

%^

1

«-%>?

s. ^

ä > < c s : % .

s

\

V

. N % \ '^?

. \ ^ « S ^ S b V

1

_

^ ' ^ ^ ^ « S , .

V

«

\^

1

C?

\

s

1

^;-^^^s.%.

V '^JS^ 7

'

\

>.

N

\

\

k^

'

N

^

\

V

\

\

1

N ^ '

s

N

^

\

\

'sm

1-

^s

X

- u

f

c

-

-D

B

- 3

- a

a

- (1

3

•0

(I

B

. C

a

N

\

•

»

\

\

1

S

\

—

—

200 a

—

150

3

•2,5

2

1,8

1,6

1,5

1,4

1,3

i n

>

120

K

8

60

40

30

20

10

8

6

Weishaupt products

and service

Max Weishaupt GmbH

D - 884 75 Schwendi

Tel.: (07353) 83 0, Fax.: (07353) 8 3358

www.weishaupt.de

Print No. 83001802, July 2005

Printed in Germany. All rights reserved.

http://www.weishaupt.de/

http://www.weishaupt.de/



Neachells Lane, Willenhall, W V13 3RG

Tel: (01902)

609841,

Fax: (01902) 6333 43

-weishaupt

Product

1.

år

< é l P

W-Bu me r s

Monarch and

industrial burners

multif lam® burners

W K

industrial burners

Description

The com pa ct ser ies, proven m i ll ions of t imes over:

Eco nom ical, rel iable, ful ly autom atic. Ga s, oi l and

dual fuel burners for domest ic and commercial

appl icat ions.

The legendary industr ia l burne r:

Tr ied and te sted , long

l ived,

c lear construct ion.

Gas, oi l and dual fuel burners for district heat provision.

Innovat ive Weishaupt technology for large burners:

Minimal emission values particularly at ratings

over one megawatt . Oi l , gas and dual fuel burners wi th

patented fuel distr ibut ion system.

Modular powerhouses :

Adaptable, robust , powerful .

Per formance

Up to 570 kW

Up to

1 0 9 0 0 k W

Up to

1 2000 kW

Up to

1 7 5 0 0 k W

1/81 GB

Instructions for



fitting Fiigh grade steel hoses and

pressure hoses

- w e i s h a u p t -

Contents

Tit le

1. General

2. Applicat ion possibi l i tes

2.1 Axia l turning movements

2.2 Li f t ing movements

3. Specification s and

technical data

3.1 Hoses in oil supp ly

installations

3.2 Pressure hoses

Page

1

1/2

2/3

4

4

1. General

The oil and pressure hoses are corrugated

high grade steel w it h a high grade steel

woven wire sleeve cover.

With adherence to the fol lowing applicat ion

rules,

the oil hoses and pressure hoses are

extremely well qual i f ied for residual oi l

app/ icat ions. The sta bi l i ty , against chemical

and temperature ef fects of fuel oi l , is

designed for long term service.

T he T R D 4 1 1 , 7/81 edit ion recommends

metal hoses for residual oil plants.

The oil and pressure hoses should be pro

tected fro m e xternal mechanical damage.

When f i t t in g, care must be taken to ensure

the hose is not twisted . I t must not du ring

f i f t ing . or during later movement, receive

torsional strain, i t is important that both

hose ends and movement lie in one plane.

To guarantee a strain-free assembly, the

hose should first be installed loosely at each

end,

then moved through the required hose

movements two or three times so that the

hose can al ign without distort ion and then

t igh ten .

A spanner should be used to counterhold

when t ightening. '

Particular care should be taken that hoses

do not foul each other, or other equip

ment (burn er, oi l l ines or bo i ler).

During instal lat ion, suf f ic ient curve radi i

and min imu m hose lengths should be

a l lowed. For horizontal f i t t ing the hose

shou ld , in most cases, be supported.

Example

Angular m ovement and hose curves must l ie

in one plane. Damaging torsional strain is

thus avoided.



t

I

Example

By ensuring tension free hose ends, the

angular movement can be enlarged

accordingly . The simultaneous extension

of the nom inal i .e. installed leng th, should

be noted. I t is not permitted to bend the

hose excessively.

2.2 L i f t ing Movem ents

Example

Fit an 180° curve with suff icient tension

free hose ends. The length is determined

according to the formular for an 180°.

Determine the distance for f i t t ing according

to the required curve radius.

Example

By instal l ing r igid pipes, there is no varying

curve strain and no very sharp bends dire ct ly

behind the hose conne ct ions.



Example

Direct ion of movement and hose curve must

lie in one plane. Damaging torsional strain is

thu s avoided.

Example

Arrange the hose in a loosely hanging curve

so that even on extended movements it

does not come in contact with the wa l l ,

f loor or other objects.

"<:

f l ^''

^Jk

3. Specifications and Technical Data

3.1 Oi l hoses in oi l supply instal lat ions

(f low and return)

3.2 Pressure hoses (between pump and

nozzle)

must be allowed for. This length must stay

straigh t, i .e. the curve radius may n ot start

unt i l af ter this straight sect ion.



The hoses on residual oil plants should be

designed for a work ing pressure of 10 bar

and a temperature (me dium) o f 1 50°C.

With considerat ion of the temperature factor

for high-grade steel, the fol low ing is

stipulated for these hoses:

Nominal pressure.

Test pressure

Working pressure

Work ing temperature.

_P N = 16 bar

. PP = 21 bar

. PB = lo ba r

. TB = 150°C

For the installation of oil hoses in flow and

return (between pump and rigid pipe

Installa tion), please observe the installation

diagrams relating to the produ ct:

For this a pplic at ion , the pressure hose is

designed for a workin g pressure of 30 bar

and 150°C temperature.

With considerat ion of the temperature

factor, the fol lowing is st ipulated for these

hoses:

Nominal pressure.

Test pressure.

Work ing pressure

Work ing temperature.

. PN = 64 bar

. PP = 82 bar

. PB = 30 bar

. T B = 1 5 0 O C

The minimum curve radius is dependent on

the nominal clearance, the applicat ion, the

mater ial ,

and on the type of manufacture.

The hose applicat ion on our products is

agreed with the manufacturer using the

or iginal equipment .

For free use i.e. installat io n, with regard

to the f i t t ing assembly instruct ions, the

fol lowing m inimu m radi i must be

maintained:

Minimum radii

D N

r = minimum

curve radius

6

8

10

70

100

110

~ 1

Z

m

ength

DN

6

8

10

12

16

2 0

25

Z = length

80

85

90

100

125

130

135

12

16

2 0

25

110

210

240

250

After assembly

is

complete, the maintenance

of minimum radii should be checked in the

most adverse po sition and if need be, a

f ixed mechanical stop must be made to l imit

the movement .

The length of hose chosen must be

suf f i

c ient ly

long.

On each hose end,a Z sect ion

TYPE FT 3L

.mm

-LENGTH IN MM



-3 WIRE

•PT 100 Ohm

ACCURACY

: IEC 751

class

B

STANDARD : TYPE PT 3L = 215 mm

ENCLOSURE CLASS IP54

MAX. TEMPERATURE 550°c

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

1 or 2 Measuring elements

ISO- VIEW

A - A



0'

Li fti ng Ey for h»a< l «r

ThWTTKl fluid OUtlSt

DN80/ t 'N25 occardHa to D I N 2634

Iharniol fluM OMtlat

DNaO/ ('N25 aeconl l na to D I N 2634

Fl u« ga« »am pta pi p« 1/ 2*

comrafponv M M offsnl

laon

ony^

on ipvcnlc

knulatcn 1Nckn«ii 120 nwn

kwiiiUw IMclaiw« bockiM« 80

jacM HSA

B/0O-11B

IW50a2

^

Ei ti ptyi n l ^ : 3000 Kg

: STJUI ra

O

o

a

z

3

>

o

CO

a.

z

3

Section B — B

YAIW : Minq Shk)yarti

At : Nanßng - RR. of

China

CLASS : Germanischer Uoyd + UCE.AU1(SBG)

Aabcrg ProiKt

PP573a659A.00

PP5738660A.00

PP5738661A.W

PP5738662A.00

PP573BB41A.00

PP5738B42KO0

052352-1

PP5739698A.00

052352-2

Newbuldhg

JLZ04-04O9

JLZ0*-0410

JLZ0*-0413

ÅZ04-0414

1204-0411

1204-0412

1204-0415

1204-0416

1204-0417

Baler no.

15393

15395

15397

15399

15610

15612

16939

16605

16941

Hull nra added

Dnwiinq updated

DESCaPTKW

«Uiliiii

AAIBORG

I N D U < T « I I *

PJ

CE

1 3 - 0 2 - 2 0 0 6

1 9 - 0 4 - 2 0 0 5

PATt

MISSION TFO

V4-0-TF0-010

ORAW tCE

SCME None

D A T E 1 6 - 0 3 - 2 0 0 5

D R M M G N E

D53717

THERMAL FLUID

HEAT TECHNOLOGY

w : 4 a « m a

REWn«

B

M H i c n o a n r v M M H

SHEET

1

ori

AI

CQ2 Co n n . R 5 / 4 "

No z z le TF1 4 XW 3 / 8 " ( 2 x)

S e c t i o n

B

—B

Im m e rs io n tu b e

Marking

o f

o r i f ic e p lo a t

Gasl<et DN25



Ex t in g u is h n o z z le

o

LO

LO

•<

022 (36x)

f le u gas f la n g e s

a c e D IN8 6 0 4 4

O

in

in

o

o

oo

to

f

01366

P.C. 01310

CD. 01226

o

CD

Cle o n in g n o z z le .

Dra w

t u r n e d

45°

Se e to p v ie w.

O

o

IT)

iXXM>i>3.

<>

>, r-p ,r-\

o 0

» o

1226

P.C. 01310

01366

DN2 5 PN4 0

DN8 0 PN4 0

m m e rs io n tu b e .

O

o

CD

CM

DN80 PN40

O

o

CM

O

O

CM

}

DN40 PN40

Cle a n in g n o z z le .

Dra w

t u r n e d

15°

Se e to p v ie w.

O

o

CD

100

o

k

View A-A

Th e rm a l F lu id

In le t

Th e rm a l F lu id

Ou t le t

CO 2

C o n n e c t i o n R 3 / 4 "

Se e v ie w A—A

LU

4

i>- 4~ ^

400

I

o

in

CM

Detai l cleaningnozzle

40

17

Sta in le s s s te e l p ip e

0 2 1 . 3 X 2 . 6 5

NUMBER OF ECONOMSERS : 1

HEAT CAPACTY : 1000 kW

INLET TEMP : 150 °C

OUTLET TEMP : 200 "0

WEGHT EMPTY : 5800 kg

LIQUID VOLUME : 1553 Itr

FLANGES AGO DN

Nozzle TF14XW 3 /8"

D e t a i l I n s p e c t i o n h o l e

10

550

in

o

CM

40 1

CO

o

CM

CO

o

CM

of

470

U-

300=

o

to

o

lO

20 170

170 170

Te s t c o n n e c t io n

Im m e rs io n tu b e

See view A-A

( l O x )

Hex,

h e a d b o l t M1 0 x 4 0

+

nut +

wa s h e r (D IN9 3 1 ,9 3 4 ,1 2 5 )

+ g a s k e t (g la s s c o rd ø8 )

YARD

:

Jinling Shipyard

At

:

Nanjing

- P.R. of

China

CLASS

:

Germanischer Lloyd

+

MCE,AUT(SBG)

Aalborg Project

PP5758661A.00

PP5738662A.00

PP5738841A.00

PP5758842A.00

052552-1

PP5759698A.00

052352-2

Newbuilding

JLZ04-0413

JLZ04-0414

JLZ04-0411

JLZ04-0412

JLZ04-0415

JLZ04-0416

JLZ04-0417

Boiler no.

15398

15400

15611

15613

16940

16606

16942

Flue gas

I n let

REV

Hull

nrs.

a d d e d

DESCRIPTION

iiUUib

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

PJ

NAME

PROJECTON

1 4 - 0 2 - 2 0 0 6

DATE

Economiser

E X V 6 6 0 - 4 3 - 5 7 , 0 - 6 0 0

DRAWN CE

SCALE none

DATE

1 1 - 1 1 - 2 0 0 5

DRAWING No:

D54051

T H E R M A L F L U I D

PO

Box145

3200

AC

S l n ^

The

Nethernds

Td

: +31

181

650500

ML H I I L V ^ n i N U L U U I E _ap rmw10bog ndu3Wesn

REVSON

A

IHIS DRAMNG

AND

DESGN SHOWN

HERQN

ISTHE

PROPERTY

OF

AABORG

INDUSTRES

AND

MUST

NOTBE

USED

BY

OR

RERODUCED

FOR

THRD PARTY

SHEET

1

0F 1

AI

1739

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/rimwft10lborg-lndu3Wes.nl

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/rimwft10lborg-lndu3Wes.nl



CLOSED FRESH

WATER SYSTEM

Detail "a''

æ

s

o

1^

o

CM

CM

•Holes 26x18

FLUID

FLUID FLOW

C o n n e c t i o n D N

T E M P .

IN

T E M P . O U T

DESIGN TEMP.

D E S I G N P R E S .

T E S T P R E S

C O N T E N T

M A T E R I A L

W E I G H T E M P T Y

SHE

FRESI-

LL

WATER

28

80 DIN 86030

38.0

68.0

160

10

15

27.4

C-STEEL

T U B E S

THERMAL FLUID

34

65 DIN 86030

250

195

300

10

15

11.8

C-STEEL

197

m 3 / h

•c

•c

•c

BARG

BARG

LTR.

KG

D E L I V E R Y E X C L . I N S U L A T I O N

C A P A C I T Y 1 0 0 0 K W

YA RD : Ming Shipyard

At : Nanjing - P.R. of China

CLASS :

Germanischer

Lloyd +

MCE,AUT(SBG)

Aalborg Project

PP5738659A.00

PP5758660A.00

PP5738661A.00

PP5758662A.00

PP5738841A.00

PP5738842A.00

052352-1

PP5739698A.00

052352-2

Newbuilding

JLZ04-0409

JLZ04-0410

JLZ04-0413

JLZ04-0414

JLZ04-0411

JLZ04-0412

JLZ04-0415

JLZ04-0416

JLZ04-0417

R E V.

Hull numbers added

DESCRIPTION

iililiiii

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

PJ

N A M E

PROJECIW

#€3

14-02-2006

D A T E

Dumpcooler

Type:MX20/L T10/1200

DRAWN: CE

SCALE: none

DATE: 16-03-2005

DRAWING No:

D53719

R E V I S I O N

T H E R M A L F LU ID

H E A T T E C H N O L O G Y

PO Box 14% 3200 AC S p lJwilM 1hl N t t lw lani l l

Til :+3 i imesosoo

F« :+31 1B1690501

E-nwl: rtmwø qdbofy-fcidurtriit jil

A

1HS DRA«MG AW DESKN SHOW

HEREM IS IHE PROFERTY OF AAUORG

MUSUCS AM) UUST NOT

BE

USED

BY OR REPRODUCED FOR IHRD PARTY

S H E E T

1

0 F 1

A3

YARD : Jinling Shipyard

A t :

Nanjing

- P.R. of

China

CLASS : Germanischer Lloyd + MCE,AUT(SBG)

Aalborg Project

PP5738659A.00

Newbuilding

JLZ04-0409

#

CIRCULATING

Type:

NTT

PUMP

50-200



PP5738660A.00

PP5758661A.00

PP5738662A.00

PP5738841A.00

PP5738842A.00

052352-1

PP5739698A.00

052352-2

JLZ04-0410

JLZ04-0413

JLZ04-0414

JLZ04-0411

JLZ04-0412

JLZ04-0415

JLZ04-0416

JLZ04-0417

CAP.:

Del.head

34

:80

E-motor:15.0

Current :

Weight:

myh

m.l.c.

kW

Siemens

3x440V-60Hz

231.5

kg

R E V.

Hull numbers added

D E S C R I P T I O N

PJ

N A M E

14-02-2006

D A T E

CIRCULATING PUMP

Type :

NTT 5 0 -2 0 0

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

P R O J E C I K M

DRAWN: CE

SCALE: none

DATE: 1 6 - 0 3 - 2 0 0 5

DRAWING

No:

D53720

THERMAL FLUID ^ ' ^ l ^ ^ Ä ' " - " " ' * - ^

HEAT TECHNOLOGY l ^ r i J ^ r ; - . ^ .

R E V I S I O N

A

1HS nUMNG M O DESKN SHOWN

HBS M E 1NE PROPERTY OF AAUORG

•DUSIRE S «NO MUST NOT BE USED

BY OR REPROniCED FDR 1HRD PARTY

SHEET

1

0F1

A3

POSITION

1 Level switch

2 Level indicator

MAN/INSPECTIONHOLE ORIENTATION

DM

E -

DRAINLINE EXPANSION LINE

IN ACCORDANCE WITH

DIN

4 7 5 4

KW

2400

DN

E

DN

65

TUBE

76.1

X 3.2

DN

A

DN

50

TUBE

6 0 .3

X 2.6

2/3 xF

'^^Oi



CM

DETAIL A

welding detai l : SHELL welding detai l : NOZZLE

Thermal fluid fi l l ing contents of the

system in l i tres at 200'C supply temp,

with a safety o f 30% on thermal

expansion of the fluid

Thermal fluid fi l l ing contents of the system

in l i tres at 300'C supply temp,

with a safety of 30% on thermal

expansion of the fluid

TYPE

SVE 5950

Content

1430

A

505

D

900

F

6

G

600

**

H

2860

K

100*100*10

N

1700

* *

Weight

700

* * *

Weight

1065

4000

NW

DN400

* Contents of expansion tank in l i tres

* *

EMPTY WEIGHT

I N K g

* * * WET

WEIGHT

I N K g

DO

NO T

INSULATE EXPANSION VESSEL

YA RD Jinling Shipyard

At Nanjing -

P,R,

of China

CLAS S '• Germanischer Lloyd +

MCE.AUTCSBG)

Aalborg Project

PP5738659A.00

PP5738660Am

PP5738661Am

PP5738662Am

PP5738841A.00

PP5738842A.00

052352-1

PP5739G98Am

052352-2

tiewbuilding

JLZ04-0409

JLZ04-0410

JLZ04-0413

JLZ04-0414

JLZ04-0411

JLZ04-0412

JLZ04-0415

JLZ04-0416

JLZ04-0417

^ DN25 PNI6

REV.

Hul l numbers added

DESCRIPTION

• • • • • • •

iiiiiiiit

AALBORG

I N D U S T R I E S

PJ

NAME

PROJECTON

^ ^

13-02-2006

DATE

EXPANSION VESSEL

TYPE: SVE 5950

D R A W N : C E

S C A L E :

n o n e

DATE:

16-03-2005

DRAWING

No:

D 5 3 7 2 1

T H E R M A L F L U ID

PC Box 145, 3200 AC Spicenisse, The Netheriands

Tel : +31 181 650 500

H E A T T E C H N O L O G Y ' " =' " '' ''' °°

l l l _ /- \ l I U V > ^ I I M V l _ W I E_m(|| rtmw9aalborg-industries.nl

REVISION

THIS BRAVING AND DESIGN SHDVN

HEREIN IS THE PRDPERTY DF AALBDRp

INDUSTRIES AND MUST NDT BE USED

BY GR REPRDDUCED FDR THIRD PARTI

SHEET

1

0F1

A3

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/rtmw9aalborg-industries.nl

http://localhost/var/www/apps/conversion/tmp/scratch_1/rtmw9aalborg-industries.nl

m14 thermal fluid

Documents